HP Color 8550 High Cap

Manual Part Number
C7834-90902
HP Color LaserJet 8550 Printer Service Manual
©Copyright 2000
Hewlett-Packard Company
Printed in USA
8550 Printer
Copy Module
Automatic Document Feeder
High-Capacity Input
Service Manual
*C7834-90902*
*C7834-90902*
Printed on
Recycled Paper
C7834-90902
English
HP Copy Module, ADF, and side
HCI for HP Color LaserJet 8550
series printers
_____________ Service Manual
Copyright Information
Warranty
Trademark Credits
Copyright © 2000 HewlettPackard Company
The information contained in
this document is subject to
change without notice.
CompuServe™ is a U.S.
trademark of CompuServe, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
Reproduction, adaptations, or
translation without prior written
permission is prohibited except
as allowed under copyright
laws.
Part number C7834-90902
First edition, April 2000
Printed in USA
Hewlett-Packard makes no
warranty of any kind with
respect to this information.
HEWLETT-PACKARD
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS
THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
Hewlett-Packard shall not be
liable for any direct, indirect,
incidental, consequential, or
other damage alleged in
connection with the furnishing or
use of this information.
NOTICE TO U.S.
GOVERNMENT USERS:
RESTRICTED RIGHTS
COMMERCIAL COMPUTER
SOFTWARE: “Use, duplication,
or disclosure by the
Government is subject to
restrictions as set forth in
subparagraph (c) (1)(ii) of the
Rights in Technical Data Clause
at DFARS 52.227-7013.
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714 U.S.A.
MS-DOS® is a U.S. registered
trademark of Microsoft
Corporation.
Photoshop™ and PostScript®
are registered trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
TrueType™ is a U.S. trademark
of Apple Computer, Inc.
UNIX® is a registered trademark
in the United States and other
countries, licensed exclusively
through X/Open Company
Limited.
Safety Information
WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
To avoid electrical shock, use
only supplied power cords and
connect only to properly
grounded (3-hole) wall outlets.
Contents
1 Product information
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Copy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Automatic document feeder (ADF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Side high-capacity input (side HCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Model and serial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Safety and regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
2 Service approach
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Service approach overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Parts and supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Technical assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
3 Operational overview
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Copy module functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Self-diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
4 Adjustments and maintenance
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
MFP print engine adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Copy module adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
ADF adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Side HCI adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Periodically replaced parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Lubricating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
EN
Contents 3
5 Theory of operation
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Notes on the power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Copy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Side HCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
6 Removal and replacement
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Repair notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Copy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Automatic document feeder (ADF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Side HCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
7 Troubleshooting
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
System-to-device troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Copy module troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
ADF troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Side HCI troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
8 Parts and diagrams
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
How to use this chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Printer parts unique to the HP Color LaserJet 8550MFP . . . . . .552
Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Copy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Side HCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Numerical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
Alphabetical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680
Index
4 Contents
EN
Figures
Figure 1.
Figure 2.
Figure 3.
Figure 4.
Figure 5.
Figure 6.
Figure 7.
Figure 8.
Figure 9.
Figure 10.
Figure 11.
Figure 12.
Figure 13.
Figure 14.
Figure 15.
Figure 16.
Figure 17.
Figure 18.
Figure 19.
Figure 20.
Figure 21.
Figure 22.
Figure 23.
Figure 24.
Figure 25.
Figure 26.
Figure 27.
Figure 28.
Figure 29.
Figure 30.
Figure 31.
Figure 32.
Figure 33.
Figure 34.
Figure 35.
EN
Copy module front left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Copy module front right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Copy module cross-section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Automatic document feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Automatic document feeder cross-section . . . . . . . 31
Front of side HCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Rear of side HCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Cross-section of side HCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Copy module control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Service mode initial screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Service label (inside the lower front cover of
the copy module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Example of a Level 1/Level 2 item screen . . . . . . . . 63
Example of a Level 3 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Copier, display mode Level 1/Level 2 screen . . . . . 65
JAM screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
ERR screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Copier, I/O mode Level 1/Level 2 screen . . . . . . . . 77
Copier, I/O mode Level 3 screen example . . . . . . . 78
Copier, adjust mode Level 1/Level 2 screen . . . . . . 83
BLANK margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Copier, run/check mode Level 1/Level 2 screen . . . 93
Copier, machine settings mode
Level 1/Level 2 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Copier, test print mode Level 1/Level 2 screen . . . 108
Counter mode, Level 1/Level 2 screen . . . . . . . . . 111
Feeder screen, example of a Level 3 item . . . . . . 114
Image and non-image width of the leading edge . . 122
Image and non-image width of the left or
right margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
BLANK margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Adjusting horizontal registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Service label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Standard white plate barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Adjusting the ADF height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
DADF controller PCB cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
DSW1 on the DADF controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . 142
SW3 DADF controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Figures 5
Figure 36.
Figure 37.
Figure 38.
Figure 39.
Figure 40.
Figure 41.
Figure 42.
Figure 43.
Figure 44.
Figure 45.
Figure 46.
Figure 47.
Figure 48.
Figure 49.
Figure 50.
Figure 51.
Figure 52.
Figure 53.
Figure 54.
Figure 55.
Figure 56.
Figure 57.
Figure 58.
Figure 59.
Figure 60.
Figure 61.
Figure 62.
Figure 63.
Figure 64.
Figure 65.
Figure 66.
Figure 67.
Figure 68.
Figure 69.
Figure 70.
Figure 71.
Figure 72.
Figure 73.
Figure 74.
Figure 75.
Figure 76.
6 Figures
Testing the ADF adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Rear view of the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Adjusting screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
DSW1 on the DADF controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Testing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Adjusting ADF document tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
DSW1 on DADF controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Measuring the copy paper stop position . . . . . . . . 148
DSW1 on DADF controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Positioning paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Retaining plate adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Measuring the distance from
the copyboard glass to the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Preparing test strips for measuring feeding power . 152
DADF controller cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
DSW1 on DADF controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Measuring feeding power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Lock nut glued in place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
ADF sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
LED 1 and 2 on DADF controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . 156
DADF controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Wing nuts on the adjustment screws . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Base plate securing screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Paper guide fixing screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Paper guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Paper size card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Copyboard glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Copyboard cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Belt assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Document tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Sensor S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Reflecting face sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Registration sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Guide plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Registration sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Registration sensor LED3 cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Light-emitting face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Separation guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Control panel power soft switch, copy module
rear power switch, and power plug . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Copy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Electrical circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
EN
Figure 77.
Figure 78.
Figure 79.
Figure 80.
Figure 81.
Figure 82.
Figure 83.
Figure 84.
Figure 85.
Figure 86.
Figure 87.
Figure 88.
Figure 89.
Figure 90.
Figure 91.
Figure 92.
Figure 93.
Figure 94.
Figure 95.
Figure 96.
Figure 97.
Figure 98.
Figure 99.
Figure 100.
Figure 101.
Figure 102.
Figure 103.
Figure 104.
Figure 105.
Figure 106.
Figure 107.
Figure 108.
Figure 109.
Figure 110.
Figure 111.
Figure 112.
Figure 113.
Figure 114.
EN
Inputs to and outputs from
the reader controller PCB (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Inputs and outputs from the
reader controller PCB (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Inputs and outputs from the
reader controller PCB (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Basic sequence of operations at power-on . . . . . . 183
A4- and letter-size, 2 copies, 4-color, Direct, and
cassette 1 sequence of operations (1 of 2) . . . . . . 185
A4- and letter-size, 2 copies, 4-color, Direct, and
cassette 1 sequence of operations (2 of 2) . . . . . . 186
Cross-section of exposure system . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Exposure system mechanics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
A4- and letter-size, 2 copies, 4-color, Direct,
cassette 1 sequence of operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Scanner movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Scanner motor circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Changing the reproduction ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Controlling the scanning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Paper selection sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Sensor operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Image processing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
CCD lines and filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
CCD circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Analog circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
G image signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Digital image processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Scanning lamp and lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Shading correction measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
CCD position matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Text identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Sensor color correction measurement . . . . . . . . . 212
Background pixel measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Weak and strong sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Original density compared to CCD output . . . . . . 216
Density level conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
BGR and YMC levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
BGR to YMC conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Gray components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Bk signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
UCR amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Chromatic absorption characteristics . . . . . . . . . . 221
Enlargement/correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Figures 7
Figure 115.
Figure 116.
Figure 117.
Figure 118.
Figure 119.
Figure 120.
Figure 121.
Figure 122.
Figure 123.
Figure 124.
Figure 125.
Figure 126.
Figure 127.
Figure 128.
Figure 129.
Figure 130.
Figure 131.
Figure 132.
Figure 133.
Figure 134.
Figure 135.
Figure 136.
Figure 137.
Figure 138.
Figure 139.
Figure 140.
Figure 141.
Figure 142.
Figure 143.
Figure 144.
Figure 145.
Figure 146.
Figure 147.
Figure 148.
Figure 149.
Figure 150.
Figure 151.
Figure 152.
Figure 153.
Figure 154.
Figure 155.
Figure 156.
8 Figures
Image shifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Shift in main and sub-scanning directions . . . . . . 224
Center Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Mirror image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Mirror image principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Image repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Image repeat principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Slant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Slant principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Curve for items A through D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Curve for black-and-white text mode . . . . . . . . . . 229
Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Blanking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Copy module fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Cooling fan engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Copy module power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Copy module general circuit diagram (1 of 2) . . . . 240
Copy module general circuit diagram (2 of 2) . . . . 242
ADF electrical circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Operation mode communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Inputs to the DADF controller PCB (1 of 2) . . . . . . 246
Inputs to the DADF controller PCB (2 of 2) . . . . . . 247
Outputs to the DADF controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . 248
ADF motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Top pick-up path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Face-up (left) output tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Face-down (top) output tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Page composition copy sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Picking up originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Pick-up path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Feeding sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Feeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Second original pick-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Sequence of operations (A4, 2 originals,
top pick-up mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Picking up for the first side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Reversing from the first side to the second side . . 261
Sequence of operations (reversal) . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Placement of first original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Positioning the first original and pick-up of
second original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Movement of first and second originals . . . . . . . . . 264
EN
Figure 157. Delivery of originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Figure 158. Sequence of operations (reduced page composition; top
pick-up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Figure 159. Delivery path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Figure 160. Feeding the first original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Figure 161. Delivering the first original and picking up the
second original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Figure 162. Sequence of operations (small size, pick-up and
delivery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Figure 163. Detecting an original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Figure 164. Document tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Figure 165. Registration rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Figure 166. Horizontal detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Figure 167. Placement of original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Figure 168. Control of pick-up motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Figure 169. Control of belt motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Figure 170. ADF jam sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Figure 171. Improper placement of originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Figure 172. Jam flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Figure 173. Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Figure 174. Motors, solenoids, and sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Figure 175. PCB locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Figure 176. Indicator PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Figure 177. ADF general circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Figure 178. ADF controller circuit diagram (1 of 7) . . . . . . . . . 292
Figure 179. ADF controller circuit diagram (2 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . 294
Figure 180. ADF controller circuit diagram (3 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . 296
Figure 181. ADF controller circuit diagram (4 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . 298
Figure 182. ADF controller circuit diagram (5 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . 300
Figure 183. ADF controller circuit diagram (6 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . 301
Figure 184. ADF controller circuit diagram (7 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . 301
Figure 185. ADF display board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Figure 186. ADF general timing chart (top pick-up mode, A4, and 2
originals—single-sided original to single copy) . . . 303
Figure 187. Deck block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Figure 188. Deck controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Figure 189. Deck controller PCB output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Figure 190. Pick-up feed rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Figure 191. Pick-up feed signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Figure 192. Signal transfer points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Figure 193. Pick-up signal levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Figure 194. Lifter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Figure 195. Remaining paper detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
EN
Figures 9
Figure 196. Paper-size-detection switch and
detection plate (A4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Figure 197. Paper-size-detection switch and
detection plate (LTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Figure 198. Jam detection levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Figure 199. Stationary jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Figure 200. Side HCI power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Figure 201. Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Figure 202. Solenoids and motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Figure 203. PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Figure 204. Deck controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Figure 205. User LED PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Figure 206. Remaining-paper-detection PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Figure 207. Deck controller PCB general circuit diagram . . . . . 324
Figure 208. Front view of copy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Figure 209. Rear view of copy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Figure 210. Removing the copy module lower front cover . . . . 334
Figure 211. Removing the copy module upper right cover . . . . 334
Figure 212. Removing the copy module upper rear cover . . . . 335
Figure 213. Removing the copy module upper left cover . . . . . 335
Figure 214. Removing the copy module rear cover . . . . . . . . . 336
Figure 215. Removing the copy module upper front cover . . . . 337
Figure 216. Removing the copy module scanner motor . . . . . . 338
Figure 217. Removing the copy module the
scanner motor driver PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Figure 218. Preparing to remove the ROM DIMM . . . . . . . . . . 340
Figure 219. Opening the claws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Figure 220. Lifting the ROM DIMM to detach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Figure 221. Inserting the ROM DIMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Figure 222. Engaging the ROM DIMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Figure 223. Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Figure 224. Detaching the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Figure 225. Detaching the metal plate on the LCD assembly . 346
Figure 226. Detaching the LCD assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Figure 227. Copyboard glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Figure 228. Scanner drive cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Figure 229. Securing the metal cable clamp (front view) . . . . . 349
Figure 230. Securing the metal cable clamp (rear view) . . . . . 349
Figure 231. Mirror tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Figure 232. Detaching and reattaching the
mirror positioning tool (front view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Figure 233. Detaching and reattaching the
mirror positioning tool (rear view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
10 Figures
EN
Figure 234. Securing the metal cable clamp to the
mirror 1 mount (front view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Figure 235. Securing the metal cable clamp to the
mirror 1 mount (rear view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Figure 236. Cable positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Figure 237. Copyboard glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Figure 238. Flexible cable warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Figure 239. Releasing the connector to the flexible cable . . . . 354
Figure 240. Disconnecting the flexible cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Figure 241. Connecting the flexible cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Figure 242. Scanning lamp cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Figure 243. Scanning lamp inside cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Figure 244. Anti-reflecting plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Figure 245. Detaching the scanning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Figure 246. Removing the scanning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Figure 247. Scanning lamp heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Figure 248. Replacing the scanning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Figure 249. Scanning lamp adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Figure 250. White plate cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Figure 251. Replacing the white plate cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Figure 252. Detaching the claws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Figure 253. Detaching the intensity-detection PCB . . . . . . . . . 364
Figure 254. Lens mount cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Figure 255. Detaching the CCD unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Figure 256. CCD unit connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Figure 257. Electrical unit screws and connectors . . . . . . . . . . 367
Figure 258. Reader controller PCB connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Figure 259. Removing the reader controller PCB cover (1 of 2) 368
Figure 260. Removing the reader controller PCB cover (2 of 2) 368
Figure 261. Removing the electrical unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Figure 262. Holding the electrical unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Figure 263. Detaching the electrical unit cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Figure 264. Electrical unit connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Figure 265. ECO PCB replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Figure 266. AP-IP PCB removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Figure 267. Removing the copy module main power
supply PCB (DCP1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Figure 268. Accessory power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Figure 269. Power supply cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Figure 270. Inverter PCB unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Figure 271. ADF external covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Figure 272. Opening the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Figure 273. Removing the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Figure 274. Mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
EN
Figures 11
Figure 275.
Figure 276.
Figure 277.
Figure 278.
Figure 279.
Figure 280.
Figure 281.
Figure 282.
Figure 283.
Figure 284.
Figure 285.
Figure 286.
Figure 287.
Figure 288.
Figure 289.
Figure 290.
Figure 291.
Figure 292.
Figure 293.
Figure 294.
Figure 295.
Figure 296.
Figure 297.
Figure 298.
Figure 299.
Figure 300.
Figure 301.
Figure 302.
Figure 303.
Figure 304.
Figure 305.
Figure 306.
Figure 307.
Figure 308.
Figure 309.
Figure 310.
Figure 311.
Figure 312.
Figure 313.
Figure 314.
Figure 315.
Figure 316.
Figure 317.
12 Figures
Body cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Document tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Side guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Side guide and screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Opened side guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Mounting the gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Setting the width detection volume . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Setting the screws and mounting lock . . . . . . . . . . 385
Connector J12 on pick-up motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Pick-up motor cable guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Detaching the pick-up motor unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Feeder motor unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Feeder motor color sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Feeder motor drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Belt motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Belt motor clock sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Belt motor count position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Feeding the belt drive roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Replacing the belt motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Adjusting belt tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Clutch unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
E-ring and bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Clutch unit slip stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Delivery motor connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Delivery motor cable retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Detaching the delivery motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Document tray mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Paper-retaining solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Inlet guide plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Pick-up roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Reversing roller drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Separation belt unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Separation guide plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Inside guide plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Roller unit stopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Roller unit E-ring, gear, and timing belt . . . . . . . . . 400
Removing the E-ring, arm, and gear . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Removing the feeding roller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Right hinge unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
E-ring and bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Solenoid mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Detaching the spring, screw, and arm . . . . . . . . . . 403
EN
Figure 318.
Figure 319.
Figure 320.
Figure 321.
Figure 322.
Figure 323.
Figure 324.
Figure 325.
Figure 326.
Figure 327.
Figure 328.
Figure 329.
Figure 330.
Figure 331.
Figure 332.
Figure 333.
Figure 334.
Figure 335.
Figure 336.
Figure 337.
Figure 338.
Figure 339.
Figure 340.
Figure 341.
Figure 342.
Figure 343.
Figure 344.
Figure 345.
Figure 346.
Figure 347.
Figure 348.
Figure 349.
Figure 350.
Figure 351.
Figure 352.
Figure 353.
Figure 354.
Figure 355.
Figure 356.
Figure 357.
Figure 358.
Figure 359.
Figure 360.
EN
Link arm shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Sensor mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Tension spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Grip ring, clock plate, sensor mount, and spring . . 405
Registration roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Timing belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Unlocking and removing the gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Grip ring and bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Detaching the lower guide stopper . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Removing the spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Registration sensor cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Disconnecting the sensor connector . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Paper guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Reversing plate (front view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Detaching the reversing plate (rear view) . . . . . . . 412
Front plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Delivery/reversing roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Body cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
E-ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Delivery roller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Removing the screw and spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Disengaging the connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Detaching the timing belt and motor unit . . . . . . . . 417
Detaching the delivery roller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Gear and timing belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Unlocking and removing the gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Reversing guide spring, front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Reversing guide spring, rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Detaching the solenoid unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Reversing the sensor jack and grounding cord . . . 421
Detaching the reversing guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Document tray mounting plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Stopper plate solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Solenoid positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Test strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Delivery roller and pick-up roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Inserting the test strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Paper-deflecting solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Flapper plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
E-ring and bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Delivery roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Paper-guide plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Figures 13
Figure 361.
Figure 362.
Figure 363.
Figure 364.
Figure 365.
Figure 366.
Figure 367.
Figure 368.
Figure 369.
Figure 370.
Figure 371.
Figure 372.
Figure 373.
Figure 374.
Figure 375.
Figure 376.
Figure 377.
Figure 378.
Figure 379.
Figure 380.
Figure 381.
Figure 382.
Figure 383.
Figure 384.
Figure 385.
Figure 386.
Figure 387.
Figure 388.
Figure 389.
Figure 390.
Figure 391.
Figure 392.
Figure 393.
Figure 394.
Figure 395.
Figure 396.
Figure 397.
Figure 398.
Figure 399.
Figure 400.
Figure 401.
Figure 402.
14 Figures
Sensor flag and connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Delivery roller mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Delivery roller and stamp solenoid mount . . . . . . . 429
Stamp solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Placing the spring in the temporary position on the
retaining hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Detaching the solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Detaching the side plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Delivery unit linking plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Removing the feeding belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
External covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Upper left cover and screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Front cover and screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Rear cover and screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Upper right cover and screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Paper-size limit panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Fixing plate and limit panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Connectors and cable clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Pick-up unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Pick-up roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Feed roller and separation roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Preparing to remove the lifter wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
E-ring and pulley cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Pulley cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Screw and lifter wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Parts removal behind the lifter wire . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Paper-detection unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Lifter drive unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
E-ring and gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
E-ring and pulley cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Bracket removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Lifter wire removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Tightening the lifter wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Lifter motor (M1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Feeder motor (M2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Pick-up motor (M3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Deck controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Power supply PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Standard image sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
EN
Figure 403.
Figure 404.
Figure 405.
Figure 406.
Figure 407.
Figure 408.
Figure 409.
Figure 410.
Figure 411.
Figure 412.
Figure 413.
Figure 414.
Figure 415.
Figure 416.
Figure 417.
Figure 418.
Figure 419.
Figure 420.
Figure 421.
Figure 422.
Figure 423.
Figure 424.
Figure 425.
Figure 426.
Figure 427.
Figure 428.
Figure 429.
Figure 430.
Figure 431.
Figure 432.
Figure 433.
Figure 434.
Figure 435.
Figure 436.
Figure 437.
Figure 438.
Figure 439.
Figure 440.
Figure 441.
Figure 442.
Figure 443.
Figure 444.
Figure 445.
EN
Horizontal stripe test print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
256-color test print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
256-gradation test print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
16-gradation test print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Halftone test print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Grid test print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
CMYK 64-gradation test print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
RGB 64-gradation test print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Full-color 16-gradation test print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Full-color light area 16-gradation test print . . . . . . 475
Leakage breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
DIP switch on the DADF controller PCB . . . . . . . . 534
Figure 5-101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Figure 5-102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Interface assembly location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
ECO-2 PCB Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Interface assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Stand assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Assembly location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
External covers and panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Internal components (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Internal components (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Internal components (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Power cord terminal assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Control panel assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Copyboard cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Mirror assembly 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Electrical tray assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Dc power supply PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
APC power supply PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Noise filter PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Control panel PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Control panel CPU PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Control panel inverter PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Reader controller PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Analog image processor PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Motor driver PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Inverter PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Connectors (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Connectors (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Connectors (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Assembly locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Mounting hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Figures 15
Figure 446.
Figure 447.
Figure 448.
Figure 449.
Figure 450.
Figure 451.
Figure 452.
Figure 453.
Figure 454.
Figure 455.
Figure 456.
Figure 457.
Figure 458.
Figure 459.
Figure 460.
Figure 461.
Figure 462.
Figure 463.
Figure 464.
Figure 465.
Figure 466.
Figure 467.
Figure 468.
Figure 469.
Figure 470.
Figure 471.
Figure 472.
Figure 473.
Figure 474.
16 Figures
External covers and panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
DF assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Document tray assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Upper cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
RF assembly (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
RF assembly (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
RF assembly (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
RF assembly (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Right paper delivery assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Paper feed motor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Belt drive motor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Upper paper guide assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Lower paper guide assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Separation roller assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Paper separation assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
RDF controller PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Connectors (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Connectors (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Assembly locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Mounting hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
External covers and panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Internal components (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Internal components (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Internal components (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
Lifter drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Paper pick-up assembly (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Paper pick-up assembly (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Deck controller PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
EN
Tables
Table 1.
Table 2.
Table 3.
Table 4.
Table 5.
Table 6.
Table 7.
Table 8.
Table 9.
Table 10.
Table 11.
Table 12.
Table 13.
Table 14.
Table 15.
Table 16.
Table 17.
Table 18.
Table 19.
Table 20.
Table 21.
Table 22.
Table 23.
Table 24.
Table 25.
Table 26.
Table 27.
Table 28.
Table 29.
Table 30.
Table 31.
Table 32.
Table 33.
Table 34.
Table 35.
Table 36.
Table 37.
Table 38.
EN
First copy time (in seconds*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Copying speed (pages per minute) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Operating conditions—copy/print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Electrical specifications—copy/print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Physical specifications—copy/print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Electrical specifications—ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Physical specifications—ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Supported media—ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Operating conditions—side HCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Electrical specifications—side HCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Physical specifications—side HCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Ordering parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Technical support websites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Asia Pacific region Customer Care Centers . . . . . . . . 46
Copy module functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Common settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Copy module settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Timer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Adjustment/cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Self-diagnostic (error) messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Service mode sub-items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Copier, display mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Copier, display mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus . . . 66
Country code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Language code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Series code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
JAM screen legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Types of jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
First 2 digits of FFFF (type of jam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Last 2 digits of FFFF (jam sensor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
G (pick-up position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Pick-up jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Detecting jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
ERR screen legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Copier, I/O mode descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Copier, I/O mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus . . . . . . . 79
Copier, adjust menu descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Copier, adjust mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus . . . . 84
Tables 17
Table 39.
Table 40.
Table 41.
Table 42.
Table 43.
Table 44.
Table 45.
Table 46.
Table 47.
Table 48.
Table 49.
Table 50.
Table 51.
Table 52.
Table 53.
Table 54.
Table 55.
Table 56.
Table 57.
Table 58.
Table 59.
Table 60.
Table 61.
Table 62.
Table 63.
Table 64.
Table 65.
Table 66.
Table 67.
Table 68.
Table 69.
Table 70.
Table 71.
Table 72.
Table 73.
Table 74.
Table 75.
Table 76.
Table 77.
Table 78.
18 Tables
Copier, run/check mode menu descriptions . . . . . . . . 93
Copier, run/check mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus . 94
Control panel key descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Copier, machine settings menu descriptions . . . . . . . 98
Copier, machine settings mode Level 2 and
Level 3 menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Copier, machine settings mode,
soft counter specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Soft counter defaults by voltage and country . . . . . . 107
Copier, test print mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus . 109
Test print options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Copier counter menu descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Copier, counter mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus . . 112
Feeder options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Serviceable printer parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Feeding power measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Periodically replaced parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Items to be cleaned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Warm-up and standby phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Sequence functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Scanning lamp/scanning lamp heater errors. . . . . . . 196
Identifying original size, metric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Identifying original-size, inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
PCB functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
BGR->YMC conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Enlargement/reduction and image processing . . . . . 222
Copy module fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Power saving function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Copy module main power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Accessories power supply (secondary side) . . . . . . . 239
Page composition sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Europe/Asia (A4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
U.S. (Letter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Relationship between pick-up motor signals and
the pick-up roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Relationship between belt motor drive signal and
the feeding belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Jam detection sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Jam detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Improper placement of originals sensors . . . . . . . . . 282
Improper placement detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Motors, solenoids, and sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
PCB functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
EN
Table 79.
Table 80.
Table 81.
Table 82.
Table 83.
Table 84.
Table 85.
Table 86.
Table 87.
Table 88.
Table 89.
Table 90.
Table 91.
Table 92.
Table 93.
Table 94.
Table 95.
Table 96.
Table 97.
Table 98.
Table 99.
Table 100.
Table 101.
Table 102.
Table 103.
Table 104.
Table 105.
Table 106.
Table 107.
Table 108.
Table 109.
Table 110.
Table 111.
Table 112.
Table 113.
Table 114.
Table 115.
Table 116.
Table 117.
Table 118.
Table 119.
Table 120.
Table 121.
EN
LEDs on the indicator PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Names and abbreviations of signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Remaining paper detection switches . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Sensor functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Solenoid and motor functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
PCB functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Deck controller switches and LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
User LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Signal names and codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Test pattern types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Common image faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Repetitive image defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Errors based on LED lighting cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Interface assembly location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
ECO-2 PCB Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Interface assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Stand screw/ring kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Stand assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Screw/ring kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Belt kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Gear/pulley kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Spring kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
External covers and panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Internal components (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Internal components (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Internal components (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Power cord terminal assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Control panel assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Copyboard cover assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Mirror assembly 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Electrical tray assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Dc power supply PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
APC power supply PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Noise filter PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Control panel PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Control panel CPU PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Control panel inverter PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Reader controller PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Analog image processor PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Motor driver PCA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Inverter PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Connectors (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Tables 19
Table 122.
Table 123.
Table 124.
Table 125.
Table 126.
Table 127.
Table 128.
Table 129.
Table 130.
Table 131.
Table 132.
Table 133.
Table 134.
Table 135.
Table 136.
Table 137.
Table 138.
Table 139.
Table 140.
Table 141.
Table 142.
Table 143.
Table 144.
Table 145.
Table 146.
Table 147.
Table 148.
Table 149.
Table 150.
Table 151.
Table 152.
Table 153.
Table 154.
Table 155.
Table 156.
Table 157.
Table 158.
Table 159.
Table 160.
Table 161.
Table 162.
Table 163.
Table 164.
20 Tables
Connectors (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Connectors (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Belt kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Bushing kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Gear/pulley kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Pin kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Screw/ring kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Spring kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Mounting hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
External covers and panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
DF assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Document tray assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Upper cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
RF assembly (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
RF assembly (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
RF assembly (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
RF assembly (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Right paper delivery assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Paper feed motor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Belt drive motor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Upper paper guide assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Lower paper guide assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Separation roller assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Paper separation assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
RDF controller PCA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Connectors (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Connectors (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Bushing kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Gear/pulley kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Screw/ring kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Spring kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Mounting hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
External covers and panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
Internal components (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
Internal components (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Internal components (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
Lifter drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Paper pick-up assembly (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Paper pick-up assembly (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Deck controller PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Numerical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
Alphabetical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
EN
1
Product information
Chapter contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Copy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Automatic document feeder (ADF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Side high-capacity input (side HCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Model and serial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Safety and regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
FCC regulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
EN
Chapter contents 21
22 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Introduction
The HP Color LaserJet 8550 Multi-Function Printer (MFP) system
consists of the following:
l
Copy module
l
Stand
l
Print engine
l
Optional automatic document feeder (ADF)
l
Optional side high-capacity input (side HCI)
Copy module
Features
Control panel
l
320-by-230 dot LCD touch screen
Copy speed (letter/A4)
l
6 pages per minute (ppm) full color
24 ppm monochrome
l
Copy speed (ledger/A3)
l
l
3 ppm full color
12 ppm monochrome
Original type
l
Sheet, book, three-dimensional
object (2 kilogram maximum)
Magnification
l
Nine preset reduction and
enlargement percentages
Zoom: 25% to 400%, by 1%
increments
l
Resolution
l
600 dots per inch by 600 lines per
inch
Advanced copying features:
EN
l
Up to 100 continuous copies
l
Auto clear (two minute standard; variable, can be disabled)
l
Auto color select (identifies original to select four-color or mono copy)
l
One-touch adjust (vivid colors, tranquil colors, lighten image, darken
image, highlight reproduction, old-fashioned photo)
l
Color adjust (color balance, density range YMCK adjustment)
l
Auto power save (30-minute standard; variable, can be disabled)
l
Low power (one-hour standard; variable in user mode)
l
Original mode (text/photo/map, printed image, photo, black text)
Introduction 23
Advanced copying features (continued):
l
Frame erase
l
Image shift
l
Blind margin
l
Margin
l
Auto gradation correction
l
Color balance
l
Auto exposure
l
Sharpness
l
Auto paper select
l
Single color
l
Auto zoom
l
Image separation
l
Two-page separation
l
Mode memory and recall
l
Heavy-sheet original
l
Framing/blanking
l
Image creation
l
Image combination
Specifications
Speed
Table 1. First copy time (in seconds*)
Type
Size
4-color
Mono-color
Plain paper
A4, Letter
34
18
Thick paper
A4, Letter
50
35
Transparency
A4, Letter
57
41
*Times shown assume A4-size media, direct copy using cassette 1, face-up delivery,
and no pre-scanning; for face-down delivery, add three seconds for plain paper, six
seconds for thick paper, and seven seconds for transparencies.
Table 2. Copying speed (pages per minute)
Source
Size
4-color
Mono-color
Plain paper
Cassette
Multifeeder
A3, B4, A4R,
B5, 11 by 17,
Legal, Letter
3 ppm
12 ppm
A4/LTR
6 ppm
24 ppm
Thick paper
Multifeeder
A3/11 by 17
A4/LTR
1.2 ppm
2.4 ppm
1.7 ppm
3.4 ppm
Transparency
Multifeeder
A4/LTR
2.1 ppm
2.8 ppm
24 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Environmental
Table 3. Operating conditions—copy/print
Temperature
15° to 27.5° C
59° to 81.5° F
Humidity
20% to 80% RH
Atmospheric pressure
786 to 1013 hPa (560 to 760 mmHg)
Acoustic emissions
74 dB copying
62 dB standby
Ozone emissions
0.05 ppm or less
0.02 ppm or less
Electrical
Table 4. Electrical specifications—copy/print
Power source:
110 V units
220 V units
100-127 Vac ± 10% at 50 Hz ± 2 Hz,
60 Hz ± 2 Hz
220-240 Vac ± 10% at 50 Hz ± 2 Hz
Maximum power consumption
1.5 kW or less
Physical
Table 5. Physical specifications—copy/print
Weight
39 kg (348 lb)
Dimensions (mm)
Width: 673 mm (26.5 in)
Height: 190 mm (7.5 in)
Depth: 787 mm (31.0 in)
Supported media sizes
l
l
l
l
EN
A3
A4R
A4
legal
l
l
l
l
B4
B5
11-by-17 inches
letter
Copy module 25
Overview
2
1
2
2
3
2
4
Figure 1.
Copy module front left
1
Copyboard cover
2
Copyboard glass
3
Control panel
4
Power supply cooling fan air inlet
2
1
Figure 2.
2
2
3
2
4
Copy module front right
1
Control key switch
2
Power supply cord connector
3
Rear power switch
4
Printer power cord connector
26 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
2
2
3
Figure 3.
EN
2
4
2
5
2
6
2
1
Copy module cross-section
1
Number 1 mirror
2
Number 2 mirror
3
Number 3 mirror
4
Scanning lamp
5
Lens
6
Charge-coupled device (CCD)
Copy module 27
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
The ADF is not part of the standard MFP bundle. It can be ordered as
an option.
Features
The ADF can identify the size of an original in terms of its length
(feeding direction) and width for communication to its host computer.
Features include:
l
24 copies per minute
l
circulating, auto-duplexing pickup method
l
communication with copier using interprocess communication
(IPC)
28 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Specifications
Electrical
Table 6. Electrical specifications—ADF
Power supply
24 Vdc (from the copy module)
Maximum power consumption
Less than 170 W
Physical
Table 7. Physical specifications—ADF
Weight
Approximately 14.8 kg (32.6 lb)
Weight does not include the document output
tray.
Dimensions
Width: 641 mm (25.2 in)
Height: 152 mm (6.0 in)
Depth: 508 mm (20.0 in)
Dimensions do not include document output
tray.
Supported media
Table 8. Supported media—ADF
Sizes
Weights
Capacity
A5, B5, A4, Letter, Legal
50 to 105 g/m
2
50 sheets
B4, A3, 11 by 17, Legal
50 to 105 g/m2
25 sheets
ADF media selection guidelines
Do not use the following as originals in the ADF:
CAUTION
EN
l
transparencies, or paper with an opacity of 80% or less
l
carbon-backed sheets
l
sheets with paste-ups or binding
l
sheets with cut-outs, holes, or tears
l
sheets with a clips, staples, or glue
l
sheets with curling, wrinkling, or creasing
Do not feed the same original more than once, to protect against
damage.
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 29
Overview
2
1
2
2
3
2
4
2
6
2
5
Figure 4.
2
7
2
8
Automatic document feeder
1
Upper cover
5
Document tray
2
Side guide
6
Sub-tray
3
Last-page detector
7
Body cover
4
Original-set indicator
8
Document output tray
30 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
2
2
4
2
5
2
6
2
7
2
8
2
3
2
9
2
1
2
13
2
15
Figure 5.
EN
2
14
2
12
2
11
2
10
Automatic document feeder cross-section
1
Reversing roller
8
Pick-up roller
2
Paper deflecting plate
9
Delivery roller
3
Feeding roller (separation
function)
10 Feeding belt link roller
4
Separation belt (feeding
function)
5
Pre-separation guide
6
Delivery/pick-up roller
7
Paper retaining plate
11 Retaining rolls
12 Feeding belt
13 Paper stopper plate
14 Feeding belt drive roller
15 Registration roller
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 31
Side high-capacity input (side HCI)
Features
l
holds up to 1,000 sheets of 20-pound (lb) media
l
supports media weights of 64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2
l
accommodates either letter- or A4-size media
Specifications
Environmental
Table 9. Operating conditions—side HCI
Temperature
10° to 32.5° C (50° to 90.5° F)
Humidity
20% to 80% RH
Atmospheric pressure
786 to 1013 hPa (560 to 760 mm Hg)
Electrical
Table 10. Electrical specifications—side HCI
Power supply:
110 V units
220 V units
100 to 120 Vac (50/60 Hz)
220 to 240 Vac (50 Hz)
Power consumption
Less than 22 W
Physical
Table 11. Physical specifications—side HCI
Weight
Approximately 18.5 kg (40.8 lb)
Dimensions (mm)
Width: 317 mm (12.5 in)
Height: 280 mm (11.0 in)
Depth: 571 mm (22.5 in)
32 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Overview
2
1
2
2
3
Figure 6.
Front of side HCI
1
Upper right cover
2
Paper-size selection tab
3
User LED
2
4
2
5
Figure 7.
EN
Rear of side HCI
4
Interface connector
5
Power receptacle
Side high-capacity input (side HCI) 33
2
1
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
Figure 8.
Cross-section of side HCI
1
Feed roller
2
Pick-up roller
3
Paper-size limit panel
4
Separation roller
5
Lifter
34 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Model and serial numbers
The serial number on the HP Color LaserJet 8550MFP is the primary
identification number for this MFP bundle. The serial number is
located on the back of the print engine.
Accessories also have their own unique serial numbers, which are
located on the back of each accessory.
Safety and regulatory information
Declaration of conformity
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturer’s Name:
Manufacturer’s Address:
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021
USA
declares, that the product
Product Name:
Model Number:
Product Options:
Color LaserJet 8550MFP Accessories
C7836A, C7837A, and C7839A
All
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety:
IEC 950:1991+A1+A2+A3+A4 / EN 60950:1992+A1+A2+A3+A4+A11
IEC 825-1:1993 +A1/EN 60825-1:1994 +A11 Class 1 (Laser/LED)
EMC:
CISPR 22:1997 / EN 55022:1998 Class A1
EN 61000-3-2:1995
EN 61000-3-3:1995
EN 55024:1998
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class A2 / ICES-002, Issue 2
AS / NZS 3548:1995
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage
Directive 73/23/EEC, and carries the CE-Marking accordingly.
1
The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
2
This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation
June 17, 1999
For Regulatory Topics ONLY, contact:
Australia Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 31-41 Joseph
Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia
European Contact:
Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard
GmbH, Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Straße 110-140,
D-71034 Böblingen, (Fax: +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop
160, Boise, Idaho 83707-0015, (Phone: 208-396-6000)
EN
Model and serial numbers 35
FCC regulations
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If it is not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If
this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
receptions, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
Note
l
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
l
Increase separation between equipment and receiver.
l
Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is located.
l
Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.
Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly
approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this
equipment.
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class
B limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.
36 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
2
Service approach
Chapter contents
Service approach overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Parts and supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Obtaining related documentation and software . . . . . . 40
Ordering consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Ordering FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Parts exchange program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Technical assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
List Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
HP ASAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
HP FIRST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Dealer Response Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
HP Software Distribution Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
HP Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Customer Support Sales Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Parts identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Customer Information Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
HP Customer Care Centers (CCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
EN
Chapter contents 37
38 Chapter 2 - Service approach
EN
Service approach overview
The HP Color LaserJet 8550MFP has a one-year, next-day, onsite
warranty from HP to the customer. An in-field service strategy based
on field-replaceable units (FRUs) applies to all devices of the HP
Color LaserJet 8550MFP system (print engine, copy module, and
side HCI).
The ADF under warranty will be first be serviced by a field technician
who will troubleshoot, clean, and adjust the unit. The field technician
can also replace the feeding belt, if necessary. If these measures fail
to correct the problem, the ADF be replaced as a whole-unit
exchange.
Parts and supplies
Field-replaceable and accessory part numbers are found in chapter 8
of this manual. Use only accessories specifically designed for this
printer. Accessories can be ordered from an authorized service or
support provider. Replacement parts can be ordered from HP’s
Service Materials Organization (SMO) or Support Materials Europe
(SME).
EN
Service approach overview 39
Ordering
The following table lists information for ordering from SME, SMO, and
the HP Distribution Center (HPD).
Table 12. Ordering parts
Organization
Address
Phone
SMO (Service Materials
Organization)
Hewlett-Packard Company
Support Materials Organization
8050 Foothills Blvd.
Roseville, CA 95678
(800) 227-8164
(U.S. only)
SME (Support Materials Europe)
Hewlett-Packard Company
Support Materials Europe
Wolf-Hirth Strasse 33
D-7030 Böblingen, Germany
(49 7031) 14-2253
HPD (HP Distribution Center)
(805) 257-5565
(805) 257-6995 Fax
Obtaining related documentation and
software
To order related documentation and software, contact SMO or SME
at the numbers listed on the previous page.
For information through the World Wide Web, visit the following
websites:
Table 13. Technical support websites
HP Customer Care Online
http://www.hp.com/go/support
Software drivers, support documentation, and
answers to frequently asked questions
HP Technical Training
http://www.hp.com/go/resellertraining
(North America)
Classes and schedules
Parts
Parts information
40 Chapter 2 - Service approach
http://outfield.external.hp.com/spi/
welcom.htm
EN
Ordering consumables
Consumable parts and accessories are available directly from
Hewlett-Packard at the following numbers:
l
U.S.: (800) 538-8787
l
Canada: (800) 387-3154
(in Toronto: (416) 671-8383)
l
United Kingdom: 0734-441212
l
Contact your local HP Parts Coordinator for other local phone
numbers.
To find a dealer near you (or if the local dealer is temporarily out of
stock), call the HP Customer Information Center at (800) 752-0900.
Ordering FRUs
This printer is designed to be repaired by replacing FRUs. Part
numbers are located in chapter 8 of this manual and can be ordered
from SMO or SME (see page 40).
Parts exchange program
HP offers remanufactured assemblies for selected parts. These are
identified in chapter 8 and can be ordered through SMO or SME (see
page 40).
EN
Ordering 41
Technical assistance
List Server
A list server is an e-mail program that allows users to subscribe to
certain mail lists by sending e-mail to the server. The list server
allows HP LaserJet Technical Marketing to make the support
community aware of new or urgent information by sending
information to subscribers.
l
To subscribe to hardware-related information, send e-mail to:
subscribe-CLJ8500/[email protected]
l
To subscribe to software-related information, send e-mail to:
subscribe-CLJ8500/[email protected]
Once you subscribe, you will receive more information about the
benefits of the list server as well as additional instruction about how to
use the list server.
HP ASAP
HP ASAP (Automated Support Access Program) provides free
technical support information 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. The
ASAP system includes HP FIRST, explained below. The ASAP
service at (800) 333-1917 (U.S.) requires a touch-tone phone.
42 Chapter 2 - Service approach
EN
HP FIRST
HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology) is a
phone-in fax service that provides technical information for
HP LaserJet end-users and service personnel. Receiving a fax
requires a type-3 facsimile machine or fax card. Service-related
information includes:
l
service notes (HP Authorized Dealers)
l
Product Data Sheets (PDS)
l
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs)
l
typeface and accessory information
l
printer support software information
l
toner information
l
driver request form and Software Matrix
HP FIRST, U.S.
Call the U.S. HP ASAP system at (800) 333-1917 and follow the
voice prompts to enter HP FIRST.
HP FIRST, Europe
Call HP FIRST at one of the following European numbers:
l
U.K.: 0800-96-02-71
l
Belgium: 078-111906 (Dutch)
l
Switzerland: 155-1527 (German)
l
Netherlands: 06-0222420
l
Germany: 0130-810061
l
Austria: 0660-8128
For English service outside the countries listed above, call
(31) 20-681-8192.
EN
Technical assistance 43
Dealer Response Line
For further technical assistance on pre/post sales and service
support, HP dealer service-authorized personnel can contact the
Dealer Response Line.
(800) 544-9976 (U.S. only)
(800) 363-6584 (Canada)
HP Software Distribution Center
For printer drivers and application note orders:
(805) 257-5565
HP Direct
For supplies and accessories orders:
(800) 538-8787 U.S. only
Customer Support Sales Center
For existing hardware and software service agreements:
(800) 386-1115 U.S. only
For price quotations for or purchase of new hardware or software
agreements:
(800) 743-8305 U.S. only
Parts identification
For service part number identification:
(916) 783-0804
Customer Information Centers
For further technical assistance, service-authorized HP and dealer
service personnel can contact the Hewlett-Packard Customer
Information Center at (800) 752-0900 in North America.
44 Chapter 2 - Service approach
EN
HP Customer Care Centers (CCC)
HP representatives are available to answer technical questions at no
charge for a period equivalent to the original HP hardware warranty
period.
Questions regarding operating systems such as MS-DOS®, UNIX®,
or network configuration operating systems cannot be answered by
the Customer Care Center, and should be referred to your dealer.
Note
Each time you call the HP Customer Care Centers, you will be asked
to provide the printer serial number and the original date of purchase.
U.S. CCC
The CCC can be reached at (208) 323-2551 and is available
weekdays from 6:00 A.M. to 6:00 P.M. Mountain Time.
European Customer Care Center (ECCC)
The ECCC can be reached at 31-0-20-605-0505 and is available
weekdays from 8:30 A.M. until 6:00 P.M. Central European Time.
Multilingual customer-support representatives are available to answer
questions.
Canadian Customer Care Center (CCCC)
The CCCC at (905) 206-4663 is available weekdays from 8:00 A.M.
until 8:00 P.M. Eastern Time. French- and English-speaking
customer-support representatives are available to answer questions.
EN
Technical assistance 45
Asia Pacific region Customer Care Centers
Table 14. Asia Pacific region Customer Care Centers
Country
Phone
Hours of operation
Australia
+ 61 3 8877 8000
9:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M., Monday through Friday
China
+ 86 (0)10 6564 5959
8:30 A.M. to 5:30 P.M., Monday through Friday
Hong Kong
800 96 7729
8:30 A.M. to 5:30 P.M., Monday through Friday
India
+ 91 11 682 6035
9:30 A.M. to 5:30 P.M., Monday through Friday
Indonesia
+62 (21) 350 3408
8:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M., Monday through Friday
Japan
+ 81 3 3335 8333
9:00 A.M. to 12:00 noon and 1:00 P.M. to 5:00 P.M.,
Monday through Friday
Korea, Republic of
+82 (2) 3270 0700
8:30 A.M. to 5:30 P.M., Monday through Friday
(outside Seoul only)
080 999 0700
8:30 A.M. to 5:30 P.M., Monday through Friday
Malaysia
+60 (3) 295 2566
8:30 A.M. to 5:30 P.M., Monday through Friday
Penang
1 300 88 00 28
8:30 A.M. to 5:30 P.M., Monday through Friday
New Zealand
+64 (9) 356 6640
9:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M., Monday through Friday
Philippines
+ 63 (2) 867 3551
8:30 A.M. to 5:30 P.M., Monday through Friday
Singapore
+65 272 5300
8:30 A.M. to 5:30 P.M., Monday through Friday
Taiwan
+ 886 (2) 2717 0055
8:30 A.M. to 6:00 P.M., Monday through Friday
Thailand
+66 (2) 661 4000
8:30 P.M. to 5:30 P.M., Monday through Friday
Vietnam
+84 (0) 8 823 4530
8:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M., Monday through Friday, and
8:00 A.M. to 12:00 noon on Saturday
Warranty
The warranty outlines specific legal rights. Customers might also
have other rights that vary from area to area. Refer to the user’s guide
for further warranty information.
46 Chapter 2 - Service approach
EN
3
Operational overview
Chapter contents
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Copy module functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
User mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Automatic gradation adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Cold reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Original-set indicator (ADF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Warnings and actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Self-diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Navigating service mode screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Copier, display mode (DISPLAY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Copier, I/O mode (I/O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Copier, adjust mode (ADJUST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Copier, run/check mode (FUNCTION). . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Copier, machine settings (OPTION) mode . . . . . . . . . 98
Copier, test print mode (TEST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Copier, counter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
EN
Chapter contents 47
48 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Control panel
2
1
2
8
Figure 9.
2
4
2
2
5
2
6
2 15
13
2
17
2
2
2 16
14
2
3
2
7
2
9
2
10
2
11
2
12
2
18
2
19
2
20
Copy module control panel
1
System switch—switch between the copy module user interface
and the print system screen; also use to exit Power Save mode
2
Status indicators:
• copying—glows green to indicate that copying is under way
• error—flashes orange to indicate the absence of media,
media jam, or absence of toner; glows orange to indicate a
fault
• data—glows green to indicate that data is being output
• error (after “options”)—flashes orange to indicate a printer
error, the absence of media, media jam, or absence of toner
EN
3
Screen contrast dial—adjust the contrast of the liquid crystal
display (LCD) (clockwise darkens the screen, counter-clockwise
lightens the screen)
4
Reset key—return to standard copying mode; also use to back
out of menus without making changes
5
Guide key—display context-sensitive help screens (functions,
how to operate)
6
User mode key—start or end user mode, and check common
settings, copy module settings, timer settings, adjust/clean
settings, and counter readings
7
Interrupt key—make an interrupt copy
Control panel 49
8
Touch panel display—display settings screen according to
system functions
9
Keypad—enter numerical values, such as copy counts
10 ID key—start ID mode with the ID key and enter a user ID or
password on the keypad; also use to lock the copy module
11 Start key—begin to copy
12 Stop key—stop continuous copying
13 Clear key—initialize numeric values, such as copy counts
14 ACS key—enable and disable black-and-white/color auto
identification
15 Full-color key—select four-color (full-color) mode
16 Black key—select black (mono-color) mode
17 Save power key—enable and disable Power Save mode
18 Clip holder—a recessed area for paperclips
19 Control panel power switch—turn power to the copy module on
and off
20 Pilot lamp—stays lit when there is power to the copy module
50 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Copy module functionality
Table 15. Copy module functionality
Mode
Description
Auto paper select
Measures the size of the original and the reduction/enlargement percentage,
and selects the appropriate size for copies.
Auto enlarge/reduce
Enlarges/reduces to suit the selected paper size.
Full image
Reduces images slightly to avoid copying in the unprintable area.
Zoom
Enlarges/reduces images to preset or selected percentages.
X/Y zoom
Enables specification of different ratios for X and Y directions in percentages.
Enlarged page
separation
Divides an image into several pages for output.
Text/photo/map
Adjusts copy algorithms to best match the type of original.
* text/photo/map (default)
* print photo
* photo
* black-and-white text
Auto start
Starts copying automatically after the warm-up/calibration process from
power-on or jam removal.
Double-sided
(requires duplexing unit)
Makes double-sided copies of two single-sided copies, or makes doublesided copies of the left and right pages of an original (page separation).
Interrupt copying
Allows interruption and resumption of continuous copying for quick copies of
different originals.
Color auto recognition
(ACS)
Automatically identifies a color or a black-and-white original.
Page separate
Print left and right pages of a book on separate pages.
Book frame erase
Erases shadows from originals.
Original frame erase
Erases the shadow and frames along the sides and the middle of a copy that
is larger than the original.
Hole image erase
Erases the shadow of holes on a copy.
Second-side elimination
Blocks the image on the back of a double-sided original on a copy.
Shift
Shifts images to the center (or corner) of a copy.
Bind margin
Shifts the image of the original to create a blank width of zero to 20 mm along
the side of the copy (left/right/top/bottom bind).
Sheet frame erase
Creates a blank width (7 mm) along the sides of a copy to prevent soiling or
line images on the copy.
Reduce page compose
Requires an ADF.
Enlarge page compose
Divides the image of a single original into several copies (1 to 2, or 1 to 4).
ID
Enables copying only in response to an appropriate ID number or password.
EN
Copy module functionality 51
User mode
The copy module provides an administrative-functions menu that
allows for customized defaults to suit users’ needs. Four
administrative menus are available when
is pressed.
l
Common settings
l
Copy module settings
l
Timer settings
l
Adjustment/cleaning
The administrative-functions key also allows users to check the
readings of six software counters from the control panel display.
52 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Common settings
Table 16. Common settings
Name
Description
Remarks
Buzzer
Enables and disables the input
sound, alarm sound, or job sound.
ON:
enable
OFF: disable
Factory setting: ON
Cassette auto
select
Enables and disables auto selection
(auto paper selection and auto
cassette change) for each cassette
(including the side HCI).
ON:
enable
OFF: disable
Factory setting:
cassette 1/2, ON;
multifeeder, OFF
Black text auto
density adjust
In black-text mode, selects “priority
on image quality,” in which prescanning is enabled, or “priority on
speed,” in which there is no prescanning.
Factory setting:
priority on speed
Priority on photo/
text in black mode
for text/photo/map
In black mode of text/photo/map
mode, selects “text original” or “photo
original” for image quality. In “priority
on text original,” text is reproduced
more faithfully. In “priority on photo
originals,” photographs are
reproduced more faithfully.
Factory setting:
priority on photo original.
Save power
Selects a rate of saving for the copy
module in power save mode:
10%: saving at 10%
25%: saving at 25%
50%: saving at 50%
No recovery time: no saving
The “rate of saving” is the
rate of saving in relation to
the copy module’s total
power consumption.
Factory setting: 10%
Inch input
Enables and disables input in inches
on screen designed for metric inputs
(shift width or bind width).
ON:
enable
OFF: disable
Factory setting: OFF.
EN
Copy module functionality 53
Copy module settings
Table 17. Copy module settings
Name
Description
Remarks
Preference key
Allows for up to two commonly-used
special functions to be displayed as
buttons on the main menu.
Factory settings: none
Standard mode
Stores copy module standard mode
settings selected at power-on or in
response to the Reset key being
pressed.
Factory setting:
copy count: 1
paper select: auto
density: auto
original type: text/photo/map
Settings reset
Initializes the items of the copy
module settings to factory settings.
54 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Timer settings
Table 18. Timer settings
Name
Description
Remarks
Auto clear time
Automatically returns the touch-panel
display to standard mode if no
operation takes place for a set time
after the end of key operation. Set the
time to between zero and nine
minutes in one-minute increments.
Factory setting: 2 minutes
Auto save power
time
Automatically puts the copy module in
save power mode if no operation
takes place for a set time after the
end of copying or key operation. Set
the time to one, two, five, 10, 20, or
30 minutes, or to one to eight hours in
one-hour increments.
Factory setting: 30 minutes
Shift to low power
time
Automatically puts the copy module
into low-power mode if no operation
takes places for a set time after the
end of copying or key operation. Set
the time to 30 minutes or to one to
eight hours in one-hour increments.
Factory setting: one hour
In low power mode, the
fusing assembly is deprived
of power in specific intervals.
Auto power-off time
Automatically turns off the copy
module if no operation takes place for
a set time after the end of copying or
key operation. Turn the setting off or
set the time to one to 24 hours in onehour increments.
Factory setting: two hours
The setting is changed to
“off” at installation.
EN
Copy module functionality 55
Adjustment/cleaning
Table 19. Adjustment/cleaning
Name
Description
Remarks
Zoom fine
adjustment
Make fine adjustments to correct
small discrepancies between the
original image and the copy image
made in Direct. For X (left/right) and Y
(front/back), adjustment is possible
between -1.0% and +1.0%.
Factory setting: 0.
Exposure
recalibration
Correct differences in density
between the original image and a
copy image that has been made with
the manual density control set at the
standard (median) value. Adjust the
density correction to any of five
settings.
Factory setting:
standard (median)
Auto gradation
adjustment
Correct poor color balance caused by
discrepancies in fine adjustment or
density adjustment.
See the section that follows
for information about auto
gradation adjustment.
Feeder cleaning
Feed ten blank sheets of paper
through the optional ADF to pick up
loose toner and other contaminants.
56 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Automatic gradation adjustment
To change the automatic gradation adjustment
1
Press the
key.
2
Press ADJUSTMENT/CLEANING.
3
Press AUTO GRADATION ADJUSTMENT.
4
Press TEST PRINT 1. The message PRINTING TEST PRINT 1
appears on the copy module touch screen display.
5
Place the page from Test Print 1 on the copy module glass, facedown, with the black portion of the page aligned with the orange
arrow, and then press SCAN. SCANNING appears on the display if
the page was placed on the glass correctly. If not, CORRECTLY
PLACE THE TEST PRINT ON THE GLASS appears; adjust the
placement of the page and press OK.
6
After the page has been scanned, remove it from the copy
module glass.
7
Repeat steps 4 through 6 for Test Print 2.
8
Repeat steps 4 through 6 for Test Print 3.
9
When scanning of Test Print 3 is complete, SCAN IS COMPLETE
appears on the display for approximately two seconds.
Cold reset
To perform a cold reset on the print engine portion of the HP Color
LaserJet 8550MFP, see the HP Color LaserJet 8500/8550 Printer
Family Service Manual.
Cold reset on the copy module is useful in three circumstances:
l
after replacement of the firmware dual inline memory modules
(DIMM)
l
after replacement of the reader controller printed circuit board
(PCB)
l
if a system settings password has been set and forgotten
For more information about cold resets, see page 96.
EN
Copy module functionality 57
Original-set indicator (ADF)
The original-set indicator turns on when an original is placed on the
document tray, and flashes when an original jams.
Note
1
If the original is A3 or 11-by-17 inch in feeding length, open the
original sub tray.
2
Set the side guide to suit the size of the original.
The side guide lock must be removed if the width of the original is larger
than 297 mm (A4/A3). For details, see “To remove the side guide lock”
on page 382.
3
Place the originals with the first page on top.
4
As needed, set the appropriate copying mode on the copy
module.
5
Press the copy module’s Copy Start key.
Warnings and actions
If the original-set indicator flashes while an original is being fed,
suspect a jam and perform the following:
CAUTION
1
Remove the originals from the document tray.
2
Open the upper cover, and remove the jam. Then, open the ADF
to reset the warning. (If any original is on the copyboard glass,
remove it.)
If the jam is in the copy module, the copy module will run jam recovery
mode and will automatically set the originals. Do not open the ADF to
reset.
3
Set the originals in correct order, and set the stack in the ADF.
58 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Self-diagnostic messages
If a self-diagnostic (error) message appears, see the instructions on
the touch panel display.
If there is no message, but the HP Color LaserJet 8550MFP fails to
make copies, there might be an error in the printer unit. Follow the
instructions on the printer control panel display.
Table 20. Self-diagnostic (error) messages
Message
Cause
Solution
PAPER HAS JAMMED IN
THE “_____” AREA.
REMOVE THE JAMMED
PAPER.
An original or copy media jam has
occurred, halting any print or copy
jobs.
See the location (“_____”) and
follow the removal procedures
described in the screen for
instructions to clear the jammed
media.
RETURN PG.1 TO THE TOP
AND PRESS THE START
KEY AGAIN.
Copying was stopped because of a
problem in the optional ADF.
Rearrange the originals in page
order from the first page in the
optional ADF, and then press the
Start key.
REPLACE THE DRUM.
The drum cartridge is near the end of
its life cycle.
Replace the drum kit.
SET THE DRUM
CARTRIDGE.
The imaging drum is not installed
correctly.
Reinstall the imaging drum.
SET THE FUSER UNIT.
The fuser unit is not installed correctly.
Reinstall the fuser unit.
SET THE INTERMEDIATE
TRANSFER DRUM.
The intermediate transfer drum is not
installed correctly.
Reinstall the intermediate transfer
drum.
<COLOR> TONER NEEDS
TO BE REPLACED.
There is a small amount of the toner
remaining as indicated in the touch
panel display.
Prepare the toner cartridge
indicated in the touch panel display.
REPLACE THE <COLOR>
TONER CARTRIDGE.
There is only a small amount of the
toner remaining as indicated in the
touch panel display, halting any print
or copy jobs.
Replace the toner cartridge
indicated in the copy module touch
panel display.
LOAD PAPER.
The copy module has run out of
media, halting any print or copy jobs.
Load media into one of the input
trays.
LOAD LTRR-SIZE PAPER.
Copy media of the appropriate size
and rotation is not placed in the
selected media input tray.
Place copy media of the indicated
size and rotation in the input tray.
If the Start key is pressed while the
message is shown, copying will be
performed on the displayed copy
media size.
ADJUSTING...
WAIT A MOMENT, THEN
SET THE STACK BYPASS
SIZE AGAIN
The copy module is making internal
operational adjustments.
Remove the media from Tray 1
(stack bypass), wait one minute,
and the replace the media in the
tray.
EN
Self-diagnostic messages 59
Service mode
Note
You cannot start service mode when the “Wait” message appears on
the user screen after the power is turned on. Start service mode when
the “Wait (Select Auto Start)” or “Enter Group ID and ID No.” message
appears.
Overview
The copy module's service mode is divided into two major items,
each with its own initial screen:
l
COPIER (copier service screens begin on page 65)
l
FEEDER (feeder service screens begin on page 114)
Each of these major items consists of sub-items, called “Level 1”
items:
Table 21. Service mode sub-items
Initial screen
Level 1 menu
Mode
COPIER
DISPLAY
Control display mode
FEEDER
I/O
I/O mode
ADJUST
Adjust mode
FUNCTION
Run/check mode
OPTION
Settings mode
TEST
Test print mode
COUNTER
Counter mode
DISPLAY
Control display mode
ADJUST
Adjust mode
FUNCTION
Run/check mode
OPTION
Settings mode
60 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
To start service mode and make selections
Figure 10.
1
Press the administrative-functions key (
panel.
) on the control
2
Press the 2 and 8 on the keypad simultaneously.
3
Press
again. The display changes to the screen shown in
figure 10.
Service mode initial screen
4
Select an item on the touch panel. The screen for the selected
item appears.
To end service mode
Press the Reset key to return to the service mode initial screen. Press
the Reset key again to end service mode and return to the User
screen.
EN
Service mode 61
Backing up copy module service settings
Figure 11 shows the label attached behind the lower front cover of the
copy module.
Figure 11.
Service label (inside the lower front cover of the copy module)
The copy module is adjusted at the factory, and the adjustment
settings are recorded on this label.
l
If you have replaced the reader controller PCB, the firmware
DIMM, or the dc controller PCB (on the printer), you must reenter
these numbers in service mode.
l
If you have replaced the standard white plate, you must enter the
new values found on the new standard white plate into service
mode (W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y, and W-PLT-Z).
l
If you have replaced the CCD unit, you must enter the new values
found on the new CCD into service mode (AL-RG and AL-GB).
62 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Navigating service mode screens
The screens are arranged in three layers:
l
initial screen (see figure 10 on page 61)
l
Level 1/Level 2 screen
l
Level 3 screen
Select one of the two major items on the initial screen (either COPIER
or FEEDER) by pressing the item.
Note
Feeder is available only when an optional ADF is attached.
After you press one of the major items, the Level 1/Level 2 screen
appears on the display. Figure 12 shows the Level 1/Level 2 screen
that appears after COPIER is selected from the initial screen.
Figure 12.
EN
Example of a Level 1/Level 2 item screen
l
Level 1 items are at the top of the screen. To select a Level 1
item, press an item shown across the top of the screen.
l
To select a Level 2 item, select an item shown as white text on a
black background.
Service mode 63
After a Level 2 item is selected, a Level 3 screen appears. Figure 13
shows the Level 3 screen that appears after COPIER, from the initial
screen, and DISPLAY and VERSION, from the Level 1/Level 2 screen,
are selected.
If the Level 3 item consists of multiple pages,
N/M appears, with N being the present screen
and M indicating the number of pages.
Figure 13.
Example of a Level 3 screen
Press the Level 3 item to select it.
64 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Copier, display mode (DISPLAY)
Figure 14.
Copier, display mode Level 1/Level 2 screen
Table 22. Copier, display mode menu
EN
Item
Description
VERSION
Read-only memory (ROM) versions of the PCBs used in
the copy module and accessories
USER
Indicates items related to the user screen and the user
interface
ACC-STS
Connection status of accessories (only if installed)
CST-STS
State of use of cassettes and multifeeder
JAM
Log of jams
ERR
Log of errors and alarms
CCD
Measured readings of the CCD
SENSOR
State of sensors (important in servicing)
MISC
Miscellaneous other conditions
ALARM-1
Latest alarm for the ADF
Service mode 65
Table 23. Copier, display mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus
Level 2 item
Level 3 item
Description
VERSION
DC-CON
ROM version of the dc controller PCB
“DC-CON xx.yy/XX.YY”
xx.yy: ROM version that controls the communication between
the video controller (LIPS, PS/PCL) PCB on the dc controller
PCB, controls high voltage, and controls some loads (xx =
version number; yy = R&D number)
XX.YY: Version of the ROM which controls loads on the dc
controller PCB (mechanical workings) (XX = version number;
YY = R&D number)
R-CON
ROM version of the reader controller PCB
“R-CON: xx.yy” (xx = version number; yy = R&D number)
PANEL
ROM version of the control panel controller PCB. “PANEL xx.yy”
(xx = version number; yy = R&D number)
ECO
ROM version of the ECP PCB
“ECO xx.yy” (xx = version number; yy = R&D number)
FEEDER
ROM version of the ADF controller PCB (if an ADF is installed)
“FEEDER xx.yy” (xx = version number; yy = R&D number)
SORTER
ROM version of the sorter driver PCB (not available on the HP
Color LaserJet 8550MFP)
“SORTER xx.yy” (xx = version number; yy = R&D number)
DECK
ROM version of the deck controller PCB
“DECK xx.yy” (xx = version number; yy = R&D number)
OP-CON
ROM version of the ACC controller PCB
“OP-CON xx.yy” (xx = version number; yy = R&D number)
USER
LANGUAGE
Selected language
“LANGUAGE xx.yy,zz,aa”
xx (first 2 digits): country code (see table 24)
yy (last 2 digits): language code (see table 25)
zz: destination code
aa: series code (see table 26)
ACC-STS
0 = not connected
1 = connected)
FEEDER
Connection status of the ADF (if installed)
SORTER
Connection status of the sorter (not available on the HP Color
LaserJet 8550MFP)
DECK
Connection status of the side HCI (if installed)
EDITOR
Connection status of the editor (not available on the HP Color
LaserJet 8550MFP)
CARD
Connection status of the control card (not available on the HP
Color LaserJet 8550MFP)
DATA-CON
Connection status of the copy data controller (not available on
the HP Color LaserJet 8550MFP)
PCB
Connection status of various boards
(9 = accessories control PCB)
66 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Table 23. Copier, display mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus (continued)
Level 2 item
Level 3 item
Description
CTS-STS
(width of media
in terms of
converted value
or media size)
WIDTH-C1
Media width in cassette 1
WIDTH-C2
Media width in cassette 2
WIDTH-C3
Media width in cassette 3 (supports either a 1,000-sheet side
side HCI or a 200-sheet paper deck)
WIDTH-C4
Media width in cassette 4 (supports only a 2,000-sheet side
HCI)
WIDTH-MF
Media width in the multifeeder
WIDTH-DK
Media width in the side HCI (supports only a 1,000-sheet side
side HCI)
AA
1 through 50 (lower numbers indicate more recent jams)
E
Location (0 = copy module; 1 = ADF)
FFFF
Jam code
First two digits indicate the type of jam (see table 29 on page 72)
Last two digits indicate the sensor that detected the jam (table
30 on page 73)
G
Location of pickup (see table 31 on page 73)
JAM
(jam history; see
figure 15 on page
71 for screen
setup)
ERR
(error history; see
figure 16 on page
76 for screen
setup)
CCD
(CCD-related
measured
readings)
EN
HHHHHH
Soft counter reading at the time of a jam
IIIII
Media size.
AA
1 through 20 (higher numbers indicate older errors)
EEEE
Error code “Exxx” (to decode error codes, see Chapter 7,
“Troubleshooting”)
FFFF
Detail code (if not available, “0000”)
G
Location (0 = copy module; 1 = ADF)
TARGET-B
Shading target value for blue
TARGET-G
Shading target value for green
TARGET-R
Shading target value for red
BOF-B
Output value of the blue CCD (when the scanning lamp is off)
“BOF-B-xx/yy” (xx = odd-numbered bit; yy = even-numbered bit)
BOF-G
Output value of the green CCD (when the scanning lamp is off)
“BOF-G-xx/yy” (xx = odd-numbered bit; yy = even-numbered bit)
BOF-R
Output value of the red CCD (for when the scanning lamp is off)
“BOF-R-xx/yy” (xx = odd-numbered bit; yy = even-numbered bit)
Service mode 67
Table 23. Copier, display mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus (continued)
Level 2 item
Level 3 item
Description
CCD, continued
(when “0” is set to
COPIER > OPTION
> BODY > SH-SW)
OFST-OB
Offset level (SH-SW = 0) of blue for CCD odd-numbered bits
OFST-OG
Offset level (SH-SW = 0) of green for CCD odd-numbered bits
CCD, continued
(when “1” is set to
COPIER > OPTION
> BODY > SH-SW)
CCD, continued
OFST-OR
Offset level (SH-SW = 0) of red for CCD odd-numbered bits
OFST-EB
Offset level (SH-SW = 0) of blue for CCD odd-numbered bits
OFST-EG
Offset level (SH-SW = 0) of green for CCD odd-numbered bits
OFST-ER
Offset level (SH-SW = 0) of red for CCD odd-numbered bits
GAIN-OB
Offset level (SH-SW = 0) of blue for CCD odd-numbered bits
GAIN-OG
Offset level (SH-SW = 0) of green for CCD odd-numbered bits
GAIN-OR
Offset level (SH-SW = 0) of red for CCD odd-numbered bits
GAIN-EB
Offset level (SH-SW = 1) of blue for CCD even-numbered bits
GAIN-EG
Offset level (SH-SW = 1) of green for CCD even-numbered bits
GAIN-ER
Offset level (SH-SW = 1) of red for CCD even-numbered bits
POFST-OB
Offset level (SH-SW = 1) of blue for CCD odd-numbered bits
POFST-OG
Offset level (SH-SW = 1) of green for CCD odd-numbered bits
POFST-OR
Offset level (SH-SW = 1) of red for CCD odd-numbered bits
POFST-EB
Offset level (SH-SW = 1) of blue for CCD even-numbered bits
POFST-EG
Offset level (SH-SW = 1) of green for CCD even-numbered bits
POFST-ER
Offset level (SH-SW = 1) of red for CCD even-numbered bits
PGAIN-OB
Offset level (SH-SW = 1) of blue for CCD odd-numbered bits
PGAIN-OG
Offset level (SH-SW = 1) of green for CCD odd-numbered bits
PGAIN-OR
Offset level (SH-SW = 1) of red for CCD odd-numbered bits
PGAIN-EB
Offset level (SH-SW = 1) of blue for CCD even-numbered bits
PGAIN-EG
Offset level (SH-SW = 1) of green for CCD even-numbered bits
PGAIN-ER
Offset level (SH-SW = 1) of red for CCD even-numbered bits
CCD-TYPE
Indicates CCD or analog processor (0 = CCD, 1 = analog)
TAR2-B
Shading target value for blue
Needed when “1” is set to COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SH-SW
(in other words, when the lamp intensity is decreased)
TAR2-G
Shading target value for green
Needed when “1” is set to COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SH-SW
(in other words, when the lamp intensity is decreased)
TAR2-R
Shading target value for red
Needed when “1” is set to COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SH-SW
(in other words, when the lamp intensity is decreased)
68 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Table 23. Copier, display mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus (continued)
Level 2 item
Level 3 item
Description
SENSOR
SC-HP
Output of the scanner home position sensor
(0 = home position, 1 = non-home position)
W-TONER
Indicates that the waste toner case is almost full
(0 = normal, 1 = full warning)
DOC-SZ
Original size detected by the original size sensor
(xxxx = A4, A3, B4, B5, and so on)
DRUMLIFE
Life of the photosensitive drum in the drum cartridge:
0 = normal
1 = warning 1 (70%)
2 = warning 2 (100%, at which point the copy module cannot
ensure normal levels of quality)
4 = memory error
DSNS-ALM
The density sensor is faulty on the printer side; indicates that the
value is outside the stable image guarantee range for the printer
(0 = normal, 1 = error)
Check the sensors and the condition of the intermediate transfer
drum. If the warning remains, density control will fail, bringing
about gradual deterioration of image quality.
Y-OUTRNG
Indicates that the value is outside the stable Y image guarantee
range for the printer unit (0 = normal, 1 = error)
M-OUTRNG
Indicates that the value is outside the stable M image guarantee
range for the printer unit (0 = normal, 1 = error)
C-OUTRNG
Indicates that the value is outside the stable C image guarantee
range for the printer unit (0 = normal, 1 = error)
K-OUTRNG
Indicates that the value is outside the stable K image guarantee
range for the printer unit (0 = normal, 1 = error)
ENV-DENS
Site environment; checks the temperature and humidity inside
the printer and indicates the environmental range for density
control
0: normal temperature/normal humidity (N/N)
1: high temperature/high humidity (H/H)
2: normal temperature/low humidity (N/L)
3: low temperature/low humidity (L/L)
ENV-TR
Site environment; checks the temperature and humidity inside
the printer and indicates the environmental range for transfer
control
0: N/N
1: H/H
2: N/L
3: L/L
FL-LIFE
Life of the scanning lamp (0 = normal, 1 = warning); when endof-life is reached, E219 is indicated
DF
Latest ADF error (“00” if no errors)
MISC
ALARM-1
EN
Service mode 69
Copier, display mode, user > language details
Table 24. Country code
Code
Country
Code
Country
IT
Italy
AU
Australia
US
North America
FR
France
SG
General
DE
Germany
GB
United Kingdom
NL
Netherlands
Code
Language
Table 25. Language code
Code
Language
JA
Japanese
DE
German
EN
English
IT
Italian
FR
French
Table 26. Series code
Code
Configuration
Code
Configuration
00
AB
02
A
01
Inch
03
All configurations
70 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Copier, display mode, jam details
Figure 15.
JAM screen
Table 27. JAM screen legend
EN
Item
Description
AA
1 through 50 (lower numbers indicate more recent jams)
E
Location (0 = copy module; 1 = ADF)
FFFF
Jam code
First two digits indicate the type of jam (see table 29 on page 72)
Last two digits indicate the sensor that detected the jam (table
30 on page 73)
G
Location of pickup (see table 31 on page 73)
HHHHHH
Soft counter reading at the time of a jam
IIIII
Media size.
Service mode 71
Copier, display mode, jam details (continued)
the copy module distinguishes 14 types of jams (including jams in the
duplexing unit). Table 28 below shows the combination of codes.
Table 28. Types of jams
First 2 digits
Last 2 digits
Jam type
01
01
02
03
04
06
07
08
Pick-up delay jam 2
Intermediate transfer drum jam
Face-down delivery outlet delay jam
Pick-up delay jam 1
Fusing delivery delay jam
Duplexing feeding assembly delay jam
Reversing assembly delay jam
01
01
03
05
06
08
Delivery long-length paper jam
Face-down delivery outlet stationary jam
Non-default-size paper feeding jam
Fusing delivery stationary jam
Reversing assembly stationary jam
10
10
Internal residual jam
11
11
Door-open jam
Table 29. First 2 digits of FFFF (type of jam)
Code
Description
00
ADF jam
01
Delay jam
02
Stationary jam
10
Residual jam at power-on
11
Door open/closed during copying
72 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Copier, display mode, jam details (continued)
Table 30. Last 2 digits of FFFF (jam sensor)
Code
Description
Sensor
01
Registration paper sensor
PS1
02
Separation sensor
PS5
03
Face-down tray delivery sensor
PS11
04
Pick-up assembly paper sensor
PS17
05
Transparency sensors 1 and 2
PS1801, PS1802
06
Fusing delivery sensor
PS1903
07
Duplexing unit paper sensor
PS24
08
Reversal paper sensor
PS26
10
Separation sensor, face-down tray delivery
sensor, pick-up assembly paper sensor, or
fusing delivery sensor
PS5, PS11, PS17, or
PS1903
11
Registration paper sensor, separation sensor,
face-down tray delivery sensor, pick-up
assembly paper sensor, transparency sensors
1 and 2, or fusing delivery sensor
PS1, PS, PS11, PS17,
PS1801, PS1802, or
PS1903
Table 31. G (pick-up position)
EN
Code
Description
1
Cassette 1
2
Cassette 2
3
Cassette 3 (supports the two 500-sheet paper decks and the
2,000-sheet paper deck)
4
Cassette 4 (supports the two 500-sheet paper decks)
8
Multifeeder
9
Duplexing unit (accessory)
Service mode 73
Copier, display mode, jam details (continued)
Table 32. Pick-up jams
Type of original
Sensor
Description
Code
Original extraction
S1, S7
The sensor S7 does not detect the
leading edge of an original 1500
msec after pick-up motor M1 has
turned on and, in addition, the
sensor S1 does not detect an
original.
0001
Pick-up delay
S7
The sensor S7 does not detect the
leading edge of an original 1500
msec after the pick-up motor M1
has turned on.
0002
Registration delay
S3, S7
The sensor S3 does not detect the
leading edge of an original 350
msec after the sensor S7 has
detected the leading edge of an
original.
0003
Table 33. Detecting jams
Original
placement
Sensor
Description
RF operation
Code
Recirculation
lever idle rotation
S1
The recirculation lever rotates
idly without coming into contact
with an original immediately after
the recirculation motor (M4) turns
on.
Stops operating upon
detection.
01
Pick-up failure
S7
The sensor S7 does not detect
the leading edge of an original in
1500 msec during pick-up.
The separation belt,
feeding roller, and pickup roller stop
immediately. The ADF
stops after discharging
the preceding originals.
03
Paper overriding
the stopper plate
S7
The original has overridden when
placed.
Stops operating upon
detection.
05
Different number
of originals after
jam removal
S3
The number of originals placed
on the document tray has
changed as follows*:
Number at end
Number set on of copying
document tray
Stops operating upon
detection.
11
74 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Table 33. Detecting jams (continued)
Original
placement
Sensor
Description
RF operation
Code
Unidentified
number of
originals
S3
The recirculating bar does not fall
below the document tray, not
enabling the detection of the last
original.
Reference:
Normally, the document tray is
capable of holding 50 sheets of
A5, STMT, A4, B5, or Letter; 25
sheets of A3, B4, 279 X 432 mm
(11-by-17-inch), or Legal.
Stops operating after
counting up to 100
sheets.
12
Original
extraction
S14
The recirculating drops on the
document tray while an original is
being processed.
Stops operating upon
detection.
13
Wrong original
size
S3
The size of the original which is
picked up is not of a default size.
Stops operating upon
detection.
14
Wrong original
size or mixed
original sizes in
reduced page
composition
(Note 1)
S3
1. The original which has been
picked up is not of a size
supported by reduced image
composition mode.
2. The size of the original which
has been picked up is of a size
different from the first original.
Stops operating upon
detection.
15
1To reset, remove the originals from the document tray, and open the ADF.
EN
Service mode 75
Copier, display mode, err details
Figure 16.
ERR screen
Table 34. ERR screen legend
Item
Description
AA
1 through 20 (higher numbers indicate older errors)
EEEE
Error code “Exxx” (to decode error codes, see Chapter 7,
“Troubleshooting”)
FFFF
Detail code (if not available, “0000”)
G
Location (0 = copy module; 1 = ADF)
76 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Copier, I/O mode (I/O)
Figure 17.
Copier, I/O mode Level 1/Level 2 screen
Table 35. Copier, I/O mode descriptions
EN
Item
Description
DC-CON
Input/output state of the CPU on the dc controller PCB
R-CON
Input/output state of the CPU on the reader controller
PCB
FEEDER
State of the CPU on the feeder controller PCB
Service mode 77
Address appears here. Each “x”
in the sequence “xxxxxxxx” next
to the address represents a digit,
with bit 7 the first digit, bit 6 the
second digit, and so on to bit 0,
the last digit.
Figure 18.
Level 2
selection
appears here
(DC-CON,
R-CON, or
FEEDER)
Copier, I/O mode Level 3 screen example
78 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Table 36. Copier, I/O mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus
Level 2
DC-CON
(input ports of the
dc controller
PCB)
Level 3
(address)
Bit
Item
Description
P001
4
FDOUT
Face-down tray delivery sensor (PS11)
(“1” when paper is detected)
3
FXOUTS
Fusing delivery sensor (PS1903)
(“1” when paper is detected)
2
SEPS
Separation sensor (PS5)
(“1” when paper is detected)
1
FEEDS
Pick-up paper sensor (PS17)
(“1” when paper is detected)
0
REGS
Registration paper sensor (PS1)
(“1” when paper is detected)
5
SWBKS
Duplexing unit reversal paper sensor (PS26)
(“1” when paper is detected)
For bit 5, the door must be closed. Defeat the
door switch to simulate a closed door.
4
DUPPS
Duplexing unit paper sensor (PS24)
(“1” when paper is detected)
For bit 4, the door must be closed. Defeat the
door switch to simulate a closed door.
3
LDECKS
Cassette 2 paper sensor (PS1207)
(“1” when paper is detected)
1
UPDECKS
Cassette 1 paper absent sensor (PS1208)
(“1” when paper is detected)
0
MPDFS
Multifeeder tray last paper sensor (PS19)
(“1” when no more than one sheet is set)
1
TMPSNS
0
HUMSNS
Temperature and humidity sensor
00: normal temperature/normal humidity
01: high temperature/high humidity
10: normal temperature/low humidity
11: low temperature/low humidity
P002
P003
EN
Service mode 79
Table 36. Copier, I/O mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus (continued)
Level 2
R-CON
(input/output
Level 3
(address)
Bit
Item
Description
P001
6
---
SW7 of SW1601
5
---
SW6 of SW1601
4
---
SW5 of SW1601
3
---
SW4 of SW1601
2
---
SW3 of SW1601
1
---
SW2 of SW1601
0
---
SW1 of SW1601
state of the
CPU on the
reader
controller PCB)
P002
7
DSZ4
Original size sensor 4 (PS106)
6
DSZ3
Original size sensor 3 (PS105)
5
DSZ2
Original size sensor 2 (PS104)
4
DSZ1
Original size sensor 1 (PS103)
P003
5
FLPWN
Scanning lamp activation
P004
7
FLERR
Scanning lamp error signal
(“1” if error)
3
CCIVCON
E*
Control card connected signal
(“1” when connected)
1
FM4DEC
Power supply fan locked signal
(“1” when locked)
0
CBCC
Copyboard cover open/close sensor (PS102)
(“1” when closed)
P005
2
KEYSW
Control key switch signal
(“1” when on)
P006
7
ACCON
Accessories power supply connected signal
(“1” when connected)
6
YON
Scanning lamp pre-heat ON signal
5
FLONOUT
Scanning lamp ON signal
1
MMIRST
LCD control panel rest signal
4
LPHTON
Scanning lamp heater ON signal
1
FM4ON
Power supply fan (FM4) drive signal
(“1” when rotating)
0
BLON*
LCD control panel back-light ON signal
(“1” when on)
P009
2
ASTCNT
Copy data control counter signal
1
CCIVCNT
Control card counter signal
P013
0
FL_TH
Scanning lamp thermistor signal
P022
2
SOFSWON
Power soft switch ON signal
(“1” when on)
P008
80 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Table 36. Copier, I/O mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus (continued)
Level 2
FEEDER
(input ports of the
feeder controller
PCB)
Level 3
(address)
Bit
Item
Description
P001
3
BDIR
Belt motor (M3) rotation direction signal
(“1” when in correct delivery mode)
2
SMPSL
Stamp solenoid (SL4) drive
(“1” when on)
1
FLPSL1
Paper deflecting plate solenoid (SL3) drive
(“1” when on)
0
STPSL
Stopper plate solenoid (SL1) drive
(“1” when on)
2
SPRS
Pick-up sensor (S7)
(“1” when paper is present)
1
EJTS1
Delivery sensor 1 (S6)
(“1” when paper is present)
0
TLIRNS
Reversal sensor (S8)
(“1” when paper is present)
P003
5
RSS
Recirculation sensor (S14)
(“1” when paper is present)
P004
4
DCTS
Pick-up roller sensor (S13)
(“1” when paper is present)
3
ECLK
Delivery motor clock sensor (S13)
(alternates “0” and “1” when rotating)
2
RCLK
Registration roller clock sensor (S11)
(alternates “0” and “1” when rotating)
1
FCLK
ADF motor clock sensor (S9)
(alternates “0” and “1” when rotating)
0
BCLK
Belt motor clock sensor (S10)
(alternates “0” and “1” when rotating)
7
SMON
Pick-up motor (M1) drive signal
(“1” when on)
6
SMPWM
Pick-up motor (M1) speed signal
(“0” or “1” according to speed)
4
FMPWM
ADF motor (M2) speed signal
(“0” or “1” according to speed)
3
BMON
Belt motor (M3) drive signal
(“1” when on)
2
BMPWM
Belt motor (M3) speed signal
(“0” or “1” according to speed)
P002
P006
EN
Service mode 81
Table 36. Copier, I/O mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus (continued)
Level 2
FEEDER,
continued
Level 3
(address)
Bit
Item
Description
P007
7
WGTSL
Paper holding plate solenoid (SL2)
(“1” when on)
6
CL
Clutch (CL) drive (”1” when on)
P008
P009
P010
5
BK
Brake (BK) drive (”1” when on)
3
ORGLED
Original indicator LED (LED101, LED 102)
(“0” when on)
2
RSDRV
Recirculation motor (M5) drive signal
(“1” when on)
1
SDIR
Pick-up motor (M1) direction signal
(“1” when in top-separation mode)
0
EMPWM
Delivery motor (M5) speed signal
(“0” or “1” according to speed)
5
RFC
ADF switch (MS1) (”1” when open)
4
UPCC1,
CVRSW
Upper cover switch (MS2), Upper cover
sensor (S4) (”0” when upper cover is open)
3
EJTS2
Delivery sensor 2 (S12)
(“1” when paper is present)
2
SW3 on feeder controller PCB
(“1” when pushed)
1
SW2 on feeder controller PCB
(“1” when pushed)
0
SW1 on feeder controller PCB
(“1” when pushed)
1
---
LED2 on feeder controller PCB
(“0” when on)
0
---
LED1 on feeder controller PCB
(“0” when on)
7
---
DSW1-8 on feeder controller PCB
(“1” when on)
6
---
DSW1-7 on feeder controller PCB
(“1” when on)
5
---
DSW1-6 on feeder controller PCB
(“1” when on)
4
---
DSW1-5 on feeder controller PCB
(“1” when on)
3
---
DSW1-4 on feeder controller PCB
(“1” when on)
2
---
DSW1-3 on feeder controller PCB
(“1” when on)
1
---
DSW1-2 on feeder controller PCB
(“1” when on)
0
---
DSW1-1 on feeder controller PCB
(“1” when on)
82 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Copier, adjust mode (ADJUST)
Figure 19.
Copier, adjust mode Level 1/Level 2 screen
Table 37. Copier, adjust menu descriptions
EN
Item
Description
AE
Adjust AE mode
ADJ-XY
Adjust the image position
CCD
Adjust CCD- and shading-related items
IMG-REG
Correct color displacement
DENS
Adjust developing density-related items
BLANK
Adjust the image margins
PASCAL
Execute auto gradation correction control
COLOR
Adjust color balance
HV-TR
Adjust transfer charging bias output by condition
FEED-ADJ
Adjust ADF-related items
MISC
Other
Service mode 83
Table 38. Copier, adjust mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus
Level 2 item
Level 3 item
Range
Description
AE
AE-TBL
+1 to +9
Standard = 5
Adjust if the density of the text is too low (light
text) with priority on speed in AE mode (blackand-white text mode only). Use higher
settings for darker print.
BE-TBL
+1 to +9
Adjust if the density of the text is too high
(dark text), with priority on speed in AE mode
(black-and-white text mode only).
ADJ-XY
See the details
after this table on
page 90
ADJ-X
0 to +32
Moves the image on the copied page
(X direction).
ADJ-Y
0 to +255
Moves the image on the copied page
(Y direction).
CCD
W-PLT-X
+2000 to
+11997
Standard white plate X signal data.
See the details after this table on page 90.
W-PLT-Y
+2000 to
+11997
Standard white plate Y signal data.
W-PLT-Z
+2000 to
+11997
Standard white plate Z signal data.
A-RG
9 to +9
Correct color displacement in sub-scanning
direction dependent on R-G ratio.
B-RG
9 to +9
Correct color displacement in sub-scanning
direction not dependent on R-G ratio.
A-GB
9 to +9
Correct color displacement in sub-scanning
direction dependent on G-B ratio.
B-GB
9 to +9
Correct color displacement in sub-scanning
direction not dependent on G-B ratio.
AL-RG
9 to +9
Correct color displacement in sub-scanning
direction dependent on R-G ratio for the lens
unit.
Note: this number is specified on the CCD
unit.
AL-GB
9 to +9
Correct color displacement in sub-scanning
direction dependent on G-B ratio for the lens
unit.
Note: this number is specified on the CCD
unit.
84 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Table 38. Copier, adjust mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus (continued)
Level 2 item
Level 3 item
Range
Description
IMG-REG
See additional
information on
page 90.
REG-V-Y
-7 to +8
Adjusts the Y pattern start position (1st page,
sub-scanning direction) when M is the color of
reference.
REG-V-C
-7 to +8
Adjusts the C pattern start position (1st page,
sub-scanning direction) when M is the color of
reference.
REG-V-K
-7 to +8
Adjusts the K pattern start position (1st page,
sub-scanning direction) when M is the color of
reference.
REG2-V-Y
-7 to +8
Adjusts the Y pattern start position (2nd page,
sub-scanning direction) when M is the color of
reference.
REG2-V-C
-7 to +8
Adjusts the C pattern start position (2nd page,
sub-scanning direction) when M is the color of
reference.
REG2-V-K
-7 to +8
Adjusts the K pattern start position (2nd page,
sub-scanning direction) when M is the color of
reference.
DM-FIX-Y
-7 to +8
Adjusts Y density (toner deposit) for the
printer unit to correct fusing faults.
DM-FIX-M
-7 to +8
Adjusts M density (toner deposit) for the
printer unit to correct fusing faults.
DM-FIX-C
-7 to +8
Adjusts C density (toner deposit) for the
printer unit to correct fusing faults.
DM-FIX-K
-7 to +8
Adjusts K density (toner deposit) for the
printer unit to correct fusing faults.
DM-TR-Y
-7 to 0
Adjusts Y density (toner deposit) for the
printer unit to correct transfer faults.
DM-TR-M
-7 to 0
Adjusts M density (toner deposit) for the
printer unit to correct transfer faults.
DM-TR-C
-7 to 0
Adjusts C density (toner deposit) for the
printer unit to correct transfer faults.
DM-TR-K
-7 to 0
Adjusts K density (toner deposit) for the
printer unit to correct transfer faults.
BLANK-T
0 to +65535
Adjusts the right blank margin (for A4- or
letter-size paper). Higher settings increase the
margin.
BLANK-L
0 to +65535
Adjusts the left blank margin (for A4- or lettersize paper). Higher settings increase the
margin.
BLANK-R
0 to +65535
Adjusts the bottom blank margin (for A4- or
letter-size paper). Higher settings increase the
margin.
BLANK-B
+118 to
+65535
Adjusts the top blank margin (for A4- or lettersize paper). Higher settings increase margin.
DENS
Higher settings
increase the toner
deposit; lower
settings decrease
the toner deposit.
Note: Effective
only during
copying
operation.
BLANK
In “Range” (third
column), 100 =
4.2 mm.
Defaults: 118.
See additional
information on
page 91.
EN
Service mode 85
Table 38. Copier, adjust mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus (continued)
Level 2 item
Level 3 item
Range
Description
PASCAL
See additional
information on
page 91.
LUT-P-Y
-4 to +3
Fine-adjust the gradation control level
(correction table) for Y.
LUT-P-M
-4 to +3
Fine-adjust the gradation control level
(correction table) for M.
LUT-P-C
-4 to +3
Fine-adjust the gradation control level
(correction table) for C.
LUT-P-K
-4 to +3
Fine-adjust the gradation control level
(correction table) for K.
LUT-P-1
-4 to +3
Fine-adjust the gradation control level
(correction table, image processing pattern A).
LUT-P-2
-4 to +3
Fine-adjust the gradation control level
(correction table, image processing pattern B).
LUT-P-3
-4 to +3
Fine-adjust the gradation control level
(correction table, image processing pattern
C).
ADJ-Y
-8 to +8
Adjusts the color balance for Y for the user.
ADJ-M
-8 to +8
Adjusts the color balance for M for the user.
ADJ-C
-8 to +8
Adjusts the color balance for C for the user.
COLOR
Higher settings in
ADJ categories
make colors
darker.
Higher settings in
OFST categories
reduce fogging.
ADJ-K
-8 to +8
Adjusts the color balance for K for the user.
OFST-Y
-8 to +8
Adjusts the color balance and the density of
light areas of Y.
OFST-M
-8 to +8
Adjusts the color balance and the density of
light areas of M.
OFST-C
-8 to +8
Adjusts the color balance and the density of
light areas of C.
OFST-K
-8 to +8
Adjusts the color balance and the density of
light areas of K.
86 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Table 38. Copier, adjust mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus (continued)
Level 2 item
Level 3 item
Range
Description
HV-TR
See additional
information on
page 92.
Environment
codes are shown
under the Level 3
item “ENV-DENS”
on page 69.
TR-N1M
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a N/N environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for single-sided
printing or first-side printing of double-sided
printing on plain paper.
TR-N1H
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a H/H environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for single-sided
printing or first-side printing of double-sided
printing on plain paper.
TR-N1L
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a L/L environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for single-sided
printing or first-side printing of double-sided
printing on plain paper.
TR-N2M
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a N/N environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for second-side
printing of double-sided printing on plain
paper.
TR-N2H
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a H/H environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for second-side
printing of double-sided printing on plain
paper.
TR-N2L
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a L/L environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for second-side
printing of double-sided printing on plain
paper.
TR-N1N/L
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a N/L environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for single-sided
printing or first-side printing of double-sided
printing on plain paper.
TR-N2N/L
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a N/L environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for second-side
printing of double-sided printing on plain
paper.
TR-TSM
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a N/N environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for thick, small-size
paper.
TR-TSH
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a H/H environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for thick, small-size
paper.
TR-TSL
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a L/L environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for thick, small-size
paper.
TR-TSN/L
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a N/L environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for thick, small-size
paper.
TR-TLM
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a N/N environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for thick, large-size
paper.
EN
Service mode 87
Table 38. Copier, adjust mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus (continued)
Level 2 item
Level 3 item
Range
Description
HV-TR
(continued)
TR-TLH
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a H/H environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for thick, large-size
paper.
TR-TLL
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a L/L environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for thick, large-size
paper.
TR-TLN/L
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a N/L environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for thick, large-size
paper.
TR-OSM
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a N/N environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for a small-size
transparency.
TR-OSH
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a H/H environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for a small-size
transparency.
TR-OSL
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a L/L environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for a small-size
transparency.
TR-OSN/L
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a N/L environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for a small-size
transparency.
TR-OLM
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a N/N environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for a large-size
transparency.
TR-OLH
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a H/H environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for a large-size
transparency.
TR-OLL
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a L/L environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for a large-size
transparency.
TR-OLN/L
0 to +15
Default = 8
For a N/L environment, use it to adjust the
secondary transfer bias for a large-size
transparency.
88 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Table 38. Copier, adjust mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus (continued)
Level 2 item
Level 3 item
Range
Description
FEED-ADJ
See additional
information on
page 92.
REGIST
0 to +52
Default = 18
Adjusts the timing at which the registration
clutch turns on (1st page of 1-page mode and
1st page of 2-page mode only). Higher
settings decrease the leading edge margin.
ADJ-C1
1 to +62
Default = 32
Adjusts the image-write start position in main
scanning direction for the cassette 1.
ADJ-C2
1 to +62
Default = 32
Adjusts the image-write start position in main
scanning direction for the cassette 2.
ADJ-MF
1 to +62
Default = 32
Adjusts the image-write start position in main
scanning direction for the multifeeder.
REGIST2
0 to +52
Default = 18
Adjusts the timing at which the registration
clutch turns on (2nd and subsequent pages in
1-page mode or 2nd and subsequent pages in
2-page mode). Higher settings decrease the
leading edge margin.
SEG-ADJ
-4 to +4
Adjusts the degree of distinction between text
and photo in text/photo/map mode.
+ values tend to identify as photo;
- values tend to identify as text
K-ADJ
-3 to +3
Adjusts the degree of back for black-text
identification. Higher settings tend to identify
text as black.
ACS-ADJ
-3 to +3
Adjusts the area of color recognition for ACS.
+ values tend to identify as black original;
- values tend to identify as color original.
ACS-EN
-2 to +2
When an image is being read for ACS, a large
area of displaced color in a leading edge/
trailing edge/side width (main scanning
direction) can cause wrong identification. Use
ACS-EN to limit the area of ACS.
+ values increase the area;
- values decrease the area
ACS-CNT
-2 to +2
Adjusts the area in which pixels are counted
for identification of chromatic components for
ACS.
+ values increase the area. Fine, colored lines
might be identified as part of a color original,
but identification is affected more by color
displacement.
- values decrease the area. The absence of
chromatic pixels in a wide area of an original
will prevent the original from being identified
as colored, but identification is affected less
by color displacement.
MISC
EN
Service mode 89
Copier, adjust mode, ADJ-XY details
Image-read start positions (X-direction and Y-direction) will return to
the standard settings when the reader controller PCB is replaced, the
RAM on the reader controller PCB is initialized, or the DIMM is
replaced, requiring you to reenter the settings. Record new settings
on the service label on the copy module if you have changed the
settings or replaced parts.
Copier, adjust mode, CCD details
l
If you replace the standard white plate, you must enter the values
indicated on the bar code of the new standard white plate.
l
If you replace the CCD, you must enter the values indicated on
the bar code of the new CCD.
Enter the values in service mode, and then record the values on the
service label on the copy module.
Copier, adjust mode, IMG-REG details (color image
displacement)
Higher settings move the pattern toward the trailing edge. The range
is -7 pixels to +8 pixels (with 0 as the standard setting). To change a
setting:
1
Enter the setting.
2
Press OK.
3
Select FUNCTION > MISC-P > DC-LOAD.
4
Press OK.
5
Turn off and then back on the control panel power soft switch.
6
Perform auto gradation adjustment.
90 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Copier, adjust mode, BLANK details
Figure below shows the four blank margins for an A4- or letter-size
sheet.
BLANK-B
Paper feed direction
BLANK-L
A
BLANK-T
BLANK-R
Figure 20.
BLANK margins
Copier, adjust mode, PASCAL details
LUT-P-Y, LUT-P-M, LUT-P-C, and LUT-P-K settings:
The density of Dhalf after auto gradation correction control and the
density of Dhalf during image gradation correction control are
compared to adjust the LUT gain for correction of each color.
LUT-P-1, LUT-P-2, and LUT-P-3 settings:
The density of Dhalf after auto gradation correction control and the
density of Dhalf during image gradation correction control are
compared to adjust the LUT gain for image processing patterns A, B,
and C (which correspond to Test Prints 1, 2, and 3 used in auto
gradation correction control).
EN
Service mode 91
Copier, adjust mode, HV-TR and FEED-ADJ details
Note
The following information applies to both HV-TR (transfer charging bias
output by condition) and FEED-ADJ (feeding system).
To change a setting:
1
Enter a setting.
2
Press OK.
3
Select FUNCTION > MISC-P > DC-LOAD.
4
Press OK.
5
Turn off and then back on the control panel power soft switch.
6
Perform auto gradation adjustment.
92 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Copier, run/check mode (FUNCTION)
Figure 21.
Copier, run/check mode Level 1/Level 2 screen
Table 39. Copier, run/check mode menu descriptions
Item
Description
CCD
Execute automatic adjustment of CCD-/shading-related items.
PANEL
Check the control panel.
PART-CHK
Check the various electric parts.
CLEAR
Initialize RAM and resets jam/error code histories.
MISC-R
Various adjustments and checks for the copy module.
MISC-P
Various adjustments and checks for the printer.
The state of the copy module is indicated in the upper right corner of
the screen. Take note of the indications. While this mode is being
executed, the indications will be as follows:
EN
l
READY—copy module is ready for servicing/printing operations
l
SERVICE—the copy module is executing servicing operations
(for example, running a check in service mode)
93
Table 40. Copier, run/check mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus
Level 2 item
Level 3 item
Outline
CCD
CCD-ADJ
To start auto-adjustment, press CCD-ADJ and then press OK. At the
end of auto-adjustment, “End” appears on the screen.
Note: This adjustment is performed automatically each time the
copier is turned on.
FILT-B
Ensure that the B signal is generated by the CCD correctly by
generating images expressed by blue signals using cyan only. Press
FILT-B, place a color original on the glass, and press OK.
FILT-G
Ensure that the G signal is generated by the CCD correctly by
generating images expressed by green signals using cyan only.
Press FILT-G, place a color original on the glass, and press OK.
FILT-R
Ensure that the R signal is generated by the CCD correctly by
generating images expressed by red signals using cyan only. Press
FILT-R, place a color original on the glass, and press OK.
LCD-CHK
To check the control panel LCD for missing dots, press LCD-CHK
and then press OK (to stop the check, press the Stop key). The
screen turns white for several seconds, then blue for several
seconds.
LED-CHK
To check the LEDs on the control panel, press LED-CHK and then
press OK. The LEDs turn on in sequence. To stop the check, press
LED-OFF.
PANEL
LED-OFF
Turn off the LEDs on the control panel by pressing LED-OFF.
KEY-CHK
Check the keys on the control panel. Press KEY-CHK and then press
a key. The screen mimics the key pressed (see table 41 on page 96
for screen notations).
TOUCHCHK
Adjust the position of coordinates on the analog touch panel by
matching the points pressed and the coordinates indicated on the
screen. Press + on the screen for the next + (this sequence is
repeated nine times). To select a different item, press TOUCHCHK
again.
PART-CHK
FAN-ON
Check the copy module fan (power supply cooling fan FM4 only).
Press FAN-ON and then press OK. The fan switches from half-speed
to high-speed rotation. Press OK again to return the fan to half-speed
rotation.
CLEAR
ERR
Initialize error codes E000, E001, E003, E004, E009, E211, E215,
E217, E717, and E808. Press ERR, then press OK, and turn off and
then on the main power switch manually.
R-CON
Initialize the RAM on the reader controller PCB or the control panel
CPU PCB (user mode). For more information, see “Copier, run/check
mode, CLEAR > R-CON details (cold reset)” on page 96.
Note: All end-user default or custom settings and all values recorded
on the service label must be re-entered after performing this reset.
JAM-HIST
Initialize the jam history.
ER-HIST
Initialize the error codes history.
CNT-ERR
--
CNT-CLR
--
E354-CLR
--
94 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Table 40. Copier, run/check mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus (continued)
Level 2 item
Level 3 item
Outline
MISC-R
SCANLAMP
To check the activation of the scanning lamp, press SCANLAMP and
then press OK. The lamp turns on for one second.
SC-MOVE
To check movement of the mirror assemblies, press SC-MOVE.
Mirror assemblies move at 25% increments and then return to “home”
positions in sequence when you press OK:
operation HP -> A is checked the first time you press OK
operation HP -> B is checked when you press OK the second time
operation HP -> C is checked when you press OK the third time
operation HP -> D is checked when you press OK the fourth time
LAMP-ADJ
Adjust the intensity of light of a new scanning lamp. Press LAMP-ADJ
and then press OK to turn on the scanning lamp. When the scanning
lamp replacement VR is turned slowly, an audible beep is emitted
when the optimum intensity is reached. Press OK in response to the
beep to save the intensity setting and quit adjustment.
CAUTION: Wait until the intensity of the lamp has stabilized
(approximately five minutes) before adjusting it.
USE-LAMP
Adjust the intensity of the lamp after removing and remounting the
lamp, or when replacing the reader controller PCB or the light
intensity detection PCB. Press USE-LAMP and then press OK to turn
on the scanning lamp. When the scanning lamp replacement VR is
turned slowly, an audible beep is emitted when the optimum intensity
is reached. Press OK in response to the beep to save the intensity
setting and quit adjustment.
CAUTION: Wait until the intensity of the lamp has stabilized
(approximately five minutes) before adjusting it.
IP-CHK
To run self-diagnosis on the AP-IP PCB, press IP-CHK and then
press OK. When self-diagnosis ends, “OK” or “NG” appears to the
right of “IP-CHK.”
POWEROFF
To check operation of the auto power-off mechanism, press
POWEROFF, press the OK key, and then turn off and then on the
power to start the mechanism.
DEV-DRV
To drive the developing rotary and the sleeve motor for approximately
25 seconds, press DEV-DRV, press the OK key, and then turn off
and then on the power to start the mechanism.
PPR-FEED
Run paper feeding test. Select the source of paper (cassette 1 or 2,
multifeeder) and mode of delivery (face-up, face-down) in user mode.
Press PPR-FEED, press the OK key, and then turn off and then on
the power to start the mechanism.
MAIN-DRV
Drive the intermediate transfer drum and the photosensitive drum for
approximately ten seconds. Press MAIN-DRV, press the OK key, and
then turn off and then on the power to start the mechanism.
DC-SAVE
Save data stored in EEPROM on the ECO-2 PCB to the RAM on the
reader controller PCB when replacing the ECO-2 PCB. For more
information, see “Copier, run/check mode, MISC-P > DC-SAVE/DCLOAD details” on page 97.
DC-LOAD
Load data unique to the ECO-2 PCB (and saved in RAM on the
reader controller PCB) to EEPROM on the ECO-2 PCB after
replacing the ECO-2 PCB. For more information, see “Copier, run/
check mode, MISC-P > DC-SAVE/DC-LOAD details” on page 97.
MISC-P
EN
95
Copier, run/check mode, PANEL > KEY-CHK details
Table 41. Control panel key descriptions
Key
Screen indication
Key
Screen indication
Copy
COPY
ID
ID
Extend
ETC
ACS
ACS
Reset
RESET
Full Color
F-COLOR
Guide
?
Black
BLACK
Use Mode
M
Start
START
Interrupt
INTERRUPT
Stop
STOP
0-9, #, *
0-9, #, *
Save Power
STAND BY
Clear
CLEAR
Copier, run/check mode, CLEAR > R-CON details
(cold reset)
To perform a cold reset on the copy module:
1
Enter service mode.
2
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > R-CON.
3
Press OK.
All of the following result from a cold reset of the copy module:
l
All user settings, including ID, passwords, and system settings
password, are erased.
l
All service mode settings recorded on the service label (on the
inside of the lower front cover of the copy module) are erased.
To restore the settings, complete the following steps:
1 Manually re-enter all 11 numbers that appear on the service
label in service mode.
2 Perform a DC-SAVE adjustment in service mode (COPIER >
FUNCTION > MISC-P > DC-SAVE) and press OK.
3 Turn the copier off and then back on (cycle power).
4 Perform an auto gradation adjustment.
For more information about auto gradation adjustments, see
page 57.
96 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Copier, run/check mode, MISC-P > DC-SAVE/DCLOAD details
Save data stored in EEPROM on the ECO-2 PCB to the RAM on the
reader controller PCB when replacing the ECO-2 PCB, and then load
the data to the new ECO-2 PCB.
EN
1
Start service mode.
2
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > DC-SAVE and then press
OK.
3
Turn off the power.
4
Replace the ECO-2 PCB.
5
Turn on the power.
6
Start service mode.
7
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > DC-LOAD and then press
OK.
8
Exit service mode.
9
Turn the power off and then back on.
97
Copier, machine settings (OPTION) mode
Figure 22.
Copier, machine settings mode Level 1/Level 2 screen
Table 42. Copier, machine settings menu descriptions
Item
Description
BODY
Configure default settings related to the copier.
USER
Configure default settings related to user mode under 'BODY'.
INT-FACE
Set conditions for connection of an external controller (not
available on the HP Color LaserJet 8550MFP).
98 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Table 43. Copier, machine settings mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus
Level 2 item
Level 3 item
Description
BODY
(copier-related
settings)
MODEL-SZ
Switch between different paper-size recognition (0 = AB, 1 = Inch, 2 =
A, 3 = AB/Inch). This setting need not be changed in the field.
Note: Selections 0 and 3 are not available on the HP CLJ 8550MFP.
FIX-TEMP
Enable/disable the fusing improvement mechanism for black halftone
(0 = disable, 1 = enable). The default is “0.” Enabling this setting
improves fusing of black halftone, but increases the first copy time by
approximately 45 seconds. To set the fusing temperature to “off,” see
the HP Color LaserJet 8500/8550 Printer Family Service Manual.
PASCAL
Enable/disable contrast potential/gradation correction data
(0 = disable, 1 = enable). Default = 1.
PLT-TYPE
Switch between the standard and the aluminum white plates
(0 = standard white plate, 1 = aluminum white plate). Default = 0. This
setting need not be changed in the field.
SH-SW
Select the method of shading when using the standard white plate
(0 = standard white plate, 1 = standard white plate with a different
hue). Default = 0. This setting need not be changed in the field.
DH-SW
Switch modes for image gradation correction control
(0 = off, 1 = as needed, 2 = always, 3 = reserved). Default = 0.
Image gradation correction control ensures good gradation of
images, but takes approximately one minute.
DM-MODE
Enable/disable image density correction for auto gradation correction
(0 = disable, 1 = enable). Default = 0.
Image density correction control is executed during PG output of auto
gradation correction; auto gradation correction is executed with the
adjusted image density correction value serving as the copier’s
density control standard, thereby improving the accuracy of gradation
control. Images are likely to improve, but the auto gradation
correction time increases significantly.
ITD-CLN
Enable/disable ITD cleaning rotation insertion mode (0 = disable for
all modes, 1 = enable for enlarge page separation/page separation,
2 = enable for all modes). Default = 1. See details on page 100.
SP-1-SW
Enable/disable separation static elimination for 1st side printing
(0 = disable, 1 = enable). Default = 0. See details on page 101.
SP-2-SW
Enable/disable separation static elimination for 2nd side printing
(0 = disable, 1 = enable). Default = 1. See details on page 102.
TR-ON-SW
Adjust the secondary transfer bias application timing to prevent paper
from wrapping around the intermediate transfer drum and other
separation faults (settings: 1 to +3). Default is 1.
RE-TR-SW
Enable/disable the remedy against re-transfer in high-humidity
environments (0 = disable remedy, 1 = enable remedy in H/H,
2 = enable remedy in H/H and N/N). Default = 0. See details on page
102.
EC-GLASS
Specify the use of EC-coated glass (0 = not used, 1 = used).
Default = 1. This setting need not be changed in the field.
EN
99
Table 43. Copier, machine settings mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus
Level 2 item
Level 3 item
Description
USER
COPY-LIM
Use it to change the print counter upper limit (settings: 1 to 100
pages). Default = 100.
SERIAL
Enter the five-digit serial number of the copy module when replacing
the reader controller PCB.
TX-PT-ON
Enable/disable indication of “text/photo” items when text/photo/map
is selected on the User screen (0 = do not indicate text/photo,
1 = indicate text/photo). Default is 0.
COUNTER1
Set the soft counter 1 indication. See details starting on page 103.
COUNTER2
Set the soft counter 2 indication. See details starting on page 103.
COUNTER3
Set the soft counter 3 indication. See details starting on page 103.
COUNTER4
Set the soft counter 4 indication. See details starting on page 103.
COUNTER5
Set the soft counter 5 indication. See details starting on page 103.
COUNTER6
Set the soft counter 6 indication. See details starting on page 103.
CONTROL
Enable copying, printing, or scanning without the control key, control
card, or ID Number. See details following this table.
S/U-SW
Switch between user maintenance and service maintenance at time
of installation, so that error reporting on the user screen differs
depending on the method of maintenance (0 = service maintenance,
1 = user maintenance). Defaults: 1 in U.S.; 0 elsewhere.
B-CLR
(clearing E717)
Indicate connection/disconnection of a copy data controller
(0 = not connected, 1 = connected).
Note: This setting is not available on the HP CLJ 8550MFP.
You can disconnect the copy data controller temporarily by
performing the following steps.
INT-FACE
(conditions for
settings when
a connection is
made to an
external
controller)
1
Install the copy data control.
2
Turn on the power
3
Execute error clear in service mode.
4
Set B-CLR to '0'.
Copier, machine settings mode, Body > ITD-CLN
details
When disabled, traces of a first-page image might appear on the
second page, especially when printing in enlargement page
separation/page separation.
l
Sequence when disabled (standard sequence):
Y1 > M1 > C1 > K1 > Y2 > M2 > C2 > K2 > cleaning rotation
l
Sequence when enabled:
Y1 > M1 > C1 > K1 > cleaning rotation > Y2 > M2 > C2 > K2 >
cleaning rotation
100 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Copier, machine settings mode, Body > SP-1-SW/SP2-SW details
SP-1-SW
Enable separation static elimination if claw-like lines or tread-like lines
occur because of low humidity when generating (copying/printing) a
1st page in a normal temperature/normal humidity environment
(0 = disable, 1 = enable). Default is 1.
SP-2-SW
Enable/disable separation static elimination if brush-like lines
occur on some types of paper when copying/printing a 2nd side
in double-sided mode using auto/multifeeder mode in a hightemperature/high-humidity environment or when copying/printing
a 2nd side in double-sided mode using auto/multifeeder mode in a
high-temperature/high-humidity environment.
0 = disable (if brush-like lines occur), 1 = enable (if claw-like lines
occur). Default is 1.
EN
Copy type
H/H
N/N
N/L
L/L
1st page
OFF
Enable/disable
using this mode
ON
ON
Auto doublesided
Enable/disable
the mechanism
during this mode
ON
ON
ON
Manual
double-sided
Enable/disable
the mechanism
during this mode
Enable/disable
the mechanism
during this mode
ON
ON
101
Copier, machine settings mode, Body > RE-TR-SW
details
Enable/disable the use of a remedy against re-transfer occurring in a
high-humidity environment. The Dmax control parameter will change,
consequently changing the primary charging bias and the primary
transfer bias to the appropriate settings.
0 = disable remedy
1 = enable remedy in H/H
2 = enable remedy in H/H and N/N
Default = 0
To enable or disable the remedy:
1
Enter service mode.
2
Enter the setting.
3
Exit service mode.
4
Turn off and then on the control panel power soft switch.
5
Execute auto gradation correction in user mode.
102 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Copier, machine settings mode, User > Soft counter
details
Guide to Terms
l
Functions:
• C = copied pages
• P = printed pages
• S = scanned pages
l
Color:
• 4C = 4 full colors
• MONO = single color (such as yellow, magenta, cyan, blue,
green, red, and brown)
• BK = black
• ALL = 4C, MONO, and BK
l
Paper size:
• L = large-size (larger than A3 or 11-by-17-inch)
• S = small-size (A4- and letter-size)
• M = large- and small-sizes
l
Count for double-sided:
• 0 = two-sided pages counted as one
• - = two-sided pages counted as two, as in normal copying
l
Count for large-size
• 1 = large-size pages counted as single pages
2 = large size pages counted as two pages
Table 44. Copier, machine settings mode, soft counter specifications
Function
Color
Paper
size
C+P
All
M
Count, Count,
2-side large
No.
Counter
0
None
1
Total counter 1
2
Total counter 2
C+P
All
M
---
2
3
Total counter (full color 1)
C+P
4C
M
---
1
4
Total counter (full color 2)
C+P
4C
M
---
2
5
Total counter (mono color)
C+P
Mono
M
---
1
6
Total counter (black-and-white 1)
C+P
Bk
M
---
1
7
Total counter (black-and-white 2)
C+P
Bk
M
---
2
8
Total counter (large-size)
C+P
All
L
---
1
9
Total counter (small-size)
C+P
All
S
---
--
EN
---
1
103
Table 44. Copier, machine settings mode, soft counter specifications (continued)
Function
Color
Paper
size
C
All
M
Count, Count,
2-side large
No.
Counter
10
Copy counter 1
11
Copy counter 2
C
All
M
---
2
12
Copy counter (full color 1)
C
4C
M
---
1
---
1
13
Copy counter (full color 2)
C
4C
M
---
2
14
Copy counter (mono color 1)
C
Mono
M
---
1
15
Copy counter (mono color 2)
C
Mono
M
---
2
16
Copy counter (black-and-white 1)
C
Bk
M
---
1
17
Copy counter (black-and-white 2)
C
Bk
M
---
2
18
Copy counter (full color, large-size)
C
4C
L
---
1
19
Copy counter (full color, small-size)
C
4C
S
---
--
20
Copy counter (mono color, large-size)
C
Mono
L
---
1
21
Copy counter mono color, small-size)
C
Mono
S
---
--
22
Copy counter (black-and-white, largesize)
C
Bk
L
---
1
23
Copy counter (black-and-white, smallsize)
C
Bk
S
---
--
24
Copy counter (full color, large-size,
double-sided)
C
4C
L
0
1
25
Copy counter (full color, small-size,
double-sided)
C
4C
S
0
--
26
Copy counter (mono color, small-size,
double-sided)
C
Mono
L
0
1
27
Copy counter (mono color, small-size,
double-sided)
C
Mono
S
0
--
28
Copy counter (black-and-white, largesize, double-sided)
C
Bk
L
0
1
29
Copy counter (black-and-white, smallsize, double-sided)
C
Bk
S
0
--
30
Print counter 1
P
All
M
---
1
31
Print counter 2
P
All
M
---
2
32
Print counter (full color 1)
P
4C
M
---
1
33
Printer counter (full color 2)
P
4C
M
---
2
34
Print counter (mono color 1)
P
Mono
M
---
1
35
Print counter (mono color 2)
P
Mono
M
---
2
36
Print counter (black-and-white 1)
P
Bk
M
---
1
37
Print counter (black-and-white 2)
P
Bk
M
---
2
38
Print counter (full color, large-size)
P
4C
L
---
1
39
Print counter (full color, small-size)
P
4C
S
---
--
40
Print counter (mono color, large-size)
P
Mono
L
---
1
104 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Table 44. Copier, machine settings mode, soft counter specifications (continued)
Function
Color
Paper
size
Print counter mono color, small-size)
P
Mono
S
---
--
42
Print counter (black-and-white, largesize)
P
Bk
L
---
1
43
Print counter (black-and-white, smallsize)
P
Bk
S
---
--
44
Print counter (full color, large-size,
double-sided)
P
4C
L
0
1
45
Print counter (full color, small-size,
double-sided)
P
4C
S
0
--
46
Print counter (mono color, large size,
double-sided)
P
Mono
L
0
1
47
Print counter (mono color, small-size,
double-sided)
P
Mono
S
0
--
48
Print counter (black-and-white, largesize, double-sided)
P
Bk
L
0
1
49
Print counter (black-and-white, smallsize, double-sided)
P
Bk
S
0
--
54
Copy scan counter (full color, large-size)
S
4C
L
---
1
55
Copy scan counter (full color, smallsize)
S
4C
S
---
--
56
Copy scan counter (black-and-white,
small-size)
S
Bk
L
---
1
57
Copy scan counter (full color, large-size,
double-sided)
S
Bk
S
---
--
58
Copy + print counter (full color, largesize)
C+P
4C
L
---
1
59
Copy + print counter (full color, smallsize)
C+P
4C
S
---
--
60
Copy + print counter (black-and-white,
large-size)
C+P
Bk
L
---
1
61
Copy + print counter (black-and-white,
small-size)
C+P
Bk
S
---
--
62
Copy + print counter (black-and-white 2)
C+P
Bk
M
---
2
63
Copy + print counter (black-and-white 1)
C+P
Bk
M
---
1
64
Copy + print counter (full color + mono
color, large-size)
C+P
4C +
Mono
L
---
1
65
Copy + print counter (full color + mono
color, small-size)
C+P
4C +
Mono
S
---
--
66
Copy + print counter (full color + mono
color 2)
C+P
4C +
Mono
M
---
2
67
Copy + print counter (full color + mono
color 1)
C+P
4C +
Mono
M
---
1
No.
Counter
41
EN
Count, Count,
2-side large
105
Table 44. Copier, machine settings mode, soft counter specifications (continued)
No.
Counter
68
Paper
size
Count, Count,
2-side large
Function
Color
Copy counter (full color + mono color,
large-size)
C
4C +
Mono
L
---
1
69
Copy counter (full color + mono color,
small-size)
C
4C +
Mono
S
---
--
70
Copy counter (full color + mono color 2)
C
4C +
Mono
M
---
2
71
Copy counter (full color + mono color 1)
C
4C +
Mono
M
---
1
72
Print counter (full color + mono color,
large-size)
P
4C +
Mono
L
---
1
73
Print counter (full color + mono color,
small-size)
P
4C +
Mono
S
---
--
74
Print counter (full color + mono color 2)
P
4C +
Mono
M
---
2
75
Print counter (full color + mono color 1)
P
4C +
Mono
M
---
1
76
Copy + print counter (large-size)
C+P
All
L
---
1
77
Copy + print counter (small-size)
C+P
All
S
---
--
78
Copy + print counter 2
C+P
All
M
---
2
79
Copy + print counter 1
C+P
All
M
---
1
80
Copy counter (large-size)
C
All
L
---
1
81
Copy counter (small-size)
C
All
S
---
---
82
Print counter (large-size)
P
All
L
---
1
83
Print counter (small-size)
P
All
S
---
---
84
Total counter (mono color, large-size)
C+P
Mono
L
---
1
85
Total counter (mono color, small-size)
C+P
Mono
S
---
---
86
Total counter (black-and-white, largesize)
C+P
Bk
L
---
1
87
Total counter (black-and-white, smallsize)
C+P
Bk
S
---
---
88
Copy scan counter (full color)
S
4C
M
---
---
89
Copy scan counter (black-and-white)
S
Bk
M
---
---
90
Copy scan counter (large-size)
S
All
L
---
---
91
Copy scan counter (small-size)
S
All
S
---
---
92
Copy scan counter (total)
S
All
M
---
---
93
Copy scan counter (large-size 4)
S
All
L
---
---
94
Copy scan counter (small-size 4)
S
All
S
---
---
95
Copy scan counter (total 4)
S
All
M
---
---
106 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Table 45. Soft counter defaults by voltage and country
Model
Model
Number
Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter
1
2
3
4
5
6
120V (USA)
F13-5731
1
6
68
69
72
73
120V (TWN)
F13-5701
1
6
58
59
5
0
230V (Others)
F13-5741
1
6
58
59
5
0
230V (UK)
F13-5751
1
64
65
77
60
61
230V (CA)
F13-5761
1
6
68
69
72
73
230V (FRN)
F13-5771
1
64
65
77
60
61
230V (GER)
F13-5781
1
64
65
60
61
95
230V (AMS)
F13-5791
1
6
68
69
72
73
230V (ITA)
F13-5721
1
6
68
69
72
73
Copier, machine settings mode, User > Control
details
Enable copying or printing with conditions by changing the last three
digits of the appropriate input in the absence of the control key,
control card, or ID number. Set the three digits to settings from 0 to 4.
Format: CONTROL XYZ
l
set X in place of an ID number
l
set Y in place of a control card
l
set Z in place of the control key
Setting
Black-and white
copying
Black-and-white
printing
Color printing
0
disabled
disabled
disabled
1
disabled
disabled
disabled
2
disabled
enabled
enabled
3
enabled
disabled
disabled
4
enabled
enabled
enabled
For example, if CONTROL is set to 421:
EN
l
all printing and copying is permitted without an ID number
l
all printing, but no copying, is permitted without a control card
l
no printing or copying is permitted without the control key
107
Copier, test print mode (TEST)
Figure 23.
Copier, test print mode Level 1/Level 2 screen
108 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Table 46. Copier, test print mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus
Level 2 item
Level 3 item
Description
PG
TYPE
Enter a number and press the Copy Start key to generate a test print.
For test print details, see page 110.
TXPH
Switch between text mode and photo mode:
3 = text/photo/map
4 = film photo
5 = printed photo
6 = text/photo
7 = black-and-white text
THRU
Enable/disable the gate array of the laser controller PCB
(0 = disable, 1 = enable).
DENS-Y
Adjust the density of Y at TYPE=5 (range: 0 to +255).
DENS-M
Adjust the density of M at TYPE=5 (range: 0 to +255).
EN
DENS-C
Adjust the density of C at TYPE=5 (range: 0 to +255).
DENS-K
Adjust the density of K at TYPE=5 (range: 0 to +255).
COLOR-Y
Enable/disable generation of Y for each TYPE
(0 = disable, 1 = enable).
COLOR-M
Enable/disable generation of M for each TYPE
(0 = disable, 1 = enable).
COLOR-C
Enable/disable generation of C for each TYPE
(0 = disable, 1 = enable).
COLOR-K
Enable/disable generation of K for each TYPE
(0 = disable, 1 = enable).
F/M-SW
Switch between full color and mono color for PG generation (0 = full
color, 1 = mono color). When set to 1, select the output color under
TEST > PG > COLOR (Y, M, C, or K).
109
Copier, test print mode, PG > TYPE details
Table 47. Test print options
No.
Test print
00
Image from the CCD (normal copying)
01
For R&D
02
256 colors
03
256 gradations
04
16 gradations
05
Entire face in halftone
06
Grid
07
For R&D
08
For R&D
09
for R&D
10
YMCK horizontal stripes (laser FF activation)
11
For R&D
12
YMCK 64 gradations
13
BGR 64 gradations
14
Full-color 16 gradations
15
Full-color light area 16 gradations
16
YMCK horizontal stripes (Laser A0 activation)
110 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Copier, counter mode
Figure 24.
Counter mode, Level 1/Level 2 screen
Table 48. Copier counter menu descriptions
Item
Note
EN
Description
TOTAL
Total counter
SCANNER
Scan counter
PICK-UP
Pick-up counter
FEEDER
ADF counter
JAM
Jam counter
All counters return to “00000000” after “99999999.”
111
Table 49. Copier, counter mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus
Level 2 item
TOTAL
SCANNER
Level 3 item
Description
SERVICE 1
Total counter 1 for servicing
SERVICE 2
Total counter 2 for servicing
TTL
Total counter (copy + print + combination)
L-TTL
Large-size total counter (copy + print + combination)
S-TTL
Small-size total counter (copy + print + combination)
C-L-TTL
Color large-size total counter (copy + print + combination)
C-S-TTL
Color small-size total counter (copy + print + combination)
K-L-TTL
Black large-size total counter (copy + print + combination)
K-S-TTL
Black small-size total counter (copy + print + combination)
COPY
Total copy counter
L-COPY
Large-size total copy counter
S-COPY
Small-size total copy counter
C-L-COPY
Color large-size total copy counter
C-S-COPY
Color small-size total copy counter
K-L-COPY
Black large-size total copy counter
K-S-COPY
Black small-size total copy counter
PRNT
Total print counter
L-PRNT
Large-size total print counter
S-PRNT
Small-size total print counter
C-L-PRNT
Color large-size total print counter
C-S-PRNT
Color small-size total print counter
K-L-PRNT
Black large-size total print counter
K-S-PRNT
Black small-size total print counter
4C-TTL
4-color total copy counter
Y-COPY
Y mono copy counter
M-COPY
M mono copy counter
C-COPY
C mono copy counter
K-COPY
K mono copy counter
SC-TTL
Scanner total scan counter
SC-COPY
Scan counter for copying
112 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Table 49. Copier, counter mode Level 2 and Level 3 menus (continued)
Level 2 item
Level 3 item
Description
PICK-UP
C1
Cassette 1 pick-up total counter
L-C1
Large-size cassette 1 pick-up total counter
S-C1
Small-size cassette 1 pick-up total counter
C2
Cassette 2 pick-up total counter
L-C2
Large-size cassette 2 pick-up total counter
S-C2
Small-size cassette 2 pick-up total counter
C31
Cassette 3 pick-up total counter
L-C31
Large-size cassette 3 pick-up total counter
1
Small-size cassette 3 pick-up total counter
S-C3
C42
Large-size cassette 4 pick-up total counter
S-C42
Small-size cassette 4 pick-up total counter
MF
Multifeeder pick-up total counter
L-MF
Large-size multifeeder pick-up total counter
L-C4
FEEDER
JAM
Cassette 4 pick-up total counter
2
S-MF
Small-size multifeeder pick-up total counter
DK3
External paper deck pick-up total counter
L- DK3
Large-size external paper deck pick-up total counter
S- DK3
Small-size external paper deck pick-up total counter
2-SIDE
2nd side in double-sided mode total counter
FEED
ADF pick-up total counter
L-FFED
Large-size original ADF pick-up total counter
S-FFED
Small-size original ADF pick-up total counter
PICKUP-L
Left pick-up total counter
TOTAL
Indicates the total number of jams in the copier.
PRINT
Indicates the total number of print jams in the copier.
FEEDER
Indicates the total number of jams in the ADF.
SORTER
Indicates the total number of jams in the sorter (not available on HP
CLJ 8550MFP).
1
: For the 2x500-Sheet Paper Deck, 2000-Sheet Paper Deck (not available on HP CLJ 8550MFP)
: For the 2x500-Sheet Paper Deck (not available on HP CLJ 8550MFP)
3
: For the 1000-Sheet Paper Deck
2
EN
113
Feeder
Figure 25.
Feeder screen, example of a Level 3 item
Note
For FEEDER items, the Level 1 modes I/O, Test, and Counter are not
used. Also, there are no Level 2 menus.
114 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
Table 50. Feeder options
Level 1 item
Level 3 item
Outline
DISPLAY
FEEDSIZE
Indicate the size of the original detected by the ADF.
Note: This is a good test of automatic page-size detection.
ADJUST
Note: ADJUST
settings and
adjustments
have the same
function as
adjustments
made with the
switches on the
DADF
controller PCB.
DOCST
Adjust the original stop position for top pick-up by units of 0.5 mm.
Place an original on the ADF document tray, and press OK. When
the original has been fed, open the ADF, and check the position of
the original stopped on the copyboard glass.
If it is to the left of the orange arrow, increase the setting.
If it is to the right of the orange arrow, decrease the setting.
DOCST-RP
--
P-INTL-U
Adjust the sheet-to-sheet distance for top pick-up by units of
0.5 mm.
Place two originals on the document tray and press OK. The
original will be picked up and stopped on the copyboard glass.
Adjust the sheet-to-sheet distance.
If it is small, increase the setting.
If it is large, decrease the setting.
FUNCTION
Note:
FUNCTION
settings and
adjustments
have the same
function as
adjustments
made with the
switches on the
DADF
controller PCB.
OPTION
EN
P-INTL-D
--
SENS-INT
Use it to adjust the ADF sensor auto sensitivity (initialization).
Perform the adjustment if you have replaced the feeder controller
PCB, document tray paper sensor (S1), or registration sensor (S3).
However, keep in mind that you must perform additional steps if you
have replaced the DADF controller PCB. The contents of the
adjustment are the same as making adjustments using the DIP
switch on the feeder controller PCB.
1. Remove the feeder controller PCB cover.
2. Check the position of LED 1/2.
3. Select the mode, and press OK.
4. The copier executes the mode and stops automatically.
UBLT-CLN
Perform separation belt cleaning mode for top pick-up for the ADF.
Note: The separation belt provides the “feed” function on the HP
CLJ 8550MFP.
1. Select “UBLT-CLN' to highlight.
2. Moisten the center of a sheet of plain paper with isopropyl
alcohol.
3. Place the sheet in the document tray.
4. Press OK. Paper is picked up and then stopped in the middle;
the top pick-up separation belt rotates idly.
5. Press the OK key to stop the operation.
6. Open the ADF, remove the paper, and then close the ADF.
DBLT-CLN
--
SIZE-SW
Enable/disable the size mix mechanism (AB-/Inch-size originals).
0 = disable detection (default)
1 = enable detection
DOC-DELI
--
115
116 Chapter - 3 Operational overview
EN
4
Adjustments and
maintenance
Chapter contents
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
MFP print engine adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Parts unique to the HP LaserJet 8550MFP print
engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Adjustments unique to the HP LaserJet 8550MFP
print engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Copy module adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
End-user adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Mechanical and electrical adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Required adjustments when replacing parts or
upgrading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Upgrading and localizing the copy module firmware . 135
ADF adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Mechanical adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Electrical adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Replacing the DADF controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Side HCI adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Gap between the printer and the side HCI . . . . . . . . 159
Base plate position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Paper-size change (A4 or letter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Periodically replaced parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
EN
Chapter contents 117
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Cleaning by an end-user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Cleaning by service technicians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Solvents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Cleaning parts on the copy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Cleaning ADF parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Cleaning side HCI parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Lubricating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
118 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
Overview
This chapter will address adjustments to and maintenance and
cleaning of the copy module, the ADF, and the side HCI. Unique
adjustments and parts for the HP LaserJet 8550MFP print engine (as
compared to a standard HP LaserJet 8550 printer print engine) will
also be addressed.
MFP print engine adjustments
Parts unique to the HP LaserJet 8550MFP
print engine
Table 51. Serviceable printer parts
Note
EN
Part number
Description
FG6-3597-000CN
ECO-2 PCB assembly
FG2-9543-000CN
ECO-2 cable
FG2-9545-000CN
Interface PCB assembly 100-127 and 20-240 V
FG2-9479-000CN
Interface cable
FG2-9476-000CN
IOT cable
FG2-9470-000CN
Dc controller PCB assembly
C7835-60101
Modified top cover assembly (without electronics)
Adjustment is required when replacing the printer dc controller PCB or
the ECO-2 PCB assembly.
Overview 119
Adjustments unique to the HP LaserJet
8550MFP print engine
To replace the dc controller PCB
1
Remove the dc controller PCB as shown in the HP Color
LaserJet 8500/8550 Printer Family Service Manual.
2
Install the new dc controller PCB.
3
Reassemble the parts except for the printer unit rear cover. Do
not replace the rear cover until you have determined that the
printer operates normally.
4
Connect the power plug to the power outlet
5
Turn on the copy module rear power switch.
6
Turn on the control panel power soft switch.
7
Execute auto gradation correction in user mode.
To replace the ECO-2 PCB
1
Start service mode by first pressing
, then pressing 2 and 8
simultaneously, and then pressing
again.
2
Select FUNCTION>MISC-P>DC-SAVE.
3
Press OK.
4
Turn the printer off.
5
Remove the old ECO-2 PCB assembly and replace it with a new
ECO-2 PCB assembly.
6
Turn the printer on.
7
Start service mode.
8
Select FUNCTION>MISC-P>DC-LOAD.
9
Press OK.
10 End service mode, and turn off and then on the control panel
power soft switch.
120 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
Copy module adjustments
End-user adjustments
Note
EN
These adjustments and tests should be attempted before service is
performed on the hardware to remedy copy quality complaints. For
instructions about how to perform these adjustments, see the Copy
Module User Guide.
l
Clean the glass, ADF belts and rollers, standard white plate,
mirrors, and lenses.
l
Inspect the original. Defects and imperfections of the original
often cause copy quality complaints. Check to see if the copier is
simply making an accurate reproduction of a bad original. Also
examine the original to see if the source of the complaints is
simply a limitation of a four-color process printer.
l
Determine whether the image adjustment is required for all
copies or only for a specific original. Don’t make adjustments to
the default settings of the copier for a single original that is
uniquely difficult to copy.
l
Try a different original-type setting (printed image, photo, or black
text) to better match the original.
l
Manually lighten or darken the exposure with the arrow keys on
the main menu.
l
Adjust sharpness. Increase to sharpen edges and add contrast,
or decrease to soften contrast and reduce granularity of photos.
l
Adjust color balance. Increase or decrease relative strengths of
primary colors YMCK to achieve best reproduction.
l
Use the density fine adjust to control the relative lightness or
darkness of each primary color in high, medium, or low density
areas.
l
Use the background color adjustment to eliminate the color that
appears on copies as a result of the copy module trying to
reproduce the color or texture of the original media.
l
Use second-side elimination to reduce the image from the back
side of a lightweight original that appears on the copy.
l
Perform auto gradation to calibrate the scanner to match the
condition of printer (consumables, lamp, etc.).
l
Perform zoom fine adjustment to adjust for small deviations
between original and copy size.
l
Use exposure recalibration to change the medium value of light/
dark if the print on all copies is too light or too dark.
Copy module adjustments 121
Mechanical and electrical adjustments
To adjust the non-image width and image margin on
the copier
The image margin and non-image width are correct if the following
specifications are met (for copies made without reduction or
enlargement):
l
leading edge: 5.0 ±2.0 mm
l
left/right: 5.0 ±2.0 mm
l
trailing edge: 5.0 ±2.0 mm
Figure 26.
Image and non-image width of the leading edge
Figure 27.
Image and non-image width of the left or right margin
122 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
1
Start service mode on the copy module.
2
If needed, adjust the leading edge margin registration (COPIER >
ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REGIST, REGIST 2). This setting controls the
timing of the registration clutch (CL1) engagement in the printer.
REGIST adjusts the timing for when the registration clutch turns
on for the first sheet. REGIST2 adjusts the timing for when the
registration clutch turns on for the second and subsequent
sheets. This changes the position of the image transferred from
the transfer drum to the copied page, thereby adjusting the image
margin.
3
If needed, adjust the image left/right margin (COPIER > ADJUST >
BLANK > BLANK-L, R). These settings adjust the blank margin
area.
4
If needed, adjust the leading/trailing edge non-image width
(COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK > BLANK-T, B) These settings adjust
the leading and trailing blank margin areas.
BLANK-B
Paper feed direction
BLANK-L
A
BLANK-T
BLANK-R
Figure 28.
BLANK margins
5
If needed, adjust the image read start (COPIER > ADJUST >
ADJ-XY > ADJ-X, Y).
6
Recheck the image margin.
For details, see “Copier, adjust mode, BLANK details” on page 91
and “Copier, adjust mode, ADJ-XY details” on page 90.
Note
EN
Keep in mind that the new settings will become effective when the
copier has been turned off and on.
Copy module adjustments 123
To adjust the copy module horizontal registration
Figure 29.
1
Start service mode on the copy module.
2
Enter '6' under COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE in service mode to
make a test print of a grid.
3
Make a copy of the grid test page.
4
If the lines do not intersect at 90-degree angles or are distorted
(check against the corner of a piece of paper), adjust the
horizontal registration for the copy module as shown in figure 29.
Use the adjustment wrench FY9-1027-000, which ships with
every unit and which installers are instructed to place on the
stand behind the print engine. (Normally, this adjustment is not
needed, as adjustments are made at the factory.)
Adjusting horizontal registration
5
Make another copy of the test grid page and check the angles.
124 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
To adjust auto gradation
The copy module reproduces original images in full color by making
fine adjustments to the amount of toner used. Incorrect adjustments
and changes in copy exposure may result in poor reproduction of the
colors of the original. If the colors reproduced on copy images differ
from the original, or if the color exposure of copied images changes
after a new color toner cartridge has been installed or other printer
consumables have been replaced, perform auto gradation adjustment
to improve the quality of copy images. This function makes three test
prints and scans them so that the copy module can perform an auto
gradation adjustment.
Note
EN
1
Press
.
2
Press ADJUSTMENT/CLEANING.
3
Press AUTO GRADATION ADJUSTMENT.
4
Press TEST PRINT 1. The message PRINTING TEST PRINT 1
appears on the copy module touch-screen display.
5
Place the page from Test Print 1 on the copy module glass, facedown with the black portion of the page aligned with the orange
arrow, and press SCAN. SCANNING appears on the display if the
page has been placed on the glass correctly. If not, CORRECTLY
PLACE THE TEST PRINT ON THE GLASS appears; adjust the
placement of the page and press OK.
6
After the page has been scanned, remove it from the copy
module glass.
Use Test Print 1 for the first scan, Test Print 2 for the second scan, and
Test Print 3 for the third scan. Altering the order will cause copy quality
problems.
7
Repeat steps 4 through 6 for Test Print 2.
8
Repeat steps 4 through 6 for Test Print 3.
9
When scanning of Test Print 3 is complete, SCAN IS COMPLETE
appears on the display for approximately two seconds.
Copy module adjustments 125
To fine-adjust zoom
Use zoom fine-adjust to correct the slight difference in size between
the original and the output copy images when the copy ratio is set to
100%.
1
Press
.
2
Select ADJUSTMENT/CLEANING.
3
Press ZOOM FINE ADJUSTMENT on the adjustment/cleaning
screen.
4
Make fine adjustments using the arrow buttons, then press OK.
To adjust exposure recalibration
Use exposure recalibration to adjust the exposure of the copy. In
instances when copy images are a little lighter or darker than the
original, the copy exposure can be adjusted manually. This function
adjusts the middle or normal exposure setting of the copy module
touch panel display exposure scale.
1
Press
.
2
Select ADJUSTMENT/CLEANING.
3
Press EXPOSURE RECALIB on the Adjustment/Cleaning screen 1/2.
4
Select LIGHT or DARK to recalibrate the copy exposure, then
press OK.
126 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
To adjust lamp output
Use this procedure to adjust the output of the lamp after replacing
various components of the copy module, including the lamp itself.
This procedure can also be helpful in optimizing copied output quality.
1
Remove the lower front cover of the copy module.
2
Turn the copy module on.
3
Allow five minutes for the lamp to warm up.
4
Start service mode on the copier.
5
Select COPIER > FUNCTIONS > MISC-R > LAMP-ADJ.
6
Press OK.
7
Wait for the lamp to turn on, then turn the lamp-adjusting VR
clockwise or counterclockwise until it beeps.
8
Press OK. READY should appear on the screen.
To use lamp adjustment
Use this procedure to recalibrate the output of the lamp in the
following circumstances:
l
when the lamp has been removed and replaced
l
when replacing the intensity detection PCB, the reader controller
PCB, or the firmware DIMM
l
when various other parts have been replaced
This procedure is also used to optimize copied output quality.
EN
1
Remove the lower front cover of the copy module.
2
Turn the copy module on.
3
Allow five minutes for the lamp to warm up.
4
Start service mode on the copier.
5
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > USE-LAMP
6
Press OK.
7
While the lamp is on, turn the lamp-adjusting VR clockwise or
counterclockwise until it beeps.
8
Press OK.
Copy module adjustments 127
To adjust the CCD
Use this procedure to calibrate the CCD after replacing various
components of the copy module. The procedure can also be used to
improve copy quality.
Note
This adjustment occurs automatically when the unit is powered on.
1
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CCD-ADJ.
2
Press OK. When END appears, the adjustment is complete.
3
Exit service mode.
128 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
Required adjustments when replacing parts
or upgrading
This section describes the adjustments necessary when the following
parts have been replaced:
l
Reader controller PCB
l
Firmware/language DIMM
l
CCD unit
l
Scanning lamp
l
Intensity detection PCB
l
Standard white plate
l
AP-IP PCB
To replace the reader controller PCB
CAUTION
Do not mount a reader controller PCB equipped with an EEPROM from
a different machine.
1
Remove the two face plates, and remove the two screws; then,
detach the copy module lower front cover. (See “Removing the
lower front cover” on page 334.)
2
If possible, enter service mode and verify the 11 values listed on
the service label (COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY and COPIER >
ADJUST > CCD).
16
0
92
1
0
8316
8782
9480
0
1
-1
Figure 30.
Service label
3
EN
Turn the copier off and remove the old reader controller PCB.
(See “Removing the electrical unit pullout” on page 367.)
Copy module adjustments 129
4
Detach and keep the EEPROM from the old reader controller
PCB.
5
Attach the old EEPROM to the new reader controller PCB.
6
Replace the parts, except for the cover removed in step 1.
7
Turn the copier on.
8
The control panel will indicate Error 353 (mismatch of serial
numbers between the new reader controller PCB and the old
EEPROM).
9
Enter service mode on the copier.
10 Select OPTION > USER > SERIAL and type in the five-digit serial
number of the copy module.
11 Initialize the RAM on the reader controller PCB in service mode
(FUNCTION > CLEAR > R-CON).
12 Enter the settings recorded on the copy module service label in
service mode (COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY, CCD); these are the
same settings verified in step 2.
13 Press OK.
14 Select COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > USE-LAMP in service
mode.
15 Press OK.
16 Allow five minutes for the lamp to warm up.
17 Turn the scanning lamp adjusting VR clockwise or
counterclockwise until it beeps. (See “Removing the intensitydetection PCB” on page 364.)
18 Select COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CCD-ADJ.
19 Press OK.
20 When END appears, exit service mode.
21 Reinstall the lower front cover (with the service label) removed in
step 1.
22 Adjust auto gradation correction in user mode. (See “To adjust
auto gradation” on page 125.)
130 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
Replacing the firmware/localization DIMM
1
Enter service mode on the copier.
2
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > R-CON.
3
Select COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY, CCD, and type in the values
noted on the copy module service label.
4
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > USE-LAMP.
5
Press OK.
6
While the lamp is on, turn the scanning lamp adjusting VR
clockwise or counterclockwise until it beeps.
7
Press OK. READY should appear on the screen.
8
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CCD-ADJ.
9
Press OK.
10 When END appears, exit service mode.
11 Adjust auto gradation correction in user mode. (See “To adjust
auto gradation” on page 125.)
To replace the CCD Unit
EN
1
Record the values (AL-RG, AL-GB) shown on the new CCD unit
to the service label attached to the copy module lower front
cover.
2
Turn off the copier.
3
Install the new CCD unit in the copier. (See “Removing the power
supply cooling fan (FM4)” on page 375.)
4
Turn on the copier.
5
Enter service mode on the copier.
6
Type in the new CCD settings in ADJUST > CCD > AL-RG, AL-GB.
These are the values recorded in step 1.
7
Execute CCD auto adjustment in FUNCTION > CCD > CCD-ADJ.
8
Adjust auto gradation correction in user mode. (See “To adjust
auto gradation” on page 125.)
Copy module adjustments 131
To replace the scanning lamp
1
Replace the scanning lamp. (See “Removing the scanning lamp
and scanning lamp heater” on page 357.)
2
Turn on the copier.
3
Remove the copy module lower front cover. (See “Removing the
lower front cover” on page 334.)
4
Allow five minutes for the lamp to warm up.
5
Enter service mode on the copier.
6
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > LAMP-ADJ.
7
Press OK.
8
Turn the scanning lamp adjusting VR clockwise or
counterclockwise until it beeps.
9
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CCD-ADJ.
10 Press OK.
11 When END appears, exit service mode.
12 Adjust auto gradation correction in user mode. (See “To adjust
auto gradation” on page 125.)
132 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
To replace the intensity detection PCB, or to remove
and replace the same scanning lamp
1
Replace the intensity detection PCB. (See “Removing the
intensity-detection PCB” on page 364.)
2
Turn on the copier.
3
Remove the copy module lower front cover. (See “Removing the
lower front cover” on page 334.)
4
Allow five minutes for the lamp to warm up.
5
Enter service mode on the copier.
6
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > USE-LAMP.
7
Press OK.
8
Turn the scanning lamp adjusting VR clockwise or
counterclockwise until it beeps. (See “Removing the intensitydetection PCB” on page 364.)
9
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CCD-ADJ.
10 Press OK.
11 When END appears, exit service mode.
12 Adjust auto gradation correction in user mode. (See “To adjust
auto gradation” on page 125.)
EN
Copy module adjustments 133
To replace the standard white plate
Figure 31.
1
Remove the copy module lower front cover. (See “Removing the
lower front cover” on page 334.)
2
Record the three four-digit numbers printed on the bar code label
(XXXX YYYY ZZZZ; see figure 31 below) of the new standard
white plate for use in step 6.
Standard white plate barcode
3
Replace the standard white plate. (See “Removing the standard
white plate cover” on page 363.)
4
Enter service mode on the copier.
5
Select COPIER > ADJUST > CCD to bring up the input screen.
6
Type in the settings recorded in step 2 in W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y,
W-PLT-Z.
7
Press OK.
To replace the AP-IP PCB
1
Enter service mode on the copier.
2
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CDD-ADJ.
3
When END appears, exit service mode.
4
Execute auto gradation correction in user mode. (See “To adjust
auto gradation” on page 125.)
134 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
Upgrading and localizing the copy module
firmware
System requirements:
l
Pentium processor
l
Windows 95/98 (not supported on Windows NT; not tested on
Windows 2000)
l
IEEE 1284-compliant port and B-type connector parallel cable
To obtain and install the Service Support Tool
1
Download the Service Support Tool archive file.
2
Run the self-extracting archive file. This program will extract two
directories containing the install data (DISK1 and DISK2).
3
Run the SETUP.EXE program from the DISK1 directory. This
program does the following:
• creates a startup icon.
• creates supporting directory structures.
• copies the necessary files to C:\Program
Files\ServiceSupportTool and to C:\SERVTOOL.
To obtain the firmware image files for the correct
language localization
1
Note
There will be one firmware archive file for each of the following
languages: English, French, German, Italian, Finnish, Swedish, Dutch,
and Spanish. Be sure to obtain and use the correct file.
2
Note
Run the self-extracting archive file. This program will extract three
firmware files.
Each language/ROM version contains three files: .ift, .ird, and .pgr.
3
EN
Download the firmware archive file.
Copy all three firmware files to C:\SERVTOOL\NewROM.
Copy module adjustments 135
To install the firmware image to the Service Support
Tool
1
Start the Service Support Tool by clicking Start, then Programs,
and then the Service Support Tool icon. The opening splash
screen appears, followed by the program's main menu. The main
menu allows two choices of operations:
• Use Revision Control to add or delete firmware images to the
Service Support Tool program.
• Use Download/Upload to perform the firmware download to
the copy module.
Note
2
Click Continue under Revision Control.
3
Click the Add ROM Data to install a new firmware image. Note
that old firmware images can be removed by selecting Remove
ROM Data.
4
Copy the new firmware image files to the
C:\SERVTOOL\NewROM directory.
5
Click Install.
6
When the installation of a language or ROM version is complete,
the new version appears in the directory structure.
After Install is pressed, the contents of the NewROM directory are
installed and a subdirectory in C:\ServTool\Cp660\R-con\ is created
with the new firmware files under it. This leaves the NewROM directory
empty; the LastROM directory now contains the files.
136 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
To prepare the copy module for downloading
CAUTION
EN
1
Turn off the copy module's soft switch and the rear power switch.
2
Disconnect the copy module power cable.
ESD damage is possible; please take standard ESD precautions and
use a grounding wrist strap.
3
Remove the lower front cover of copy module and connect the
copy module to the computer with the parallel cable.
4
Set the DIP switch SW1 to the LOAD position (left switch down).
5
Turn on the computer.
6
Start the Service Support Tool by clicking Start, then Programs,
and then the Service Support Tool icon.
7
Reconnect the copy module power cable.
8
Turn on the rear power switch.
9
Turn on the soft switch (note that the copy module will appear
dead, with no lights and no front panel display).
Copy module adjustments 137
To download the new firmware / language localization
using the Service Support Tool
CAUTION
1
From the Service Support Tool main menu, click Continue button
under Download/Upload.
2
Select R-CON under ServTool and then select CP660.
3
Click Connect to establish the connection between the computer
and the copy module. A reminder screen appears.
4
If the connection has been established, click Continue to start
the connection. A progress bar showing the status of the
connection appears. If the bar does not show progress, there has
been a failure to communicate and an error message/screen
should appear. If the connection has not been established, click
Return to Previous Menu.
5
When the connection is successfully established, press OK.
Do not use options and utilities that allow you to read or write to RAM
data. These options are used to back up copy module configuration
and calibration data to the computer hard disk.
6
Note
Click Write to Flash ROM.
The screen that appears when you click Write to Flash ROM shows
several different firmware/language images that have been installed
and are available to download.
7
Click the appropriate version/language. The Selected ROM
Version section in the lower part of the window will confirm your
selection of language, country, and version.
8
Click Start to begin the download process
9
Select version/language.
10 Click Start to begin the programming phase.
11 If you are changing from the original language, a warning
appears. Press Start Write Operation to continue, or Go Back if
you do not want the selected language. Pressing Start Write
Operation will bring up a screen which tracks the status as the
Service Support Tool program obtains more information from the
original ROM, and as the download progresses. The ROM is
erased before it is written to. The information for the previous and
new language, country, and firmware version all appear.
138 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
Note
If this procedure fails at any point during the download, return to “To
prepare the copy module for downloading” on page 137 and begin the
process again.
12 Once the write process is complete, a Cyclic Redundancy Check
(CRC) is performed automatically to confirm that the download
occurred without error. Upon completion of the reprogramming,
the program confirms the previously loaded ROM version, the
ROM version designated to download, and the ROM version on
the copy module after download. The results of the CRC of the
flash ROM also appear.
13 Click OK to continue.
14 Click Return to the Model/PCB Selection Menu to terminate the
programming procedure.
15 Click OK to return to the PCB select menu and complete the
programming procedure. A screen should appear that indicates
that the download process ended successfully.
16 Click Return to Main Menu and exit the Service Support Tool.
To turn the copy module off and return to standard
condition
1
Turn off the copy module soft switch and the rear power switch.
2
Disconnect the copy module power cord.
3
Disconnect the parallel cable.
4
Set the DIP switch SW1 back to the COPY position (up).
5
Reconnect the power cord and turn the rear power switch on.
6
Turn the copy module soft switch on.
To check new ROM version number
EN
1
Confirm that the desired display language appears on the LCD.
2
Start service mode and check the ROM version under COPIER >
DISPLAY > VERSION.
3
Confirm that the version is correct.
Copy module adjustments 139
ADF adjustments
Perform ADF adjustments if the ADF has been replaced, or as part of
ADF troubleshooting. Mechanical and electrical adjustments are
required for the ADF.
CAUTION
It is critical that these adjustments be performed in the order listed.
Mechanical adjustments
1
Adjust the ADF height.
2
Correct the skew.
3
Check the distance from the horizontal plate.
4
Check the original leading edge stop position.
5
Check the sheet-to-sheet distance for reduced page composition
mode.
6
Adjust the ADF open/closed switch (MS1).
7
Adjust separation belt pressure.
Electrical adjustments
1
Adjust the level of the document tray paper sensor (S1) and
registration sensor (S3).
2
Adjust the original-width-detecting variable resistor (VR1).
3
check the initial setting for paper pick-up (only needed after
replacing the DADF controller PCB).
140 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
Mechanical adjustments
To adjust the ADF height
The height of the ADF is adjusted by lengthening or shortening the
left and right adjusting bolts (callout 1) so that the distance between
the two rubber feet (callout 2) at the rear and the horizontal size plate
(callout 3) on the copyboard glass (callout 4) is 0.2±0.1 mm (the
thickness of two sheets of 64 g/m2 copy paper) when the ADF
(callout 5) is closed, and the feet (callout 6) at the front are in contact
with the copyboard glass.
To adjust the ADF height, follow these steps:
1
Turn the copier off.
2
Remove the ADF to expose the adjusting bolts. (See “Removing
the ADF” on page 378.)
2
5
2
2
6
2
7
2
3
2
4
2
1
Figure 32.
Adjusting the ADF height
3
Note
EN
Loosen the lock nuts (callout 7) and turn the bolts of the left and
right supports to raise and lower the ADF.
After adjustment, tighten the nuts (callout 7) to lock them.
4
Replace the ADF and recheck the height. Repeat steps 2 and 3
as necessary.
5
After adjustment, check to make sure that both the left and right
rubber feet at the front of the ADF are in contact with the
copyboard glass. If not, adjust the height of the magnet at the
front of the ADF.
ADF adjustments 141
To correct the original skew
1
Remove the screw (callout 1), and detach the DADF controller
PCB cover (callout 2).
2
2
1
Figure 33.
DADF controller PCB cover
2
Figure 34.
Shift bit 1 of the DIP switch (DSW1) on the DADF controller PCB
to ON.
DSW1 on the DADF controller PCB
3
Place an A3 or 11-by-17-inch sheet of copy paper in the
document tray of the ADF.
142 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
4
Figure 35.
Press switch SW3 on the DADF controller PCB one time. The
sheet is picked up and placed on the copyboard glass.
SW3 DADF controller PCB
5
Open the ADF slowly, and measure the distance between the
horizontal size plate and the sheet at any two points (l1 and l2)
150 mm apart along the top edge of the page. The difference in
measurement of l1 and l2 should be within 1 mm.
Figure 36.
Testing the ADF adjustment
Note
Skew adjustments are performed at the rear of the ADF (callout 1 in
figure 37).
EN
ADF adjustments 143
2
1
Figure 37.
Rear view of the ADF
6
7
If the difference is not within 1 mm, loosen the nut (callout 1) at
the rear of the right hinge unit (callout 2), and turn the adjusting
screw (callout 3) to make adjustments.
If . . .
Then turn the adjusting screw . . .
l1 is greater than l2
Clockwise
l1 is less than l2
Counterclockwise
Tighten the lock nut (callout 1) completely.
2
2
1
2
3
Figure 38.
Adjusting screw
8
Press switch SW3 to move the sheet of copy paper back to the
document tray, then press SW3 again to move the page back to
the copyboard glass.
9
Check the skew again as described in step 5, and repeat steps 6,
7, and 8, if necessary.
10 When adjustment is complete, tighten the nut to lock the
adjusting screw in place.
11 Return the DIP switches to the OFF position.
144 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
To adjust the distance from the horizontal size plate
Be sure to perform “To correct the original skew” on page 142 before
adjusting the distance to the horizontal size plate.
Note
When copying from the ADF, originals are placed on the glass in
different positions compared to the positioning when copying from the
glass. For this procedure, do not adjust the position of the original to
match the positioning guides on the glass plate.
1
Figure 39.
EN
Shift bit 1 of the DIP switch (DSW1) on the DADF controller PCB
to ON.
DSW1 on the DADF controller PCB
2
Place an A3 or 11-by-17-inch sheet of copy paper in the
document tray.
3
Press switch SW3 on the DADF controller PCB one time. The
sheet is picked up and placed on the copyboard glass.
ADF adjustments 145
4
Note
Open the ADF slowly, and check to make sure that the distance l3
shown in the figure is as indicated.
The l3 measurement for A3 paper should be 2.3±1 mm.
The l3 measurement for 11-by-17 inch paper should be 11.1±1 mm
A3
11-by-17 inch
±
Figure 40.
Testing adjustment
5
CAUTION
±
If the distance is not as indicated, loosen the positioning screw
(callout 1) and the fixing screws (callout 2) of the ADF document
tray (callout 3), and adjust the position of the ADF document tray.
When making a test copy, be sure to tighten the two fixing screws and
the positioning screw (two pieces). Otherwise, the original might jam
and the adjustment become inaccurate.
2
3
2
Figure 41.
2
1
2
Adjusting ADF document tray
6
Move the ADF input tray to correct the positioning of the original
on the glass. If l3 is too large, move the tray toward the rear of the
copier. If l3 is too small, move the tray toward the front of the
copier.
7
Close the ADF and leave the copy paper on the glass during the
adjustment.
8
After adjustment, check to make sure that the positioning screw
and the fixing screws are fully tightened.
146 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
9
Press SW3 again to advance another page to the copyboard
glass.
10 Repeat step 4. If adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 5 through
8.
11 Return the DIP switch to the OFF position.
To adjust the left edge stop position
Be sure to perform “To correct the original skew” on page 142 and
“To adjust the distance from the horizontal size plate” on page 145
before adjusting the original-left-edge stop position.
1
Figure 42.
EN
Shift bits 1, 4, and 5 of the DIP switch (DSW1) on the DADF
controller PCB to ON.
DSW1 on DADF controller PCB
2
Place an A3 or 11-by-17-inch sheet of copy paper on the
document tray.
3
Press switch SW3 on the DADF controller PCB one time. The
sheet is picked up and placed on the copyboard glass.
ADF adjustments 147
4
Figure 43.
Open the ADF slowly, and measure the stop position l4; then,
close the ADF. The distance l4 should be 11.0 ± 1 mm, and the
left edge of the page should align with the indicator arrow on the
horizontal size plate.
Measuring the copy paper stop position
5
To adjust the original-leading-edge stop position, use switches
SW1 and SW2 on the DADF controller PCB.
• Pressing switch SW1 shifts the original stop position to the
right by 0.34 mm.
• Pressing switch SW2 shifts the original stop position to the left
by 0.34 mm.
Note
Holding down the push switch causes only a single shift.
6
Press switch SW3 one time to move the sheet off the glass back
to the document tray and store the new setting.
7
Press switch SW3 again to place the sheet back on the
copyboard glass.
8
Open the ADF slowly, and measure the copy paper stop position
l4; then, close the ADF. The distance l4 should be 11.0 ± 1 mm,
and the left edge of the page should align with the indicator arrow
on the horizontal size plate. If necessary, adjust as described in
step 5.
9
When no more adjustment is required, press switch SW3 to
discharge the page and save the final stop position setting.
10 Return the DIP switches to the OFF position.
148 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
To adjust the sheet-to-sheet gap for two-page copy
mode
Be sure to perform “To correct the original skew” on page 142, “To
adjust the distance from the horizontal size plate” on page 145, and
“To adjust the left edge stop position” on page 147 before adjusting
the sheet-to-sheet distance for reduced page composition mode.
Figure 44.
1
Shift bits 1, 2, 4, and 5 of the DIP switch (DSW1) on the DADF
controller PCB to ON.
2
Place two sheets of A4- or letter-size copy paper on the
document tray. Make sure that the copy paper matches the ADF
model (if it is an A-size model, use A4 copy paper; if it is an inchsize model, use letter-size copy paper).
DSW1 on DADF controller PCB
3
EN
Press switch SW3 on the DADF controller PCB one time. Both
pages will be picked up and placed on the copyboard glass.
ADF adjustments 149
4
Figure 45.
Open the ADF slowly, and measure the distance l5 between the
two sheets of copy paper. Then, close the ADF.
Positioning paper
5
Use switches SW1 and SW2 on the DADF controller PCB to
adjust the sheet-to-sheet distance.
• Pressing SW1 increases the distance between sheets by
0.34 mm.
• Pressing SW2 decreases the distance between sheets by
0.34 mm.
6
Press switch SW3 one time to move the sheets off of the glass to
the document tray and store the new setting.
7
Press SW3 again one time. Both pages are picked up and placed
on the copyboard glass.
8
Open the ADF slowly, and measure the distance l5 between the
two sheets of copy paper. Then, close the ADF. If the distance is
still not within specifications, repeat steps 5 and 6.
9
When no more adjustment is necessary, press switch SW3 to
discharge the pages and save the final stop position setting.
10 Return the DIP switches to the OFF position.
150 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
To adjust the ADF open/closed switch (MS1)
Note
1
Remove the ADF body cover (upper). (See “Removing the body
cover” on page 380.)
2
Open and close the ADF and adjust the retaining plate (callout 1)
so that the ADF switch MS1 (callout 2) turns on and off when the
distance from the copyboard glass (callout 3) to the end of the
ADF (callout 4) is between 10 and 100 mm.
When opening and closing the ADF, listen for the switch to audibly click
at the point at which it actuates.
2
2
1
Figure 46.
Retaining plate adjustment
2
4
2
3
Figure 47.
EN
Measuring the distance from the copyboard glass to the ADF
ADF adjustments 151
To adjust separation belt pressure
Adjust the pressure of the separation belt under the following
circumstances:
l
if originals start to skew because of wear on the separation belt or
the feeding roller
l
if the separation belt or the feeding roller are replaced
1
Prepare test strips for measuring feeding power.
To create the measurement tool, cut an A4- or letter-size sheet of
copy paper into thirds lengthwise (strips of about 70 mm in width),
then put tape on both sides of one end of each of the strips. Put a
small hole in the taped end about 10mm into the tape, as shown
in figure 48. This creates three test strips.
Figure 48.
Preparing test strips for measuring feeding power
2
Remove the screw (callout 1), and detach the DADF controller
cover (callout 2) of the ADF.
2
2
1
Figure 49.
DADF controller cover
152 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
3
Figure 50.
Shift bits 5 and 6 of the DIP switch DSW1 on the DADF controller
PCB to ON to select separation belt/feeding roller cleaning mode.
DSW1 on DADF controller PCB
4
Press switch SW3 on the DADF controller PCB.
5
Hook a spring-tension gauge through the tape-reinforced hole.
6
Put the test strip into the middle separation assembly, and
measure the feeding power.
• Make sure that the three separation belts are in contact with
the test strip.
• Make sure that the test strip is pulled straight along the
separation belt.
• Take the measurement when the rear end of the test strip and
the rear end of the document tray are flush.
Upper cover
Test strip
Spring gauge
Match the end of the test strip
and the end of the document tray
Figure 51.
EN
Measuring feeding power
ADF adjustments 153
7
Open the upper cover of the ADF to end the measurement, and
then
8
Press switch SW3 on the DADF controller PCB one time.
Table 52. Feeding power measurements
Test strip
Target feeding power (g)
64 g/m2
300+30
2
330+30
80 g/m
9
If feeding power is insufficient, turn the adjusting screw clockwise
1/8 turn (see figure 52 below).
• Clockwise rotation increases the feeding power
• counterclockwise rotation decreases the feeding power.
Loosening the lock nut (callout 1) is not necessary for small
adjustments. The lock nut is glued in place. If greater adjustment
is necessary, loosen the lock nut first.
2
1
Figure 52.
Lock nut glued in place
10 Repeat the measurement test, and readjust as needed.
11 After final adjustment, reglue the lock nut in place, if necessary.
154 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
Electrical adjustments
Adjustments are required if the following parts are replaced on the
ADF:
Note
l
Document tray paper sensor (S1)
l
Registration sensor (S3)
l
Original-width-detecting variable resistor (VR1)
Under the whole-unit replacement strategy, these parts will not be
replaced in the field.
To adjust the document tray paper sensor (S1) and
registration sensor (S3)
Figure 53.
EN
ADF sensors
1
Remove the PCB cover of the ADF.
2
Turn bit 4 of the DIP switch bank ON.
ADF adjustments 155
3
Without placing paper on the document tray, press switch SW3
on the DADF controller PCB. LED 1 and 2 will turn on.
I
Figure 54.
Note
LED 1 and 2 on DADF controller PCB
4
Press switch SW3 again one time. The LEDs turn off and the
adjustment is complete.
5
Return the DIP switch to the OFF position.
If LED 1 does not turn on in 30 seconds, suspect that the Document
Tray Paper Sensor is bad.
If LED 2 does not turn on in 30 seconds, suspect that the Registration
Sensor or the DADF controller PCB is bad.
156 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
To adjust the original-width-detecting variable
resistor (VR1)
Note
This procedure requires a sheet of A4- or letter-size paper. Be sure to
use the size that matches the original configuration of the ADF and
copy module.
1
Figure 55.
EN
Remove the PCB cover of the ADF.
DADF controller PCB
2
For A4 paper: Turn bits 3 and 4 of the DIP switch bank ON.
For letter-size paper: Turn bits 3, 4, and 5 of the DIP switch
bank ON.
3
Place the page of A4- or letter-size paper in the portrait
orientation (long edge leading) in the document tray and adjust
the side guides to the width of the page.
4
Press switch SW3 on the DADF controller PCB.
5
LED 1 will turn on, then immediately off, and LED 2 will turn on.
6
Place the page in the landscape orientation (short edge leading)
in the document tray and adjust the side guides to the width of the
page.
7
Push switch SW3 again one time and the adjustment will end with
LEDs 1 and 2 on. Return the DIP switches to their OFF position.
ADF adjustments 157
Replacing the DADF controller PCB
CAUTION
Use care when performing this procedure. The setting on the DADF
controller PCB can be configured only one time. If set incorrectly,
damage may result in the ADF and DADF controller PCB.
1
Set the paper setting:
e Remove the PCB cover of the ADF.
f
Turn bits 4 and 5 of the DIP switch bank ON.
g Press switch SW3 on the DADF controller PCB one time.
h Press switch SW2 on the DADF controller PCB five times to
move the pick-up assembly.
i
Press switch SW3 on the DADF controller PCB one time.
j
Turn bits 4 and 5 of the DIP switch bank OFF.
2
Adjust the document tray paper sensor (S1)/registration sensor
(S3). (See “To adjust the document tray paper sensor (S1) and
registration sensor (S3)” on page 155.)
3
Adjust the original-width-detecting variable resistor (VR1). (See
“To adjust the original-width-detecting variable resistor (VR1)” on
page 157.)
4
Adjust the left-edge stop position. (See “To adjust the left edge
stop position” on page 147.)
5
Adjust the sheet-to-sheet gap in reduced composition mode.
(See “To adjust the sheet-to-sheet gap for two-page copy mode”
on page 149.)
158 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
Side HCI adjustments
There are three adjustments for the side HCI:
l
Gap between the printer and the side HCI
l
Base plate position
l
Paper-size change (A4 or letter)
Gap between the printer and the side HCI
Note
Improper adjustment of this gap can cause misfeeds.
1
Figure 56.
EN
Loosen the wing nuts on both adjustment screws on the bottom
of the side HCI.
Wing nuts on the adjustment screws
2
Use the adjustment screws to straighten the gap between the
side HCI and the print engine.
3
When adjustment is complete, secure the wing nuts to lock the
adjustment screws into place.
Side HCI adjustments 159
Base plate position
Note
Improper positioning of the base plate will cause printed images to be
misplaced on the paper. For best results, the base plate should be
centered.
1
Figure 57.
Note
Loosen the two securing screws on the base plate.
Base plate securing screws
2
If the printout is placed too far to the top of the page, move the
plate toward the rear of the printer.
3
If the printout is placed too far to the bottom of the page, move
the plate toward the front of the printer.
4
When adjustment is complete, tighten the two securing screws.
You might have to lift the plate completely off to move it.
160 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
Paper-size change (A4 or letter)
1
Figure 58.
Paper guide fixing screws
2
Figure 59.
Lift the paper guides out of their slots and place them into the
holes for LTR or A4, as labeled.
Paper guides
3
EN
Loosen the two white paper-guide fixing screws.
Replace the fixing screws.
Side HCI adjustments 161
4
Insert the plastic paper-size tab so that the notation for the
correct size is displayed (LTR or A4).
Figure 60.
Paper size card
Note
If the side HCI fails to register letter, or incorrectly reports A4 instead
of letter, reinsert the plastic paper-size tab to make sure that the tab is
activating the switch correctly.
162 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
Periodically replaced parts
Note
The copy module, ADF, and side HCI do not contain parts that must
be replaced after a certain number of printed pages or at a certain time
interval. The numbers provided below are for estimation purposes only
and do not indicate a point at which the part must be replaced. Replace
parts upon failure only.
Table 53. Periodically replaced parts
Copy module
ADF
Side HCI
EN
Part name
Part number
Approximate life
expectancy
Lamp
FH7-3336-000CN
500 hours or 75,000 pages
Fan
FH6-1463-000CN
30,000 hours
Control panel LCD
FG6-0365-000CN
10,000 hours
Feeder belt
FC1-7815-020CN
200,000 sheets
Paper pick-up roller
FF5-5191-000CN
250,000 sheets
Feeder belt (separation)
FB3-5702-000CN
250,000 sheets
Separation roller
FF5-5207-000CN
250,000 sheets
Feed roller and separation roller
RF5-1834-0000CN
350,000 pages
Periodically replaced parts 163
Cleaning
Cleaning by an end-user
The user should clean the following at least once a week:
Note
l
Copyboard glass and cover. Wipe with water or mild detergent
on a well-wrung cloth, and then wipe dry.
l
ADF. Execute ADF cleaning(
FEEDER CLEANING).
, ADJUSTMENTS/CLEANING,
For information on cleaning the printer, see the printer service manual.
Cleaning by service technicians
Service technicians should perform cleaning during a service visit, not
periodically.
Solvents
Isopropyl alcohol is the recommended solvent for all parts except the
copyboard glass, external plastic covers, and rubber rollers/belts.
Isopropyl alcohol can be procured locally.
Clean external plastic covers and rubber rollers/belts with a wellwrung, water-dampened cloth.
Note
In the absence of isopropyl alcohol, use a water-dampened cloth for
cleaning.
164 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
Cleaning parts on the copy module
To clean the copyboard glass and cover
1
Figure 61.
Copyboard glass
2
Figure 62.
EN
Wipe the copyboard glass and cover with a cloth moistened with
water or solution of mild detergent; then, wipe them dry.
Wipe the inside surface of the copyboard cover with a cloth
moistened with water or solution of mild detergent; then, wipe it
dry.
Copyboard cover
Cleaning 165
To clean internal parts of the copy module
1
Clean the mirrors, reflecting shade, CCD lens, and standard
white plate with a soft blower brush.
2
Clean and lubricate the scanner rail only if contaminated.
Table 54. Items to be cleaned
CAUTION
Parts
Remarks
Copyboard glass and cover
Use lint-free cloth with water or
detergent.
Mirrors 1, 2, and 3
Use a blower brush.
Lens CCD
Use a blower brush.
Standard white plate
Use lint-free cloth with water or
isopropyl alcohol.
Do not touch the mirrors and lenses. Keep the CCD free from dust.
For a list of periodically replaced parts of and consumables/durables
for the printer unit, see the HP Color LaserJet 8500/8550 Printer
Family Service Manual.
166 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
Cleaning ADF parts
EN
l
Inspect and blow paper dust out of timing sensors.
l
Clean delivery/reversing roller with a water-dampened, lint-free,
soft cloth.
l
Clean the registration roller with a water-dampened, lint-free, soft
cloth.
l
Clean the registration paper sensor (S3) and registration sensor
LED3 with a water-dampened, lint-free, soft cloth. See “To clean
the registration sensor (S3)” on page 170.
l
To clean the separation belt (pick function), use a sheet of paper
moistened with alcohol. If you do not have isopropyl alcohol, use
dry paper, shift bit 6, and then press SW3 to clean.
l
To clean the feeding roller (separation function), use a sheet of
paper moistened with alcohol. If you do not have isopropyl
alcohol, use dry paper, shift bit 6, and then press SW3 to clean.
l
Clean the document tray paper sensor (S1) and the reflecting
face of the original sensor with a water-dampened, lint-free, soft
cloth. See “To clean the sensors” on page 169.
l
Clean the delivery roller with a water-dampened, lint-free, soft
cloth.
l
Clean the pick-up roller with a water-dampened, lint-free, soft
cloth.
l
Clean the feeding belt with a water-dampened, lint-free, soft
cloth. Move the belt by hand in the paper-feed direction to clean
the entire belt.
l
Clean the copyboard glass retainer with a water-dampened, lintfree, soft cloth (right).
l
To clean the separation guide, use alcohol, or, in absence of
alcohol, use a water-dampened, lint-free, soft cloth to clean the
12 tabs. Clean with strokes in paper-feed direction. See “To clean
the separation guide” on page 173.
l
Clean the vertical size plate with a water-dampened, lint-free, soft
cloth.
Cleaning 167
To clean the belt assembly
1
Figure 63.
Move the feeding belt in the direction of the arrow as you wipe it
with a water-dampened cloth.
Belt assembly
2
Moisten the center of a sheet of copy paper with alcohol and
place the paper on the document tray; then, shift bit 6 of the DIP
switch (SW1) on the DADF controller PCB to ON.
Note
In the absence of alcohol, use dry paper.
Figure 64.
Document tray
3
Press the push switch (SW3) to execute cleaning of the
separation belt.
4
When cleaning has ended, press the push switch (SW3), and
shift all bits of the DIP switch to OFF.
5
Mount the DADF controller PCB cover.
168 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
To clean the sensors
The ADF’s feeding path is equipped with two transmission-type
sensors (original sensor S1, registration sensor S3) and three
photointerrupers (pick-up sensor S7, delivery sensor S6, reversal
sensor S8).
The light-receiving face of a transmission-type sensor tends to collect
more paper lint than does a photointerrupter, possibly leading to
malfunction.
Follow the steps below to clean the sensors:
Figure 65.
1
Remove the body cover.
2
Remove the two screws (callout 1) and remove the documenttray mounting plate (callout 2).
Sensors
3
Clean the sensor S1 (callout 3) shown in the following figure.
2
3
Figure 66.
EN
Sensor S1
Cleaning 169
To clean the reflecting face (original sensor)
Clean the reflecting face (callout 1) of the original sensor while
keeping the delivery roller (callout 2) down.
2
1
2
Figure 67.
Reflecting face sensor
To clean the registration sensor (S3)
1
Remove the separation belt unit.
2
Remove the four screws (callout 1), and detach the separation
guide plate (callout 2).
2
1
2
2
1
Figure 68.
Registration sensor
170 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
3
Remove the two screws (callout 3), and detach the inside guide
plate (callout 4).
2
4
2
3
Figure 69.
2
3
Guide plate
4
Clean the registration sensor S3 (callout 5) mounted on the inside
of the plate (callout 4).
2
4
2
5
Figure 70.
EN
Registration sensor
Cleaning 171
To clean the registration sensor LED3
1
Remove the screw (callout 1), and detach the registration sensor
LED3 cover (callout 2) of the reversing roller unit (callout 3).
2
1
2
2
3
Figure 71.
Registration sensor LED3 cover
2
Clean the light-emitting face of the registration sensor LED3
(callout 4).
2
4
Figure 72.
Light-emitting face
172 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
To clean the separation guide
1
Remove the separation belt. (See See “Removing the separation
belt unit” on page 398..)
2
Remove the two front separation flappers.
3
Clean all 12 areas of the pre-separation guide with alcohol.
Note
Make cleaning strokes in the paper-feed direction.
Figure 73.
Separation guide
Cleaning side HCI parts
Clean the following items periodically using a water-dampened, lintfree, soft cloth:
EN
l
Pick-up roller
l
Separation roller
l
Feed roller
Cleaning 173
Lubricating
The HP Color LaserJet 8550MFP does not have any parts that
require periodic lubrication. Apply lubricant only if contamination has
necessitated cleaning, or if lubricated parts have been replaced.
CAUTION
When applying lubricant, take care that other parts are not soiled with
lubricant. If this occurs, be sure to wipe clean the affected parts.
Table 55. Lubricants
Name
Use
Composition
Remarks
Copy module
Lubricant
Lubricating scanner rail
Light mineral oil
(paraffin family)
Procure locally
Copy module
Lubricant
Lubricating between gear
and shaft
Mineral oil of the
petroleum family
Procure locally
Copy module
Lubricant
Lubricating drive parts
Silicon oil
Procure locally
ADF
Lubricant
Lubricating
Silicon oil
Procure locally
side HCI
Lubricating oil
Apply between the gear
and shaft
Petroleum jelly
Procure locally
side HCI
Lubricating
solvent
Apply to the gear;
not for mouldedassembly application
Lithium grease
Procure locally
174 Chapter 4 - Adjustments and maintenance
EN
5
Theory of operation
Chapter contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Notes on the power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Copy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Functional construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Outline of electrical circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Inputs to and outputs from the major PCBs . . . . . . . . 180
Basic sequence of operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Sequence of operations during copying . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Copy module exposure system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Scanner home position sensor and operation . . . . . . 190
Scanner motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Controlling the scanning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Identifying the size of originals when copying from
the glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Copy module image processing system. . . . . . . . . . . 200
CCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
CCD driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
AP-IP (analog image processing) PCB . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Digital image processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
EN
Chapter contents 175
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
ADF electrical circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Communication with the copy module . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Inputs and outputs to the DADF controller PCB . . . . 246
Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Functional overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Picking up originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Reversal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Reduced page composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Delivery operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Detecting originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Controlling the pick-up motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Controlling the belt motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Detecting jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Improper placement of originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Motors, solenoids, and sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Indicator PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
General timing charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Side HCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Pick-up feed system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Solenoids and motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
List of variable resistors (VR), LEDs, check pins
by PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Input and output signals to the deck controller PCB . 321
General circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
176 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Introduction
This chapter addresses the theory of operation for the copy module,
the ADF, and the side HCI. The theory of operation for the print
engine is covered in the printer service manual.
Notes on the power switch
Use the control panel soft switch to power off the copy module. Do
not power off the copy module with the rear power switch unless the
copy module will not be used for several days or will be moved to
another location. To power off the copy module for an extended
duration, follow these steps:
1
Switch the control panel soft switch to off.
2
Wait at least 30 minutes while the HP Color LaserJet 8550MFP
cools down. Failure to allow at least 30 minutes for cooling can
damage toner cartridges.
3
Switch the rear power switch to off.
4
Disconnect the power.
Note
The copy module should be relocated only by professional equipment
movers.
Figure 74.
Control panel power soft switch, copy module rear power
switch, and power plug
CAUTION
Do not turn off the control panel power soft switch or the rear power
switch while the copy module is in operation.
Do not open the printer door while the copy module is in operation.
EN
Introduction 177
Copy module
Functional construction
The copy module may is divided into two functional blocks: control
system and exposure system.
Copy module
Figure 75.
Copy module
178 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Outline of electrical circuitry
The main electrical mechanisms of the copy module are controlled by
the CPU on the reader controller PCB. The reader controller PCB is
equipped with a lithium battery for backing up important data. The
control panel is equipped with its own CPU for control of keys, LEDs,
and LCD.
ADF
Figure 76.
EN
Electrical circuitry
Copy module 179
Inputs to and outputs from the major PCBs
See
“Controlling
the scanning
lamp” on
page 193.
See
“Controlling
the scanning
lamp” on
page 193.
See
“Scanner
motor” on
page 191.
See “Upgrading and
localizing the copy
module firmware”
on page 135.
Figure 77.
Inputs to and outputs from the reader controller PCB (1 of 3)
180 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
See “Originalsize sensors” on
page 198.
See “Control
panel” on
page 232.
Figure 78.
EN
Inputs and outputs from the reader controller PCB (2 of 3)
Copy module 181
ADF
Figure 79.
Inputs and outputs from the reader controller PCB (3 of 3)
182 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Basic sequence of operations
Figure 80.
EN
Basic sequence of operations at power-on
Copy module 183
Table 56. Warm-up and standby phases
Item
Period
Purpose
Remarks
WMUP (warmup)
From when the control
panel power soft switch
is turned on until the
surface temperature of
the upper fusing roller
reaches 160° C and the
temperature of the
lower fusing roller
reaches 165° C.
To heat the fusing roller
and to put the printer
into standby state.
During this period, the
printer checks for
residual paper and the
presence/absence of
the toner cartridge, and
executes correction for
stable reproduction of
images.
STBY (standby) From when WMUP
ends until the COPY
START is turned on or
the power switch is
To wait for COPY
START or another key
to be pressed.
turned off.
Note
The copy module is not likely to be used on its own, and the sequence
of operations is discussed in terms of a combination of the copy module
and the printer.
184 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Sequence of operations during copying
Figure 81.
EN
A4- and letter-size, 2 copies, 4-color, Direct, and cassette 1
sequence of operations (1 of 2)
Copy module 185
Figure 82.
A4- and letter-size, 2 copies, 4-color, Direct, and cassette 1
sequence of operations (2 of 2)
186 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Table 57. Sequence functions
Item
Period
Purpose
INTR (initial
rotation)
From when a key input
is made or an original is
set until COPY START
is pressed.
To rotate the laser
scanner motor, thereby
stabilizing the
sensitivity of the
photosensitive drum.
DSRDY
(scanning
preparation)
From when COPY
START key is pressed
COPY (copy)
From when control
rotation ends until all
toner has been
transferred to the copy
paper.
To turn on and off the
laser beam using video
signals so as to form an
image on the
photosensitive drum;
thereafter, to turn the
toner image into a
visible image and
transfer the result to
copy paper.
LSTR (last
rotation)
From when COPY
ends until the main
motor stops.
EN
until the point of
rotation of the
intermediate transfer
drum reaches the
leading edge of the first
color.
To discharge copy
paper and to clean the
intermediate transfer
drum.
Remarks
The intermediate
transfer drum is
cleaned for each copy.
In the case of
continuous copying,
cleaning is also
executed during COPY.
Copy module 187
Copy module exposure system
The exposure system includes functions used to expose the original
and direct the reflected optical image to the CCD. Figure 83 is a
cross-section of the exposure system, while figure 84 is a diagram of
the mechanics involved.
Figure 83.
Cross-section of exposure system
Figure 84.
Exposure system mechanics
188 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Basic sequence of operations
Figure 85.
EN
A4- and letter-size, 2 copies, 4-color, Direct, cassette 1 sequence
of operations
l
INTR—initial rotation
l
ODETCT—original detection and shading correction
l
LSTR—last rotation; approximately equal to secondary transfer
end to paper discharge
l
DSRDY—document scanner ready
Copy module 189
Scanner home position sensor and operation
The scanner home position sensor operates at the following timing:
l
When the power is turned on
l
When COPY START is pressed
l
When all originals are read
l
While the CCD is being adjusted in service mode
The home position sensor does not turn on during continuous
copying; if the sensor does turn on, scanning stops immediately.
Figure 86 shows the movement of the scanner during copying. The
start position is approximately 5 mm forward of the home position in
Direct Mode.
Figure 86.
Scanner movement
190 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Scanner motor
Figure 87 shows the circuit used to control the scanner motor. The
circuit has the following functions:
l
Controls the direction of rotation of the scanner motor
l
Controls the speed of rotation of the scanner motor
The scanner motor changes its direction of rotation to move the
scanner forward and in reverse. The speed of its rotation during
scanning varies according to the selected reproduction ratio. The
scanner moves at four different speeds when moving in reverse. The
greater the distance, the greater the speed. The four speeds are
described below, compared to the forward speed with a 1:1
enlargement ratio.
Figure 87.
EN
l
One-page mode (7.7 times as fast)
l
Reverse distance of the mirror 1 mount is 105.1 mm or more
(16.4 times as fast)
l
Reverse distance of the mirror 1 mount is 70.1 mm or more and
less than 105.1 mm (9.3 times as fast)
l
Reverse distance of the mirror 1 mount is less than 70.1 mm (5.7
times as fast)
Scanner motor circuit
Copy module 191
The reader controller PCB sends the MTCLK signal, CW/CCW signal,
and STEP_ANGLE through STEP_ANGLE3 signals to the scanner
motor driver PCB to suit the scanning mode, distance, and
reproduction ratio. In response, the motor control IC (Q301) on the
scanner motor driver PCB generates motor drive pulses (SPA to
SPE, SNA to SNE) to drive the scanner motor. The scanner motor is
a five-phase stepping motor, and controls the direction and speed of
scanning by varying the sequence and frequency of the motor drive
pulses (SPA through SPE and SNA through SNE). The constant
current control circuit controls the current flowing to the motor to a
specific level to suit the speed of motor rotation. When the motor
remains at rest in standby, the current flowing to the motor is cut in
response to the MOVE signal to prevent heating of the motor.
Changing the reproduction ratio
The reproduction ratio in main scanning direction (drum axial
direction) is changed by skipping image signals when writing them
into the line memory (reduction) or by reading the same image
signals when reading them from the line memory (enlargement). The
reproduction ratio in sub scanning direction is changed by moving the
mirror mount faster (reduction) or slower (enlargement).
Figure 88.
Changing the reproduction ratio
192 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Controlling the scanning lamp
The scanning lamp in the copy module is a fluorescent lamp. The
lamp is turned on and off by the inverter PCB according to the reader
controller PCB. The reader controller PCB controls the following
functions:
Figure 89.
EN
l
Scanning lamp preheating mechanism
l
Power to the scanning lamp on and off
l
Density of the scanning lamp
l
Temperature of the scanning lamp heater
l
Condition (deterioration) checks of the scanning lamp
l
Error detection
Controlling the scanning lamp
Copy module 193
Controlling the pre-heating mechanism of the
scanning lamp
To reduce the time required for the scanning lamp to reach its
optimum intensity after COPY START is pressed, the filament of the
scanning lamp is supplied with power. This mechanism is called “preheating,” and it may be standby pre-heating, pre-activation preheating, or activation pre-heating.
l
Standby pre-heating—The filament is supplied with a voltage of
2.9 ±0.25 V after power-on, during initial rotation, and after
copying. If the lamp turns on and then off at the end of copying,
standby pre-heating is ended and it will be started as soon as the
lamp heater turns on next time. Thereafter, standby pre-heating
remains on until the next time the lamp turns on.
l
Pre-activation pre-heating—The filament is supplied with a
voltage of 4.35 ±0.45 V 1.5 seconds before the scanning lamp is
turned on for copying.
l
Activation pre-heating—The filament is supplied with a voltage
of 3.8 ±0.4 V during copying. Thereafter, a voltage determined
based on the intensity duty value read while the scanning lamp is
on will be applied.
Turning on and off the scanning lamp
The scanning lamp is turned on and off by the scanning lamp on
signal (FLPWM), scanning lamp clock signal (FLCLK), and scanning
lamp ON signal (FLONOUT) from the reader controller PCB.
Controlling the intensity of the scanning lamp
The FLPWM signal is a pulse signal, and the intensity of the scanning
lamp is controlled so that it remains a constant level by changing the
duty ratio of the signal according to the scanning lamp intensity signal
(FL_S) detected by the intensity detection PCB and the scanning
lamp VR setting.
194 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Controlling the temperature of the scanning lamp
heater
The copy module uses a scanning lamp heater to speed up the
preparation of the scanning lamp. Normally, the scanning lamp heater
is set to 70° C ±5° C, and its temperature is monitored by the
scanning lamp thermistor integrated into the heater unit. The
temperature of the scanning lamp is controlled as follows:
l
If the scanning lamp is less than 40° C at power-on, the filament
of the scanning lamp is supplied with power for 120 seconds by
way of standby pre-heating. Thereafter, the intensity duty ratio is
made 10%, and minimum current preparatory activation is
executed for 120 seconds, during which time the scanning lamp
heater is controlled to 70° C. The scanning lamp heater is not
turned on unless the scanning lamp is turned on as part of
preparatory activation.
l
If the temperature is 40° C or more at power-on, the copy module
will assume that the power has been turned on immediately after
it was turned off, and will not turn on the scanning lamp heater
but will start preparatory activation (about 20 seconds).
l
After preparatory activation, the temperature of the scanning
lamp is controlled so that it remains the selected level (about 70°
C). When the temperature falls below the selected level, the copy
module turns on the scanning lamp heater; when the temperature
rises above the selected level, the copy module turns off the
scanning lamp heater.
Checking the condition (wear) of the scanning lamp
The condition of the scanning lamp is checked at the following times:
EN
l
The intensity duty value while the scanning lamp remains on is
read every 100 ms (approximately), and the value is found to be
higher than a specific level.
l
The temperature of the scanning lamp while it remains on is
detected by the scanning lamp thermistor, and the value is found
to be higher than the selected level (130° C).
l
The time taken by the scanning lamp to reach a specific level is
monitored each time the lamp turns on, and it does not reach a
specific level within a specific time (two seconds, approximately).
l
When the luminous distribution of the scanning lamp lowers, and
the deterioration falls outside the compensated range by shading
correction.
Copy module 195
If any of the above four conditions is detected, the copy module
assumes the end of the scanning lamp, and indicates a message
under COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC > FL-LIFE in service mode.
To replace the scanning lamp, see “Removing the scanning lamp and
scanning lamp heater” on page 357.
Detecting errors
Table 58 shows the types of errors that are related to the scanning
lamp and scanning lamp heater.
Table 58. Scanning lamp/scanning lamp heater errors
Code
Cause
Description
E211
The scanning lamp thermistor
has an open circuit.
The temperature has fallen below a specific
level while it was controlled to 70° C.
E215
The scanning lamp thermistor
has a short circuit.
When the FLONOUT signal is off (including
at time of power-on), the thermistor of the
scanning lamp heater has detected 170° C
or more.
E216
The scanning lamp does not
turn on in 15 seconds.
The intensity sensor does not detect light
from the scanning lamp within 15 seconds.
E217
The scanning lamp heater is
out of order.
While the scanning lamp is controlled to a
specific temperature by the scanning lamp
heater, its temperature does not exceed
the selected level after supplying the lamp
heater with power for three minutes or
more.
E218
The scanning lamp is out of
order.
The scanning lamp is not installed (as after
replacement work). Or, the filament of the
lamp is broken.
E219
The scanning lamp has
reached the end of its life.
While the scanning lamp is on, the
thermistor of the scanning lamp heater has
detected 150° C or more.
196 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Identifying the size of originals when copying
from the glass
The copy module identifies the size of an original in reference to an
original placed on the copyboard glass, and turns on the following
functions based on the identified size:
Figure 90.
EN
l
Automatic paper selection
l
Automatic ratio selection
Paper selection sensors
Copy module 197
Original-size sensors
The original-size sensors (figure 91) are reflective and are mounted
under the copyboard glass (callout 1) to identify the size of originals
(callout 2) placed on the copyboard glass. When the copyboard glass
cover (callout 3) is brought down to an angle of approximately 30°, a
flag blocks photointerrupter PS102 (callout 4) and it turns on. For 15
seconds after PS 102 turns on, or until START is pressed, the output
level of each sensor is read at intervals of approximately 0.1 seconds.
If the level of the output remains the same during the period, the copy
module assumes the presence of an original over the sensor, and
identifies the size of the original as shown in tables 59 and 60. This
way, the copy module can also identify the size of a black original.
The level of the output of a sensor will not change under conditions a
and b below; in the case of c, the copy module shows a screen on the
control panel, in response to a press on COPY START, for selecting a
cassette in the case of auto paper selection or for selecting an
original size in the case of auto ratio selection.
a A3-size black original
b Book original (thickness prevents changes in the sensor
level)
c Copyboard cover open (PS 102 is off)
Note
In each case above, the copy module can incorrectly identify the size
of the original.
Note
For automatic size-detection of ADF-fed originals, see “Detecting
originals” on page 269.
2
4
2
3
30°
2
1
2
Figure 91.
Sensor operation
198 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Identifying the size of originals
The reader controller PCB identifies the size of an original based on
signals indicating the presence or absence of an original.
l
Unchanged: the output of the sensor is read about every 100 ms
after the copyboard cover opened/closed sensor turns on. The
notation “unchanged” means that the sensor output remained
unchanged, detecting the presence of an original.
l
Changed: the output of the sensor is read about every 100 ms
after the copyboard cover opened/closed sensor turns on. The
notation “changed” means that the sensor output has changed,
detecting the absence of an original.
Table 59. Identifying original size, metric
Original size sensor
Original size
1
4
unchanged
unchanged
changed
unchanged
A4
unchanged
changed
A5
changed
changed
A3
A4R
Table 60. Identifying original-size, inches
Original-size
EN
Original-size sensor
2
3
4
11-by-17
unchanged
unchanged
unchanged
Legal
changed
unchanged
unchanged
Letter-R
changed
unchanged
changed
Letter
unchanged
changed
changed
Copy module 199
Copy module image processing system
The image processing system converts optical images from the
scanning system into electrical signals, which are then sent to the
laser exposure system of the printer. The image processing system
also performs corrections and various image processing to the
electrical images. The image processing system consists of a CCD,
CCD driver PCB, and AP-IP PCB.
Copy module
Figure 92.
Image processing unit
Note
The reader controller PCB is pass-through only with regard to copy
data.
200 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
CCD
The CCD (charge-coupled device) consists of a 3-line CCD
composed of about 7,500 photocells. Each CCD line is covered with a
blue, green, or red filter (callout 1) and consists of a transfer block
(callout 2) and an output block. The output of the odd-numbered
photocells (callout 3) and the output of the even-numbered photocells
(callout 3) are sent out by output blocks A and B, respectively. This
way, the CCD sends out image signals simultaneously in six
channels. This split speeds up the signal processing.
2
1
2
3
2
Figure 93.
EN
CCD lines and filters
Copy module 201
CCD driver
The image signals generated by the CCD are sent through a buffer
(low-impedance circuit) for reduction of impedance and then to the
AP-IP PCB.
Figure 94.
CCD circuit
202 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
AP-IP (analog image processing) PCB
The analog image processing circuit processes the output from the
CCD for the following:
l
Odd- and even-number bit synthesis
l
BGR level matching
l
A/D conversion circuit
l
ABC circuit
The image signals coming from the CCD in six channels are held for
sampling by the sample hold signals (SH1 through SH4) for
extracting signal components. Thereafter, BGR signal levels are
matched according to the BGR gain and offset signals for correction
of photo conversion efficiencies (of the B, G, and R CCD lines); then,
the results are synthesized into B, G, and R image signals according
to the select signal (SEL). The A/D conversion circuit operates in
response to the ADCLK signal, and serves to convert B, G, and R
image signals into 8-bit digital signals for input to the image processor
block.
Figure 95.
EN
Analog circuit
Copy module 203
ABC (auto background control) circuit
AE Mode
The copy module's AE mode (in black-and-white text mode) may be
set to either of the following:
l
Priority on speed (factory default)
l
Priority on image quality
In general, “priority on speed” is best for mostly text originals,
and turns out first prints in a short time because of the absence of
pre-scanning. “Priority on image quality” is best for originals
consisting mostly of images. In “priority on image quality” mode, the
copy module uses different density correction curves according to
types of originals, and performs pre-scanning over the entire face of
the original to take measurements of the density.
ABC circuit
The A/D conversion circuit converts BGR analog image signals
representing each single line in main scanning direction from the
CCD into 8-bit digital image signals for B, G, and R. The circuit
operates in reference to reference voltage. The range (the difference
between maximum output level and minimum output level) increases
and decreases in response to increases and decreases in the
reference voltage, affecting the level of signals after A/D conversion.
In auto background control (ABC), the range of the reference voltage
is varied according to the A/D conversion circuit output signal level to
vary the background level of an original to enable adjustment of the
density of the background.
204 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Figure 96.
G image signal
As shown in figure 96 above, the range A of a white background
original is varied (as in the case of the range B of a colored
background original) to “white out” a colored background. In addition,
the ABC circuit is designed to return image signals resulting from A/D
conversion to the ABC circuit for identification of the level of the A/D
conversion circuit output signals. The result of identification
(reference voltage) is sent to the A/D conversion circuit.
EN
Copy module 205
Digital image processing
Digital image processing is performed by the PCBs shown in table 61.
These PCBs make up the image processor block of the copy module.
The BGR image signals from the analog image processing block are
converted into CMYK image signals in the digital image processing
block. At the same time, individual data units are subjected to data
conversion for various image processing effects specified by the user
on the control panel. At the end of data conversion, the image data is
sent to the printer unit in the form of 8-bit image signals.
Table 61. PCB functions
PCB
Functions
AP-IP PCB
Shading correction, 3-line position matching, sensor
color correction, background cancellation, logarithmic
correction, text identification, pre-enlargement/-reduction
processing, enlargement/reduction and image
processing, density processing, anti-counterfeit
processing, black text generation (black extraction, etc.)
ECO-2 PCB
Assists AP-IP PCB (anti-counterfeiting)
206 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Figure 97.
Digital image processing
Gm
MJ
KRO
KMJ
L
Ca
Cb
EN
G Image signal for text detection
Text detection signal
Black pixel signal
Black text identification signaL
Luminous component signal
Color component signal
Color component signal
Copy module 207
Shading correction
The output of the CCD is not necessarily uniform even when the light
it receives is from an original with perfectly uniform density for the
following reasons:
l
The sensitivity of each CCD pixel is different.
l
The level of lens transmission differs between the middle and
ends.
l
The intensity of the scanning lamp differs between the middle of
the lamp and its ends.
l
The scanning lamp deteriorates over time.
Shading correction is performed to make up for these discrepancies.
Shading correction overview
The CCD measures the intensity of light reflected by a standard white
plate (very uniform density) (callout 1). Values generated from this
process are used to correct data gathered from each scanned
original.
Correction values are taken from the standard white plate each time
START is pressed.
If the standard white plate is ever replaced, the value printed under its
bar code (callout 2) must be entered in service mode.
The shading correction circuit compares the measurement data
gathered by the CCD from the standard white plate and the target
value from the numbers recorded on the standard white plate. It then
uses this comparison to calculate a “shading correction value” that is
stored in memory.
2
2
1
Figure 98.
Copyboard glass
Scanning lamp and lens
208 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
2
1
2
4
255
2
2
5
2
3
2
6
0
Figure 99.
Black
White
2
7
Shading correction measurement
1
CCD output
2
Target value (TRGT)
3
Measurement data
4
Characteristics after correction
5
Characteristics before correction
6
Standard white plate
7
Original density
Note
The color balance of light areas may be adjusted in service mode
(ADJUST > COLOR > OFST-Y/M/C/K).
Note
Shading correction tends to be stronger over areas where scratches
or dirt exist on the standard white plate, leading to vertical white lines
on printed pages. If such a problem occurs and cannot be corrected
after cleaning the standard white plate, replace the standard white
plate.
EN
Copy module 209
CCD 3-line position matching
The CCD consists of three CCD arrays, each covered with an R, G,
or B filter. The line image from any CCD at any point in time,
therefore, is subject to a discrepancy of about 0.33 mm (12-line
equivalent) in reference to the copyboard glass. To correct these
discrepancies, the R and G image signals are first stored in the line
memory temporarily, and are sent out after synchronization with the B
image signals.
The delay in the B image signal is maximized at 400% enlargement,
requiring a 96-line delay of the R image signal and a 48-line delay of
the G image signal. For example, at 320% enlargement, the R image
signal must be delayed by 51.2 lines. To enable the delay, the
following correction will be performed using the data of adjacent
pixels:
pixel data of the 76.8th line
= 0.2 x (pixel data of the 76th line)
+ 0.8 x (pixel data of the 77th line)
0.3 mm (8 lines)
Original
Figure 100.
CCD position matching
210 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Text identification (character edge detection)
As shown in figure 101, the text identification block identifies the
edges of characters according to the Gm signal of the G image
signal. It compares the Gm signal of the pixel in question and multiple
pixels adjacent to it detect the edge component; it then identifies
whether the pixel in question is part of the edge of a character or not
based on the size of the edge component and the distribution of edge
components. When the copy module identifies it as part of an edge, it
generates the MJ signal (text detection signal). The MJ signal,
however, will suffer a delay of 12 lines in the test identification block,
requiring that the Gm image signal be advanced by 12 lines in
relation to the G' image signal.
The copy module generates the Gm image signal ahead of time by 12
lines so that the MJ signal (text detection signal) from the text
identification block will match the R'/G'/B' image signal. In other
words, the line image at this point in time would be as follows:
R'/G'/B' image signal = MJ signal (text detection signal)
Figure 101.
EN
Text identification
Copy module 211
Sensor color correction block
The sensor color correction block consists of a circuit used to correct
the transmission characteristics of the R, G, and B filters of the CCD.
Each filter lets through light of wavelengths outside a specific range,
requiring color correction. In the case of the G filter, the filter lets
through light of wavelengths falling within a and c and blocks out light
of wavelengths falling within b (figure 102).
2
2
1
Figure 102.
Sensor color correction measurement
The following computations are made so as to correct the actual
characteristics (callout 1) and bring them closer to the ideal
characteristics (callout 2).
R out
a11 a12 a13 R
G out = a21 a22 a23 G
B out
a31 a32 a33 B
l
R, G, B: input signal to the color correction circuit
l
Rout, Gout, Bout: output signal from the color correction circuit
l
a11 to a 33: correction coefficients
212 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Background cancellation (background level
adjustment)
When reading the light reflected by an original, the CCD also reads
the color data of the surface (background) of the paper. To correct the
image signal, the background cancellation block sets aside
background data or correction of the image signal, preventing fogging
and improving the level of reproduction. The pixels are identified as
representing the background of an original if the level of each
frequently appearing R, G, and B signal is 200 or higher (figure 103).
Figure 103.
Background pixel measurement
The collection of extended modes (accessible via the administrative
functions menu and image adjustment; see the copy module user
guide) provides two modes, each with a different method of
correction:
EN
l
In “background omission mode,” the level of RGB signal of the
background pixels is corrected to 255 to remove the specified
background color.
l
In “anti-see-through mode” or “second side removal mode,” the
RGB signal of the background pixels are removed from the image
data for the entire image area to remove the image on the other
side of the original.
Copy module 213
R/G/B->L/Ca/Cb conversion, L/CaCb->R/G/B
conversion
As shown in figure 97 on page 207, in the R/G/B->L/Ca/Cb
conversion block, the RGB image signal is converted to chromatic
spaces of L (light area component) and Ca/Cb (color component).
L=(R+2G+B)/4
Ca=(R-G)/2
Cb=(R+G-2B)/4
Using L/Ca/Cb, the copy module performs spatial filter processing
and chromatic identification. After spatial filter processing and
chromatic identification, the copy module then performs L/Ca/Cb->R/
G/B conversion.
R=(4L+5Ca+2Cb)/4
G=(4L-3Ca+2Cb)
B=(4L+Ca-6Cb)/4
Spatial filter processing / chromatic identification
The copy module performs spatial filter processing based on the
edge component computed from the L (luminous component) signal
and the Ca/Cb (chromatic component) signal component and the MJ
(text detection) signal from the text identification block. During spatial
filter processing, the copy module performs computations to generate
images which are sharp or soft according to the combination of
printing modes selected on the control panel, or the sharpness setting
on the control panel.
If image data as shown in figure 104 on page 215 is input and “lower
sharpness” is selected, the output level will be as shown in figure 105
on page 215. With the “lower sharpness” setting, the variations in
density of an image are evened out to produce a soft image.
In “higher sharpness,” the contrast of an image is emphasized to
produce a crisp image.
214 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Figure 104.
Input level
Figure 105.
Weak and strong sharpness
The copy module also performs chromatic identification (used for
ACS, black text identification) based on the L (luminous component)
signal and the Ca/Cb (chromatic component) signal. After chromatic
identification, the copy module generates the KMJ signal in the form
of a 1-bit black text identification signal using logical integration on the
results of computation on the achromatic (KRO) signal, and the MJ
signal.
EN
Copy module 215
Logarithmic correction and BGR->YMC conversion
A
Logarithmic Correction
The output of the CCD has linear characteristics in relation to the light
reflected by an original. However, the density perceived when looking
at an original does not necessarily have linear characteristics. Figure
106 shows the relationship between the density of an original
perceived by the eye and the output of the CCD.
Figure 106.
Original density compared to CCD output
To correct the discrepancy, the copy module performs a level
conversion as shown in figure 107.
Figure 107.
Density level conversion
216 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
B
BGR->YMC Conversion
The copy module generates YMC signals taking advantage of the fact
that BGR chromatic components are in a complementary relationship
to YMC toners (reflected light).
Table 62. BGR->YMC conversion
Chromatic light
Toner Y
Figure 108.
EN
M
C
B
Absorbs
Reflects
Reflects
G
Reflects
Absorbs
Reflects
R
Reflects
Reflects
Absorbs
BGR and YMC levels
Copy module 217
The level of transmission of each filter (B, G, R) of the CCD and the
density (Y, M, C) of the original are in a complementary relationship;
level conversion is performed as in figure 109 to generate the Y, M,
and C signals.
Figure 109.
BGR to YMC conversion
Note
_
_
_
Y = B, M = G, C = R
218 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
UCR (under color removal) processing
In theory, when equal parts of Y, M, and C toners are mixed, black
will be generated (absence of light). However, since no toner
possesses pure chromatic absorption characteristics, mixing the
three colors (as in YMC conversion) in equal parts will not produce a
pure black. In this block, the Bk signal is generated using the Y, M,
and C signals. Text characters signal for the addition of Bk to the Y,
M, and C signals, with the aim of improving black reproduction.
Gray
component
Figure 110.
EN
Gray components
Copy module 219
Specifically, the Bk signal is generated as follows:
The gray component of the YMC signal is as shown in figure 111.
Figure 111.
Bk signal
The gray component on the figure is removed, and is replaced with
the Bk signal. The size of the component that has been replaced is
referred to as “UCR amount,” and it is 100% in the case of figure 111.
With URC at 100%, Bk toner would be used on the entire image,
causing shading in light areas. The UCR amount, therefore, is
increased or decreased in relation to the text signal, limiting it to less
than 100%. This processing is performed for each pixel.
Figure 112.
UCR amount
220 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Output masking
A color image is reproduced using color toners since the Y toner
absorbs only B components, the M toner absorbs only the G
component, and the C toner absorbs only the R component.
In reality, however, no toner possesses chromatic absorption
characteristics as depicted in figure 113. In general, Y toner
possesses good absorption characteristics: however, M toner is
affected by B components, while C toner is affected by G and B
components (see circled areas). In other words, M toner has a
chromatic reproduction quality that includes Y components, while C
toner has a chromatic reproduction quality that includes M and Y
components.
Figure 113.
Chromatic absorption characteristics
If Y and M toners were mixed in an attempt to reproduce red,
therefore, the Y component of the M toner would cause the result to
have a reddish tinge, requiring removal (masking) of the Y
component from the Y toner in advance. In this block, the excess
component of each toner is corrected by means of masking.
EN
Copy module 221
Enlargement/reduction and image processing
1
Enlargement/reduction
a Horizontal reproduction ratio (main scanning direction)
Data units may be skipped when they are written into the memory
(reduction) or read multiple times from the memory
(enlargement).
b Vertical reproduction ratio (sub-scanning direction)
The scanner is moved at different speeds, thereby changing the
width of scanning a single pixel on an original.
Table 63. Enlargement/reduction and image processing
Reproduction in
scanning
direction
Direct
Reduce
Enlarge
All data units are
written into or read from
the memory as they
are.
To reduce by half,
every other data unit is
written into the
memory.
To enlarge by 200%, all
data units are written
into the memory as
they are, but each data
unit is read twice.
The scanner is moved
faster to increase the
width of scanning a
single pixel on an
original.
The scanner is moved
slower to decrease the
width of scanning a
single pixel on an
original.
Reproduction in
sub-scanning
direction
222 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
2
Enlargement Correction
In enlargement, the image data is corrected so that the difference
in density between pixels will not vary excessively. Figure 114
shows the image data of an original, image data in enlargement,
and image data after enlargement correction.
Figure 114.
EN
Enlargement/correction
Copy module 223
3
Shift
The following diagrams provide an outline of the principles of how
an image is shifted in main and sub scanning directions.
Figure 115.
Image shifts
Figure 116.
Shift in main and sub-scanning directions
224 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
The position of an original may be shifted as follows by combining
a shift in main scanning direction and a shift in sub-scanning
direction:
• Center shift
The copy module computes the coordinates (Xm, Ym) of a
corner which make the top/bottom and left/right margins of the
copy equal, based on the size of the area to be moved and the
size of the copy paper; then, it moves X1 and Y1 to the corner.
• Left/right bind and top/bottom bind
The copy module shifts the entire image of the original to
create a margin (for binding).
• Selective shift
The copy module shifts the image over a selected distance.
Note
Xmax - (X2 - X1)
———————
2
Ymax - (Y2 - Y1)
———————
2
Figure 117.
EN
Center Shift
Copy module 225
4
Mirror image
When reading data for a single scan from the RAM, reading is
started in reverse direction to create a mirror image in relation to
main scanning direction.
Sub scanning direction
<Original>
Main scanning direction
<Copy>
Figure 118.
Mirror image
Figure 119.
Mirror image principle
226 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
5
Image repeat
When reading data for a single scan from the RAM, an S address
(read start address) and an E address (read end address) are
specified. Then, reading is started with the S address and, upon
reaching the E address, reading is continued while returning to
the S address. A repeat image is created by repeating this
operation.
Sub scanning direction
<Original>
Main scanning direction
S address
E address
<Copy>
Figure 120.
Image repeat
Figure 121.
Image repeat principle
EN
Copy module 227
6
Slant
When reading data for a single scan from the RAM, the starting
address (S address) is shifted by an n number of lines for slant
processing.
Sub scanning direction
<Original>
Main scanning direction
Figure 122.
<Copy>
Slant
Address
12345678...
Figure 123.
...nnn
-1 -2
Slant principle
228 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Density processing
The correction curve for density processing varies with the following:
a Setting of the Copy Density key on the control panel
b Setting of color balance (control panel)
c Setting of color balance (service mode) (COPIER > ADJUST >
COLOR > ADJ-Y/M/C/K)
d Adjusting the light area density and color balance in service
mode COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR > OFST-Y/M/C/K
e Black-and-white text mode
As shown in figure 124, the dark or the light curve is selected to suit
items a. through d. In the case of black-and-white text mode (item e.),
the curve shown in figure 125 will be selected to produce a copy free
of image, yet with dark text characters.
Copy density
Original density
Figure 124.
Curve for items A through D
Copy density
Original density
Figure 125.
EN
Curve for black-and-white text mode
Copy module 229
Framing and blanking
For framing and blanking, as many as four areas and as many as 10
points may be selected.
l
Framing
The signals representing areas outside the selected areas of an
original are forced to represent white.
Figure 126.
Framing
l
Blanking
As opposed to framing, the signals inside the selected area of an
original are forced to represent white.
Figure 127.
Blanking
230 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Anti-counterfeit processing
The copy module is equipped with the following two functions
designed to prevent counterfeiting of bank notes or securities
certificates.
l
Tracking
A unique ID number (stored in the copy module memory) is
printed on all copies, invisible to the eye, so that any counterfeit
of a bank note or a securities certificate produced by the copy
module can be traced to the copy module. This identification
number is not printed on the printed pages.
l
Bank note detection
• If the copy module judges an original to be a bank note
(registered in its memory), it produces a solid black print.
• If an original is replaced in continuous printing mode with an
original judged to be a bank note, the copy module will
produce a solid black print for the original.
EN
Copy module 231
Control panel
The control panel consists of the PCBs shown in figure 128 on page
233 and a liquid crystal display (LCD) capable of displaying images in
320 by 240 dots, and has the following functions:
l
Data communication
l
LCD processing
l
LCD contrast adjustment
l
Touch switch input processing
Data communication
The communication of data is controlled by the CPU on the reader
controller PCB.
LCD processing
The CPU on the reader controller PCB provides the control panel
CPU PCB with data (display data) as instructed by the program. The
data is moved through the control panel CPU PCB to the LCD panel.
LCD contrast adjustment
The control panel is equipped with a dial to enable the user to adjust
the contrast of the LCD. The user may turn the dial to adjust the
contrast to suit his/her preference.
Control panel CPU
The control panel CPU has the following functions:
l
Monitoring the key inputs (communicates keypad and function
key inputs to the CPU on the reader controller PCB)
l
Controlling the buzzer sound
l
Turning off and on the control panel LEDs
232 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Figure 128.
EN
Control panel
Copy module 233
Fan
The copy module is equipped with a single fan to cool the copy
module. Figure 129 shows the location of the fan and the air
movement when the fan is turned on. Table 64 shows its function,
filter, direction, and associated error code.
Figure 129.
Copy module fan
Table 64. Copy module fan
Notation
Name
Filter
Function
Error code
FM4
Power supply
cooling fan
Air
Cools the
power supply
unit (copy
module).
E809
Figure 130.
Cooling fan engaged
Note
To prevent overheating of the copy module, the power supply cooling
fan (FM4) does not stop when the control panel power soft switch is
turned off.
234 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Power supply
Figure 131 and figure 132 show the distribution of power inside the
copy module. The AC power sent to the copy module main power
supply is turned on and off by the copy module rear power switch
(MSW1). When the copy module main power supply PCB is supplied
with AC power, +5V is generated. When the control panel power
supply soft switch is turned on, the power cut relay ON signal
(RL1ON) is sent through the reader controller PCB to turn on the
power cut relay, thereby supplying the printer unit with AC power. The
copy module main power supply PCB generates +5V, +5VA, +5.2V, 12V, +15V, +24V, and +40V.
Power saving function
The copy module is provided with “low power mode” and “auto power
save mode.”
Table 65. Power saving function
Copy module
rear power
State of power switch
Control panel
power soft
switch
Fuser
assembly
Low-power mode ON
ON
OFF
Auto power save
mode
ON
Variable
temperature
control
ON
l
Low power mode—In low power mode, the fusing assembly is
turned off to reduce power consumption.
l
Auto power save mode—In auto power save mode, the fuser
assembly remains on; however, the temperature control target is
lowered to reduce power consumption.
Protective function
The copy module main power supply PCB is equipped with an
overcurrent protective function and an overvoltage protective function
which will automatically shut off power to prevent damage to the
power supply circuit if an overcurrent or an overvoltage occurs as a
result of a fault in any of the loads (for example, short circuit). To
reset the copy module, turn off the control panel power supply soft
switch, turn off the copy module rear power switch, disconnect the
power plug, remove the cause of activation, and turn on the power
once again. The protection circuit may be reset by turning off the copy
EN
Copy module 235
module rear power switch, leaving the copy module alone for
approximately three minutes, and turning on the copy module rear
power switch/control panel power soft switch.
Figure 131.
Power
236 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
CAUTION
The printer power supply is under the control of the copy module rear
power supply switch and the control panel power soft switch. Be sure
to mount the switch cover that comes with the copy module after turning
on the power switch upon installation of the copy module.
Do not connect the power cord of the printer to an external power outlet.
Be sure to connect the power cord of the printer only to the outlet of
the copy module. Connecting the printer power cord directly to an
external outlet is acceptable when troubleshooting.
Do not disconnect or connect cables (lattice connectors) used to
connect accessories (for example, the ADF) and connectors used to
connect various units while the copy module remains powered (the
copy module rear power switch is on) to prevent blowing the protective
fuse on the secondary side of the power supply.
(not available
for LJ 8550 MFP)
ADF
Figure 132.
EN
Copy module power distribution
Copy module 237
Accessories power supply PCB
The copy module is equipped with an accessory power supply PCB
for the ADF. The accessories power supply PCB receives DC power
from the copy module main power supply PCB (after AC activation);
+24V is sent to each load (ADF) in response to the remote signal
from the reader controller PCB. As in the case of the copy module
main power supply PCB and the printer unit low-voltage power supply
PCB, the accessories power supply PCB is equipped with an
overcurrent protective function and an overvoltage protective function
to automatically cut off the output voltage to prevent damage to the
power supply PCB in the event of an overcurrent or an overvoltage.
To reset the accessories power supply PCB, turn off the control panel
power soft switch, turn off the copy module rear power switch,
disconnect the power plug, remove the cause of activation (usually a
bad component or a short), and then turn on the power.
To reset the copy module protection circuit, turn off the copy module
rear power switch for approximately three minutes, and then turn on
the copy module rear power supply and control panel power soft
switch.
CAUTION
Do not disconnect or connect cables (lattice connectors) used to
connect accessories (for example, the ADF) and connectors used to
connect various units while the copy module remains powered (the
copy module rear power switch is on) to prevent blowing the protective
fuse on the secondary side of the power supply.
The ratings of the fuses used on the secondary side of the copy
module main power supply and the accessories power supply are as
follows:
238 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Table 66. Copy module main power supply
Signal
Rating
FU1501, FU1505, FU1514
1 A, 60 V
FU1506, FU1512, FU1518
2 A, 60 V
FU1516, FU1517
0.25 A, 60 V
FU1502, FU1503, FU1504,
FU1519
0.4 A, 60 V
FU1507
4 A, 60 V
FU1515
0.5 A, 60 V
FU1511, FU1513
5 A, 60 V
FU1509
0.63 A, 60 V
FU1508
7 A, 60 V
F1
10 A, 125 V
F12, F18
1 A, 60 V
F19, F20, F24, F28
2 A, 60 V
F29, F30
0.25 A, 60 V
F11, F13, F14, F15, F17
0.4 A, 60 V
F27
4 A, 60 V
F16
0.5 A, 60 V
F21, F23
5 A, 60 V
F25
0.63 A, 60 V
F26
7 A, 60 V
Table 67. Accessories power supply (secondary side)
EN
Signal
Rating
FU1801
10 A, 60 V
FU1802
1 A, 60 V
Copy module 239
Reader unit main power supply PCB
Reader controller PCB
Figure 133.
Copy module general circuit diagram (1 of 2)
240 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Reader unit main power supply PCB
Reader controller PCB
EN
Copy module 241
Figure 134.
Copy module general circuit diagram (2 of 2)
242 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
EN
Copy module 243
ADF
ADF electrical circuitry
The ADF’s electrical mechanisms are controlled by the DADF
controller PCB. A microprocessor (CPU) is used on the DADF
controller PCB, and the microprocessor reads the input signals from
the sensors and the copy module and generates signals used to drive
dc loads (motors, solenoids) at such times dictated by ADF firmware.
Accessories
Figure 135.
244
ADF electrical circuitry
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Communication with the copy module
The operation modes selected on the copy module are
communicated to the ADF in an IPC communication method.
Likewise, the operation states of the ADF are communicated to the
copy module in an IPC communication.
If an error occurs in the IPC communication, the self-diagnosis
function in the copy module turns on to indicate “E712” on its control
panel.
Figure 136.
EN
Operation mode communication
ADF 245
Inputs and outputs to the DADF controller
PCB
Figure 137.
246
Inputs to the DADF controller PCB (1 of 2)
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Figure 138.
EN
Inputs to the DADF controller PCB (2 of 2)
ADF 247
Figure 139.
248
Outputs to the DADF controller PCB
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Basic operation
The ADF uses four motors and one clutch to pick up, feed, and
deliver originals.
The pick-up motor (M1) serves to pick up originals. The ADF motor
(M2) serves to pick up originals and reverse and deliver originals. The
belt motor (M3) moves and stops originals to and on the copyboard
glass, and delivers them. The delivery motor (M5) operates to deliver
originals to the delivery tray.
The clutch (CL) is used to engage or disengage the drive of the ADF
motor (M2) and the belt motor (M3).
Figure 140.
EN
ADF motors
ADF 249
Functional overview
The ADF performs the following five operations:
250
l
Top pick-up mode original-feeding
l
Single-sided original to double-sided copy
l
Double-sided original to single-sided copy
l
Double-sided original to double-sided copy using the standard
duplexing unit
l
Two small-size originals (A4- or letter-size) to reduced page
composition
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Top pick-up feeding
The ADF picks up the originals on the
document tray from the top (first page of
the stack), and places them on the
copyboard glass.
Each time an original has been read, the
ADF moves the original from the
copyboard glass to the original delivery
tray.
Figure 141.
EN
Top pick-up path
ADF 251
Double-sided original mode
The ADF feeds double-sided originals in two ways depending on the
specified printer output tray.
l
If the output tray is the left, or face up, output tray (default when
copying double-sided originals, the procedure is as follows:
1 Pick up the original.
2 Copy the first side.
3 Reverse the original.
4 Copy the second side.
5 Reverse the original.
6 Deliver the original.
See figure 142 on page 253.
l
If the output tray is forced to the top, or face down, output tray,
the procedure is as follows:
1 Pick up the original.
2 Reverse the original.
3 Copy the second side.
4 Reverse the original.
5 Copy the first side.
6 Deliver the original.
See figure 143 on page 254.
252
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Figure 142.
EN
Face-up (left) output tray
ADF 253
Figure 143.
254
Face-down (top) output tray
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Reduced page composition mode
When reducing and copying two originals in page composition mode,
the ADF automatically picks up two originals and places them on the
copyboard glass side by side. Table 68 shows the sizes of originals
that may be used in the ADF.
Table 68. Page composition sizes
Europe/Asia (A4)
U.S. (Letter)
A5
STMT
B5
LTR
A4
Figure 144.
EN
Page composition copy sequences
ADF 255
Picking up originals
The ADF uses top pick-up mode (that is, top separation, in which the
top sheet of the stack of originals is picked up first). See figure 145 for
the construction of the pick-up assembly.
Note
The names of the separation belt and feed roller do not match their
actual functions. Their roles are reversed.
2
3
2
4
2
2
1
2
5
2
6
Figure 145.
Picking up originals
1
Registration roller
2
Feed roller (separation function)
3
Separation roller (feed function)
4
Paper retaining plate
5
Pick-up roller
6
Paper stopper plate
When the pick-up motor starts to rotate counterclockwise, the arm on
the pick-up roller shaft transmits its drive to the original guide and the
switching arm. In response, the original guide moves downward.
Then, the rear and the front of the separation belt operating in
connection with the switching arm move upward to start the pick-up
operation.
256
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Pick-up operation
When top pick-up mode is executed with originals on the document
tray, the following will take place:
1
Figure 146.
EN
Pick-up separation
The paper stop plate is brought down, and the paper retaining
plate is moved down to the stack of originals; then, the first page
of the stack is picked up. After pick-up, the original is fed between
the separation belt and the feeding roller to prevent double
feeding.
Pick-up path
ADF 257
2
Figure 147.
Feeding sequence
3
Figure 148.
258
Arching
The original is butted against the registration roller so that it
arches. This ensures that the original will be fed without rotational
skew.
Feeding
The feeding belt, registration roller, and separation belt are
rotated to move the original to the copyboard glass.
Feeding
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
4
Figure 149.
EN
Picking up the second original
When the original reaches the correct position on the copyboard
glass, the copy module scanner starts to move forward. At the
same time, the second original is picked up (if A4- or letter-size).
In the case of a large-size original (A3-size or 11-by-17 inch), the
second original is picked up after delivery of the first original.
Second original pick-up
ADF 259
Sequence of operations (A4, two originals, top pickup mode)
Figure 150.
260
Sequence of operations (A4, 2 originals, top pick-up mode)
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Reversal operation
Reversal may be either from the first side to the second side, or from
the second side to the first side. (Since the same mechanism is
involved, the discussions herein will be on reversal from the first side
to the second side.)
l
Picking up for the first side
An original is moved from the document tray to the copyboard
glass.
l
Reversal/feeding
The feeding belt is rotated clockwise to feed the original off the
copyboard glass and to the reversing roller.
l
Reversal/delivery switching
The paper deflecting solenoid (SL3) is turned on to open the
paper deflecting plate so that the original is moved back to the
copyboard glass, reversing the original.
When the second side of the original is set on the copyboard
glass, the scanner starts to move forward.
While the scanner is moving in reverse, the original is reversed
once again so that its first side is set on the copyboard glass.
When the first side of the original has been copied, the original is
moved for delivery.
Figure 151.
Picking up for the first side
Figure 152.
Reversing from the first side to the second side
EN
ADF 261
Sequence of operations (reversal)
Figure 153.
262
Sequence of operations (reversal)
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Reduced page composition
In top pick-up mode, the originals are picked up starting with the top
sheet, not requiring reordering of the originals.
1
Figure 154.
Picking up the first original
Placement of first original
The first original is picked up and stopped on the copyboard
glass. For details of pick-up operation, see “Picking up originals”
on page 256.
2
Figure 155.
Positioning the first original and feeding the second original
Positioning the first original and pick-up of second original
The first original is moved back to adjust the sheet-to-sheet
distance. Then the two originals are moved simultaneously and
stopped on the glass at a specified position.
EN
ADF 263
3
Figure 156.
Feeding the first and second originals simultaneously
Movement of first and second originals
The clutch (CL) is turned on to eliminate the difference in speed
between the delivery/reversing roller an the feeding belt, and the
two originals are fed simultaneously.
4
Figure 157.
Delivering the first and second originals
Delivery of originals
When the original has been read, the feeding belt is rotated
counterclockwise, and the first and second originals are
delivered.
If there are third and fourth originals, the procedure repeats.
264
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Sequence of Operations (reduced page composition)
Figure 158.
EN
Sequence of operations (reduced page composition; top pickup)
ADF 265
Delivery operation
Figure 159.
Delivery path
The ADF delivers originals to the document delivery tray.
Figure 160.
Feeding the first original
The ADF delivers the original on the copyboard tray as follows:
1
Feeding the first original
The feeding belt is rotated counterclockwise to feed the first
original about 30 mm (to maintain the sheet-to-sheet distance
from the second original).
266
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
2
Figure 161.
Delivering the first original and picking up the second original
Delivering the first original and picking up the second original
The clutch (CL) is turned on to eliminate the difference in speed
between the delivery/reversing roller and the feeding belt; the first
original is moved for delivery, and the second original is picked
up.
3
Delivery to the document delivery tray
While the trailing edge of the original is moved to the document
delivery tray, the delivery motor (M5) switches to low speed to
deliver the original slowly.
EN
ADF 267
Sequence of operations (small size, pick-up and
delivery)
Figure 162.
268
Sequence of operations (small size, pick-up and delivery)
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Detecting originals
The ADF has the following types of document detection:
l
The presence or absence of an original on the document tray
l
The size of originals place on the document tray
l
The number of originals that have been copied
l
The trailing edge of the last original
Detecting the presence or absence of an original
The presence or absence of an original on the document tray is
detected by the document tray paper sensor (PS1).
When an original is placed in the document tray, the light between the
document tray paper sensor (S1) and the prism is blocked, causing
the document tray paper sensor (S1) to generate the original
detection signal (EMPS).
In response to the original detection signal (EMPS), the DADF
controller PCB turns on the original-set indicator (LED101, LED102).
Figure 163.
EN
Document tray paper signal
Original-set
indicator ON
signal
DADF controller PCB
Detecting an original
ADF 269
2
1
2
2
3
Figure 164.
270
Document tray
1
Original-set indicator
2
Original
3
Document tray
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Detecting the size of an original
The ADF detects the size of an original in relation to the vertical
(feeding) and horizontal directions of the original, to provide correct
original size detection.
Detecting in vertical (feeding) direction
Detection in the vertical direction is made by the registration paper
sensor (S3) and the registration roller clock sensor (S11).
The registration paper sensor detects the leading and trailing edges
of an original, and the registration roller clock sensor detects the
rotation of the registration roller while the original moves past the
sensor. The rotation of the registration roller is converted to the length
of the original.
Pick-up detection signal
Figure 165.
EN
Registration roller clock signal
DADF controller PCB
Registration rollers
ADF 271
Detection in horizontal direction
Detection in the horizontal direction is made by the original-width
detecting volume (VR) on the document tray. The original-width
detecting volume operates in conjunction with the side guides
(callout 1) on the document tray. As its resistance varies, the changes
are detected by the DADF controller PCB, which converts them into
length in the horizontal direction.
1
DADF controller PCB
Figure 166.
Horizontal detection
The copy module identifies the size of an original in terms of a default
size based on the results of vertical and horizontal lengths
communicated by the ADF.
272
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Tables 69 and 70 show the default sizes that are identified:
Table 69. Europe/Asia (A4)
Vertical
Horizontal
Default
257 mm
177 to 187 mm
B5R
148.2 mm
205 to 215 mm
A5
330 mm
205 to 215 mm
A4R
330 mm
205 to 215 mm
FOOLSCAP
182 mm
252 to 262 mm
B5
364 mm
252 to 262 mm
B4
381 mm
274 to 284 mm
COMPUTER paper
210 mm
292 to 302 mm
A4
420 mm
292 to 302 mm
A3
Vertical
Horizontal
Default
140 mm
211 to 221 mm
STMT
279 mm
211 to 221 mm
LTRR
330 mm
211 to 221 mm
FOOLSCAP
456 mm
211 to 221 mm
LGL
216 mm
274 to 284 mm
LTR
381 mm
274 to 284 mm
COMPUTER paper
432 mm
274 to 284 mm
11-by-17 inches
Table 70. U.S. (Letter)
Note
EN
For vertical direction, a deviation of ±10 mm is ignored; for horizontal
direction, a deviation of ±5 mm is ignored. Outside the ranges, the
original will be identified as being of a non-default size.
ADF 273
Detecting the trailing edge of the last original
The ADF is designed to pick up originals to match the timing at which
the printer picks up paper.
If the length of an original is 220 mm or less, the ADF sets the first
original on the copyboard glass, and moves the second original
beyond the registration roller.
Figure 167.
Placement of original
If the recirculating lever is on the document tray is still resting on an
original, the ADF communicates to the printer that the third and
subsequent originals are present, and the printer picks up paper for
the next copied page.
When the recirculating lever on the document tray has dropped, the
ADF communicates to the printer that there is not third or subsequent
originals (RSS signal) so that the printer will not pick up additional
paper.
274
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Controlling the pick-up motor
The ADF motor is a dc motor. The microprocessor (Q1) on the DADF
controller PCB sends the pick-up motor drive signal (SMON), pick-up
motor rotation direction signal (SDIR), and the pick-up motor rotation
speed control signal (SMPWM) to the drive circuit.
In response, the drive circuit drives the pick-up motor according to
these three signals.
The control circuit is not equipped with a circuit used to provide the
microprocessor (Q1) with feedback, indicating the state of pick-up
rotation. As such, the pick-up motor rotation speed control signal
(SMPWM) remains constant at all times, and no correction is made
when the rotation speed of the pick-up motor fluctuates because of an
external force.
Figure 168.
EN
Control of pick-up motor
ADF 275
Table 71 shows the relationship between the pick-up motor drive
signal (SMON), pick-up motor rotation direction signal (SDIR), and
pick-up motor rotation speed control signal (SMPWM) and the
operation of the pick-up roller.
Table 71. Relationship between pick-up motor signals and the pick-up roller
Pick-up motor
drive signal
(SMON)
Pick-up motor
rotation
direction
signal (SDIR)
Pick-up motor
rotation speed
control signal
(SMPWM)
1
1
Pulses
The pick-up roller rotates in copier mode
pick-up direction (counterclockwise).
1
1
0
The pick-upper roll rotates by inertia in
copier mode pick-up direction.
1
0
Pulses
The pick-up roll rotates in fax mode pick-up
direction (clockwise).
1
0
0
The pick-upper roller rotates by inertia in
fax mode pick-up direction (clockwise).
0
1/0
1/0
The pick-upper roller stops.
276
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
Pick-up roller operation
EN
Controlling the belt motor
The belt motor is a dc motor.
The microprocessor (Q1) on the DADF controller PCB sends the belt
motor drive signal (BMON), belt motor rotation direction signal
(BDIR), and belt motor rotation speed control signal (BMPWM) to the
drive circuit.
When the belt motor begins to rotate, the belt motor clock sensor
(S10) sends the belt motor clock signal (BCLK1) to the
microprocessor (Q1). In response, the microprocessor (Q1)
compares the belt motor clock signal (BCLK1) against the rotation
speed stored in memory to vary the belt motor rotation speed control
signal (PMPWM) to make a match, causing the belt motor (M3) to
rotate at a specific speed at all times.
Figure 169.
EN
Control of belt motor
ADF 277
Table 72 shows the relationship between the belt motor drive signal
(BMON), belt motor rotation direction signal (BDIR), belt motor
rotation speed control signal (BMPWM), and the feeding belt.
Table 72. Relationship between belt motor drive signal and the feeding belt
Belt motor
drive signal
(BMON)
Belt motor
rotation
direction
signal (BDIR)
Belt motor
rotation speed
control signal
(BMPWM)
1
1
Pulses
The feeding belt rotates in pick-up direction
(counterclockwise).
1
1
0
The feeding belt rotates by inertial in pickup direction (clockwise).
1
0
Pulses
The feeding belt rotates in copier mode
delivery direction (clockwise).
1
0
0
The feeding belt rotates by inertial in copier
mode delivery direction (clockwise).
0
1/0
1/0
The feeding belt stops.
Feeding Belt
Protecting the belt motor from overcurrent
At times, overcurrent can occur because of a specific type of original
or state of the ADF. To protect the power supply circuit from extra
loads occurring because of continuing overcurrent while the belt is
rotating in pick-up direction, an overcurrent control circuit is provided.
278
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Detecting jams
Figure 170.
ADF jam sensors
Table 73. Jam detection sensors
S1
Document tray paper sensor
S3
Registration paper sensor
S4
Upper cover sensor
S6
Delivery sensor 1
S7
Pick-up sensor
S8
Reversal sensor
S12
Delivery sensor 2
S14
Recirculation sensor
MS1
ADF switch
MS2
Upper cover switch
The timing at which the ADF checks for jams is stored in memory in
the microprocessor on the DADF controller PCB, and a jam is
detected in terms of the presence or absence of paper at a specific
sensor at the time.
When a jam is detected, the ADF communicates the fact to the copy
module in the form of a code. The copy module reports the results of
these on the LCD and in service mode.
EN
ADF 279
Table 74. Jam detection
Function Jam Type
Sensor
Description
Code
Pick-up
Original
retraction
S1, S7
Sensor S7 does not detect the leading edge of an
original 1500 msec after the pick-up motor (M1) has
turned on and, in addition, sensor S1 does not detect
an original.
01H
Pick-up
Pick-up delay S7
Sensor S7 does not detect the leading edge of an
original 1500 msec after the pick-up motor (M1) has
turned on.
02H
Pick-up
Registration
delay
S3, S7
Sensor S3 does not detect the leading edge of an
original 350 msec after sensor S7 has detected the
leading edge of an original.
03H
Pick-up
Double
feeding
S3
Sensor S3 remains on even when the first original is
placed on the copyboard.
06H
Pick-up
Original
leading edge
retreat
S3
At the start of original pick-up, sensor S8 does not
detect the leading edge of an original.
08H
Reversal
Reversal
delay
S8
At time of original reversal or delivery, sensor S8 does 11H
not detect the leading edge of an original 140 mm or
225 msec after the belt motor (M3) has started to rotate
clockwise.
Reversal
Reversal
stationary
S8
At time of original reversal or delivery, sensor S8 does 12H
not detect the trailing edge of an original after a
reversal delay check.
Reversal
Reversal
delay 2
S8
At time of original delivery pick up, sensor S8 does not 13H
detect the preceding original 50 mm after the belt
motor has started to rotate counterclockwise. (The
original to be delivered is moved back to the copyboard
glass together with the original picked up.)
Reversal
Reversal
initial paper
S8
At time of original reversal, sensor S8 is on.
Reversal
Reversal
S3
pick-up delay
Reversal
Reversal
pick-up
stationary
Delivery
20H
At time of original reversal, sensor S3 does not detect 21H
the leading edge of the original that has been reversed
100 mm or 300 msec after sensor S8 has detected and
original.
Sensor S3 does not detect the trailing edge of an
original (original size + 180 mm) after sensor S8 has
been turned on.
23H
Delivery delay S6
At time of original delivery, sensor S6 does not detect
an original 100 mm or 250 msec after sensor S8 has
detected the leading edge of an original.
41H
Delivery
Delivery
Stationery
S6
42H
Sensor S6 does not detect the trailing edge of an
original 100 mm or 250 msec after a reversal stationary
check.
Delivery
ADF open
MS1
The ADF is open while in operation.
280
S3
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
81H
EN
Table 74. Jam detection (continued)
Function Jam Type
Sensor
Description
Code
Delivery
Upper cover
open
MS2, S4
The upper cover is open while the ADF is in operation. 82H
Delivery
Jam original
S1
Sensor S1 does not detect the original delivered on the 83H
document tray.
Delivery
Recirculating S6, S3, S8, At the start of original pick-up, sensor S6, S3, or S8
S7
(also S7 if the paper stopper plate is up) is on.
lever idle
rotation
(second
circulation or
latter)
Delivery
Residual
original
S8
When picking up for the first original is detected on the 88H
copyboard glass.
Double
Feeding
Double
feeding
S14
For the second circulation or later, the recirculation
lever rotates idly without coming into contact with an
original.
Delivery
Delivery
failure
S3,S6
At time of delivery in bottom separation pick-up mode. 84H
the original fails to stop (for example, the original that
has been picked up is longer than the original being
delivered).
Delivery
ADF open
MS1
While the copy module is at rest (because, for
example, the absence of paper) the ADF is open.
Delivery
Upper cover
opened
MS2, S4
While the copy module is at rest (because, for
example, the absence of paper) the upper cover is
opened
Delivery
Recirculating S13
lever idle
rotation
84H
89H
91H
At time of original pick-up, the recirculating lever fell off 93H
a stack of original.
Note
The ADF operation stops immediately upon detection of a jam.
Note
For a pick-up delay jam, reset the ADF by removing the original from
the document tray. For other types of jams, remove the originals from
the document tray, remove the jam from the ADF, and open the ADF.
EN
ADF 281
Improper placement of originals
Figure 171.
Improper placement of originals
Table 75. Improper placement of originals sensors
S1
Document tray paper sensor
S3
Registration paper sensor
S7
Pick-up sensor
S14
Recirculation sensor
An original, placed improperly, can cause a jam or damage to the
original. The ADF ensures that all originals are placed properly to
prevent jams or damage. The timing of a check is stored in the
microprocessor on the DADF controller, and detection is made in
terms of the presence/absence of paper over a specific sensor.
When the ADF detects an improperly placed original, it
communicates the fact to the copy module. The copy module will
report the results of these codes as errors on the LCD and in service
mode.
282
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Table 76. Improper placement detection
Fault
Sensor Description
ADF operation
Code
Recirculation lever
idle rotation
S11
Immediately after the
recirculation motor M4 starts
to operate, the recirculating
lever rotates idly without
coming into contact with an
original.
Stops operation immediately
upon detection.
01H
Pick-up failure
S7
Sensor S7 does not detect the
leading edge of an original
1500 msec after the start of
pickup.
The separation belt, feeding
roller, and pick-up roller stop
operation immediately. The
original moving in advance is
delivered after the end of
copying; then, the ADF stops
operation.
03H
Paper stopper plate
overriding
S7
At time of placement of
originals, the originals ride
over the paper stopper plate.
Stops operation immediately
upon detection.
05H
Count mismatch
S3
Stops operation immediately
The number of originals
placed on the document tray upon detection.
after jam removal is fewer than
the number of originals copied.
11H
Original count
S3
Stops operation after counting 12H
The recirculating lever does
100 sheets.
not fall under the document
tray, not enabling detection of
the last original.
Note: Normally, the document
tray can hold as many as 50
sheets of A5, STMT, A4, B5,
or LTR or 25 sheets of A3, B4,
11-by-17 inch, or LGL.
Original extraction
S14
Stops operation immediately
The recirculating lever fell
under the document tray while upon detection.
an original was being
processed.
13H
Wrong original size
S3
The original that is picked up is Stops operation immediately
a non-standard size.
upon detection.
14H
Wrong original size or S3
size mix in reduced
page composition
mode
EN
1. The original that is picked
up is of a type not supported
by reduced page composition
mode, or
2. The original that is picked
up is of a size different from
the size of the first original.
Stop detection immediately
upon detection.
15H
ADF 283
When a jam occurs, the copy module remembers how many originals
have been copied. The count is sent to the ADF after jam removal,
and the ADF circulates the originals that have been copied; it then
places originals that have not been copied on the copyboard for
copying. This is the reason normal copying would not be possible if a
different number of originals are placed on the document tray after
jam removal.
Figure 172.
Jam flowchart
In the above chart, error 1 will be treated as a condition in which a
different number of originals are placed after jam removal; in such a
case, both the ADF and the copy module stop operation to indicate
an error. The operation continues, however, for error 2.
Resetting
To reset, remove all originals from the document tray and glass,
straighten them, and replace them on the document tray. If the copy
module indicates a message follow such the message when placing
the originals.
In reduced page composition mode remove the originals from the
document tray and open the ADF once.
284
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Power supply
Figure 173 is an outline of the power supply system in the ADF.
The power supply is provided by the copy module with 24 V dc
(24 VP, 24 VL).
Figure 173.
EN
l
24 VP is mainly used for loads and is cut off when the ADF is
opened or its upper cover is opened. The circuit breaker (CB1)
operates to cut off the power to protect the circuit in response to
overcurrent.
l
24 VL is converted by the regulator into 5 V and is used by the
logic system and sensors.
l
The fuse resistance (R26) melts in response to overcurrent in the
circuit, thereby cutting off the power and protecting the circuit.
Power supply
ADF 285
Motors, solenoids, and sensors
Figure 174.
Motors, solenoids, and sensors
Table 77. Motors, solenoids, and sensors
Name
Notation
Description
Motor
M1
Pick-up motor
M2
ADF motor
M3
Belt motor
M4
Recirculating motor
M5
Delivery motor
Clutch
CL
Clutch
Brake
BK
Belt motor brake
Solenoid
SL1
Stopper plate solenoid
SL2
Paper-retaining-plate solenoid
SL3
Paper-delivery-plate solenoid
Variable resistor
VR
Original-width-detecting volume
Microswitch
MS1
ADF open/close switch
MS2
Upper cover switch
Phototransistor
Photointerrupter
LED
S1
Document tray paper sensor
S3
Registration sensor
S4
Upper cover sensor
S5
Pick-up roller sensor
S6
Delivery sensor 1
S7
Pick-up sensor
S8
Reversal sensor
S9
Feeding motor clock sensor
S10
Belt motor clock sensor
S11
Registration roller clock sensor
S12
Delivery sensor 2
S13
Delivery motor clock sensor
S14
Recirculation sensor
LED101
Original-set indicator
LED102
286
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
PCBs
Figure 175.
PCB locations
Table 78. PCB functions
Name
EN
Notation
Description
DADF controller PCB
1
Controls ADF
Indicator PCB
2
Indicates the presence of an original
ADF 287
Indicator PCB
Figure 176.
Indicator PCB
Table 79. LEDs on the indicator PCB
Note
LED
Description
LED101
LED102
Indicates the presence of an original
Indicates the presence of an original
Use only variable resistors and check pins noted and referenced.
Adjusting others may cause damage.
General timing charts
The following are the signal names and abbreviations used in this
manual and circuit diagrams.
Note
288
The abbreviations in parentheses are analog signals, which cannot be
expressed in terms of '1' and '0'. Others are digital signals, which may
be expressed in terms of '1' and '0'.
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Table 80. Names and abbreviations of signals
Abbreviation Name of signal
EN
BDIR
BELT MOTOR ROTATION Command
BK
BRAKE DRIVE Command
BMCLK
BELT MOTOR CLOCK PULSE Signal
BMON
BELT MOTOR DRIVE Command
BMPWM
BELT MOTOR SPEED CONTROL Command
CL
CLUTCH DRIVE Command
CNCT
CONNECT Signal
CVRSW
UPPER COVER CLOSED Signal 2
DCTS
PICK-UP ROLLER START POSITION Signal
EJTS1
PAPER DETECTION Signal 2
EJTS2
PAPER DETECTION Signal 4
ENTS
PAPER DETECTION Signal 3
EPMS
DOCUMENT ENPUTY 1 Signal
FLPSL1
DEFLECTOR SOLENOID DRIVE Command
FMCLK
FEED MOTOR CLOCK PULSE Signal
FMPWM
FEED MOTOR DRIVE Command
ORGLED
DOCUMENT SENC DRIVE Command
RFC
ADF CLOSED Signal
RSDRV
RECYCLE MOTOR DRIVE Command
RSIN
ADF SERIAL INPUT Command
RSOUT
ADF SERIAL OUTPUT Command
RSS
LAST DOCUMENT DETECTION Signal
SDIR
PICK-UP MOTOR ROTATION Command
SMON
PICK-UP MOTOR DRIVE Command
SMPWM
PICK-UP MOTOR SPEED CONTROL Command
SPRS
PAPER DETECTION Signal 1
STPSLD
STOPPER SOLENOID DRIVE Command
SUPCC
UPPER COVER CLOSED Signal 1
TURNS
PAPER DETECTION Signal 5
WGTSL
WEIGHT SOLENOID DRIVE Command
WIDTH
DOCUMENT SIZE DETECTION Signal
ADF 289
Figure 177.
290
ADF general circuit diagram
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
EN
ADF 291
Figure 178.
292
ADF controller circuit diagram (1 of 7)
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
EN
ADF 293
Figure 179.
294
ADF controller circuit diagram (2 of 7)
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
EN
ADF 295
Figure 180.
296
ADF controller circuit diagram (3 of 7)
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
EN
ADF 297
Figure 181.
298
ADF controller circuit diagram (4 of 7)
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
EN
ADF 299
Figure 182.
300
ADF controller circuit diagram (5 of 7)
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Figure 183.
ADF controller circuit diagram (6 of 7)
Figure 184.
ADF controller circuit diagram (7 of 7)
EN
ADF 301
Figure 185.
302
ADF display board
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Figure 186.
EN
ADF general timing chart (top pick-up mode, A4, and 2
originals—single-sided original to single copy)
ADF 303
Side HCI
The side HCI feeds paper to the printer. The side HCI operating
sequence is controlled by the deck controller PCB.
The deck controller PCB employs an 8-bit microprocessor (IC201)
that controls the operating sequence and serial communications
between the printer formatter and the side HCI.
The deck controller PCB drives the solenoids and motors, in
response to signals fed from the printer formatter via the serial (Clink) interface. The deck controller PCB, also sends sensor, switch
and other information to the printer formatter, via the serial (C-link)
interface.
Printer formatter
Figure 187.
304
Deck block diagram
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Figure 188.
EN
Deck controller PCB
Side HCI 305
Figure 189.
306
Deck controller PCB output
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Pick-up feed system
The side HCI out-of-paper sensor (PS3) detects whether or not there
is paper in the side HCI. When the pick-up start signal is transmitted
from the printer formatter, the deck controller PCB starts turning the
pick-up motor (M3). This action causes the pick-up roller (callout 1),
feed roller 1 (callout 2) and separation roller (callout 3) to turn.
At the same time as the pick-up motor starts turning, the pick-up
solenoid (SL1) (callout 4) goes on. This causes the pick-up roller to
be lowered to the paper surface. As a result, the paper is fed to feed
roller 2 by the rotating pick-up roller.
When the leading edge of the copy paper reaches the feed sensor
(PS5) in front of feed roller 2, the feed motor starts to turn and the
paper is fed to the copy module main unit.
When the deck controller PCB detects that the currently picked up
sheet is the last sheet during continuous printing when the second
sheet detection sensor is off, before the next pick-up operation starts,
the deck controller PCB notifies the printer formatter that there is no
more paper.
2
1
3
4
Figure 190.
EN
Pick-up feed rollers
Side HCI 307
Figure 191.
308
Pick-up feed signals
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Figure 192.
Signal transfer points
Figure 193.
Pick-up signal levels
EN
Side HCI 309
Lifter operation
The lifter in the side HCI is suspended by two wires. The wires are
operated by the lifter motor (M1: stepping motor).
When the right upper cover open sensor (PS1) detects that the upper
right door has been opened, the deck controller PCB reverses the
lifter motor and lowers the lifter until the lower limit lifter switch (MS3)
goes on.
When the right upper cover opening sensor (PS1) detects that the
upper right door has been closed, the deck controller PCB rotates the
lifter motor forward and raises the lifter until the upper limit lifter
sensor (PS4) goes on.
As the number of sheets in the stack are reduced by paper being
picked up, the upper limit lifter detection sensor goes off, the deck
controller PCB rotates the lifter motor forward and raises the lifter until
the lifter upper limit goes on.
When the lifter upper limit sensor does not go on within the stipulated
time after the lifter starts to rise, the deck controller PCB assumes
that a lifter breakdown has occurred and transmits an error code to
the option controller PCB in the copy module main unit.
Figure 194.
310
Lifter operation
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Remaining paper detection mechanism
The remaining paper detection switch 1 (SW601) and the remaining
paper detection switch 2 (SW602) on the remaining paper detection
PCB are pressed through the lifter ascending movement and the
swing arm operation. The combination of the on/off status of these
two remaining paper detection switches makes it possible to detect
four remaining paper levels (in 25% increments). Remaining paper
detection switch combinations are shown in table 81 .
Figure 195.
Remaining paper detection
Table 81. Remaining paper detection switches
EN
SW601
SW602
Remaining paper level
OFF
OFF
100%
ON
OFF
75%
ON
ON
50%
OFF
ON
25%
Side HCI 311
Paper-size-detection mechanism
The copy module detects paper size through the use of a paper-sizedetection switch (MS3). This switch is activated by a notch in the
paper-size indication plate. The switch activates when the paper-sizedetection plate is set to the A4 side. The switch is not active when the
the plate is set to the LTR side.
Figure 196.
Paper-size-detection switch and detection plate (A4)
Figure 197.
Paper-size-detection switch and detection plate (LTR)
312
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Jam detection
A feed sensor (PS5) detects the presence of paper and whether or
not the paper is being fed normally.
The microprocessor in the deck controller PCB detects paper jams by
sensing whether or not the paper is at the sensor position at check
timing intervals stored in memory.
When the microprocessor calculates that a paper jam has occurred, it
notifies the printer main unit to stop the pick-up operation and tells the
printer formatter that a paper jam has occurred.
l
Figure 198.
Jam detection levels
l
Figure 199.
EN
Pick-up delay jam—The microprocessor assumes that a pick-up
delay jam has occurred when the paper does not reach the feed
sensor (PS5) within a specified time after receiving the pick-up
start signal.
Stationary jam—The microprocessor assumes that a stationary
jam has occurred when the paper does not pass the feed sensor
(PS5) within a specified time after the feed sensor (PS5) goes on.
Stationary jam
Side HCI 313
Power supply
The side HCI power supply unit is equipped with a remote switch
system.
When the power switch of the copy module and printer are turned on,
the printer formatter outputs a power on signal (PWRON) to the
power supply PCB, to the deck controller PCB. When the PWRON
signal is “1,” the power supply provides +24 V and +5 V to the deck
controller PCB.
The lifter motor, pick-up motor, feed motor and solenoids use +24 V,
while the sensors and the deck controller PCB ICs, use +5 V. A
diagram of the power supply is shown below.
Figure 200.
Side HCI power supply
Protective Functions
The +24 V and +5 V power circuits are equipped with overvoltage and
overcurrent protective functions that automatically turn off the output
voltage to prevent the breakdown of power supply circuits in the event
of overcurrent or overvoltage caused by electrical shorts or other
problems on the load side.
When the overvoltage and overcurrent protection functions have
been triggered, and dc voltage is no longer being supplied from the
power supply circuit, turn off the power switch on the copy module,
and correct the problem on the load side before turning on the printer
assembly power switch.
314
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Sensors
Figure 201.
Sensors
Table 82. Sensor functions
EN
Name
Signal
Function
Photo
interrupter
PS1
Upper right cover open detection sensor
PS2
Second-sheet-detection sensor
PS3
Paper-detection sensor
PS4
Lifter upper-limit-detection sensor
PS5
Feed sensor
Side HCI 315
Solenoids and motors
Figure 202.
Solenoids and motors
Table 83. Solenoid and motor functions
Name
Signal
Function
Solenoid
SL1
Pick-up solenoid
Motors
316
M1
Lifter motor
M2
Feed motor
M3
Pick-up motor
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
PCBs
1
3
4
2
Figure 203.
PCBs
Table 84. PCB functions
EN
Number
Name
Function
1
Deck controller PCB
Control and detection of loads
2
Power supply unit
Power supply
3
Remaining paper detection PCB
Detects paper remaining in the side
HCI
4
LED PCB
Displays unit status
Side HCI 317
List of variable resistors (VR), LEDs, check
pins by PCB
Only the LEDs and check pins that need to be checked during field
service are listed below.
Note
Check pins not listed below are only for factory use, and their
adjustment and checking requires special tools and measurement
instruments. Their adjustments require a great degree of accuracy and
must not be touched during field service.
Note
Some LEDs leak a small amount of current even when normal, and
therefore glow faintly even when they are off. Do not mistake the faint
glow for the LEDs being on.
318
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Deck controller PCB
Figure 204.
Deck controller PCB
Table 85. Deck controller switches and LEDs
EN
Number
Function
SW201 (1 through 4)
Switch for operation check.
LED202
Inspect for servicing
Side HCI 319
User LED PCB
Figure 205.
User LED PCB
Table 86. User LED
LED number
Function
LED1
LED to be inspected by the user
Remaining-paper-detection PCB
Figure 206.
320
Remaining-paper-detection PCB
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Input and output signals to the deck controller
PCB
Table 87. Signal names and codes
Connector
J201
J202
EN
Pin
Code
I/O
Signal name
Input
Serial input signal
1
TXI
2
GND
3
RXO
Output
Serial output signal
4
CONTO
Output
Communication ready signal
Input
Synch clock signal
5
+24V
6
CKI
7
GND
8
GND
9
GND
10
+24V
11
GND
12
STRBI
13
PWRON-IN
Input
14
GND
Input
15
+24V
1
TXO
2
GND
3
Strobe signal
Power ON signal
Output
Serial output signal
RXI
Input
Serial input signal
4
CONTI
Input
Communication ready signal
5
+24V
6
CKO
Input
Synch clock signal
7
GND
8
GND
9
GND
10
+24V
11
GND
12
STRBO
Output
Strobe signal
13
PWRON-OUT
Output
Power ON signal
14
GND
15
+24V
Side HCI 321
Table 87. Signal names and codes (continued)
Connector
J203
J204
J205
J206
J207
J208
J209
J211
322
Pin
Code
I/O
1
+24V
Input
2
+24V
Input
3
PWRON-IN
Output
4
+5V
Input
5
GND
6
GND
Signal name
Power ON signal
1
GND
2
DKSET
Input
Deck set detect signal
3
LLLMT
Input
Lifter lower limit signal
4
NC
Input
5
PPRSIZE
Input
Paper size detect signal
6
GND
Remaining paper detect signal
1
GND
2
PAP-VOL1
Input
3
PAP-VOL2
Input
Remaining paper detect signal
1
DRVAD
Output
Lifter motor control signal
2
DRVAND
Output
Lifter motor control signal
3
DRVBD
Output
Lifter motor control signal
4
DRVBND
Output
Lifter motor control signal
1
FED1AD
Output
Feed motor control signal
2
FED1AND
Output
Feed motor control signal
3
FED1BD
Output
Feed motor control signal
Output
Feed motor control signal
4
FED1BND
1
NC
2
NC
1
+5VB2
2
GND
3
2NDPPR
Input
4
+5VB1
Output
5
GND
6
DROPN
Input
Upper right cover open signal
1
PUPSLD
Output
Pick up solenoid drive signal
2
+24V
Output
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
Output
2nd paper detect signal
EN
Table 87. Signal names and codes (continued)
Connector
J212
J213
EN
Pin
Code
1
+5VB5
2
GND
3
PPREXT
4
+5VB4
5
GND
6
UPRLMT
I/O
Signal name
Paper feed detect signal
Lifter upper limit detect signal
7
+5VB3
8
GND
9
PPREXT
1
LED R
Output
Red LED lit-up signal
2
LED G
Output
Green LED lit-up signal
3
GND
Paper detect signal
Side HCI 323
General circuit diagram
Upper right
cover open
detect sensor
Second sheet
detection sensor
Pick-up motor
Pick-up solenoid
Deck
Lifter motor M1
Remaining
paper
detection
PCB
Feed motor M2
Figure 207.
324
Deck set
detection
switch
Deck controller PCB general circuit diagram
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
Paper detection
sensor
Lifter upper
detection
sensor
Feed sensor
J
J
J
Controller PCB
J
Lifter lower
limit detection
switch
Paper size
detect switch
EN
Side HCI 325
326
Chapter - 5 Theory of operation
EN
6
Removal and
replacement
Chapter contents
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Repair notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Copy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Identifying the external covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Removing the lower front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Removing the upper right cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Removing the upper rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Removing the upper left cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Removing the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Removing the upper front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Removing the scanner motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Removing the scanner motor driver PCB . . . . . . . . . 339
Removing DIMMs on the reader controller PCB . . . . 340
Removing the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Removing the LCD assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Removing the flexible cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Removing the scanning lamp and
scanning lamp heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Removing the standard white plate cover . . . . . . . . . 363
Removing the intensity-detection PCB . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Removing the lens-mount cover and CCD unit . . . . . 365
Removing the electrical unit pullout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Removing the reader controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Removing the ECO-2 PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
EN
Chapter contents 327
Removing the AP-IP PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Removing the copy module main power supply
PCB (DCP1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Removing the accessories power supply
PCB (DCP2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Removing the power supply cooling fan (FM4) . . . . . 375
Removing the inverter PCB unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Automatic document feeder (ADF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Identifying external covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Removing the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Removing the body cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Mounting the original-width detecting volume . . . . . . 383
Removing the pick-up motor unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Removing the ADF motor unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Removing the belt motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Removing the clutch unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Removing the delivery motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Removing the pick-up roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Removing the separation belt unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Removing the feeding roller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Removing the registration roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Removing the delivery/reversing roller . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Removing the delivery roller unit
(bottom pick-up mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Removing the delivery roller unit
(top pick-up mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Removing the reversing guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Removing the stopper plate solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Positioning the paper-retaining plate
solenoid (SL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Positioning the paper-deflecting solenoid (SL3) . . . . 426
Removing the stamp solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Removing the feeding belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
328
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Side HCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Identifying the external covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Removing the upper left cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Removing the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Removing the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Removing the upper right cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Removing the pick-up unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Removing the pick-up roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Removing the feed roller and separation roller . . . . . 441
Removing the lifter wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Removing the lifter motor (M1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Removing the feeder motor (M2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Removing the pick-up motor (M3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Removing the deck controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Removing the power supply PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
EN
Chapter contents 329
330
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Required tools
You will need the following tools to perform service on the HP Color
LaserJet 8550MFP and its accessories:
Table 88. Service tools
Note
EN
Tool Name
Part number
Uses
Mirror positioning tool
FY9-3040-000CN
For positioning mirrors
Stop ring pliers
Procure locally
For removing clip rings
(4 to 9 mm)
Tension gauge
(270-330g)
Procure locally
For adjusting the
tension on belts
Standard image test
Sheet (optional)
RY9-9030-020CN
Troubleshooting copied
image defects
Phillips #2 screwdriver
(long reach, magnetic)
Procure locally
Various
Allen wrench (2mm)
Procure locally
ADF skew adjustment
Small adjustable wrench Procure locally
ADF skew adjustment
Ruler (150 mm or
longer)
Procure locally
Measuring stop position
adjustments for ADF
Screwdriver (very small Procure locally
Phillips or flat-blade)
Adjusting lamp intensity
VR
Penlight
Procure locally
Illumination
Needle nose pliers
Procure locally
Various
See the pages inside the back cover of this manual. These pages can
be used to keep track of screws while removing and replacing parts.
To use them, enlarge the pages so that an ice-cube tray or egg carton
fits the middle of the page.
Required tools 331
Repair notices
Make sure of the following when disassembling or assembling the
printer.
When the control panel soft switch (on the front of the
copy module) is turned off, the fans continue to operate
to cool the printer (to prevent clumping of toner). Be
sure to perform the following before disconnecting the
power plug:
Note
l
Wait for 30 minutes after turning off the control panel power soft
switch (to the right of the copy module control panel) or turning off
the control panel soft switch and the copy module rear power
switch (to the right side of the copy module rear), and then
remove the fusing assembly of the printer unit.
l
Assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble
them, unless otherwise instructed.
l
Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.
l
Do not omit or forget to replace the toothed washer that comes
with one of the mounting screws on the rear cover, as it protects
against static electricity.
l
Do not omit or forget to replace the washer that comes with the
screw used for the grounding wire and the varistor, as it ensures
electrical continuity.
l
Do not operate the printer with any of its parts removed, unless
otherwise instructed.
l
Use standard ESD precautions when disassembling the devices.
All illustrations in this chapter assume that the copy module assembly
is mounted on its stand.
Remove the ADF when servicing the copy module.
Service the copy module as it sits on the stand. Removal is not
necessary.
Pull the printer unit out of the stand when servicing, but do not remove
it from its wheeled base.
Remove the ADF and place it on a table when servicing to avoid
personal injury or damage to the hardware.
There are two unused connectors in the copy module. One is under
the front panel, to the right of the scanner motor. The other is behind
the rear panel, below the leakage breaker.
332
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Copy module
Identifying the external covers
1
Figure 208.
3
2
Front view of copy module
1
Lower front cover
2
Upper front cover
3
Upper right cover
4
5
Figure 209.
EN
6
Rear view of copy module
4
Upper rear cover
5
Rear cover
6
Upper left cover
Copy module 333
Removing the lower front cover
1
Remove two face plates and screws (callout 1).
2
Detach the lower front cover (callout 2).
2
2
1
Figure 210.
Removing the copy module lower front cover
Removing the upper right cover
Note
1
Remove four screws (callout 1).
2
Detach the upper right cover (callout 2).
If the ADF is attached, remove the document output tray that is retained
by two long screws.
2
2
1
Figure 211.
334
Removing the copy module upper right cover
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the upper rear cover
1
Remove three rubber face plates and five screws (callout 1).
2
Detach the upper rear cover (callout 2).
2
1
Figure 212.
2
Removing the copy module upper rear cover
Removing the upper left cover
1
Remove the upper rear cover (see above).
2
Remove five screws (callout 1).
3
Detach the upper left cover (callout 2).
2
2
1
Figure 213.
EN
Removing the copy module upper left cover
Copy module 335
Removing the rear cover
Note
1
Remove the upper rear cover (see page 335).
2
Remove the upper left cover (see page 335).
3
Remove three screws (callout 1).
4
Detach the rear cover (callout 2).
Be sure to use the same toothed washers when reinstalling.
There is an unused 8-pin connector located below the leakage breaker.
2
2
1
Figure 214.
336
Removing the copy module rear cover
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the upper front cover
1
Remove the lower front cover (see page 334).
2
Remove the control panel (see page 344).
3
Remove four rubber face plates and four screws (callout 1).
4
Detach the upper front cover (callout 2).
2
1
Figure 215.
EN
2
Removing the copy module upper front cover
Copy module 337
Removing the scanner motor
1
Remove the lower front cover (see page 334).
2
Remove the control panel (see page 344).
3
Disconnect the connector (callout 1), and remove three screws
(callout 2).
2
1
2
2
3
Figure 216.
Removing the copy module scanner motor
4
Note
Detach the scanner motor (callout 3) with its support plate.
There is an unused 9-pin connector located below the scanner motor.
To adjust the tension of the drive belt
When mounting the scanner motor, move the scanner motor and
support plate to the right as far as possible by hand. This provides
correct belt tension. Tighten the screws in place. (Refer to the initial
screw position.)
338
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the scanner motor driver PCB
1
Remove the lower front cover (see page 334).
2
Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), and remove two screws
(callout 2).
3
Free the cable from the cable clamp.
4
Detach the scanner motor driver PCB.
2
Figure 217.
EN
2
1
2
Removing the copy module the scanner motor driver PCB
Copy module 339
Removing DIMMs on the reader controller
PCB
Note
The printer’s copy module can be upgraded by either of the following
methods:
• Replacing the DIMM on the reader controller PCB, or
• Replacing the contents of the DIMM by downloading data from a
computer.
To remove the ROM DIMM
1
Remove the lower front cover (see page 334).
2
Disconnect three connectors, and remove two screws.
3
Detach the scanner motor driver PCB (see page 339).
4
Remove two screws (callout 1), and detach the ROM DIMM cover
(callout 2).
2
1
2
Figure 218.
340
Preparing to remove the ROM DIMM
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
5
While opening the claws (callout 3) of the slot, lift and detach the
ROM DIMM.
2
3
Figure 219.
Opening the claws
Figure 220.
Lifting the ROM DIMM to detach
EN
Copy module 341
To mount the ROM DIMM
1
Figure 221.
Insert the ROM DIMM into the slot at an angle.
Inserting the ROM DIMM
2
Shift the ROM DIMM down in the direction indicated by the
arrows until a click is heard.
Figure 222.
Engaging the ROM DIMM
CAUTION
Do not force the ROM DIMM. It can crack.
342
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
After replacing the ROM DIMM, perform the following steps at the
copy module control panel:
EN
1
From the service menu, press COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR >
R-CON.
2
From the service menu, press COPIER > ADJUST > LAMP, ADJ-XY,
CCD, PASCAL (enter the value indicated on the service label).
3
From the service menu, press COPIER > FUNCTION >
MISC-R > USE-LAMP.
4
From the service menu, press COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD >
CCD-ADJ.
5
Turn the power off and then on.
6
Execute auto gradation correction in user mode.
Copy module 343
Removing the control panel
1
Remove the copy module lower front cover (see page 334).
2
Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and free the cable from
the cable saddle. Further, free the scanner motor cable from the
wire saddle.
2
1
Figure 223.
Control panel
CAUTION
When securing the cable, be sure to fit it in the wire saddle, preventing
its contact with metal plates.
344
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
3
Remove five screws (callout 2), and detach the control panel
(callout 3).
2
2
3
2
Figure 224.
EN
Detaching the control panel
Copy module 345
Removing the LCD assembly
1
Remove the control panel (see page 344).
2
Disconnect the connector (callout 1), and remove the 11 screws
(callout 2) to detach the metal plate on the LCD assembly.
2
2
1
2
Figure 225.
Detaching the metal plate on the LCD assembly
3
Disconnect three connectors (callout 3), and remove four screws
(callout 4).
4
Detach the LCD assembly.
2
4
2
3
Figure 226.
346
Detaching the LCD assembly
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
To route the scanner drive cable
Note
You will need a mirror positioning tool (FY9-3040-000CN) when
mounting the scanner drive cable.
1
Remove the copyboard cover.
2
Remove two screws (callout 1), and detach the right glass
retainer cover (callout 2).
2
2
1
2
1
Figure 227.
EN
Copyboard glass
3
Remove the copyboard glass.
4
Remove the lower front cover (see page 334).
5
Remove the control panel (see page 344).
6
Remove the upper front cover (see page 337).
7
Remove the upper rear cover (see page 335).
8
Remove the standard white plate (see page 363).
Copy module 347
9
Remove four screws (callout 3), and detach the right reinforcing
stay (callout 4).
2
3
2
4
2
3
Figure 228.
Scanner drive cable
10 Remove the upper left cover (see page 335).
11 Remove the rear cover (see page 336).
12 Remove the electrical tray pullout (see page 347).
13 Remove two front horizontal reinforcing stays and the rear
horizontal reinforcing stay.
Note
348
When replacing these parts, be sure to tighten the front and rear screws
before tightening the side screws. Test the copyboard glass for correct
fit.
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
14 Place the mirror 1 mount (callout 5) so that the metal cable clamp
of mirror 1 is in view through the long hole in the front and rear
plates (callout 6).
2
5
2
6
Figure 229.
Securing the metal cable clamp (front view)
2
5
2
6
Figure 230.
Securing the metal cable clamp (rear view)
CAUTION
Take care not to damage the cable by catching it on edges of the metal
plates.
Note
Removing the scanner motor might provide easier access to the
cables.
EN
Copy module 349
15 Loosen the screws on the mirror positioning tool (FY9-3040000CN), and contract the arms fully.
Figure 231.
Mirror tool
16 Fit the mirror positioning tool (callout 7) between the mirror 1
mount and the mirror 2 mount, and insert the pin (callout 8) that
comes with the positioning tool.
Note
The threaded hole in the tool is for storage only. For correct alignment,
insert the pins into the non-threaded holes in the positioning tool (see
figures 232 and 233 below).
2
7
2
8
Non-threaded
hole
Figure 232.
Detaching and reattaching the mirror positioning tool (front
view)
Note
Verify that the tool arms are collapsed.
350
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
2
7
Non-threaded
hole
2
8
Figure 233.
Detaching and reattaching the mirror positioning tool (rear view)
17 Secure the metal cable clamp that was temporarily secured in
step 15 with two screws (callout 9) inside the long hole (callout
10) of the side plate.
2
9
2
10
Figure 234.
Securing the metal cable clamp to the mirror 1 mount (front
view)
2
9
Figure 235.
EN
2
10
Securing the metal cable clamp to the mirror 1 mount (rear view)
Copy module 351
18 Engage the scanner cable on the pulley and the hook as shown
in figure 236.
8
8
Figure 236.
Cable positioning
19 Detach the mirror positioning tool.
352
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the flexible cable
Note
Do not disconnect the connector of the flexible cable connected to the
mirror 1 mount except when replacing the mirror 1 mount. (The mirror
can be cleaned without disconnecting the cable.)
1
Remove two screws (callout 1), and detach the right glass
retainer cover (callout 2).
2
2
1
2
1
Figure 237.
Copyboard glass
2
Remove the copyboard glass.
3
Shift the mirror 1 mount (callout 3) to the center.
2
3
Figure 238.
EN
Flexible cable warning label
Copy module 353
4
Peel the warning label (callout 4) from the flexible cable
(callout 5).
2
4
2
5
Figure 239.
354
Releasing the connector to the flexible cable
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
5
Push the inside claws inward (callout 6), and release the
connector to the flexible cable (callout 5).
2
6
2
5
Figure 240.
EN
Disconnecting the flexible cable
Copy module 355
6
Using a small screwdriver (callout 7), push the two tables that
hold the flexible cable (callout 5) to disconnect the flexible cable
from the connector.
2
7
2
5
Figure 241.
Connecting the flexible cable
CAUTION
When connecting the flexible cable to the connector, make sure that
the metal area of the cable has not collected metal powder or dust.
Clean it as necessary.
356
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the scanning lamp and scanning
lamp heater
1
Remove two screws, and remove the right glass retainer cover or
jump board if the ADF is installed (page 347).
2
Remove the copyboard glass.
3
Remove the screw and plate (callout 1), and detach the scanning
lamp cover (callout 2).
2
1
Figure 242.
2
Scanning lamp cover
4
Remove two screws (callout 3), and detach the scanning lamp
inside cover (callout 4).
2
3
2
4
Figure 243.
Scanning lamp inside cover
5
EN
Position the mirror 1mount under the opening for access.
Copy module 357
6
Note
Remove two screws (callout 5), and detach the anti-reflecting
plate (callout 6).
These screws are difficult to remove for the first time. Take care to use
the correct screwdriver (a Phillips #2 screwdriver) and not damage the
screw heads. If necessary, use needle nose pliers to assist in removal.
2
6
Figure 244.
358
2
5
Anti-reflecting plate
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
CAUTION
When mounting the anti-reflecting plate, be sure to fit the anti-reflecting
plate securely into the cut-off (front, rear) (callout 7) in the mirror 1
mount. Further, be sure to fit the lamp heater connector (in step 7) to
the anti-reflecting plate. Failure to do so will inhibit free movement of
the mirror 1 mount assembly and will cause damage to the scanning
system.
2
7
Figure 245.
EN
Detaching the scanning lamp
Copy module 359
7
Disconnect the connector (callout 8), and remove two screws
(callout 9).
2
10
2
8
2
9
Figure 246.
Removing the scanning lamp
8
CAUTION
2
11
Detach the scanning lamp (callout 10) from the electrode plate
(front) (callout 11) by pulling the assembly toward the front.
Avoid touching the scanning lamp with your fingers. Touching the
scanning lamp will create hot spots and decrease lamp life.
9
Remove the scanning lamp (callout 10) and the scanning lamp
heater (callout 12) by moving them together towards the front.
2
10
2
12
Figure 247.
Scanning lamp heater
10 Carefully remove the scanning lamp heater and the copper
heater rings (front and rear, two pieces) from the scanning lamp.
Note
360
The scanning lamp thermistor is integrated with the heater assembly
and is replaced with the heater assembly.
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
When replacing the scanning lamp:
Note
l
Do not work when the surface of the scanning lamp is hot.
l
Do not leave fingerprints on the surface of the scanning lamp.
l
If the surface of the scanning lamp is soiled, wipe it with a clean,
soft, dry cloth.
l
When mounting the scanning lamp heater to the scanning lamp,
be sure to match the reference points. (The connector of the
scanning lamp heater is toward the front of the copy module.)
The lamp can be reversed, but the heater must be positioned so that
the connectors will reach.
Reference mark
Figure 248.
Replacing the scanning lamp
l
EN
When mounting the scanning lamp to the copier, take care not to
touch the light-emitting section.
Copy module 361
l
When mounting the copper heater ring (callout 1), be sure to
locate it about 4 to 8 mm from the light-emitting section of the
lamp (callout 2).
2
1
2
2
Figure 249.
Scanning lamp adjustment
l
362
When mounting a new scanning lamp, or when removing and
then remounting the existing lamp, be sure to make the
necessary adjustments. See “To replace the scanning lamp” on
page 132.
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the standard white plate cover
1
Remove two screws, and detach the right glass retainer cover
(see page 347).
2
Remove the copyboard glass.
3
Remove the standard white plate plastic covers (one each from
front and rear, callout 1) using a flat-blade screwdriver.
2
1
Figure 250.
White plate cover removal
4
Remove four screws (callout 2), and detach the standard white
plate (callout 3).
2
2
3
Figure 251.
Replacing the white plate cover
Note
When replacing the standard white plate, be sure to make service mode
adjustments (see page 84).
EN
Copy module 363
Removing the intensity-detection PCB
1
Remove two screws, and detach the right glass retainer cover
(page 347) or jump board if the ADF is installed.
2
Remove the copyboard glass.
3
Remove the screw (callout 1), and detach the claws (callout 2)
while pushing them down.
2
2
1
Figure 252.
Detaching the claws
4
Disconnect the connector (J2001) (callout 3), and remove the
screw (callout 4) that secures the PCB.
2
3
2
4
Figure 253.
Detaching the intensity-detection PCB
5
364
Detach the intensity-detection PCB.
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the lens-mount cover and CCD unit
1
Remove two screws, and detach the right glass retaining cover.
2
Remove the copyboard glass.
3
Remove ten screws, and detach the lens-mount cover.
2
1
Figure 254.
Lens mount cover
4
Remove four screws (callout 2), and detach the CCD unitretaining spring (callout 3) and the cable-retaining metal plate
(callout 4).
2
2
4
2
3
2
Figure 255.
EN
Detaching the CCD unit
Copy module 365
5
Remove the cable clamp (callout 5) from the copier, and
disconnect two connectors (J101, J102) (callout 6).
2
5
2
5
2
6
Figure 256.
CCD unit connectors
6
CAUTION
366
Detach the CCD unit.
Do not move the mirror 1 mount to the left or right, or turn on the power
to make copies. If you do so, the leaf spring on the CCD unit will hit
against the mirror 1 mount, damaging the leaf spring.
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the electrical unit pullout
1
Remove the copy module lower front cover (two covers, two
screws).
2
Disconnect three connectors, and remove two screws, holding
the scanner motor driver PCB.
3
Detach the scanner motor driver PCB (see page 339).
4
Remove two shoulder screws (callout 1), and disconnect eight
connectors (callout 2).
2
2
1
2
1
2
Figure 257.
Electrical unit screws and connectors
5
Remove the lens-mount cover (see page 365).
6
Remove two large tie-down screws (callout 3), and disconnect
three connectors (callout 4).
2
3
2
4
2
4
Figure 258.
EN
Reader controller PCB connectors
Copy module 367
7
Remove the copyboard cover, copy module upper rear cover,
upper left cover, and rear cover, in that order.
8
Remove seven screws (callout 5).
Note
Refer to figure 259 below for help in locating the seven screws.
Figure 259.
Removing the reader controller PCB cover (1 of 2)
2
5
2
5
Figure 260.
368
Removing the reader controller PCB cover (2 of 2)
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
9
Pull out the electric unit (callout 6) to the rear, as shown.
2
6
Figure 261.
Removing the electrical unit
CAUTION
When pulling out the electrical unit to the rear, you might hear some
rough noise caused by plastic film rubbing against a metal plate. Ignore
the noise. When putting the electrical unit back into the copy module,
take care not to damage the cable and connectors at the front.
Figure 262.
Holding the electrical unit
EN
Copy module 369
Removing the reader controller PCB
1
Remove the electrical unit pullout (page 367).
2
Remove seven screws (callout 1), and detach the electrical unit
RFI cover (callout 2).
2
2
1
Figure 263.
Detaching the electrical unit cover
3
Disconnect eight connectors (callout 3) and six screws (callout 9).
4
Detach the reader controller PCB.
2
4
2
4
2
3
2
4
Figure 264.
370
Electrical unit connectors
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Take note of DIP switch bank SW1601 on the reader controller PCB.
These DIP switch settings should not be changed in the field. If they
are changed accidentally, restore the settings to the factory defaults
shown below.
Switch
110V setting
220V setting
SW7
SW6
SW5
SW4
SW3
SW2
SW1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
Removing the ECO-2 PCB
1
Remove the electrical unit pullout (page 367).
2
Perform the work through step 10 provided for the removal of the
reader controller PCB (see page 404).
3
Remove two screws (callout 1), and detach the ECO-2 PCB
(callout 2) from the two PCB supports (callout 3).
2
3
2
2
1
2
3
Figure 265.
EN
ECO PCB replacement
Copy module 371
Removing the AP-IP PCB
1
Remove the electrical unit pullout (see page 367).
2
Remove the ECO PCB (see page 371).
3
Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), and remove seven
screws (callout 2).
4
Detach the AP-IP PCB (callout 3).
2
2
2
1
2
3
2
Figure 266.
372
AP-IP PCB removal
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the copy module main power
supply PCB (DCP1)
1
Remove the copy module upper rear cover, upper left cover, and
rear cover, in that order.
2
Disconnect nine connectors (callout 1), and remove five screws
(callout 2).
1
2
Figure 267.
EN
Removing the copy module main power supply PCB (DCP1)
3
Detach the copy module power supply PCB unit.
4
Disconnect the AC cable to the accessories power supply PCB.
Copy module 373
Removing the accessories power supply PCB
(DCP2)
1
Remove the copy module upper left cover, upper rear cover, and
rear cover.
2
Disconnect the connector (J1801) (callout 1), and remove three
screws (callout 2).
2
2
1
Figure 268.
Accessory power supply
3
374
Disconnect connectors J1802 and J1804, and detach the
accessory power supply PCB unit.
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the power supply cooling fan (FM4)
1
Remove the copy module upper rear cover, upper left cover, and
rear cover, in that order.
2
Disconnect the connector, and remove two screws (callout 1).
3
Detach the fan.
2
1
Figure 269.
Power supply cooling fan
CAUTION
When mounting the fan (FM4), be sure that the arrow on the fan is
toward the inside (so that air is blown toward the inside).
EN
Copy module 375
Removing the inverter PCB unit
1
Remove the copy module upper left cover, upper rear cover, and
rear cover.
2
Remove the electrical unit pullout (see page 367).
3
Remove the copy module main power supply PCB (see page
373).
4
Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), and remove two screws
(callout 2).
5
Remove the inverter PCB unit.
2
2
1
2
1
2
Figure 270.
376
Inverter PCB unit
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
Note
The only serviceable part of the ADF is the large white feeding belt
(part number FC1-7815-020CN). (See “Removing the feeding belt” on
page 431.) The remainder of the ADF will be serviced via adjustment/
calibration (see “ADF adjustments” on page 140) and cleaning (see
“Cleaning ADF parts” on page 167), or, only when necessary, wholeunit exchange.
The exchange part number for the ADF is C7837-69053. The
replacement product number for the ADF is C7837A.
The following removal and replacement procedures are provided for
reference only, and should not be performed in the field (except for
replacement of the large white feeding belt).
Identifying external covers
Remove the covers when cleaning, inspecting, and repairing the
inside of the ADF.
2
1
2
2
3
2
4
Figure 271.
EN
ADF external covers
1
Upper cover
2
Document tray
3
Body cover
4
Front cover
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 377
Removing the ADF
CAUTION
Figure 272.
378
The ADF should be removed from the copier and placed on a table
before servicing. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or
damage to the ADF.
1
Turn off the copier.
2
Disconnect the communication cable of the ADF from the copier.
3
Open the ADF fully.
Opening the ADF
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
4
Figure 273.
Go to the rear of the copier, and lift the ADF upright to remove.
Removing the ADF
The feet of the hinges of the ADF are equipped with a locking
mechanism designed to prevent slippage. When detaching the ADF
from the copier, you must fully open it to disengage these locks.
When removing the ADF from the copier, be sure to hold it as shown
in figure 273 above. Do not support it by the delivery assembly, which
might create or cause subsequent faulty delivery.
EN
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 379
Removing the body cover
1
Remove seven mounting screws (callout 1), and detach the body
cover.
2
1
2
1
Figure 274.
Mounting screws
2
1
Figure 275.
Body cover
2
1
Figure 276.
380
2
1
Mounting screws
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
2
CAUTION
Remove two mounting screws (callout 2), and detach the
document tray (callout 3).
The document tray is connected with a cable. Take extra care not to
damage the cable during work.
2
3
2
Figure 277.
EN
Document tray
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 381
To remove the side guide lock
The side guide of the ADF is equipped with a side guide lock so that it
will not open farther than 297 mm (the width of A3-size media). If an
original larger in width than 297 mm is used, the side guide lock must
be removed.
1
Loosen the screw (callout 1).
2
Remove the side guide lock (callout 2).
2
2
1
Figure 278.
Side guide
CAUTION
When making copies, be sure to adjust the side guide to the size of the
original. If the side guide is improperly positioned, the original will tend
to move askew.
382
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Mounting the original-width detecting volume
1
Loosen two screws (callout 1), and detach the side guide (callout
2).
2
Figure 279.
Side guide and screws
2
Fully open the side guide at the rear (callout 3) and the front
(callout 4).
2
3
Figure 280.
EN
2
1
2
4
Opened side guide
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 383
3
Mount the gear (callout 5).
2
5
Figure 281.
Mounting the gear
4
Turn the original-width detecting volume (callout 6) fully in the
direction of the arrow; then, turn it in the opposite direction
(equivalent to half a tooth) to the position indicated in the figure.
2
6
Figure 282.
384
Setting the width detection volume
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
5
Keeping the original-width detecting volume (callout 6) (as in step
4), mount it to the original tray (callout 7), and fix it in position with
screws (callout 8).
6
Connect the connector (callout 9).
2
7
2
9
2
8
2
6
Figure 283.
Setting the screws and mounting lock
7
Mount the side guide lock removed in step 1, and execute
adjustments to the original-width detecting volume. (For
adjustments, see p. 518.)
Removing the pick-up motor unit
1
Remove the body cover (see page 380).
2
Remove the tie-wrap as necessary.
3
Disconnect the connector J12 (callout 1) from the ADF controller
PBC (callout 2).
2
1
2
Figure 284.
EN
Connector J12 on pick-up motor
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 385
4
Remove the screw (callout 3), and remove the cable guide
(callout 4).
2
3
2
4
Figure 285.
Pick-up motor cable guide
5
Disconnect the connector (callout 5) on the upper cover sensor
S4.
6
Remove two mounting screws (callout 6), and detach the pick-up
motor unit (callout 7).
2
5
2
6
2
7
Figure 286.
386
Detaching the pick-up motor unit
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the ADF motor unit
1
Remove the pick-up motor unit.
2
Remove the tie-wrap as necessary.
3
Disconnect the connector J11 (callout 1) from the ADF controller
PCB (callout 2).
2
1
2
Figure 287.
Feeder motor unit
4
Remove two screws (callout 3), and disconnect the connector
(callout 4) of the ADF motor color sensor S9.
2
3
2
4
2
3
Figure 288.
EN
Feeder motor color sensor
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 387
5
Detach two drive belts (callout 5), and detach the ADF motor unit
(callout 6).
2
5
2
6
Figure 289.
388
Feeder motor drive belts
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the belt motor
1
Remove the ADF from the copier (see page 378).
2
Remove the ADF motor unit (see page 387).
3
Remove the tie-wrap as necessary.
4
Disconnect connectors J6 (callout 1), J7 (callout 3), and J13
(callout 3) on the ADF controller PCB.
2
3
2
2
1
Figure 290.
Belt motor
5
Disconnect the connector (callout 4) of the belt motor clock
sensor S10.
2
4
Figure 291.
EN
Belt motor clock sensor
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 389
6
Using a pencil, mark the position of the belt motor count (callout
5) on the ADF, and then remove three screws (callout 6).
2
6
2
5
Figure 292.
Belt motor count position
7
Detach the feeding belt drive roller side (callout 7) of the timing
belt (callout 8), and detach the belt motor unit (callout 5).
2
7
2
8
2
5
Figure 293.
390
Feeding the belt drive roller
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
To make adjustments
1
Secure the belt motor unit (callout 1) in place with three screws
(callout 2) so that the displacement is 3 ±1 mm when the timing
belt (callout 3) is pushed under a force of 3 ±1 mm.
2
1
2
2
3
Figure 294.
Replacing the belt motor
2
Pull the belt tensioner (callout 4) with a force of 500 g (± 50), and
secure it in place with the screw (callout 5).
2
4
Figure 295.
EN
2
5
Adjusting belt tension
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 391
Removing the clutch unit
1
Remove the belt unit (callout 1).
2
Detach the drive belt (callout 2).
2
1
2
Figure 296.
Clutch unit
3
Remove the E-ring (callout 3).
4
Displace the bushing (callout 4), and remove the clutch unit
(callout 5).
2
4
2
3
2
5
Figure 297.
392
E-ring and bushing
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Note
When mounting the clutch unit, be sure that the slip stop (callout 6) of
the clutch engages with the stopper (callout 7) of the mount.
2
6
Figure 298.
EN
2
7
Clutch unit slip stop
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 393
Removing the delivery motor
1
Remove the body cover (see page 380).
2
Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 299.
Delivery motor connectors
3
Remove two screws (callout 2), and free the cable (callout 3) from
the cable retainer (callout 4).
4
Detach the delivery monitor unit (callout 5).
2
4
2
5
2
2
2
3
Figure 300.
394
Delivery motor cable retainer
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
5
Disconnect the connector (callout 6), and remove two screws
(callout 7).
6
Detach the delivery motor (callout 8).
2
6
2
8
2
7
Figure 301.
EN
Detaching the delivery motor
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 395
Removing the pick-up roller
1
Remove the body cover (see page 380).
2
Remove two screws (callout 1), and detach the document tray
mount (callout 2).
2
1
2
Figure 302.
Document tray mount
3
Remove the screw (callout 3), and detach the paper-retaining
solenoid (callout 4).
2
3
2
4
Figure 303.
396
Paper-retaining solenoid
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
4
Remove two screws (callout 5), and detach the original inlet
guide plate (callout 6).
2
6
2
5
Figure 304.
Inlet guide plate
5
Rotate the pick-up roller (callout 7) to the position shown in the
figure.
6
Remove the screw (callout 8), and detach the pick-up roller.
2
8
2
7
Figure 305.
EN
Pick-up roller
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 397
Removing the separation belt unit
1
Remove the body cover (see page 380).
2
Detach the reversing roller drive belt (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 306.
Reversing roller drive belt
3
Remove two screws (callout 2), and detach the separation belt
unit (callout 3) together with the fixing plate (callout 4).
2
3
2
4
2
2
Figure 307.
398
Separation belt unit
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the feeding roller unit
1
Remove the body cover (see page 380).
2
Remove the document tray mount (see page 396).
3
Remove the original inlet guide plate (see page 397).
4
Remove the separation belt unit (see page 398).
5
Remove four screws (callout 1), and detach the separation guide
plate (callout 2).
2
2
1
2
1
Figure 308.
Separation guide plate
6
Remove two screws (callout 3), and detach the inside guide plate
(callout 4).
2
4
2
3
Figure 309.
EN
2
3
Inside guide plate
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 399
7
Remove the screw (callout 5), and detach the stopper (callout 6).
2
6
2
5
Figure 310.
Roller unit stopper
8
Remove the E-ring (callout 7), and detach the idler gear (callout
8).
9
Remove the E-ring (callout 9), and detach the gear (callout 10)
and the timing belt (callout 11). (Take care not to drop the pin.)
2
7
2
8
2
10
Figure 311.
400
2
11
2
9
Roller unit E-ring, gear, and timing belt
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
10 Remove the E-ring (callout 12), and shift the arm (callout 13) and
the gear (callout 14) in the direction of the arrow.
2
14
2
12
2
13
Figure 312.
Removing the E-ring, arm, and gear
11 Remove the E-ring (callout 15), and shift the bushing (callout 16)
in the direction of the arrow.
12 Remove the feeding roller unit (callout 17).
2
15
2
16
2
17
Figure 313.
EN
Removing the feeding roller unit
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 401
Removing the registration roller
1
Remove the ADF from the copier (see page 378).
2
Remove the body cover (see page 380).
3
Remove the feeding roller unit (see page 399).
4
Remove the pick-up motor unit (see page 385).
5
Remove four screws (callout 1), and detach the right hinge unit
(callout 2).
2
1
2
1
2
Figure 314.
Right hinge unit
6
Remove the E-ring (callout 3), and detach the bushing (callout 4).
2
3
2
4
Figure 315.
402
E-ring and bushing
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
7
Remove the screw (callout 5), and detach the solenoid mount
(callout 6).
2
5
2
6
Figure 316.
Solenoid mount
8
Remove the spring (callout 7) and the screw (callout 8).
9
Detach the arm (callout 9).
2
9
2
7
2
8
Figure 317.
EN
Detaching the spring, screw, and arm
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 403
10 Remove the E-ring (callout 10) and the bushing (callout 11).
11 Detach the link arm shaft (callout 12).
2
11
2
12
2
10
Figure 318.
Link arm shaft
12 Remove two screws (callout 13), and remove the sensor mount
(callout 14).
2
14
Figure 319.
404
2
13
Sensor mount
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
13 Remove the E-ring (callout 15), tension spring (callout 16),
bushing (callout 17), and two screws (callout 18).
2
18
2
17
2
16
2
15
2
18
Figure 320.
Tension spring
14 Remove the grip ring (callout 19), clock plate (callout 20), sensor
mount (callout 21), and spring (callout 22).
21
2
2
20
2
22
Figure 321.
EN
2
19
Grip ring, clock plate, sensor mount, and spring
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 405
15 Remove the grip ring (callout 23), tension spring (callout 24),
bushing (callout 25), and two screws (callout 26).
16 Detach the registration roller (callout 27).
2
24
2
26
2
25
2
23
2
26
Figure 322.
406
2
27
Registration roller
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the delivery/reversing roller
1
Remove the ADF from the copier (see page 378).
2
Remove the body cover (see page 380).
3
Remove the registration roller (see page 402).
4
Remove two E-rings (callout 1), gear (callout 2), timing belt
(callout 3), and bushing (callout 4). (Take care not to drop the
pin.)
2
3
2
4
2
2
1
Figure 323.
EN
2
1
Timing belt
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 407
5
Note
Remove the gear (callout 5). (Take care not to drop the pin.)
Remove the gear while unlocking it.
2
5
Figure 324.
Gear
Figure 325.
Unlocking and removing the gear
408
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
6
Remove the grip ring (callout 6), and remove the bushing (callout
7).
2
7
2
6
Figure 326.
Grip ring and bushing
7
Remove the spring (callout 8) and the screw (callout 9).
8
Detach the lower guide stopper (callout 10).
2
9
2
8
2
10
Figure 327.
EN
Detaching the lower guide stopper
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 409
9
Remove the spring (callout 11).
2
11
Figure 328.
Removing the spring
10 Remove the screw (callout 12), and detach the sensor cover
(callout 13).
11 Disconnect the sensor connector (callout 14), and remove the
registration sensor (callout 15) by lifting it.
2
12
2
13
Figure 329.
410
Registration sensor cover
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
2
14
15
Figure 330.
Disconnecting the sensor connector
12 Remove the paper guide (callout 16).
2
9
Figure 331.
EN
Paper guide
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 411
13 Remove two screws (callout 17) at the front and two screws
(callout 18) at the rear.
14 Detach the reversing plate (callout 19) to the bottom.
2
17
Figure 332.
Reversing plate (front view)
2
19
2
18
Figure 333.
412
Detaching the reversing plate (rear view)
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
15 Remove four screws (callout 20), and remove the front plate
(callout 21).
2
21
2
20
Figure 334.
Front plate
16 Remove the delivery/reversing roller (callout 22).
2
22
Figure 335.
EN
Delivery/reversing roller
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 413
Removing the delivery roller unit (bottom
pick-up mode)
1
Remove the body cover (see page 380).
2
Remove the pick-up motor (see page 385).
3
Remove two screws (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 336.
Body cover
4
Remove the E-ring (callout 2).
2
Figure 337.
414
E-ring
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Figure 338.
EN
5
Remove the screw (callout 3), and remove the fixing pin (callout
4).
6
Detach the delivery roller unit (callout 5).
Delivery roller unit
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 415
Removing the delivery roller unit (top pick-up
mode)
1
Remove the body cover (see page 380).
2
Remove the screw (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 339.
Removing the screw and spring
3
Disconnect the spring (callout 2) and the connector (callout 3).
2
2
3
Figure 340.
416
Disengaging the connector
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
4
Remove two screws (callout 4), and detach the timing belt
(callout 5) and the motor unit (callout 6).
2
5
2
4
2
4
2
6
Figure 341.
EN
Detaching the timing belt and motor unit
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 417
5
Remove the screw (callout 7) at the front and three screws
(callout 8) at the rear.
6
Detach the delivery roller unit (callout 9).
2
8
2
7
2
9
Figure 342.
418
Detaching the delivery roller unit
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the reversing guide
Note
1
Remove the body cover (see page 380).
2
Remove the gear (callout 1) and the timing belt (callout 2).
Remove the gear while unlocking it.
2
2
1
Figure 343.
Gear and timing belt
Figure 344.
Unlocking and removing the gear
EN
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 419
3
Disengage the reversing guide springs from the front side
(callout 3) and the rear side (callout 4).
2
3
Figure 345.
Reversing guide spring, front
2
4
Figure 346.
Reversing guide spring, rear
4
Remove the screw (callout 5), and detach the solenoid unit
(callout 6).
2
5
2
6
Figure 347.
420
Detaching the solenoid unit
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
5
Remove the reversing sensor jack (callout 7), and the grounding
cord (callout 8).
2
7
2
8
Figure 348.
Note
Reversing the sensor jack and grounding cord
6
Remove two screws (callout 9), the spacer (callout 10), and the
fixing pin (callout 11).
7
Detach the reversing guide (callout 12).
When mounting the fixing pin, be sure to return it to original position.
2
9
2
11
2
10
2
12
Figure 349.
EN
Detaching the reversing guide
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 421
Removing the stopper plate solenoid
1
Remove the body cover (see page 380).
2
Remove two screws (callout 1), and remove the document tray
mounting plate (callout 2).
2
1
Figure 350.
2
1
2
Document tray mounting plate
3
Remove two screws (callout 3), and disconnect the connector
(callout 4).
4
Remove the stopper plate solenoid (callout 5).
2
3
2
5
Figure 351.
422
2
4
Stopper plate solenoid
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
To make adjustments
Secure the solenoid (callout 1) in place where the rubber block
stopper (callout 2) butts against the rear edge of the stopper plate
(callout 3) when the plunger of the solenoid (callout 1) is at the end of
its stroke.
2
3
2
1
2
Figure 352.
EN
Solenoid positioning
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 423
Positioning the paper-retaining plate solenoid
(SL2)
1
Prepare test strips. Cut a sheet of A4- or letter-size paper
(64 g/m2) into thirds, to widths of about 70 mm each.
1/3
70 mm (approx.)
1/3
1/3
Vertical
Figure 353.
Test strips
2
Remove the front cover and the body cover (see page 380).
3
Shift bits 5 and 6 of the DIP switch (DSW1) on the DADF
controller to ON, and press switch SW3 one time. The pick-up
roller rotates and stops at the top pick-up mode pick-up position.
4
When the pick-up roller has stopped, press switch SW3 on the
DADF controller again one time. The motor stops.
5
Secure the paper-retaining solenoid in place so that the delivery
roller (callout 1) (the pick-up roller for top pick-up mode) is in firm
contact with the pick-up roller (callout 2) when the plunger (callout
3) of the paper-retaining solenoid is pushed in fully.
2
1
2
2
3
Figure 354.
424
Delivery roller and pick-up roll
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
6
Push the test strip prepared in step 1 in between the delivery
roller and the pick-up roller while pushing the plunger of the
paper-retaining solenoid. Check to make sure the delivery roller
rotates as the rear and front pick-up rollers are tested.
Figure 355.
Inserting the test strip
Note
When pulling the test strip, the one-way clutch prevents the delivery
roller from rotating.
EN
7
If the delivery roller does not rotate when a test strip is pushed in,
go back to step 3.
8
Shift the bits of the DIP switch (DSW1) on the ADF controller
PCB back to their initial configuration.
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 425
Positioning the paper-deflecting solenoid
(SL3)
1
Remove the body cover (see page 380).
2
Loosen the fixing screw (callout 1), and tighten it when the stroke
of the solenoid (callout 2) is 4.5 mm.
2
1
2
Figure 356.
426
Paper-deflecting solenoid
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the stamp solenoid
1
Remove the delivery roller unit (top pick-up mode) (see page
416).
2
Remove the screw (callout 1) and spring (callout 2).
3
Detach the flapper plate (callout 3).
2
2
1
2
3
Figure 357.
Flapper plate
4
Remove the E-ring (callout 4) and the bushing (callout 5).
2
4
2
5
Figure 358.
EN
E-ring and bushing
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 427
Note
5
Remove two E-rings (callout 6), the gear (callout 7), and the
bushing (callout 8).
6
Detach the delivery roller (callout 9).
Take care not to drop the pin.
2
9
2
7
2
8
2
6
Figure 359.
Delivery roller
7
Remove two screws (callout 10) at the front and two screws
(callout 11) at the rear.
8
Remove the paper-guide plate (callout 12).
2
11
2
12
2
10
Figure 360.
428
Paper-guide plate
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
9
Remove the sensor flag (callout 13), and disconnect the
connector (callout 14).
2
13
2
14
Figure 361.
Sensor flag and connector
10 Remove three screws (callout 15), and detach the delivery roller
mount (callout 16).
2
16
2
15
Figure 362.
Delivery roller mount
11 Remove the delivery roller (callout 17), and detach the stamp
solenoid mount (callout 18).
2
17
Figure 363.
EN
2
18
Delivery roller and stamp solenoid mount
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 429
12 Disengage two claws (callout 19) of the stamp solenoid mount
(callout 18).
13 Detach the stamp solenoid (callout 20).
2
18
2
19
2
20
Figure 364.
430
Stamp solenoid
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the feeding belt
1
Remove the body cover (see page 380).
2
Remove the spring (callout 1) at the front.
2
1
Figure 365.
Spring
3
Note that the rear spring has a retaining hook for temporary
storage of the spring. Free the spring (callout 2) from the hook
(callout 3) at the rear, and engage it on the retaining hook
(callout 4).
2
Figure 366.
EN
2
4
2
3
Placing the spring in the temporary position on the retaining
hook
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 431
4
Note
Remove the screw (callout 5), and detach the solenoid and cable
(callout 6).
Take care not to drop the pin in the solenoid arm.
2
5
2
6
Figure 367.
Detaching the solenoid
5
Remove four screws (callout 7), and detach the side plate (callout
8).
2
8
2
7
2
7
Figure 368.
432
Detaching the side plate
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
6
Note
Remove three screws (callout 9), and detach the delivery unit
linking plate (callout 10).
Figure 369 below shows the linking plate from the bottom of the plate.
2
9
2
9
Figure 369.
2
10
Delivery unit linking plate
7
Pull off the feeding belt (callout 11) to the front.
2
11
Figure 370.
Removing the feeding belt
Note
When replacing the belt, take care not to rub or catch the belt on
protruding sheet-metal parts. This can damage the belt.
EN
Automatic document feeder (ADF) 433
Side HCI
Identifying the external covers
2
2
3
2
1
Figure 371.
External covers
2
4
Figure 372.
434
Rear cover
1
Front cover
2
Upper left cover
3
Upper right cover
4
Rear cover
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the upper left cover
Remove two screws (callout 1) and the upper left cover (callout 2).
2
1
Figure 373.
Upper left cover and screws
Removing the front cover
1
Remove the upper left cover (see above) and open the upper
right cover.
2
Remove two screws (callout 1) and the front cover (callout 2).
1
2
1
Figure 374.
EN
Front cover and screws
Side HCI 435
Removing the rear cover
1
Remove the upper left cover and open the upper right cover.
2
Remove three screws (callout 1) and the rear cover (callout 2).
1
2
Figure 375.
1
Rear cover and screws
Removing the upper right cover
1
Remove the upper left cover.
2
Remove two screws (callout 1) and the upper right cover (callout
2).
2
1
Figure 376.
436
Upper right cover and screws
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the pick-up unit
1
Remove the upper right cover (see page 436).
2
Remove the front cover (see page 435).
3
Remove two screws (callout 1) and the paper-size limit panel
(callout 2).
2
2
1
Figure 377.
EN
Paper-size limit panel
Side HCI 437
4
Remove two screws (callout 3), the fixing plate (callout 4), and
the paper-size limit panel (callout 5).
2
5
2
3
2
4
2
3
Figure 378.
438
Fixing plate and limit panel
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
5
Remove four connectors (callout 6) to release the cable clamp
(callout 7).
2
6
2
7
2
6
Figure 379.
Connectors and cable clamps
6
Remove two screws (callout 8) and pull the pick-up unit (callout 9)
toward you to remove it.
2
8
2
9
Figure 380.
EN
Pick-up unit
Side HCI 439
Removing the pick-up roller
1
Open the upper right cover (see page 436).
2
Release the claw (callout 1) and remove the pick-up roller
(callout 2) from the shaft.
2
2
1
Figure 381.
440
Pick-up roller
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the feed roller and separation roller
1
Remove the upper right cover (see page 436).
2
Rotate the knobs (callout 1) to remove the feed roller (callout 2)
and the separation roller (callout 3).
2
1
2
2
3
Figure 382.
EN
Feed roller and separation roller
Side HCI 441
Removing the lifter wire
To remove parts in front of the lifter wire
1
Remove the upper left cover and the front cover (see page 435).
2
Remove the screw (callout 1) and the bracket (callout 2).
2
2
1
Figure 383.
Preparing to remove the lifter wire
3
Remove the E-ring (callout 3) and the pulley cover (callout 4).
2
4
2
3
Figure 384.
442
E-ring and pulley cover
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
4
Remove the pulley cover (callout 5).
2
5
Figure 385.
EN
Pulley cover
Side HCI 443
5
Remove the screw (callout 6) and the lifter wire (callout 7).
2
6
2
7
Figure 386.
444
Screw and lifter wire
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
To remove parts behind the lifter wire
1
Remove the upper left cover (see page 435).
2
Remove the rear cover (see page 436).
3
Remove the deck controller PCB (see page 453).
4
Remove the power supply PCB (see page 454).
5
Remove three screws (callout 1) and the power supply mount
(callout 2).
2
2
1
2
1
Figure 387.
EN
Parts removal behind the lifter wire
Side HCI 445
6
Remove four connectors (callout 3).
2
3
2
3
Figure 388.
Connectors
7
Remove three screws (callout 4) and the remaining paperdetection unit (callout 5).
2
5
2
4
2
4
Figure 389.
446
Paper-detection unit
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
8
Remove two screws (callout 6) and the lifter drive unit (callout 7).
2
6
2
6
2
7
Figure 390.
Lifter drive unit
9
Remove three screws (callout 8) and the rear panel (callout 9).
2
8
2
8
2
9
Figure 391.
EN
Rear panel
Side HCI 447
10 Remove the E-ring (callout 10) and the gear (callout 11).
2
11
2
10
Figure 392.
E-ring and gear
11 Remove the E-ring (callout 12) and the pulley cover (callout 13).
2
13
2
12
Figure 393.
448
E-ring and pulley cover
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
12 Remove the screw (callout 14) and the bracket (callout 15).
2
15
2
14
Figure 394.
EN
Bracket removal
Side HCI 449
13 Remove the screw (callout 16) and the lifter wire (callout 17).
2
16
2
17
Figure 395.
450
Lifter wire removal
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
To tighten the lifter wire
1
Secure the bracket to the lifter with two screws (callout 1).
2
Thread the lifter wire onto the upper pulley (callout 2).
3
Load the spool of the lifter wire onto the pulley (callout 3) of the
lifter drive shaft, and wind the wire around the pulley groove
twice, by hand.
4
Secure the pulley to the lifter shaft with the two set screws
(callout 4).
2
4
2
2
3
2
4
2
3
2
1
2
Figure 396.
EN
Tightening the lifter wire
Side HCI 451
Removing the lifter motor (M1)
1
Remove the upper left cover (see page 435).
2
Remove the rear cover (see page 436).
3
Remove the deck controller PCB (see page 453).
4
Remove two screws (callout 1) and the lifter motor (M1) (callout
2).
2
1
2
Figure 397.
Lifter motor (M1)
Removing the feeder motor (M2)
1
Remove the pick-up unit (see page 437).
2
Remove two screws (callout 1) and the feeder motor (M2) (callout
2).
2
1
Figure 398.
452
2
Feeder motor (M2)
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the pick-up motor (M3)
1
Remove the upper left cover and the front cover (see page 435).
2
Remove the connector (callout 1), two screws (callout 2), and the
pick-up motor (M3) (callout 3).
2
1
2
3
2
Figure 399.
Pick-up motor (M3)
Removing the deck controller PCB
1
Remove the upper left cover (see page 435).
2
Remove the rear cover (see page 436).
3
Remove 12 connectors (callout 1), two screws (callout 2), and the
deck controller PCB (callout 3).
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
Figure 400.
EN
2
3
Deck controller PCB
Side HCI 453
Removing the power supply PCB
1
Remove the upper left cover (see page 435).
2
Remove the rear cover (see page 436).
3
Remove the deck controller PCB (see page 453).
4
Remove two screws (callout 1) and pull out the power supply
PCB (callout 2) to remove it.
2
1
2
Figure 401.
454
Power supply PCB
Chapter - 6 Removal and replacement
EN
7
Troubleshooting
Chapter contents
System-to-device troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Pre-troubleshooting checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Process of elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Copy module troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Necessary adjustments for replaced parts . . . . . . . . 460
Image fault troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Image faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Numbered error codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Faults not identified by error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Using the copy module service mode to test parts . . 526
ADF troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Fault isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Numbered error codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Check the output of the DADF controller PCB. . . . . . 534
Side HCI troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
User and service LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Sensor and switch tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Test pick-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Faults not identified by error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
EN
Chapter contents 455
456 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
System-to-device troubleshooting
Pre-troubleshooting checklist
Before troubleshooting any specific printer/copier problem, make sure
the following conditions are met:
Note
EN
l
The printer should be disconnected from the network before
beginning troubleshooting (to make sure that the failure is
associated with the printer).
l
The printer driver is correct and current for the printer installed.
l
The printer is being turned off with the copy module soft switch,
not by unplugging the printer or by using the main switch on the
copy module, so that cooling fans run through their entire cycle.
l
Any overdue maintenance should be performed in advance of
troubleshooting.
l
The printer maintenance units are within their rated life.
The customer is responsible for ensuring that the items included in the
printer consumable kits are in good condition.
l
The printer has been maintained on a regular basis as described
in chapter 4 of the HP Color LaserJet 8500/8550 Printer Family
Service Manual. Note the location of any spilled or accumulated
toner before troubleshooting. Toner contamination might indicate
ventilation or printer-environment problems.
l
The toner catch tray is not overfull. Empty the toner catch tray, if
necessary, and identify the source of excessive waste toner.
l
The customer is using supported media.
l
The operating environment is within the specified parameters
listed in chapter 1 of this manual.
l
The printer is not exposed to ammonia gas such as that produced
by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials.
l
The printer is never exposed to direct sunlight.
l
The media are stored correctly and within environmental limits.
l
The printer is installed on a solid, level surface.
l
The line voltage does not vary more than 10% from the nominal
rated value specified on the Power Rating Label. Suspect this
problem if large motors are used near the printer, as they might
cause temporary voltage changes.
l
Any non-HP components (toner, memory boards, and EIO cards)
should be removed from the printer.
System-to-device troubleshooting 457
Note
Note that the Print engine can operate independent of the copy module
if the video IO connection on the printer is terminated. Installers have
been instructed to leave the original terminator that ships with the
printer on the stand behind the printer.
l
Printer hardware or software configuration has not changed, or
the problem is not associated with any specific software. Refer
customers to their software vendor for software-related problems.
l
If service work has been performed or parts replaced, make sure
the correct adjustments have been made.
l
Eliminate the host computers and all items associated with it
(such as drivers, applications, spoolers, etc.) as being possible
causes of the problem.
Process of elimination
Through verification, isolate the problem to the system device.
Verification step
Possible problem
Solution/location of solution
Power
No power
l
l
l
l
l
l
Display
The display on either the printer or the
copy module is not on and showing
information
l
l
458 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Plug a device known to work into
the power outlet.
Temporarily plug the printer
power cable directly into the wall
outlet.
Verify that the three power
switches are ON. Note: The
printer switch will be covered by a
plastic tab. If the plastic tab is in
place, the switch underneath it is
ON.
Verify that the power cables are
functional and connected
correctly.
Verify that the circuit breaker in
the copy module has not been
tripped.
Verify that the power
requirements for the system have
been met.
If the control panel display on the
printer is not working, see the
HP Color LaserJet 8500/8550
Printer Family Service Manual.
If the control panel display on the
copy module is not working, see
wiring diagrams and system block
diagrams (“Copy module” on
page 178 of chapter 5) to locate
and check for loose connections
or failed parts.
EN
Verification step
Possible problem
Solution/location of solution
Paper input devices
Not feeding
l
l
Printed and copied
pages
Image defects
l
l
EN
If the input failure is from the
multipurpose tray (tray 1), tray 2,
tray 3, or tray 4, see chapter 7,
Troubleshooting, in the HP Color
LaserJet 8500/8550 Printer
Family Service Manual.
If the input failure is from the side
HCI, see troubleshooting
procedures (page 535) in this
chapter.
If image defects appear in printed
pages, see chapter 7,
Troubleshooting, in the HP Color
LaserJet 8500/8550 Printer
Family Service Manual.
If image defects appear only in
copied pages, eliminate the ADF
as being the cause of the problem
(“System-to-device
troubleshooting” on page 457),
and then troubleshoot the copy
module (page 460) in this
chapter.
System-to-device troubleshooting 459
Copy module troubleshooting
Overview
Copy module troubleshooting will generally proceed in the order
specified in the following outline:
1
Replaced parts and necessary adjustments
2
Image fault troubleshooting
3
Error codes and faults not identified by error codes
4
Copy module service mode to test parts
Necessary adjustments for replaced parts
If any of the following parts have been replaced recently, or if service
was performed on any of them, see chapter 4, "Adjustments and
maintenance," to complete adjustments:
l
Printer dc controller PCB
(printer part)
See “To replace the dc controller PCB”
on page 120. Also see the HP Color
LaserJet 8500/8550 Printer Family
Service Manual for the procedure to
change the dc controller PCB
hardware.
l
ECO-2PCB (printer part)
See “To replace the ECO-2 PCB” on
page 120.
l
Reader controller PCB
See “To replace the reader controller
PCB” on page 129.
l
CCD unit
See “To replace the CCD Unit” on
page 131.
l
Scanning lamp
See “To replace the scanning lamp” on
page 132.
l
Density detection PCB
See “To replace the intensity detection
PCB, or to remove and replace the
same scanning lamp” on page 133.
460 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
EN
l
Standard white plate
See “To replace the standard white
plate” on page 134.
l
AP-IP PCB
See “To replace the AP-IP PCB” on
page 134.
Copy module troubleshooting 461
Image fault troubleshooting
Initial checks
Environment
l
The voltage must be ± 10% of the requirements noted in chapter
1 of this manual.
l
The copier must not be in a high-temperature and high-humidity
environment (near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier), and it
must not be in a cold place. There must be no source of fire
nearby, and the copier must not be subjected to excessive dust.
l
The copier must not be exposed to ammonium gas.
l
The copier must not be exposed to direct sunshine. As
necessary, curtains must be provided for nearby windows.
l
The room must be well ventilated.
l
The copier must be kept level.
l
The power plug of the printer unit must be connected to the copy
module, and the power plug of the copy module must be
connected to the power outlet.
Originals
Check whether the problem is related to the original or to the copier.
A diazo (blueprint) original or an original with high transparency can
produce copies that can be considered “foggy.” An original prepared
in light pencil can produce copies that can be thought of as “too light.”
Also, very often a “bad copy” is simply a faithful reproduction of a bad
original. Note: Second- and third-generation copies (copies of copies)
deteriorate rapidly in terms of copy quality.
Parts
Check the copyboard cover, copyboard glass, and standard white
plate for dirt and scratches. If any are soiled, clean them with a moist
cloth; if any are scratched, replace them.
Printer assemblies checks
Check the secondary pre-transfer assembly and separation static
eliminator for dirt and faults (scratches, deformations).
Clean the charging wires of the secondary pre-transfer charging
assembly and separation static eliminator. Further, clean the density
sensor and the pre-exposure LEDs.
462 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Check the intermediate transfer drum unit, fusing assembly,
intermediate transfer drum cleaning roller, secondary transfer belt
assembly, toner cartridge, and drum cartridge to make sure that they
are properly mounted.
Paper
Media should meet the specifications outlined by HP. See the media
guidelines on page “Supported media” on page 29. Also check the
HP Media Specifications Guide.
Environmental factors can affect media; try some new media, fresh
from its packaging.
Placement of copy paper
Copy paper must be placed in the cassette or the multi-feeder tray in
an appropriate volume and in the correct orientation.
Transparencies must be placed on the multi-feeder tray with the
correct orientation.
Condensation
In the winter, bringing a copier from a cold place to a warm one can
cause condensation inside the printer, leading to various problems.
Note
EN
l
Condensation in the original exposure system or the drum
exposure system (six-facet mirror, reflecting mirror, lens) can
produce light images.
l
Condensation in the charging system can cause leakage.
l
Condensation on the pick-up/feeding guide can cause feeding
faults.
l
When cold, the photo-conducting layer of the photosensitive
drum inside the drum cartridge tends to have a high resistance,
causing poor contrast on copies.
l
Condensation on the surface of the intermediate transfer drum
can cause ITD cleaning faults. If condensation is found, wipe the
parts dry, or leave the copier turned on for 10 to 20 minutes.
Opening a toner cartridge immediately after bringing it in from a
cold place will also cause condensation. Instruct the user to make
sure that the cartridges have reached room temperature by
leaving them in the room where they will be used for one to two
hours before opening them.
If uneven density (difference in density between front and rear), light
image, or fogging is noted, execute auto gradation correction in user
mode.
Copy module troubleshooting 463
Standard images
The standard image target (part number RY9-9030-020CN) is an
optional tool for testing the copy abilities of this machine.
This target is professional printed on heavy card stock and shows
composite and primary colors, halftone images, halftone grayscale,
and text. This target provides a good baseline against which to
troubleshoot. It will be particularly useful in escalated cases. While
this target is very useful, it is only a sample. Any image that includes
composite and primary colors, halftone images, halftone grayscale,
and text will serve as a standard image.
Figure 402.
Standard image sample
464 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Test Prints
The copy module has 12 built-in test print patterns, each one enabling
identification of a fault in the image. If faults on normal copies are not
found on a test print, the cause can be assumed to be in the original
exposure system, CCD or AP-IP system, or the copy module.
Selecting a test pattern
Set the print count, print size, and color mode (effective if TYPE=3, 4,
5, or 6).
1
Start service mode.
2
Press COPIER.
3
Press TEST
4
Press PG.
5
Press TYPE and key in the Type number on the keypad.
6
Press OK.
7
Press the Copy Start button.
Table 89. Test pattern types
Type
Remarks
Type
Remarks
0
Image from the CCD (normal copying)
10
CMYK horizontal stripe (laser FF ON)
1
For R&D
11
For R&D
2
256 colors
12
CMYK 64 gradations
3
256 gradations
13
RGB 64 gradations
4
16 gradations
14
Full-color 16 gradations (CMYK)
5
Full-face halftone
15
Full-color light area 16 gradations
(CMYK)
6
Grid
16
CMYK horizontal stripe (laser A0 ON)
7 to 9
For R&D
EN
Copy module troubleshooting 465
Horizontal stripe test print (TYPE=10, 16)
Use the horizontal test print to check the dark-area density of each
color, balance between colors, and white lines created during
development.
Figure 403.
l
Dark-area density of each color and balance between
colors—The density must not be appreciably low (light image). If
the density of one color is low, the light-color toner cartridge is
likely to be faulty. If the density of all colors is low, primary or
secondary transfer is likely to be faulty.
l
White lines created by development—If white lines are found in
the cyan area of the copy, the cyan toner cartridge is likely to be
faulty.
l
Uneven density between left and right—If the right and left
densities are uneven for all colors, the drum cartridge, secondary
pre-transfer charging assembly, or secondary transfer belt
assembly of the printer unit is likely to be faulty.
l
Left/right image position—If the image-read start position (ADJX/Y) is faulty, the left and right position will be displaced,
eliminating the non-image width. Such a condition can cause
toner to fly astray and soil the inside of printer.
Horizontal stripe test print
466 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
256-color test print (TYPE=2)
Use the 256-color test print to check the hues. The 256-color test
print shows 256 colors in 16x16 frames arranged from the leading
edge of copier paper (the pattern is repeated).
If a hue is wrong, the toner cartridge or the drum cartridge of the
printer unit is likely to have deteriorated.
Figure 404.
EN
256-color test print
Copy module troubleshooting 467
256-gradation test print (TYPE=3)
Use the 256-gradation test print to check gradation and balance
among colors.
l
Gradation—Check the full gradation between density 0 and
density 255.
l
Balance between specified colors—Check the color balance
by printing in one color or in two colors.
CAUTION
If you specify a color in service mode (TEST > PG > COLOR-Y/M/C/K),
do not specify three colors; doing so can cause a fusing fault that would
ultimately contaminate the fusing assembly.
Figure 405.
256-gradation test print
468 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
16-gradation test print (TYPE=4)
Use the 16-gradation test print to check the gradation, fogging, white
lines, density between left and right, and balance between colors.
Figure 406.
EN
l
Gradation—If the density is not expressed in 16 gradations, the
laser system of the printer unit is most likely to be faulty.
l
White lines—If white lines occur in the image, the toner cartridge
of the printer unit is likely to be faulty.
l
Uneven density between left and right—If the density is
uneven between left and right, the drum cartridge, secondary pretransfer charging assembly, or secondary transfer belt assembly
is likely to be faulty.
16-gradation test print
Copy module troubleshooting 469
Halftone test print (TYPE=5)
Use the halftone test print to check transfer faults, black lines, white
lines, and uneven intervals. When using the halftone test print, set the
density under TEST > PG > DENS-Y/M/C/K.
l
Transfer faults—If transfer faults occur, the intermediate transfer
drum unit or the secondary transfer belt assembly of the printer
unit is likely to be faulty.
l
Black lines—If black lines print on the copy, the photosensitive
drum inside the drum cartridge of the printer unit is likely to have
scratches, or the primary charging roller is likely to be soiled.
l
White lines—If white lines occur at the same position in all
colors, the intermediate transfer drum or the secondary belt
assembly of the printer unit is likely to be faulty. If they occur at
different positions or in one color, the toner cartridge of the printer
unit is likely to be faulty.
l
Uneven intervals—If uneven intervals occur, suspect the
following:
• If errors occur at 0.5 mm intervals, suspect the scanner.
Scanner errors do not appear on test prints.
• If errors occur at 66 mm intervals, suspect the developing
cylinder.
• If errors occur at about 52 mm intervals, suspect the
registration roller.
Figure 407.
Halftone test print
470 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Grid test print (TYPE=6)
Use the grid test print to check color displacement and alignment of
angles and straight lines.
Figure 408.
EN
l
Color displacement—If color displacement occurs, the
intermediate transfer drum or the secondary transfer belt
assembly of the printer unit is likely to be faulty. Often, color
displacement occurs on a test print but not on ordinary copies as
a result of back-test processing. If color displacement is absent
on copies, the copier can be judged to be normal. Use the test
print to check the position of and the color affected by
displacement if the problem is noted on copies.
l
Angles and straight lines—If angles or straight lines are not
correct, the beam of the laser light or the height of the copy
module is likely to be wrong. See chapter 4, "Adjustments and
maintenance".
Grid test print
Copy module troubleshooting 471
CMYK 64-gradation test print (TYPE=12)
Use the CMYK 64-gradation test print to check the gradation of all
CMYK colors at a glance.
Figure 409.
CMYK 64-gradation test print
472 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
RGB 64-gradation test print (TYPE=13)
Use the RGB 64-gradation test print to check the gray color balance
and the gradation in two-color RGB mode.
Figure 410.
EN
RGB 64-gradation test print
Copy module troubleshooting 473
Full-color 16-gradation (CMYK) test print (TYPE=14)
Use the full-color 16-gradation test print to check the gray balance,
gradation of each CMYK color and fogging.
Figure 411.
l
Gray balance—Check to find out if the gray scale is even for all
colors.
l
Gradation—Check the gradation and the difference in density of
each CMYK color.
l
Fogging—If the white area is foggy, the photosensitive drum
inside the drum cartridge or the laser system of the printer unit is
likely to be faulty.
Full-color 16-gradation test print
474 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Full-color light area 16-gradation (CMYK) test print (TYPE=15)
Use the full-color light area 16-gradation (CMYK) test print to check
the gray balance and the gradation of each CMYK color in light areas.
Gray balance and the gradation checks are easier with this test
pattern than with TYPE=14 test prints.
Figure 412.
EN
Full-color light area 16-gradation test print
Copy module troubleshooting 475
Image faults
The table below lists common image faults and the location of the
information that can be used to solve them. Many of the symptoms
will be addressed by troubleshooting the print engine. Always
determine if the image fault appears on printed pages (indicating a
need to troubleshoot the printer) before troubleshooting the copy
module or ADF.
Table 90. Common image faults
Symptom
Description
Page
Light
The output image is too light
477
Dark
The output image is too dark
479
Blank
The copier fails to generate images
479
Solid black/solid color
The copier generates a solid-black copy or an
image in solid color
480
Soiled image/soiled back
The face or back of copy paper is soiled
481
Vertical band/vertical line (sub scanning
direction)
The copy has vertical lines (sub-scanning
direction)
483
White bands/white lines (vertical; sub
scanning direction)
The copy has white vertical lines (sub-scanning
direction)
484
Horizontal bands/horizontal lines (main
scanning direction)
The copy has vertical lines (main scanning
direction)
485
White bands/white lines (horizontal; main
scanning direction)
The copy has white vertical lines (main scanning
direction)
486
Absence of specific color
The copy has a specific missing color
486
White spot
The copy has white spots
487
Fusing fault
The copy has an inadequately fused toner image
488
Distorted image/displaced color
The copy has a distorted or color-displaced
image
488
Uneven image
The copy has smudged or uneven image
489
Dots
The copy has an image covered with dots
490
Ghost
The copy has a (positive) ghost image
490
Soiling (double-sided copy)
The face or back of the copy paper is soiled
(when made in double-sided copying mode)
491
Copy module faulty image
troubleshooting
The problem is not noted on a test print, and is
obviously a problem with the copy module
491
476 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
The output image is too light
Unit
Cause
Copy
module
Printer
Black toner
cartridge
Step
Checks
1
Make a test print in service NO
mode
(TEST > PG > TYPE=14),
YES
and find the color that is
light on the copy. Does the
color appear on the test
print?
The problem is with the
copy module. Go to step 2.
If the color is black only,
go to step 3.
2
See “Image fault troubleshooting” on page 462.
3
Are the contacts soiled on YES
either of the following?
l black toner cartridge
l black developing bias
Clean the contact. If it is
damaged, replace the
problem part. Also, check
for a displaced contact.
Open the front cover while NO
black toner is being
developed on the
photosensitive drum
(about 30 seconds after
the start of test printing),
and take out the black
toner cartridge. Then, take
out the black toner
cartridge and check the
toner image on the
photosensitive drum. Is the
black toner image fully
developed on the surface
of the photosensitive
drum?
Replace the high-voltage
PCB 1.
4
High-voltage
PCB 1
(inadequate
black
developing- bias
output)
Secondary pretransfer
charging
assembly
5
Is the charging wire of the YES
secondary pre-transfer
charging assembly inside
the intermediate transfer
drum unit broken?
Replace the secondary
pre-transfer charging
assembly.
Intermediate
transfer drum
unit
6
Are the contacts soiled on YES
either of the following?
l intermediate transfer
drum unit
l secondary pretransfer charging bias
Clean the contact. If it is
soiled or damaged,
replace the problem part.
Also, check for a displaced
contact.
7
High-voltage
PCB 2
(inadequate pretransfer
charging bias
output)
EN
Yes/No Action
Replace the high-voltage
PCB. Is the problem
corrected?
NO
Replace the dc controller
PCB.
YES
End.
Copy module troubleshooting 477
8
Contact (for
color developing
bias)
Is the contact for the color YES
developing bias for the
printer unit soiled?
Clean the contact. If it is
damaged, replace the
problem part. Also, check
for a displaced contact.
9
High-voltage
PCB 1
(inadequate
color developing
bias output)
Open the front cover while NO
toner is being developed
on the photosensitive
YES
drum (about 20 seconds
after the start of test
printing), and take out the
black toner cartridge.
Then, take out the drum
cartridge, and check the
toner image on the surface
of the photosensitive
drum. Is the color toner
image fully developed on
the surface of the
photosensitive drum?
Replace the high-voltage
PCB 1.
10
Intermediate
transfer drum
11
12
High-voltage
PCB 1
(inadequate
primary transfer
bias output)
Open the right cover of the NO
printer unit, and fit the door YES
switch actuator. Make a
copy, and check the toner
image on the surface of
the intermediate transfer
drum. Is the toner image
fully developed on the
surface of the intermediate
transfer drum?
Are the contacts soiled on YES
either of the following?
l intermediate transfer
drum unit
l primary transfer bias
Replace the high voltage
PCB 1. Is the problem
corrected?
Go to step 11.
Go to step 13.
Clean the contact. If it is
defective or damaged,
replace the problem part.
Also, check for a displaced
contact.
NO
Go to step 13.
YES
End.
Secondary
transfer belt
assembly
13
Are the contacts soiled on YES
either of the following?
l secondary transfer
belt assembly
l secondary transfer
bias
High-voltage
PCB 2
14
Replace the high-voltage
PCB 2. Is the problem
corrected?
478 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Replace the dc controller
PCB.
Clean the contact. If it is
defective or damaged,
replace the problem part.
Also, check for a displaced
contact.
NO
Replace the dc controller
PCB.
YES
End.
EN
The output image is too dark
Unit
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Printer
Density sensor
1
Is the lens of the density
sensor soiled?
YES
Grounding wire
contact (drum
cartridge)
2
YES
Is the contact of the
grounding wire of the drum
cartridge or the contact of
the drum grounding wire
for the printer unit soiled?
Clean the contact. If it is
defective or damaged,
replace the problem part.
Also, check for a displaced
contact.
Contact (drum
cartridge; for
primary
charging bias)
3
Are the contacts soiled on YES
either of the following?
l drum cartridge
l primary charging
Clean the contact. If it is
defective or damaged,
replace the problem part.
Also, check for a displaced
contact.
High-voltage
PCB1
(inadequate
primary
charging bias)
4
Replace the high-voltage
PCB1. Is the problem
corrected?
Clean the lens with a
special brush.
YES
End.
NO
Replace the dc controller
PCB.
The copier fails to generate images
Unit
Copy
module
EN
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
1
Make a horizontal stripe
test print (TYPE=10, 16).
Is the image normal?
YES
Check the connectors and
wiring to the AP-IP PCB
and CCD driver PCB.
Copy module troubleshooting 479
The copier generates a solid-black copy or an image
in solid color
Unit
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Copy
module
Anti-counterfeit
mechanism
(original
exposure
system)
7
Does the problem occur
when an original identical
to a bank note was
copied?
YES
Connector
wiring
8
Are the connections of the NO
connectors and wiring
between the AP-IP PCB
and CCD driver PCB
correct?
Connect them correctly.
The dc power
supply
9
Is dc power present at the NO
following terminals of the
AP-IP PCB?
YES
J502-8: +5.2V
J502-6: +5V
J502-5: +5V
J502-1: 1+5V
See “No dc power to the
copy module” on page 520
CCD unit,
AP-IP PCB
Check the exposure
system (see below). If the
problem is not corrected,
inform the user that the
anti-counterfeit
mechanism has been
turned on.
Try replacing the following,
in sequence:
CCD unit
AP-IP PCB
Checking the exposure system
CAUTION
1
Make sure there are no foreign objects under the copyboard
glass.
2
Clean the scanning lamp, the reflecting plate, the standard white
plate, the copyboard glass, and mirrors 1, 2, and 3. Is the
problem corrected?
3
On the control panel, press FUNCTION > CCD > CCD-ADJ in
service mode. Is the problem corrected?
If you have replaced the scanner parts of the copy module (scanning
lamp, mirror, CCD unit) be sure to execute CCD adjust in service mode
(FUNCTION > CCD > CCD-ADJ). Further, if you have removed and
replaced the scanning lamp or have replaced the intensity detection
PCB, the standard white plate, or the CCD, be sure to execute intensity
adjustment in service mode (FUNCTION > MISC-R > USE-LAMP).
480 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
The face or back of the copy paper is soiled
Unit
Cause
Step
Checks
Printer
Cassette pickup roller,
registration
roller, lower
fusing roller,
feeding roller
1
YES
Does the soiling have a
specific interval that
matches the diameter of
the cassette pick-up roller,
registration roller, lower
fusing roller, feeding
roller?
Secondary
transfer belt
assembly,
fusing inlet
guide, fusing/
separation
lower guide,
separation
guide
2
Is the secondary transfer
belt assembly, fusing
assembly inlet guide,
fusing/separation lower
guide or separation guide
soiled?
ITD cleaning
3
Are there scratches or dirt YES
in the peripheral direction
of the ITD cleaning roller?
Replace the ITD cleaning
roller.
4
Are the contacts soiled on YES
either of the following?
l ITD cleaning roller
(for ITD cleaning bias)
l ITD cleaning
mechanism
Clean the contact. If it is
damaged, replace the
problem part. Also, check
for a displaced part.
5
Does the problem occur in YES
a high-humidity
environment?
Wipe the surface of the
intermediate transfer drum
with a moistened flannel
cloth; then, dry wipe it with
lint-free paper.
6
Are the contacts soiled on YES
either of the following?
l fusing assembly
l fusing/separation bias
Clean the contact. If it is
damaged, replace the
problem part. Also, check
for a displaced contact.
Fusing
assembly
7
High-voltage
PCB 2 (ITD
cleaning bias or
fusing/
separation bias
output absent)
ITD cleaning
roller drive
assembly
EN
Yes/No Action
Replace the high-voltage
PCB 2. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
YES
See “Repetitive image
defects” on page 482.
Identify the soiled roller,
and clean it. If the dirt
cannot be removed,
replace it.
Clean the soiled part. If
the dirt cannot be
removed, replace the part.
End
8
Is the drive gear (used to YES
transmit locking/unlocking)
of the ITD cleaning roller
worn or cracked?
Replace the worn or
cracked part.
9
Is the cam used to lock/
unlock the ITD cleaning
roller worn or cracked?
YES
Replace the worn or
cracked part.
Copy module troubleshooting 481
Printer
ITD cleaning
roller locking/
unlocking
solenoid (SL1)
10
Are connector J674 on the NO
sub-relay PCB and
connector J227 on the dc
controller PCB connected
securely?
Connect the connectors
securely.
ITD cleaning
roller locking/
unlocking
solenoid (SL1)
11
Replace the ITD cleaning
roller locking/unlocking
(SL21) solenoid.
dc controller
PCB
12
NO
Disconnect connector
J674 of the solenoid, and
measure the voltage
between connectors J6741 (CLNRON) and J674-2
(+24 UH) on the harness YES
side. Is it about 85Ω?
Replace the dc controller
PCB
The following table may be useful in isolating repetitive image defects
to the appropriate print engine part. For more information about
repetitive image defects for the printer, see the HP Color LaserJet
8500/8550 Printer Family Service Manual.
Table 91. Repetitive image defects
Problem part
Diameter* Image
(mm)
interval*
(mm)
Development
Soiling
Cassette pick-up roller
24
75
Separation roller
24
75
Feeding roller 1
24
75
Feeding roller 2
38
119
Multi-feeder pick-up roller
30
94
*
Registration roller
16
52
*
Primary charging roller
14
44
Photosensitive drum
62
195
*
Developing cylinder
21
66
*
Upper fusing roller
46
144
*
Power fusing roller
46
144
ITD cleaning roller
18
57
482 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
White spot Soiled
back
Faulty
fusing
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
EN
The copy has vertical lines (sub-scanning direction)
Unit
Cause
Copy
module
Optical
path
Printer
EN
Step
Checks
Yes/
No
1
Make a halftone test print
(TYPE=5). Does it have vertical
bands or lines?
NO
Go to step 2.
YES
Go to step 4.
2
Is the scanning lamp, reflecting
plate, standard white plate,
copyboard glass, or any of the
mirrors soiled?
YES
Clean the soiled part. If
the dirt cannot be
removed, replace the
part.
3
Remove the CCD cover, and clean YES
the surface of the CCD with a
NO
blower brush. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
Photosensitive
drum
4
Are there scratches in the
peripheral direction (sub-scanning
direction) of the photosensitive
drum?
Upper
fusing
roller
5
YES
Are there scratches in the
peripheral direction (sub-scanning
direction) of the upper fusing roller?
Action
End.
Replace the CCD unit.
Replace the
photosensitive drum
cartridge.
Replace the upper
fusing roller.
Copy module troubleshooting 483
The copy has white vertical lines (sub-scanning
direction)
Unit
Cause
Copy
module
Optical
path
Printer
Step
Checks
Yes/
No
1
Make a halftone test print
(TYPE=5). Does it have vertical
white bands or lines?
NO
Go to step 2.
YES
Go to step 4.
2
Is the scanning lamp, reflecting
plate, standard white plate,
copyboard glass, or any of the
mirrors soiled?
YES
Clean the soiled part. If
the dirt cannot be
removed, replace the
part.
3
Remove the CCD cover, and clean YES
the surface of the CCD with a
NO
blower brush. Is the problem
corrected?
End.
YES
Make a vertical stripe test print
(TYPE=10). Do the white bands or
lines occur in a specific color only?
Replace the toner
cartridge for the specific
color.
Is the fusing/separation upper
guide coated with toner?
Clean the fusing/
separation upper guide.
4
5
Fusing/
separation
upper
guide
YES
Action
Replace the CCD unit.
Photosensitive
drum unit
6
YES
Are there scratches in the
peripheral direction (sub-scanning
direction) of the photosensitive
drum?
Replace the
photosensitive drum
cartridge.
Laser
optical
path
7
YES
Is the laser emission opening of
the printer unit coated with foreign
matter?
Remove the foreign
matter.
Printer unit 8
laser
scanner/
scanner
assembly
Are any of the mirrors of the laser/ YES
scanner assembly soiled?
Replace the laser/
scanner assembly.
Intermediate
transfer
drum unit
9
YES
Are there scratches in the
peripheral direction (sub-scanning
direction) of the intermediate
transfer drum?
Replace the
intermediate transfer
drum unit.
Upper
fusing
roller
10
Are there scratches in the vertical
direction (sub-scanning direction)
of the upper fusing roller?
CAUTION
YES
Replace the upper
fusing roller.
If you have replaced the scanner parts of the copy module (scanning
lamp, mirror, CCD unit) be sure to execute CCD adjust in service mode
(FUNCTION > CCD > CCD-ADJ). Further, if you have removed and
replaced the scanning lamp, intensity detection PCB, standard white
plate, or the CCD, be sure to execute intensity adjustment in service
mode (FUNCTION > MISC-R > USE-LAMP).
484 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
The copy has vertical lines (main scanning direction)
Unit
Cause
Copy
module
EN
Step
Checks
Yes/
No
1
NO
Make a halftone test print
(TYPE=5). Does it have horizontal YES
bands or lines?
Action
Go to step 2.
Go to step 6.
Optical
path
2
Is the scanning lamp, reflecting
plate, standard white plate,
copyboard glass, or any of the
mirrors soiled?
YES
Clean the soiled part. If
the dirt cannot be
removed, replace the
part.
Power
supply
voltage,
scanning
lamp,
inverter
PCB
3
Does the scanning lamp flicker?
YES
1. Check for fluctuation in
the power supply voltage.
2. Check the scanning
lamp and the inverter
PCB; if faulty, replace the
part.
Original
exposure
system
4
Does the mount for mirror 1/2/3
move smoothly on the rail?
NO
Remove the impediment
to smooth movement.
CCD unit
5
Remove the CCD cover, and clean YES
the surface of the CCD with a
NO
blower brush. Is the problem
corrected?
End.
Replace the CCD unit.
Copy module troubleshooting 485
The copy has white vertical lines (main scanning
direction)
Unit
Cause
Copy
module
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
1
Make a halftone test print
(TYPE=5). Does it have white
bands/lines?
NO
Go to step 2.
YES
Go to step 4.
Optical
path
2
Is the scanning lamp, reflecting
plate, standard white plate,
copyboard glass, or any of the
mirrors soiled?
YES
Clean the soiled part. If
the dirt cannot be
removed, replace the
part.
Original
exposure
system
3
Does the mount for mirror 1/2/3
move smoothly on the rail?
NO
Remove the impediment
to smooth movement.
YES
Check the cable of the
original exposure system.
CAUTION
If you have replaced the scanner parts of the copy module (scanning
lamp, mirror, CCD unit) be sure to execute CCD adjust in service mode
(FUNCTION > CCD > CCD-ADJ). Further, if you have removed and
replaced the scanning lamp, intensity detection PCB, standard white
plate, or the CCD, be sure to execute intensity adjustment in service
mode (FUNCTION > MISC-R > USE-LAMP).
The copy has a specific missing color
Unit
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Printer
Toner
cartridge
1
Remove the toner cartridge, and
turn on the power. If the printer
starts up normally, check each
cartridge. Does it malfunction?
YES
Replace the problem
cartridge.
Tonerlevel
detection
2
Is the missing color black?
YES
See the printer service
manual.
No
See the printer service
manual.
486 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
The print has white spots
Unit
Cause
Step
Checks
Printer
Toner
cartridge
1
Are any of the developing cylinders YES
of the toner cartridge defective?
Replace the problem
cartridge.
Photosensitive
drum unit
2
Is the photosensitive drum or the
primary charging roller defective?
YES
Replace the
photosensitive drum
cartridge.
Is the unlocking mechanism of the YES
secondary transfer belt assembly
defective?
Replace the problem
part.
Is the intermediate transfer drum
unit defective or soiled?
YES
Replace the intermediate
transfer drum unit.
Secondary 5
transfer
belt
assembly
Are the contacts soiled on either of YES
the following?
l secondary transfer belt
assembly
l secondary transfer bias
Clean the contact. If it is
defective or damaged,
replace the problem part.
Also, check for a
displaced contact.
6
Highvoltage
PCB 2 (inadequate
transfer
bias
output)/dc
controller
PCB
Replace the high-voltage PCB 2. Is YES
the problem corrected?
NO
End
Secondary 3
transfer
belt
assembly
Intermediate
transfer
drum unit
EN
4
Yes/No Action
Replace the dc controller
PCB.
Copy module troubleshooting 487
The print has an inadequately fused toner image
Unit
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Printer
Fusing
assembly
1
Is the upper or lower fusing roller
scratched or defective?
YES
Replace the upper or
lower fusing roller or the
fusing assembly.
dc
controller
PCB
2
Is the upper or lower fusing
thermistor soiled?
YES
Clean the upper or lower
fusing thermistor.
NO
Replace the dc controller
PCB.
The copy has a distorted or color-displaced image
Unit
Cause
Step
Checks
Printer
Drum
motor
drive
assembly
1
Is the drive gear between the drum YES
cartridge and the drum motor, or
between the intermediate transfer
drum and the drum motor, worn or
cracked?
Laser/
scanner
assembly
2
Are connectors J1001, J2, and
J901 of the laser/scanner
assembly connected securely?
NO
Connect them securely.
3
Replace the laser/scanner
assembly. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
End
4
Are connectors J205 and J211 on
the dc controller PCB connected
securely?
NO
Connect them securely.
YES
Replace the dc controller
PCB.
dc
controller
PCB
488 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Yes/No Action
Replace the worn or
cracking gear.
EN
The copy has a smudged or uneven image
Unit
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Printer
Separation
sensor
1
Does the lever of the separation
sensor move poorly?
YES
Replace the sensor lever.
Fusing
assembly
2
Is the fusing assembly inlet guide
soiled? Are the contacts soiled on
either of the following?
l upper fusing roller
l fusing/separation bias
YES
Clean the contact. If it is
defective or damaged,
replace it. Also, check for
a displaced contact to
place it correctly.
Highvoltage
PCB 2
3
Are connectors J5005 and J5006
on the high-voltage PCB 2
connected securely?
NO
Connect them securely.
4
Replace the high-voltage PCB 2. Is YES
the problem corrected?
End
5
Is the upper fusing cover securely
fitted to the fusing assembly?
Fit the cover securely.
Fusing
assembly
Registra- 6
tion roller,
feeding
roller 2
Is the drive gear of the registration YES
roller or the feeding roller itself
worn?
Replace the worn part.
7
Separation
staticeliminator
Is the charging wire of the
separation static eliminator
broken?
YES
Replace the separation
static eliminator.
8
Separation
staticeliminating
bias PCB
Are connectors J5600, J5601, and NO
J5602 on the separation staticelimination bias PCB connected
securely?
dc
controller
PCB
EN
NO
9
Replace the separation static
eliminator PCB. Is the problem
corrected?
Connect them securely.
YES
End.
NO
Replace the dc controller
PCB.
Copy module troubleshooting 489
The copy has an image covered with dots
Unit
Cause
Printer
Secondary 1
transfer
belt
assembly
Step
Checks
YES
Is the charging roller of the
secondary transfer belt defective or
worn?
Replace the secondary
transfer charging roller.
2
Separation static
eliminator
Is the charging wire of the
separation static eliminator
broken?
YES
Replace the separation
static eliminator.
3
Separation
staticeliminator
bias PCB 4
Are connectors J5600, J5601, and NO
J5602 on the separation staticeliminating bias PCB connected
securely?
Replace the separation static
eliminating bias PCB. Is the
problem corrected?
dc
controller
PCB
Yes/No Action
Connect them securely.
YES
End.
NO
Replace the dc controller
PCB.
The copy has a (positive) ghost image
Unit
Cause
Checks
Yes/No Action
Printer
Connector 1
wiring
Step
Are connector J681 on the preexposure LED assembly, relay
connectors J74 and J18,
connectors J645 and J647 on the
main relay PCB, and connector
J227 on the dc controller PCB
connected securely?
NO
Connect them securely.
2
Preexposure
LED
assembly/
dc
controller
PCB
Replace the pre-exposure LED
assembly. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
End
NO
Replace the dc controller
PCB.
490 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
The face or back of the copy paper is soiled (when
made in double-sided copying mode)
Unit
Cause
Printer
Duplexing 1
unit
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Is the duplexing feeding roller 1
soiled?
YES
Clean the roller.
2
Is the feeding guide soiled?
YES
Clean the guide.
3
Is the reversing roller or the
duplexing feeding roller 2 soiled?
YES
Clean the roller.
NO
Replace the duplexing
unit.
The problem is not noted on a test print and is
obviously a problem with the copy module.
Unit
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
1
Is there a foreign object
anywhere on or under the
copyboard glass?
YES
2
YES
Execute auto gradation
correction in user mode. Is the
problem corrected?
End.
3
Does the mount for mirror 1/2/ NO
3 move smoothly on the rail?
Remove the impediment to
smooth movement.
4
Clean the standard white plate, YES
mirror 1/2/3, reflecting plate,
and copyboard glass; then,
execute FUNCTION > CCD >
CCD-ADJ. Is the problem
corrected?
End.
Missing
service
mode
numbers
5
Compare the values listed on
the service label of the copy
module and to values listed
under ADJUST in service
mode. Are they identical?
Scanning
lamp
6
Remove the scanning lamp,
YES
and clean it. Then, remount the
lamp, and execute
Copy
module
NO
Remove the foreign object.
Enter the values listed on the
service label.
End.
FUNCTION > MISC-R > USELAMP. Is the problem
corrected?
EN
CCD/CCD 7
unit
Remove the CCD cover, and
clean the surface of the CCD
with a blower brush. Is the
problem corrected?
YES
End.
8
Are the contacts of the CCD/
CCD driver corrections
correct?
YES
End.
Copy module troubleshooting 491
9
Replace the CCD/CCD driver. NO
Is the problem corrected?
492 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Check to find out if the
connectors on the AP-IP PCB
are connected securely; if
normal, replace the AP-IP
PCB.
EN
Numbered error codes
These error messages appear on the copy module LCD at the time
they occur. A history of errors can be reviewed through the copy
module service mode (COPIER > DISPLAY > ERR). See “Service
mode” on page 60.
Note
Errors described as “printer” or “printer unit” will also appear as error
messages on the printer’s LCD.
E000/E003 (printer)
E000:The fusing assembly warm-up is faulty. This error occurs when
it takes longer than the reference time for the assembly to reach the
standby temperature after the fusing heater has been turned on.
E003:The fusing temperature is abnormally low. This error occurs
when the fusing assembly temperature drops below 120° C after it
has reached the target value.
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
1
Upper
thermistor (open
circuit)
Remove the fusing assembly, and NO
measure the resistance between
connectors J26F-A4 (FXTHU) and
J26F-A3 (GND) on the fusing
assembly side. Is it between 250
KΩ and 600 KΩ (normal
temperature)?
Check the wiring from
connector J222 on the dc
controller PCB to the upper
thermistor; if it is normal,
replace the fuser assembly.
2
Lower
thermistor (open
circuit)
Measure the resistance between NO
connectors J26F-A2 (FXTHL) and
J26F-A1 (GND) on the fusing
assembly side. Is it between 250
KΩ and 600 KΩ (normal
temperature)?
Check the wiring from
connector J222 on the dc
controller PCB to the lower
thermistor; if it is normal,
replace the fuser assembly.
NO
Check the upper fusing heater
and thermal switch. Replace the
fuser assembly if any problems
are found.
Upper fusing
heater, upper
thermal switch
(open circuit)
3
With the fusing assembly
removed, is there electrical
continuity between connectors
J27F-3 (HTUH) and J27F-4
(HTUC) on the fusing assembly
side?
Lower fusing
heater, lower
thermal switch
(open circuit)
4
NO
Is there electrical continuity
between connectors J26F-3
(HTLH) and J26F-4 (HTLC) on the
fusing assembly side?
Check the lower fusing heater
and the lower thermal switch.
Replace the fuser assembly if
any problems are found.
Upper or lower
thermistor
5
Is the upper or lower thermistor in NO
even contact with the upper/lower
fusing roller?
Mount the thermistor properly.
Upper or lower
thermistor
6
Is the upper or lower thermistor
soiled?
Clean the area of contact with
the upper or lower fusing roller.
EN
YES
Copy module troubleshooting 493
Connector
7
NO
Are connector J222 on the dc
controller PCB and connector J26
of the fusing assembly connected
securely?
Power supply
(printer unit)
8
Replace the power supply of the
printer unit. Is the problem
corrected?
CAUTION
Connect the connectors
securely.
YES
End.
NO
Replace the dc controller PCB.
If E001 or E003 is indicated, be sure to discharge the error memory
capacitor (C259) on the dc controller PCB after troubleshooting the
problem, as it may contain error memory. (Short out JP201 on the dc
controller PCB to discharge C259; see the Printer Unit Service
Manual.)
E001 (printer)
The fusing assembly has overheated. This error occurs when the
fusing temperature during standby or copying exceeds 230° C.
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
1
Upper
thermistor (short
circuit)
YES
With the fusing assembly
removed, measure the resistance
between connectors J26F-A4
(FXTHU) and J26F-A3 (GND) on
the fusing assembly side. Is it 2
KΩ or less?
Check the wiring from
connector J222 on the dc
controller PCB to the upper
thermistor; if normal, replace
the fuser assembly.
2
Lower
thermistor (short
circuit)
Measure the resistance between YES
connectors J26F-A2 (FXTHL) and
J26F-A1 (GND) on the fusing
assembly side. Is it 2KΩ or less?
Check the wiring from
connector J222 on the dc
controller PCB to the lower
thermistor: if normal, replace
the fuser assembly.
Power supply
(printer unit)
Replace the power supply of the
printer unit. Is the problem
corrected?
CAUTION
3
YES
End.
NO
Replace the dc controller PCB.
If E001 or E003 is indicated, be sure to discharge the error memory
capacitor (C259) on the dc controller PCB after troubleshooting the
problem, as it may contain error memory. (Short out JP201 on the dc
controller PCB to discharge C259; see the Printer Unit Service
Manual.)
494 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
E004 (printer)
The upper and lower fusing heaters have an open circuit. This error
occurs when no ac current is found in the fusing heater at the start of
temperature control.
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Upper fusing
heater/upper
thermal switch
(open circuit)
1
With the fusing assembly
removed, is there electrical
continuity between connectors
J27F-3 (HTUH) and J27F-4
(HTUC) on the fusing assembly
side?
NO
Check the upper fusing heater
and the upper thermal switch.
Replace the fuser if problems
are found.
Lower fusing
heater, lower
thermal switch
(open circuit)
2
NO
Is there electrical continuity
between connectors J27F-3
(HTLH) and J26F-4 (HTLC) on the
fusing assembly side?
Check the lower fusing heater
and the lower thermal switch.
Replace the fuser assembly if
problem parts are found.
Connectors
3
NO
Are connector J222 on the dc
controller PCB, connector J26 of
the fusing assembly, and
connector J101 of the printer unit
power supply connected securely?
Connect the connectors
securely.
Power supply
(printer unit)
4
Replace the power supply of the
printer unit. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the dc controller PCB.
E009 (printer)
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Fusing
assembly
1
Does the rated voltage of the
fusing assembly match the
printer’s voltage?
NO
Check the product number of
the fuser assembly; if
necessary, replace the fusing
assembly or the printer unit
power supply.
Connectors
2
NO
Are connector J222 on the dc
controller PCB and connector J26 YES
of the fusing assembly connected
securely?
EN
Connect the connectors.
Replace the dc controller PCB.
Copy module troubleshooting 495
E010/E011 (printer)
E010:The main motor start-up is faulty. This error occurs when the
revolution of the main motor fails to reach a specific value.
E011:The main motor rotation is faulty. This error occurs when the
revolution of the main motor fails to reach a specific value.
Cause
Step
Checks
Connector
1
NO
Are connector J219 on the dc
controller PCB and the relay
connector J1 connected securely?
Y/N
Connect the connectors
securely.
Action
Main motor
2
YES
Does the voltage change from
about 5 to 0 V between connector NO
J219-4 (MON) on the dc controller
PCB and connector J219-5 (GND)
when the power is turned on?
Replace the main motor.
Replace the dc controller PCB.
E013 (printer)
A specific number of copies have been made after the waste toner
case full warning has been issued (DISPLAY > SENSOR > W-TONER).
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Waste toner
case
1
Is the photosensitive drum
cartridge full of waste toner?
YES
Replace the photosensitive
drum cartridge.
NO
Replace the dc controller PCB.
496 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
E019 (printer)
At the time of power-on or while the drum motor is rotating during
printer operation, the light-receiving cell of the waste toner sensor
does not detect light for a specific time even when the waste toner
case is not full.
Cause
Step
Checks
Waste toner
detection
window
1
YES
Is the waste toner detection
window of the photosensitive drum
soiled?
Connectors
2
Are connector J21 on the dc
controller PCB, connectors J631
and J633 of the waste toner
sensor, and the relay connector
J71 connected securely?
NO
Connect the connectors
securely.
Waste toner
detecting block
(light-emitting/
receiving
section; printer
unit)
3
Is the light-emitting/receiving
section of the waste toner
detection block of the printer unit
soiled?
YES
Dry-wipe the light-emitting/
receiving section of the waste
toner detection block with a dry
cloth.
Waste toner
detection block
(printer unit)
4
Replace the waste toner detection YES
block of the printer unit. Is the
NO
problem corrected?
EN
Y/N
Action
Wipe the waste toner detection
window with a dry cloth.
End.
Replace the photosensitive
drum unit. If the problem cannot
be corrected, replace the dc
controller PCB.
Copy module troubleshooting 497
E020 (printer)
During image stabilization correction control, the LED intensity signal
(LEDCNT) is weak or is not generated at all.
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Density sensor
(light-emitting/
receiving
section)
1
Is the density sensor soiled?
YES
Clean the density sensor with
the special brush located near
the sensor.
Connector
(density
detection PCB)
2
Are connector J1101 on the
density detection PCB, relay
connectors J75 and J46, and
connector J206 on the dc
controller PCB connected
securely?
NO
Connect the connectors
securely.
Density
detection PCB
3
Is the voltage 24 V between
connectors J206-5 (+24 UH) on
the density detection PCB and
GND when the copier is turned
on?
NO
Replace the density detection
PCB.
YES
Replace the dc controller PCB.
E021 (printer)
This error occurs when the developing rotary position sensor (PS3)
does not detect the rotation position flag even when the developing
rotary motor has rotated for a specific time. This error can also occur
when the PS3 detects a faulty or wrong rotation flag width.
Cause
Step
Checks
Toner cartridge
1
NO
Is the shutter of each toner
cartridge open properly when in its
proper position in the printer?
Developing
rotary motor
drive assembly
2
Close the toner cartridge cover,
and turn the power off and then
on. Is the developing rotary
stopper arm still holding the
developing rotary assembly in
place?
Connector
(developing
rotary drive
assembly)
3
Are connectors J704 and J706 on NO
the developing rotary motor PCB
and connector J220 on the dc
controller PCB connected securely
Connect the connectors
securely.
5-V supply line
(developing
rotary position
sensor)
4
NO
Are connector J43 of the
developing rotary position sensor,
relay connector J42, and
connector J207 on the dc
controller PCB connected
securely?
Connect the connectors
securely.
498 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Y/N
Action
Replace the toner cartridge
whose shutter is not open.
YES
Go to step 6.
NO
Go to step 3.
EN
YES
End.
Developing
rotary position
sensor
5
Replace the developing rotary
position sensor. Is the problem
corrected?
Developing
rotary stopper
6
Is the operation of the developing NO
rotary stopper arm normal?
Disconnect connector J705 of the
developing rotary stop solenoid
(SL5); then, measure the
resistance between connectors
J605-10 and J605-12 on the
harness side and between J70511 and J705-12. Is it about 30Ω to
60Ω?
Replace the developing rotary
stopper solenoid.
Developing
rotary motor
PCB
7
YES
Does the voltage between
connectors J220-A6 (RLSROT)
and J220-B5 (GND) on the dc
controller PCB change from about
0 to about 3.5 V immediately after
the copier is turned on?
Replace the developing rotary
motor PCB.
Fuse
(developing
rotary motor
PCB)
8
Is the fuse (FU701, FU702) on the YES
developing rotary motor PCB
NO
blown?
Replace the fuse.
Replace the developing rotary
motor. If the problem cannot be
corrected, replace the dc
controller PCB.
E032
The counter for the copy data fails to operate. This error occurs when
the illegal prevention bit of the control device goes to zero (0) when
the open circuit detection mechanism is not disabled.
EN
Copy module troubleshooting 499
E040 (printer)
The holding plat lifter (multi-feeder) is faulty. This error occurs during
multi-feeder pick-up, when the holding plate position sensor
(PS1302) does not detect the holding plate even when the dc
controller PCB has generated the holding plate solenoid (SL4) ON
signal.
Cause
Step
Checks
Connectors
1
NO
Are connector J213 on the dc
controller PCB; connectors J641,
J642, J643, and J647 on the
printer side main relay PCB;
connectors J671 and J672 on the
sub-relay PCB; connector J1302
of the holding plate solenoid; and
connector J102 of the power
supply connected securely?
Connect the connectors
securely.
Multi-feeder tray 2
PCF
YES
Does the voltage between
connectors J1301-2 (+24 UH) and
J1301-1 (GND) on the multifeeder tray PCB change from 0 to
24 V?
Replace the multi-feeder tray
PCB.
+24 UH
3
Is +24 UH present on the multifeeder tray PCB and the holding
plate solenoid?
Holding plate
solenoid
4
NO
Disconnect connector J1302 of
the holding plate solenoid from the
multi-feeder tray PCB. Measure
YES
the resistance between
connectors J1302-1 (MPTSLD)
and J1302-2 (+24 UH) on the
harness side. Is it about 160Ω?
500 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Y/N
NO
Action
See “No +24 UH (printer)” on
page 523.
Replace the holding plate
solenoid.
Replace the dc controller PCB.
EN
E054 (printer)
Note
This error pertains to the duplexing unit, which is an accessory.
The duplexing feeding roller 1 home position sensor (PS23) does not
detect the home position of the duplexing feeding roller 1 when copy
paper is being fed to the duplexing unit.
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Duplexing
feeding roller 1
home position
sensor lever
1
Is the duplexing feeding roller 1
home position sensor level
damaged?
YES
Replace the lever.
Duplexing
feeding roller
drive gear
2
Is the drive gear of the duplexing
feeding roller worn or cracked?
YES
Replace the worn or cracking
gear.
Duplexing driver 3
PCB
Are connectors J2003, J2004, and NO
J2007 on the duplexing driver
PCB connected securely?
Connect the connectors
securely.
Duplexing
feeding roller 1
home position
sensor (PS23)
4
Replace the duplexing feeding
roller 1 home position sensor. Is
the problem corrected?
YES
Replace the sensor.
Duplexing
feeding clutch
(CL5)
5
Disconnect connector J2003 of
the duplexing feeding clutch, and
measure the resistance between
connectors J2003-1 and J2003-2
on the harness side. Is it about
140Ω?
NO
Replace the duplexing feeding
clutch.
Replace the duplexing motor. Is
the problem corrected?
YES
Replace the duplexing motor
(M8).
Duplexing driver
PCB
NO
Replace the duplexing driver
PCB.
EN
Copy module troubleshooting 501
Duplexing motor 6
(M8)
E055 (printer)
The duplexing driver PCB has detected that the horizontal registration
guide has moved in excess of the maximum distance from when the
home position was detected.
Cause
Step
Checks
Horizontal
registration
guide
1
Is the horizontal registration guide NO
mounted correctly?
Y/N
Mount the guide correctly.
Horizontal
registration
guide home
position sensor
(PS25) lever
2
Is the horizontal registration guide YES
home position sensor lever
damaged?
Replace the lever.
3
Horizontal
registration
guide drive gear
Is the horizontal registration guide YES
drive gear worn or cracked?
Replace the worn or cracked
gear.
Duplexing driver 4
PCB
Are connectors J2006 and J2005
of the duplexing driver PCB
connected securely?
NO
Action
Connect the connectors
securely.
5
Replace the horizontal registration YES
guide home position sensor
(PS25). Is the problem corrected?
Replace the sensor.
Horizontal motor 6
(M7)
Replace the horizontal registration YES
motor. Is the problem corrected?
Replace the horizontal
registration motor (M7).
Horizontal
registration
guide home
position sensor
(PS25)
Duplexing driver
PCB
NO
Replace the duplexing driver
PCB.
E066 (printer)
During image stabilization control, the dc controller PCB cannot
detect the temperature sensor signal (TMPSNS) or the humidity
sensor signal (HUMSNS).
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Connector
(temperature
and humidity
sensor)
1
Are connectors J801 on the
temperature and humidity sensor
and connector J206 on the dc
controller PCB connected
securely?
NO
Connect the connectors
securely.
Replace the temperature and
humidity sensor. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the dc controller PCB.
temperature and 2
humidity sensor
502 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
E100 (printer)
The laser of the scanner unit is faulty. This error occurs when the dc
controller PCB detects DBERR for 2.5 seconds or longer after the
scanner motor has rotated at a specific speed.
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Connector (laser 1
driver signal
line)
Are connector J1001 on the laser NO
driver PCB and connector J205 on
the dc controller PCB connected
securely?
Connect the connectors
securely.
Connectors (BD 2
line)
Are connector J2 on the BD PCB, NO
relay connector J40, and
connector J211 on the dc
controller PCB connected
securely?
Connect the connectors
securely.
Laser scanner
unit
Is the voltage between connectors YES
J211-1 (+5 V) on the dc controller NO
PCB and J211-3 (GND) 5 V
immediately after the copier is
turned on?
Replace the laser scanner unit.
3
Replace the dc controller PCB.
E110 (printer)
This error occurs when the scanner motor fails to reach a specific
revolution within 10 seconds after it has started to rotate. This error
can also occur when the BC PCB detects an error within 2.5 seconds
after the scanner motor has started to rotate.
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Connector
1
Are connector J901 on the laser
scanner motor PC, relay
connector J40, and connector
J211 on the dc controller PCB
connected securely?
NO
Connect the connectors
securely.
Laser scanner
motor
2
YES
Does the voltage between
connectors J211-7 (SCND) on the
dc controller PCB and J211-6
NO
(GND) change from 0 to 17 V or
more when the copier is turned
on?
EN
Replace the laser scanner
motor.
Replace the dc controller PCB.
Copy module troubleshooting 503
E196/E197/E198 (printer)
E196:The EEPROM (IC212) on the dc controller has an error.
E197:A machine internal communication error occurs more than
once. Or, the reception interruption on the dc controller side does not
occur for a specific time for internal communication.
E198:The IC on the dc controller has an error.
Cause
Step
Checks
dc controller
PCB
1
Turn the copier off and then on. Is YES
the problem corrected?
NO
Y/N
Action
End.
Replace the dc controller PCB.
E202
The scanner home position is not detected.This error occurs when
the scanner does not return to the home position when it has been
started.
In response to this code, the control panel keys will lock, and the
“Wait” message will appear. This code is indicated only on the Error
History screen in service mode.
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
1
Is the scanner at home position
when E202 is indicated?
NO
See “The scanner motor fails to
move forward or to move in
reverse.” on page 525.
Original scanner 2
home position
sensor (PS101)
Does J1609A-2 on the reader
controller PCB generate 5 vdc
when the scanner is at PS101?
NO
Check the wiring from the
reader controller PCB to
PS101; if normal, replace
PS101.
Wiring
3
YES
Is there any fault in the wiring or
connectors from J1605 on the
reader controller PCB to J303 and
J302 on the scanner motor driver
PCB?
Connect the wiring correctly.
Scanner motor
driver PCB
4
Replace the scanner motor driver YES
PCB. Is the problem corrected?
End.
Scanner motor
(PM1)
5
Replace the scanner motor (PM1). YES
Is the problem corrected?
NO
End.
504 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Replace the reader controller
PCB.
EN
E203
The scanner motor driver PCB or the scanner motor is faulty. This
error occurs when the scanner home position is detected during
back-scanning (not requiring return to the scanner home position
sensor). It can also occur if a deviation occurs during back-scanning
(returning to the scanner home position sensor).
Cause
Scanner motor
driver PCB/
Scanner motor
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
1
Does the scanner move until
“E203” is indicated?
NO
2
YES
Does the voltage between
connectors J303-B1 (RST) on the
scanner motor driver PCB and
J303-B4 (GND) and between
connectors J303-B2 (MOVE) and NO
J303-B4 (GND) change from 5 to
0V?
Reader
controller PCB
See “The scanner motor fails to
move forward or to move in
reverse.” on page 525.
Replace the scanner motor
driver PCB. If the problem
cannot be corrected, replace
the scanner motor.
Replace the reader controller
PCB.
E211, E215
E211:The scanning lamp (fluorescent lamp) thermistor has an open
circuit. This error occurs when the temperature does not reach 10° C
after supplying the scanning lamp heater with power for two minutes
(starting at 0° C or less). It can also occur when the temperature
drops to 0° C or less during temperature control.
E215:The scanning lamp (fluorescent lamp) thermistor has a short
circuit. This error occurs when the scanning lamp thermistor detects
170° C or more when the fluorescent lamp ON signal (FLON) is off
(including power-on).
Cause
Lamp heater
EN
Step
Checks
1
NO
Disconnect connector J1610 of
the reader controller PCB, and
measure the resistance between YES
connectors J1610-5 (GND) and
J1610-6 (FL_TH) on the harness
side. Is it 100 Ω or less or 100 KΩ
or more?
2
Yes/No Action
YES
Disconnect connector J2039 of
the lamp heater, and measure the
resistance between connectors
J2039-2 (GND) and J2039-3
(FL_TH). Is it 100 Ω or less or 100
K Ω or more?
The reader controller PCB is
faulty. Go to step 4.
Go to step 2.
Replace the lamp heater.
Copy module troubleshooting 505
3
Flat cable
(between J2037
and J2015) and
connectors
Are connector J1610, connectors NO
J2037 and J2015 of the flat cable,
and connector J2039 of the lamp YES
heater connected securely?
Reader
controller PCB
NO
Is the voltage 38 V between
connectors J1611-1 (GNDU) and
J1611-2 (+38V) on the harness
YES
side of the reader controller PCB?
4
Connect the connectors
securely.
Replace the flat cable. Or,
check each of the connectors.
See “No dc power to the copy
module” on page 520.
Replace the reader controller
PCB.
E216, E219
E216:The scanning lamp (fluorescent lamp) fails to turn on when the
power has been turned off and then on. This error occurs when the
intensity sensor does not detect light from the scanning lamp in 15
seconds.
E219:The scanning lamp (fluorescent lamp) has reached the end of
its life. This error occurs when the thermistor of the scanning lamp
detects a temperature of 150° C or more while the scanning lamp is
on.
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Fluorescent
lamp
1
Replace the fluorescent lamp. Is
the problem corrected?
YES
End.
Inverter PCB
2
Replace the inverter PCB. Is the
problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the reader controller
PCB.
Reader
controller PCB
E217
The temperature does not exceed the setting when the lamp heater is
powered for three minutes or more while the scanning lamp heater is
going through constant temperature control.
Cause
Step
1
Lamp heater,
reader controller
PCB
Checks
Yes/No Action
Replace the lamp heater. Is the
problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the reader controller
PCB.
506 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
E218
The scanning lamp (fluorescent lamp) is absent, or the inverter PCB
(copy module) is faulty. This error occurs when activation is
attempted and the scanning lamp is not mounted or the lamp filament
is broken.
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Scanning lamp
1
Is the scanning lamp mounted
properly?
NO
2
Replace the scanning lamp. Is the YES
problem corrected?
3
Are connectors J1002 and J1003
on the inverter PCB, and
connector J1602 on the reader
controller PCB connected
securely?
Inverter PCB
Mount the lamp properly. (See
note below.)
Replace the lamp.
NO
Connect the connectors
securely.
YES
Replace the inverter PCB.
Note
If you have removed and then remounted the scanning lamp, be sure
to execute intensity adjustment in service mode (FUNCTION >
MISC-R > USE-LAMP).
Note
If you have mounted a new scanning lamp, be sure to execute intensity
adjustment and CCD adjustment in service mode (FUNCTION >
MISC-R > LAMP-ADJ and FUNCTION > CCD > CCD-ADJ, respectively.)
EN
Copy module troubleshooting 507
E240
One of the following has occurred:
1
The communication between the dc controller PCB and the
reader controller PCB is faulty. This error occurs when the
DPPRDY signal is sent for less than 0.25 seconds from the
reader controller to the dc controller PCB after power-on.
2
The communication between the dc controller PCB and the
formatter or between the reader controller PCB and the formatter
is faulty. This error occurs when the signals between the
formatter and the dc controller PCB or between the formatter and
the reader controller PCB cannot be exchanged for a specific
time after power-on.
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Interface cable
1
Is the interface cable used to
connect the copy module and the
printer unit connected securely?
Further, are the copy module
power cord and the printer unit
power cord connected securely?
NO
Make the connections secure,
and turn on the copy module.
YES
Replace the video interface
PCB or the reader controller
PCB.
Video interface
PCB, reader
controller PCB
PS/PCL board
NO
Turn the unit off and remove the
formatter, and turn on the printer YES
unit and copy module as one (as a
copier). Is E240 indicated?
2
dc controller
PCB
Replace the formatter.
Replace the dc controller PCB.
E243
The communication between the control panel CPU PCB and the
reader controller PCB is not possible 20 seconds or more after
power-on.
Cause
Step
Checks
Connectors
1
Are connector J901 on the control NO
panel CPU PCB and connector
J1608 on the reader controller
PCB connected securely?
Connect the connectors
securely.
Replace the control panel CPU
PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the reader controller
PCB.
2
Control panel
CPU PCB,
reader controller
PCB
508 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Yes/No Action
EN
E351
Cause
Step
Checks
Power supply
1
NO
Are the PCBs and connectors
connected securely? (If the power
supply is cut abnormally, the
copier can indicate “E351” when it
warms up. If this occurs, turn the
copier off and then on to reset.)
Yes/No Action
ECO PCB/
AP-IP PCB
2
Are the CO PCB and AP-IP PCB
connected securely?
Make the connections secure,
and turn the copier off and then
on.
NO
Connect the PCBs securely.
YES
Replace the parts in the order
indicated:
ECO PCB
AP-IP PCB
E353
E353 is indicated in response to a mismatch of the serial number of
the reader controller PCB and that of the EEPROM while the reader
controller PCB is being replaced. See “Removing the electrical unit
pullout” on page 367.
E355
E355 is indicated in response to a mismatch of the serial numbers of
the copy module, the reader controller PCB, and the EEPROM while
the reader controller PCB is being replaced (as when the wrong serial
number is entered). If this code appears, enter the correct serial
number of the copy module using OPTION > USER > SERIAL in service
mode.
E401
The error shown on the touch-screen display is in the ADF. See “ADF
troubleshooting” on page 528.
This error indicates that either the pick-up motor (M1) fails to rotate or
the pick-up roller sensor (S5) is faulty. In normal operation, a flag is
attached to the spindle of the pick-up motor (M1), and the rotation of
the motor is checked in reference to the flag blocking the pick-up
roller sensor (S5). The E401 error is indicated when the sensor does
not turn on and off two times or more within one second.
EN
Copy module troubleshooting 509
E402
The error shown on the touch-screen display is in the ADF. See “ADF
troubleshooting” on page 528.
This error indicates that either the belt motor (M3) fails to rotate or the
belt motor clock (S10) is faulty. This error occurs when the number of
belt motor clock pulses within 200 ms is less than a specific value.
E403
The error shown on the touch-screen display is in the ADF. See “ADF
troubleshooting” on page 528.
This error indicates that either the ADF motor (M2) fails to rotate, or
the ADF motor clock sensor (S9) is faulty. This error occurs when the
number of ADF motor clock pulses within 200 ms is less than a
specific value.
E404
The error shown on the touch-screen display is in the ADF. See “ADF
troubleshooting” on page 528.
This error indicates that either the delivery motor (M5) fails to rotate
or the delivery motor clock sensor (S13) is faulty. This error occurs
when the number of ADF motor clock pulses within 200 ms is less
than a specific value.
E411
The error shown on the touch-screen display is in the ADF. See “ADF
troubleshooting” on page 528.
This error indicates that either the document tray paper sensor (S1)
or the registration sensor (S3) is faulty. This error occurs when the
sensor output is 2.3 V or more in the absence of paper.
510 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
E545, E546
The error shown on the touch-screen display is in the output device.
Note
Output devices are not supported on the LJ8550 MFP.
This error indicates that the bin flapper 1 (for E545) or bin flapper 2
(for E546) of the sorter-H1 is faulty. These errors occur when the bin
flapper solenoid sensor (PI12) does not detect solenoid operation
even when the solenoid (SL3 for E545 or SL4 for E546) is driven
during initialization or face-down delivery. This error can also occur
when the bin flapper sensor remains on even when the solenoid has
stopped operation.
E677, E678, E679
E677 indicates that an error has occurred during the initial
communication between the ACC controller PCB and an accessory.
The error occurs when the ACC controller PCB and the accessory are
not ready for communication within four seconds (possibly due to a
problem in the power supply), or when an initial communication error
with each accessory has occurred.
E678 indicates that the communication between the ACC controller
PCB and an accessory has been interrupted. The error occurs when
the accessory is turned off in the middle of communication, or when
the cable of the accessory has been disconnected in the middle of
communication.
E679 indicates that an error has occurred in the protocol used for
communication between the ACC controller PCB and an accessory.
This error occurs when the read/write/parity check of data is faulty,
and communication does not end within a specific time.
Cause
Step
Checks
Accessories
power,
accessories
1
NO
Are the power cables of the
accessories and the
YES
communication cable to the printer
unit connected securely?
EN
Yes/No Action
Turn the power off and then on.
Replace the ACC controller
PCB.
Copy module troubleshooting 511
E710, E711
These are IPC (initialization) errors. E710 occurs when the IPC sync
register for the copy module and the copy module-related
accessories fail to go to one (1) within three seconds. E711 occurs
when data has been written 10 times or more to the error register
within 1.5 seconds during the communication between the copy
module and copy module-related accessories.
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Copy module
1
Turn the copy module rear power
switch off and then on; then, turn
on the control panel power soft
switch. Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
Reader
controller PCB,
accessories
(connected to
the copy
module)
2
Replace the reader controller
PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Refer to the Service Manual for
the reader-unit accessory in
question.
E712
The error shown on the touch-screen display is in the ADF. See “ADF
troubleshooting” on page 528.
This error indicates that the IC for communication on the ADF side is
faulty. This error occurs when the communication with the copy
module has been interrupted for five seconds or more.
E717
This error occurs when the copy module is started after disconnecting
the copy data control without canceling the open circuit detection
mechanism of the copy module. If this error has occurred, execute
error clear and set COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE > B-CLR in service
mode to “0”, and then disconnect the copy data controller.
Note
The copy data controller is not available for the LJ8550 MFP.
512 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
E805 (printer)
The heat discharge fan 1 (FM, used for the fusing assembly and area
near the feeding assembly) is faulty. This error occurs when the
motor lock signal (FAN1LK) goes to one (1) for 1.5 seconds or more
while the fan is rotating.
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
1
Connectors
(heat discharge
fan 1 drive
assembly)
Are connectors J702 and J706 on NO
the developing rotary motor PCB
and connector J220 on the dc
controller PCB connected
securely?
Connect the connectors
securely.
Connectors (24
V for heat
discharge fan 1
drive)
2
NO
Are connector J701 on the
developing rotary motor PCB,
connectors J648 and J641 on the
main relay PCB, and J102 on the
dc power supply connected
securely?
Connect the connectors
securely.
Heat discharge
fan 1
3
Does the voltage change to about YES
24 V between connectors J702-3
(FAN1ON) on the developing
rotary motor PCB and J702-1
(GND)?
Replace the heat discharge fan
1.
Developing
rotary motor
PCB
4
Does the voltage change to about YES
24 V between connectors J701-1
(+24 VB) and J701-2 (GND) on
the developing rotary motor PCB
immediately after the copier is
turned on?
Replace the developing rotary
motor PCB.
Main relay PCB 5
Does the voltage between
connectors J641-1 (+24 VB) and
J641-4 (GND) on the main relay
PCB change to 24 V immediately
after the copier is turned on?
YES
Replace the main relay PCB.
The dc power
Is the dc power present?
NO
See “No dc power in the printer
(+5V, +24 VB)” on page 522.
YES
Replace the dc controller PCB.
EN
65
Copy module troubleshooting 513
E806 (printer)
The heat discharge fan 2 (FM2, used for the area around the
intermediate transfer drum) is faulty. This error occurs when the fan
motor lock signal (FAN2LK) goes to one (1) for 1.5 seconds or more
while the fan is rotating.
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
1
Connectors
(heat discharge
fan 2 drive
assembly)
Are connectors J603 and J706 on NO
the developing rotary motor PCB
and connector J220 on the dc
controller PCB connected?
Connect the connectors
securely.
Connectors (24
V for heat
discharge fan 2
drive)
2
NO
Is connector J701 on the
developing rotary motor PCB,
connectors J648 and J641 on the
main relay PCB, and connector
J102 on the dc power supply
connected securely?
Connect the connectors
securely.
Heat discharge
fan 2
3
Does the voltage change to about YES
24 V between connector J703-3
(FAN2ON) and J703-1 (GND) on
the developing rotary motor PCB
immediately after the copier is
turned on? Does the voltage
change to about 24 V for
connector J702-1 (GND)?
Replace the heat discharge fan
2.
Developing
rotary motor
PCB
4
Does the voltage change to about YES
24 V between connectors J701-1
(+24 VB) and J701-2 (GND) on
the developing rotary motor PCB
immediately after the copier is
turned on?
Replace the developing rotary
motor PCB.
Main relay PCB 5
YES
Does the voltage change to 24V
between connectors J641-1 (+24
VB) and J641-4 (GND) on the
main relay PCB immediately after
the copier is turned on?
Replace the main relay PCB.
The dc power
(printer unit)
Is the dc power present in the
printer unit?
NO
See “No dc power in the printer
(+5V, +24 VB)” on page 522.
YES
Replace the dc controller PCB.
6
514 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
E807 (printer)
The heat discharge fan (FM3, used for the area around the scanner)
is faulty. This error occurs when the fan motor lock signal (FAN3LK)
goes to one (1) for 1.5 seconds or more while the fan is rotating.
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
1
Connectors
(heat discharge
fan 3 drive
assembly)
Are connectors J681 and J682 on NO
the pre-exposure LED relay PCB
and relay connectors J18 and J17,
connectors J645 and J647 on the
main relay. PCB, and connector
J227 on the dc controller PCB
connected securely?
Connect the connectors
securely.
Connectors (24
V for heat
discharge fan 3
drive)
2
Are connectors J641 on the main NO
relay PCB and J102 on the dc
power supply connected securely?
Connect the connectors
securely.
Heat discharge
fan 2
3
Does the voltage change to about YES
24 V between connectors J645-3
(FAN3ON) on the main relay PCB
and J645-1(GND) immediately
after the copier is turned on?
Replace the heat discharge fan
3.
Main relay PCB 4
YES
Does the voltage change to 24V
between connectors J641-1 (+24
VB) and J641-4 (GND) on the
main relay PCB immediately after
the copier is turned on?
Replace the main relay PCB.
The dc power
(printer unit)
Is the dc power present in the
printer unit?
NO
See “No dc power in the printer
(+5V, +24 VB)” on page 522.
YES
Replace the dc controller PCB.
5
E808 (printer)
The fusing drive circuit power unit is faulty. This error occurs when
the fusing heater safety circuit has detected a fault in the upper and
lower fusing heaters.
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Fusing
assembly
1
Replace the fusing assembly. Is
the problem corrected?
YES
End.
Power supply
(printer unit)
2
Replace the power supply on the
printer side. Is the problem
corrected? (The fusing heater
drive circuit or the fusing heater
safety circuit is faulty.)
YES
End.
NO
Replace the dc controller PCB.
EN
Copy module troubleshooting 515
E809 (printer)
The power supply cooling fan (FM4, used for the area around the
copy module main power supply) is faulty. This error occurs when the
fan error signal (FANERR) goes to zero (0) for 1.5 seconds or more
while the fan is rotating.
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
1
Connectors
(power supply
cooling fan drive
assembly)
NO
Are the relay connector J2031,
connectors J7 and J8 on the copy
module main power supply PCB,
and connector J1602 on the
reader controller PCB connected
securely?
Connect the connectors
securely.
Power supply
(cooling fan)
2
Does the voltage change to 24 V
between connectors J7-3 (+24
VB) on the copy module main
power supply PCB and J7-4
(GND) immediately after the
copier is turned on?
YES
Replace the power supply
cooling fan.
The dc power
3
Is dc power present in the copy
module?
NO
See “No dc power to the copy
module” on page 520.
YES
Replace the dc controller PCB.
E810 (printer)
This error occurs when the drum cartridge detecting switch does not
turn on at power-on or when the cover is opened/closed.
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Drum cartridge
1
Is the drum cartridge set in the
copier correctly?
NO
Set the cartridge correctly, and
turn the copier off and then on.
Drum cartridge
switching lever
2
YES
Check the drum cartridge
switching lever on the printer side.
Is it displaced or cracked?
If the lever is displaced, set it to
the correct position. If the lever
is cracked, replace it.
Drum cartridge
switching guide
3
Is the drum cartridge switching
guide defective?
YES
Replace the drum cartridge.
Connector
(memory inside
the drum
cartridge)
4
Are connector J209 on the dc
controller PCB and relay
connectors J47 and J48
connected securely?
NO
Connect the connectors
securely.
Memory (inside
the drum
cartridge)
5
Replace the drum cartridge. Is the YES
problem corrected?
NO
516 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
End.
Replace the dc controller PCB.
EN
E812 (printer)
This error occurs when the intermediate transfer drum (ITD) home
position is not detected within a specific time (about 10 seconds).
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Intermediate
transfer drum
(ITD), Density
sensor
1
Is the intermediate transfer drum
(ITD) set in the printer properly?
NO
Set the drum properly, and turn
the power off and then on.
YES
See “E020 (printer)” on
page 498.
E813 (printer)
This error occurs when both the upper fusing roller temperature
detection signal (FXTHU) and the lower fusing roller temperature
detection signal (FXTHL) indicate -10° C or less.
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Fusing
assembly
1
Is the fusing assembly set in the
printer properly?
NO
Set the fusing assembly
properly, and turn the power off
and then on.
Connector
(fusing
assembly)
2
Is connector J26 of the fusing
assembly connected securely?
NO
Connect the connector
securely.
Connector (dc
controller PCB)
3
Is connector J222 on the dc
controller PCB connected
securely?
NO
Connect the connector.
YES
Replace the dc controller PCB.
E814 (printer)
A specific number of copies have been counted after the
photosensitive drum end of life warning has been issued.
Cause
Step
Checks
Drum cartridge
1
Replace the drum cartridge. Is the YES
problem corrected?
NO
EN
Y/N
Action
End.
Replace the dc controller PCB.
Copy module troubleshooting 517
E903
The error shown on the touch-screen display is in the side HCI. See
“Side HCI troubleshooting” on page 535.
This error indicates one of three problems:
1
An error has been detected in the paper deck lifter motor.
2
The lifter upward movement takes longer than the specified time.
3
The paper level change time is in excess of a specific value while
the lifter is moving up.
E999
A timing problem has occurred with the copy module. Power cycle the
unit to alleviate the problem.
518 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Faults not identified by error codes
No ac power to the copy module
Cause
Step
Checks
Power plug
1
Is the power plug connected to the NO
power outlet?
Yes/No Action
Connect the power plug.
Main power
source
2
Is the rated ac voltage present at
the power outlet?
NO
Advise the user to correct the
problem.
3
Is the rated voltage present
between J1101-1 and J1101-3?
YES
Go to step 7.
Leakage
breaker
(ELCB1)
4
Is the switch of the leakage
breaker in the copy module at
OFF (LOAD) position?
YES
Check the ac power system unit
and line; if faulty, replace the
part. If normal, shift the switch
of the leakage breaker to ON
(LINE) side. (See note below.)
Leakage
breaker
(ELCB1)
5
Is the resistance 0 Ω between both NO
terminals of the leakage breaker
(ELCB1)?
YES
Power cord,
6
noise filter PCB
Replace the power cord or the
noise filter PCB. Is the problem
corrected?
7
Copy module
rear power
switch (MSW1),
wiring
NO
Connect the probes to both
terminals of the copy module rear
power switch (MSW1). Does the YES
resistance change to ∞Ω when the
switch is turned on?
Note
EN
Turn on and off (shifting to LINE
and LOAD) the switch of the
leakage breaker, and check it
for electrical continuity. If it is
still not 0 Ω, replace the leakage
breaker. See Figure 413.
Replace the problem part.
Replace the copy module rear
power switch (MSW1).
Check the ac ac power line and
connectors.
The leakage breaker has two functions, serving as a circuit breaker
and cutting of power in response to leakage. Be sure to make line-toline and line-to-chassis checks for short circuits even if there is no fault
in the leakage breaker.
Copy module troubleshooting 519
Figure 413.
Leakage breaker
No dc power to the copy module
Cause
Step
Checks
The ac power
1
Is ac power present between J1-1 NO
and J1-9 on the copy module main
power PCB?
See “No ac power to the copy
module” on page 519.
YES
Turn off the copy module rear
power supply switch, and
disconnect the power plug. After
three minutes, connect the power
plug to the power outlet, and turn
on the copy module power switch.
Does the copier operate normally? NO
The copy module main power
supply PCB is normal; however,
the protection circuit on the
PCB is likely to have activated.
Remove the cause, and turn on
the power once again.
2
Overcurrent/
overvoltage
(protection
circuit
activation), copy
module main
power supply
PCB
520 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Yes/No Action
Replace the copy module main
power supply PCB.
EN
No ac power to the printer
Cause
Step
Checks
Copy module
1
Disconnect the power plug of the YES
printer from copy module and
connect it directly to the power
outlet. Is the printer now receiving
ac power?
Yes/No Action
See “No ac power to the copy
module” on page 519
Circuit breaker
(printer)
2
NO
Remove the printer’s power
supply and measure the
resistance between both terminals
of the circuit breaker. Is the
reading 0Ω?
Press the button on the circuit
breaker and check again for
electrical continuity. If the
reading is not 0Ω, replace the
circuit breaker.
Printer power
switch (SW1),
printer power
supply
3
NO
Remove the printer’s power
supply and connect the probes to
both terminals of the power supply YES
switch. Is the resistance 0Ω when
the printer power switch is on and
∞Ω when the switch is off?
Replace the printer power
switch.
Check the ac power line and
connectors for poor contact; if
normal, replace the printer unit
power supply.
Note
After turning off the circuit breaker, wait 60 seconds before turning it
back on. Before connecting the printer power plug to the power outlet,
turn on the power switch and check the ac line for a short circuit and
the condition of the circuit breaker (contact resistance and continuity)
with a meter.
Note
At the time of installation, the printer power switch (SW1) is turned on
and covered by a face cover. If removing or installing a printer power
switch (SW1), make sure the switch is on the face cover is reattached
when the switch is replaced.
EN
Copy module troubleshooting 521
No dc power in the printer (+5V, +24 VB)
Cause
Step
Printer ac power 1
Overcurrent/
overvoltage
(protection
circuit
activation),
printer power
supply fuse
2
Printer power
switch supply,
wiring and dc
load, dc
controller PCB
3
Checks
Yes/No Action
Disconnect the power plug from
the printer and connect it directly
to the power outlet. Is the printer
now receiving ac power?
NO
See “No ac power to the printer”
on page 521.
Turn off the printer power switch Yes
(SW1) (see note on page 521) and
disconnect the copy module
power plug. After two minutes,
reconnect the copy module power
plug and turn on the printer power
switch (SW1). Is the operation
NO
normal?
The copy module power supply
PCB is normal. However, the
protective circuit on the PCB
has activated. Remove the
cause of the activation and turn
on the power again.
NO
Turn off the printer unit power
switch (see note above) and
disconnect connector J204 from
YES
the dc controller PCB. Connect the
printer’s power plug directly to the
power outlet and turn on the
printer power switch. Is there dc
power (+5V) at the J204-1
connector?
Replace the printer power
supply.
522 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Replace the printer’s power
supply fuse.
Check the wiring from the dc
controller PCB. If normal,
replace the dc controller PCB.
EN
No +24 UH (printer)
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Printer dc power 1
Disconnect the power plug of the YES
printer from copy module and
connect it directly to the power
outlet. Is the printer now receiving
dc power?
See “No dc power in the printer
(+5V, +24 VB)” on page 522
Connectors
2
Are connectors J641 through J643 NO
and J6476 of the main relay PCB,
connectors J671 and J673 on the
sub-relay PCB, connector J102 of
the power supply, and connector
J227 on the dc controller PCB all
connected securely?
Connect the connectors
securely
Right cover
switch (main
relay PCB)
3
Is there electrical continuity
between connectors J641-1 (+24
VB) and J642-3 (PMP) on the
main relay PCB when the right
cover switch (SW641) is turned
on?
NO
Replace the right cover switch
on the sub-relay PCB.
Delivery cover
and front cover
switch (subrelay PCB)
4
Is there electrical continuity
between connectors J671-1
(PMP) and J671-2 (PFUFR) on
the sub-relay PCB when the
delivery cover/front cover switch
(SW761) is turned on?
NO
Replace the delivery cover/front
cover switch (SW761) on the
sub-relay PCB.
Printer power
supply
5
Disconnect the power plug of the NO
printer from copy module and
connect it directly to the power
outlet. Turn on the printer power
switch (see note on page 521) and
measure the voltage between
connectors J641 (+24 VB) on the
main relay PCB and J641-4
(GND). Is it 24 V?
Main relay PCB 6
EN
Disconnect the power plug of the NO
printer from the copy module, and YES
then connect it directly to the
power outlet. Turn on the printer
power switch (see note on
page 521) and measure the
voltage between connectors J647B11 (+24 UH) on the main relay
PCB and J647-A1 (GND). Is it 24
V?
Replace the printer power
supply.
Replace the main relay PCB.
Replace the dc controller PCB.
Copy module troubleshooting 523
No +24 VAR (printer)
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Printer dc power 1
Disconnect the power plug of the YES
printer from copy module and
connect it directly to the power
outlet. Is the printer now receiving
dc power?
See “No dc power in the printer
(+5V, +24 VB)” on page 522
Connectors
2
Are connectors J701 to the
developing rotary motor PCB;
connectors J641, J642, J644 and
J648 on the main relay PCB;
connector J672 on the sub-relay
PCB; and connector J102 of the
power supply all connected
securely?
NO
Connect the connectors
securely
Right cover
switch (main
relay PCB)
3
Is there electrical continuity
between connectors J641-1 (+24
VB) and J642-3 (PMP) on the
main relay PCB when the black
toner cartridge switch (SW644) is
turned on?
NO
Replace the right cover switch
on the main relay PCB.
Black toner
4
cartridge switch
NO
Is there electrical continuity
between connectors J644-1 (PBK)
and J644-2 (PMP) on the main
relay PCB when the black toner
cartridge detection switch
(SW644) is turned on?
Replace the black toner
cartridge (SW644).
Toner cartridge
cover switch
(SW6772)
5
NO
Is there electrical continuity
between connectors J642-1
(PYMC) and J642-2 (PBK) on the
sub-relay PCB when the toner
cartridge cover switch (SW762) is
turned on?
Replace the toner cartridge
cover switch (SW762) on the
sub-relay PCB.
Drum cartridge
switch
6
NO
Is there electrical continuity
between connectors J642-1
(PYMC) and J648-1 (+24 VAR) on
the main relay PCB when the
drum cartridge switch (SW642) is
turned on?
Replace the drum cartridge
switch (SW642) on the main
relay PCB.
Main relay PCB 7
Disconnect the power plug of the NO
printer from copy module and
YES
connect it directly to the power
outlet. Turn on the printer power
switch (see note on page 521) and
measure the voltage between the
connectors J648-1 (+24 VAR) and
J648-3 (GND) on the main relay
PCB. Is it 24 V?
524 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Replace the main relay PCB.
Replace the dc controller PCB.
EN
The scanner motor fails to move forward or to move
in reverse.
Cause
Step
Checks
Cable
1
Is the drive cable routed correctly? NO
Rail
2
Is the rail free of dirt? Does it
move smoothly when moved by
hand?
NO
Check the surface of the rail for
dirt and foreign matter or some
other obstacle; clean, lubricate,
or correct as necessary. If the
rail is soiled, clean it with
alcohol, and apply a small
amount of lubricant.
Scanner home
position sensor
(PS101)
3
Is the scanner home position
sensor (PS101) normal? See the
instructions for how to check the
photo-interrupters.
NO
Check the wiring and lightblocking plate; if normal,
replace the sensor.
Connectors,
wiring
4
Are connector J301 on the
scanner motor driver PCB and
connectors J3, J5, and J6 on the
copy module main power supply
PCB connected securely?
NO
Connect the connectors
securely.
Copy module dc
power supply
Scanner motor
driver PCB
6
Yes/No Action
Route the cable correctly.
Measure the voltage between the NO
following terminals of the scanner
motor driver PCB. Is it as
indicated?
J301-9 and -8: about +5.2 V
J301-7 and -6: about +15 V
J301-5 and -6: about -12 V J301-4
and -2: about +38 V
J301-3 and -1: about 38 V
See “No dc power to the copy
module” on page 520.
Replace the scanner motor driver YES
PCB. Is the problem corrected?
End.
Scanner motor
(PM1)
NO
Replace the scanner motor.
EN
Copy module troubleshooting 525
Using the copy module service mode to test
parts
The AP-IP PCB and the microprocessor on the dc controller PCB of
the printer are equipped with a self-diagnostic mechanism that
periodically checks the condition of the copy module (particularly the
condition of the sensors). Upon detecting an error, the mechanism
displays an error code on the copy module LCD.
Keep the following in mind:
l
When the self-diagnosis mechanism has turned on, the copier
can be reset by turning it off and then on. However, perform the
following if E000, E001, E003, E0044, E009, E211, E215, E217,
E717, or E808 is indicated:
a Select FUNCTION > CLEAR in service mode.
b Press ERR to highlight.
c Press OK, and turn the rear power switch on and off manually;
then, turn on the control panel soft switch to clear the error
code.
d See that the message on the control panel has disappeared
and the Copy Mode screen appears.
l
For E000, E001, E003, E004, E009, E808, the copier will turn off
in 20 seconds after detecting the error.
l
If E001 or E003 has occurred, the error data might be retained in
the error memory capacitor (C259) of the dc controller PCB for
the printer unit. Be sure to discharge the capacity after removing
the cause. (To do so, short out JP201 on the dc controller PCB;
for details, see the Printer Unit Service Manual).
l
Select DISPLAY > ERR to check the error history.
526 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Using the copy module device to part fault isolation
The copy module can test the functionality of many of its parts from
service mode. The list below shows the parts that can be tested and
the service menu steps that take you to the test.
l
CCD (COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD). Creates negative image of
filtered in cyan.
l
LCD (COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL > LCD-CHK). Press stop key to
end.
l
LEDs (COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL > LED-CHK). Press LED-OFF
to end.
l
Keys (COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL > KEY-CHK). Press KEY-CHK
again to end.
l
Touch (COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL > TOUCHCHK). Press
TOUCHCHK again to end.
l
Fan (COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > FAN-ON). Press OK to end.
l
Lamp (COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > SCANLAMP).
l
Move scan head (COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > SC-MOVE)
l
P-IP PCB (COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > IP-CHK).
l
Power-off mechanisms (COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P >
POWEROFF).
l
Original-size photointerrupters (COPIER > I/O > R-CON, PORT 002,
BIT 7, 6, 5, 4).
l
Home-position photointerurrupter (COPIER > DISPLAY).
To check the photointerrupters
EN
1
Start service mode.
2
Place standard size paper on the glass.
3
Select COPIER > I/O > R-CON, and look at port 002, bits 7,6,5,4,
when the top cover or ADF is closed.
4
If bits 7,6,5,4 change, the original size sensors have detected the
standard size paper and are functioning correctly.
5
You can also use (COPIER > DISPLAY > DOC-SZ) to check
functionality of the original-size detection photo sensors. Place a
standard-size original on the glass and close the cover. The
display will report the size detected.
6
To check the home-position photointerrupter, select COPIER >
DISPLAY > SENSOR > SC-HP.
Copy module troubleshooting 527
ADF troubleshooting
Fault isolation
ADF service involves whole-unit exchange, but only after the
following procedures have been performed, if necessary:
l
Replace parts. The only replaceable part on the ADF is the
feeding belt (FC1-7815-020CN). See “Removing the feeding belt”
on page 431.
l
Clean. See “Cleaning ADF parts” on page 167.
l
Calibrate and adjust. See “ADF adjustments” on page 140.
When a new ADF is installed, it must be calibrated and adjusted. See
“ADF adjustments” on page 140.
Note
Many of these calibrations can also be performed from Service Mode
on the copy module.
These procedures are also documented in the ADF installation guide
that ships with the new ADF.
528 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Numbered error codes
Note
If the table indicates replacement of a part, exchange the entire ADF.
E401
This error indicates that either the pick-up motor (M1) does not rotate
or the pick-up roller sensor (S5) is faulty. In normal operation, a flag is
mounted on the spindle of the pick-up motor (M1), and the rotation of
the pick-up motor is mounted in reference to the flag blocking the
pick-up roller sensor (S5). This error appears when the sensor does
not turn on and off two times or more per second.
Cause
Step
Checks
Pick-up roller
sensor (S5)
1
NO
Set the meter range to 20 V dc,
and connect the + probe to J5-1
and the - probe to J5-2 on the
DADF controller PCB. Turn the
flag (light-blocking plate) on the
pick-up roller shaft by hand. Is the
voltage about 5 V when the flag is
at the sensor and 0.15 V when the
flag is not at the sensor?
Pick-up motor
(M1)
2
Set the meter range to 200V dc,
and connect the + probe to J12-1
and the - probe to J12-2 on the
DADF controller PCB. Does the
reading change to 22 V when the
Copy Start key is pressed?
EN
Yes/No Action
YES
Check the wiring from the pickup motor (M1) to the DADF
controller PCB. If normal,
replace the pick-up motor.
NO
Replace the DADF controller
PCB.
ADF troubleshooting 529
E402
This error indicates that either the belt motor (M3) does not rotate or
the belt motor sensor (S10) is faulty. This error occurs when the
number of belt motor clock pulses per 200 ms is fewer than the
specified value.
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Belt motor clock 1
sensor (S10)
NO
Set the meter range to 20 V dc,
and connect the + probe to J9-B4
and the - probe to J-B3 on the
DADF controller PCB. Does the
reading jump between 0 V and 5 V
when the clock disk is turned
slowly by hand?
Belt motor (M3) 2
Set the meter range to 200 V dc,
and connect the + probe to J7-1
and the - probe to J7-2 on the
DADF controller PCB. Does the
reading change to 23 V when the
Copy Start key is pressed?
Check the wiring from the belt
motor clock sensor (S10) to the
DADF controller PCB. If normal,
replace the belt motor clock
sensor (S10).
YES
Check the wiring from the belt
motor (M3) to the DADF
controller PCB. If normal,
replace the belt motor (M3).
NO
Replace the DADF controller
PCB.
E403
This error indicates that either the ADF motor (M2) does not rotate, or
the ADF motor sensor (S9) is faulty. This error occurs when the
number of ADF motor clock pulses per 200 msec is fewer than the
specified value.
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
ADF motor clock 1
sensor (S9)
NO
Set the meter range to 20 V dc,
and connect the + probe to J9-A11
and the - probe to J9-A10 on the
DADF controller PCB. Does the
reading jump between 5 V and 0 V
when the clock disk is turned
slowly by hand?
ADF motor (M2) 2
Set the meter range to 200 V dc,
and connect the + probe to J11-1
and the - probe to J11-2 on the
DADF controller PCB. Does the
reading change to 23 V when the
Copy Start key is pressed?
530 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Check the wiring from the ADF
motor clock sensor (S9) to the
DADF controller PCB. If normal,
replace the ADF motor clock
sensor (S9).
YES
Check the wiring from the ADF
motor (M2) to the DADF
controller PCB. If normal,
replace the ADF motor (M3).
NO
Replace the DADF controller
PCB.
EN
E404
This error indicates that either the delivery motor (M5) does not
rotate, or the delivery motor sensor (S13) is faulty. This error occurs
when the number of delivery motor clock pulses per 200 msec is
fewer than the specified value.
Cause
Step
Checks
Delivery motor
clock sensor
(S13)
1
NO
Set the meter range to 20 V dc,
and connect the - probe to J14-1
on the DADF controller PCB. Does
the reading jump between 0 V and
5V when the clock disk is turned
slowly by hand?
Yes/No Action
Delivery motor
(M5)
2
Set the meter range to 200 V dc,
and connect the + probe to J14-8
and the - probe to J14-7 on the
DADF controller PCB. Does the
reading change to 23 V when the
Copy Start key is pressed?
Check the wiring from the
delivery motor clock sensor
(S13) to the DADF controller
PCB. If normal, replace the belt
motor clock sensor (S13).
YES
Check the wiring from the
delivery motor (M5) to the
DADF controller PCB. If normal,
replace the delivery motor (M5).
NO
Replace the DADF controller
PCB.
E411
This error indicates that either the document tray paper sensor (S1)
or the registration sensor (S3) is faulty. This error occurs when the
output of the sensor is 2.3 V or higher when there is no paper in the
document tray.
Cause
Step
Checks
Document tray
paper sensor
(S1)
Registration
sensor (S3)
1
Adjust the levels of the document YES
tray paper sensor and the
registration sensor. is the problem
corrected?
Adjust the levels of every
sensor.
2
Is the light-receiving section of
YES
each sensor soiled with paper lint.
Clean the light-receiving side of
the sensor with a cotton swab.
Document tray
paper sensor
(S1)
Registration
sensor (lightreceiving)
(LED3)
3
NO
For the document tray paper
sensor, measure the voltage
between connectors J5-7 and J5-9
of the DADF controller PCB.
For the registration sensor on the
light-receiving side, measure the
voltage between connectors J9B10 and J9-B9 of the DADF
controller PCB.
Is the voltage between 0.6 V and
1.1 V?
Check the wiring. If normal,
replace the document tray
paper sensor (S1) or the
registration (light-receiving)
sensor (LED3).
EN
Yes/No Action
ADF troubleshooting 531
Document tray
paper sensor
(S1)
4
Registration
sensor (S3)
5
YES
Measure the voltage between
connectors J5-8 and J5-9 of the
DADF controller PCB. Is the
NO
reading 1.5 V or less when paper
is in the document tray and 4 V or
more when there is no paper in the
document tray.
Replace the document tray
paper sensor (S1).
YES
Measure the voltage between
connectors J9-B12 and J9-B11 of
the DADF controller PCB. Is the
NO
reading 4.5 V or more when paper
is in the document tray and 1.3 V
or less when there is no paper in
the document tray.
Replace the registration sensor
(S1).
Replace the DADF controller
PCB.
Replace the DADF controller
PCB.
E712
The communications IC on the ADF side is faulty. This error occurs
when communication with the printer is disrupted for five seconds or
more.
Cause
Wiring
Step
Checks
1
Turn the power switch off and then YES
on. Is the problem corrected?
Check the wiring from the
printer’s dc controller PCB and
the DADF controller PCB.
2
Set the meter range to 200 V dc. NO
Connect a + probe to connector
J2-1 and a - probe to connector
J2-2. Measure the voltage.
Connect a + probe to connector
J1-6 and a - probe to connector
J2-2.
Is the reading 24 V in both cases?
Make sure the ADF is receiving
power from the printer.
Replace the DADF controller PCB. YES
Is the problem corrected?
NO
End.
DADF controller 2
PCB
532 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Yes/No Action
Replace the printer’s dc
controller PCB.
EN
Self-diagnosis
The microprocessor on the DADF controller PCB checks the state of
the ADF and, upon detecting an error, displays one of the numbered
error messages in the copy module’s LCD.
CAUTION
The copy module might reset itself (turning itself off and on) when the
self-diagnosis begins.
Note
If the ADF is out of order, copies can still be made by placing originals
on the copyboard glass.
EN
ADF troubleshooting 533
Check the output of the DADF controller PCB
Figure 414.
1
Power off the copier.
2
Shift bit 4 of the DIP switch (DSW) on the DADF controller PCB to
ON.
DIP switch on the DADF controller PCB
3
Turn on the copier.
4
With no original in the ADF, press the push switch SW3 on the
DADF controller PCB one time.
5
Check to make sure that LED1 and LED2 on the DADF controller
PCB light up, and the voltage of TP2-1 and TP2-2 is 1.1±0.1 V.
If the voltage of either TP1-1 or TP1-2 is not as indicated, suspect
displacement of the light-emitting/-receiving unit of the sensor that
corresponds to the meter probe. Check the position of the sensor.
534 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Side HCI troubleshooting
Overview
When a breakdown or jam occurs in the side HCI, the condition of the
unit can be checked by the user LED (LED1: green and orange 2color light) on the LED PCB and the service LED (LED201: red light)
on the deck driver PCB. These LEDs, used in combination with the
DIP switches (SW201) on the paper deck driver PCB, will help to
troubleshoot the side HCI effectively.
1
User LED
2
Service LED
3
DIP switch bank
2
1
2
2
3
Figure 415.
EN
Figure 5-101
Side HCI troubleshooting 535
User and service LEDs
User LED
The condition of the user LED (LED1) in the unit enables you to check
operational conditions.
l
Continuous green light—the unit and the printer assembly are
communicating normally.
l
Flashing orange light—a paper jam has occurred, a door is
open, or another condition requiring operator intervention has
occurred.
l
Continuous orange light—breakdown.
The user LEDs operate only when the DIP switches are all off or in
the factory default position for normal operation.
Service LEDs
The combination of DIP switch settings and service LED (LED202)
lighting makes it possible to check the operational condition of the
side HCI.
During normal operation the DIP switches are in the following state:
SW201-1
Off
SW201-2
Off
SW201-3
Off
SW201-4
Off
The service LED repeats a cycle consisting of 0.5 seconds on and 0.3
seconds off when the unit is operating normally. When an error
occurs, the service LED flashes in the cycle shown below: header
(1.0 seconds on, 0.2 seconds off), detected error details (0.3 seconds
on, 0.2 seconds off), and pause (2.0 seconds off).
Figure 416.
Figure 5-102
536 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Use the information in table 92 to identify errors based on the service
LED lighting cycle. For example, if the service LED flashes twice in
the header section, and once in the error detection section, this
indicates a feeder sensor jam.
Table 92. Errors based on LED lighting cycle
EN
Header
Detection details Error description
2
1
Feeder sensor delay jam
2
2
Feeder sensor initial jam
2
4
Feeder sensor stationary jam
1
1
Deck open
1
2
Upper right cover open, lifter
being raised
1
3
Out of paper
Side HCI troubleshooting 537
Sensor and switch tests
To enter the sensor check mode, set the DIP switches to the following
settings:
SW201-1
Off
SW201-2
Off
SW201-3
On
SW201-4
On
Then, turn on the side HCI.
Using the sensor check mode, check the state of the five sensors and
five switches listed below.
Sensors
Switches
l
l
Deck set detection switch (MS1)
l
Lifter lower limit detection switch
(MS2)
Upper cover open detection sensor
(PS1)
l
Second-sheet detection sensor
(PS2)
l
Paper-size detection switch (MS3)
l
Paper detection (PS3)
l
l
Lifter upper limit detection sensor
(PS4)
Remaining paper detection switch 1
(SW601)
l
l
Feed sensor (PS5)
Remaining paper detection switch 2
(SW602)
Run sensor or switch test
1
Turn off the HP Color LaserJet 8550 (use the power switch on the
copy module).
2
Remove the rear cover.
3
Set the DIP switches as follows:
SW201-1
Off
SW201-2
Off
SW201-3
On
SW201-4
On
4
Pull the side HCI away from the printer.
5
Open the upper right cover.
6
Turn on the HP Color LaserJet 8550 (use power switch on the
copy module).
538 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
7
Press each of the sensor levers or switches and note whether or
not the LEDs light up. A change in the status of the LEDs
indicates a properly functioning sensor or switch.
Because it is not possible to check which sensor is
malfunctioning when two sensor levers are pressed, press one at
a time.
8
If an LED does not light up, this indicates that the corresponding
switch or LED is malfunctioning.
Test pick-up
Use the side HCI test pick-up mode to watch the side HCI’s operation
and spot malfunctioning components.
A test pick-up starts when the C-link is connected, the side HCI
interlock switch (MS1) is pressed (see note below), the power is
turned on, and the DIP switches are set as follows:
SW201-1
Note
On
SW201-2
Off
SW201-3
On
SW201-4
Off
The side HCI interlock switch is also referred to as the Deck Set
Detection Switch.
This test continues as long as there is paper in the side HCI.
1
Power the system off.
2
Connect a C-link cable between the printer and side HCI.
3
Remove the rear cover.
4
Set the DIP switches as follows:
5
Note
On
SW201-2
Off
SW201-3
On
SW201-4
Off
Defeat the side HCI interlock switch so that the side HCI reads
that it is attached to the printer.
The side HCI interlock switch is also referred to as the Deck Set
Detection Switch.
6
EN
SW201-1
Load paper in the side HCI.
Side HCI troubleshooting 539
7
Turn on the system. Paper feeds continuously until the paper
runs out or the test is terminated.
The pick-up mode can be interrupted by turning off SW201-1. The
test pick-up can be resumed by setting SW201-1 to ON.
When testing with the pick-up mode is complete, turn off all DIP
switches.
540 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Faults not identified by error codes
No power
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Poor interface
between side HCI
and printer (C-link
interface)
1
Is the power on signal being
input?
NO
Inspect both ends of
connectors for damage.
Connector the connectors
securely.
Defective power
switch
2
Remove the power supply
assembly and place the tester
lead pins across the power
switch terminals. Check if the
tester gives a reading of 0Ω
when the switch is set to ON
and a reading of ∞Ω when it is
set to OFF.
NO
Replace the power supply
assembly.
Blown power
supply fuse,
overcurrent/
overvoltage
detection circuit
triggered
3
Turn off the power switch and
wait two minutes before
turning it on again. Does the
unit now operate normally?
NO
Remove the power supply
assembly and replace the
blown fuse or replace the
power supply. Note: Inspect
the side HCI for blown fuses
before replacing.
YES
Disconnect the power supply
connector and connect it
again. If this does not help,
correct the cause that
triggered the overcurrent/
overvoltage detection circuits
in the power supply assembly
and turn on the power again.
NO
Replace the power supply
assembly.
YES
Check the wiring and dc load
ahead of the deck controller
PCB. If the wiring and the dc
load are OK, replace the deck
controller PCB.
Defective power
supply unit,
wiring, dc load,
deck controller
PCB
EN
4
Turn off the printer assembly
power switch and disconnect
connector J203 on the deck
controller PCB.
Turn on the unit power switch
and measure the dc power
supply output of cable
connector J203. (Be sure not
to short-circuit any
components at this time.)
Does the J203 connector put
out the measured dc power
supply?
Side HCI troubleshooting 541
Lifter motor failure
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Poor contact in
motor drive
signal line
connector
1
Is J206 on the paper deck
drive printed circuit board
correctly connected?
NO
Correct the connection.
Defective lift
motor
2
Can the error condition be
remedied by replacing the
motor?
YES
Replace the motor.
Deck controller
PCB
3
Can the error condition be
remedied by replacing the
deck controller PCB?
YES
Replace the deck controller
PCB.
Feed motor failure
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Poor contact in
feed motor drive
signal line
connector
1
Are connector J207 and feed
motor connector J315 on the
deck controller PCB correctly
connected?
NO
Correct the connection.
Defective feed
motor
2
Can the error condition be
remedied by replacing the
feed motor?
YES
Replace the feed motor.
Deck controller
PCB
3
Can the error condition be
remedied by replacing the
deck controller PCB?
YES
Replace the deck controller
PCB.
Pick-up motor failure
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Poor contact in
pick-up motor
drive signal line
connector
1
Are connector J210 on the
deck controller PCB and
connectors J305 and J319 on
the pick-up correctly
connected?
NO
Correct the connection.
Defective pick-up
motor
2
Can the error condition be
remedied by replacing the
pick-up motor?
YES
Replace the pick-up motor.
Deck controller
PCB
3
Can the error condition be
remedied by replacing the
deck controller PCB?
YES
Replace the deck controller
PCB.
542 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Paper size identified incorrectly
Cause
Step
Paper size
selection tab is
set incorrectly
1
Checks
Y/N
Action
Correctly install the tab.
Paper size
selection tab fails
to actuate switch
(usually detects
letter size as A4)
Adjust the metal springs to
provide more tension to
actuate the switch.
Detection switch
is faulty
Test the detection switch. If
faulty, replace.
Pick-up jams
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Pick-up roller,
feed roller 1
1
Is the cassette pick-up roller or
feed roller worn or defective?
YES
Replace both the separation
roller and feed roller at the
same time.
Gears
2
Remove the pick-up assembly
and check drive gears and
springs. Are there any worn or
damaged parts? Are there any
loose springs?
YES
Replace worn or damaged
parts. Correct springs.
Poor contact in
pick-up motor
drive connectors
3
Are connector J210 on the
paper deck drive printed circuit
board?
NO
Correct the connection.
Pick-up motor
breakdown, deck
controller PCB
4
Can the error condition be
remedied by replacing the
pick-up motor?
YES
Replace the pick-up motor.
NO
Replace the deck controller
PCB.
Feed assembly jams
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Feed sensor
1
Open the feed assembly after
the test pick-up. Did the
leading edge of the paper
reach the feed sensor?
YES
Go to step 10.
Defective
detection
mechanism in
feed paper sensor
2
Is the registration paper
sensor lever or spring worn or
defective? Are there any loose
springs?
YES
Replace if damaged or
defective. Correct spring
position.
Feed paper
sensor
breakdown
3
Can the error condition be
corrected by replacing the
registration paper sensor?
YES
Replace the feed paper
sensor.
EN
Side HCI troubleshooting 543
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Registration roller
4
Is the registration roller worn,
defective, or dirty?
YES
Replace if worn or defective.
Clean to remove dirt.
Gears
5
Remove the feed assembly
and check drive gears and
springs. Are there any worn or
damaged parts? Are there any
loose parts?
YES
Replace if damaged or
defective. Correct spring
position.
Poor contact in
feed motor drive
connectors
6
Are connector J205 and relay
connector J302 on the paper
deck drive printed circuit board
correctly connected?
NO
Correct the connection.
Feed motor
breakdown
7
Can the error condition be
corrected by replacing the feed
motor?
YES
Replace the feed motor.
Feed sensor
8
Are the feed sensor lever and
springs damaged or defective?
Is the sensor lever spring
loose?
YES
Replace if damaged or
defective. Correct spring
position.
Feed sensor
breakdown
9
Can the error condition be
corrected by replacing the feed
sensor?
YES
Replace.
Feed roller 2
10
Is feed roller 2 worn, defective,
or dirty?
YES
Replace if worn or defective.
Clean to remove dirt.
Deck controller
PCB
11
Can the error condition be
corrected by replacing the
deck controller PCB?
YES
Replace the deck controller
PCB.
Multi-feed jams
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Separation roller
1
Is the separation roller worn or
defective?
YES
Replace the separation
roller.
Springs
2
Is the spring that holds the
separation roller functioning
correctly?
NO
Replace the spring if it is
damaged. Correct its
position if it is loose.
Wrinkled paper
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Rollers
1
Check the pick-up assembly
and feed assembly rollers.
Are they worn or defective?
YES
Replace rollers if they are
worn or defective.
544 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Leading edge is folding
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Feed guide
1
Check the feed path. Are the
feed guides damaged or
defective?
YES
Replace damaged or
defective feed guides.
Skewed feed
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Feed roller,
separation
guide, pick-up
assembly / feed
assembly rollers
1
Has paper dust or dirt
accumulated in the feed
roller and separation roller
guides?
YES
Clean to remove dirt.
Pick-up
assembly/feed
assembly rollers
2
Are there any damaged or
defective pick-up assembly
and feed assembly rollers?
YES
Replace any damaged or
defective rollers.
EN
Side HCI troubleshooting 545
546 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
8
Parts and diagrams
Chapter contents
How to use this chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Printer parts unique to the HP Color LaserJet 8550MFP . . 552
Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Screw/ring kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Stand assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Copy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Screw/ring kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Belt kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Gear/pulley kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Spring kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Assembly location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
External covers and panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Internal components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Power cord terminal assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Control panel assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Copyboard cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Mirror assembly 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Electrical tray assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Dc power supply PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
APC power supply PCA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Noise filter PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Control panel PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Control panel CPU PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Control panel inverter PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Reader controller PCA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Analog image processor PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
EN
Chapter contents 547
Motor driver PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Inverter PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Belt kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Bushing kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Gear/pulley kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Pin kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Screw/ring kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Spring kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Assembly locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Mounting hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
External covers and panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
DF assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Document tray assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Upper cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
RF assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Right paper delivery assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Paper feed motor assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Belt drive motor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Upper paper guide assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Lower paper guide assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Separation roller assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Paper separation assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
RDF controller PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Side HCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Bushing kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Gear/pulley kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Screw/ring kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Spring kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Assembly locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Mounting hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
External covers and panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Internal components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
548 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Lifter drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Paper pick-up assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Deck controller PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Numerical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
Alphabetical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
EN
Chapter contents 549
550 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
How to use this chapter
Please note that some parts are listed without a part number, and
some list a kit description instead of a part number.
Parts listed without a part number are for reference only and will not
be replaced in the field. These parts will not be available to order from
HP.
Parts that have a kit description instead of a part number are
available to order as a part of a kit. All screws and fasteners may also
be obtained locally.
Because of HP’s whole-unit exchange policy, ADF parts are listed for
reference only. Except for the feed belt (FCI-7815-020CN), ADF parts
will not be required in the field.
EN
How to use this chapter 551
Printer parts unique to the HP Color LaserJet
8550MFP
9
Figure 417.
Interface assembly location
Table 93. Interface assembly location
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
FH2-6455-000CN
1
Connector, short (terminator)
3
FG2-9470-000CN
1
Dc controller PCB assembly
8
FG6-3597-000CN
9
1
ECO-2 PCB assembly
1
Interface assembly
552 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Figure 418.
ECO-2 PCB Assembly
Table 94. ECO-2 PCB Assembly
Key
40
Part number
Quantity
Description
2
Screw, TP, M4X8
47
1
ECO-2 cable (J2101, J2102)
48
1
ECO-2 PCB assembly (see Figure 419)
EN
Printer parts unique to the HP Color LaserJet 8550MFP 553
Figure 419.
Interface assembly
Table 95. Interface assembly
Key
Quantity
Description
1
Part number
2
Screw, stepped
2
2
Screw, M3X4
3
1
Interface PCB assembly
4
1
IOT cable
5
2
Spring, compression
6
1
Connector, snap tight
7
1
Interface cable
8
1
Screw with washer, truss head
9
4
Screw with washer, M3X6
10
1
Clip, cable
11
2
Screw, TP, M3X6
501
2
Shim
554 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Stand
Screw/ring kit
Table 96. Stand screw/ring kit
EN
Part number
Quantity
Description
C7838-67901
1 kit
Stand screw/ring kit
1
Screw, M6X6
2
Screw, M6X6
8
Screw, Allen head, M8X8
4
Screw, M4X8
2
Ring, E
2
Washer, plain
8
Screw, TP, M4X8
8
Ring, E
4
Washer, plain
8
Washer, spring
8
Screw, allen head, M6X10
4
Washer, spring
Stand 555
Stand assembly
Figure 420.
Stand assembly
556 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 97. Stand assembly
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
1
Stand screw/ring kit
1
Screw, M6X6
2
Stand screw/ring kit
2
Screw, M6X6
3
1
Right frame assembly
3A
2
Cap
3B
1
Cap, front upper
3C
FB4-2689-000CN
1
Cap, front lower
3D
XZ9-0491-000CN
1
Adjuster
4
1
Left frame assembly
4A
2
Cap
4B
1
Cap, front upper
4C
FB4-2689-000CN
1
Cap, front lower
4D
XZ9-0491-000CN
1
Adjuster
1
Lower crossmember assembly
Stand screw/ring kit
8
Screw, allen head,M8X8
5
5A
5B
XZ9-0367-000CN
2
Caster
5C
XZ9-0491-000CN
2
Adjuster
6
1
Lower plate assembly
FB4-2675-000CN
4
Shaft, roller
6B
XG9-0304-000CN
4
Bearing
6F
Stand screw/ring kit
4
Screw, M4X8
6C
XZ9-0446-000CN
2
Caster
6D
XZ9-0457-000CN
2
Caster
2
Pin, positioning
FG6-0394-000CN
2
Lock pin assembly
1
Plate, reinforcement, rear
FB4-2686-000CN
1
Cover, mount plate
6A
6E
7
8
9
10
4
Clamp, cable
11
1
Plate, mount, 1
12
1
Plate, mount, 2
501
Stand screw/ring kit
2
Ring, E
502
Stand screw/ring kit
2
Washer, plain
503
Stand screw/ring kit
32
Screw, TP, M4X8
504
Stand screw/ring kit
8
Ring, E
505
Stand screw/ring kit
4
Washer, plain
506
Stand screw/ring kit
8
Washer, spring
507
Stand screw/ring kit
12
Screw, allen head, M6X10
508
Stand screw/ring kit
4
Washer, spring
EN
Stand 557
Copy module
Screw/ring kit
Table 98. Screw/ring kit
Part number
Quantity
Description
C7836-67901
1 kit
Copy module screw/ring kit
4
Screw with washer, M4X6
2
Screw with washer, M3X6
*
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
1
Screw, mach., C.S. head, M4X8
4
Screw, M4X6
4
Screw, TP, M3X4
6
Ring, E
*
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X10
4
Screw with washer, M3X8
*
Screw, TP, M4X6
*
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
2
Screw, stepped, M4
2
Screw, stepped
2
Screw, stepped, M4
*
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X12
8
Screw, TP, M3X6
1
Screw, stepped, M4
8
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X5
*
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
*
Screw, TP, M4X6
2
Screw, tapping, pan head, M2.6X8
4
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
2
Washer, toothed lock
5
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X20
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M5X6
1
Screw with washer, M3X6
8
Screw, M3X8
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
*Several used
558 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 98. Screw/ring kit (continued)
Part number
Quantity
Description
4
Screw with washer, M4X6
4
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X16
8
Screw, tapping, truss head, M4X12
1
Screw, M3X6
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X12
4
Screw with washer, M3X6
4
Screw with washer, M3X8
8
Screw, TP, M3X6
1
Screw with washer, M4X6
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
8
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X30
8
Screw, TP, M3X6
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
1
Screw with washer, M4X6
Part number
Quantity
Description
C7836-67902
1 kit
Copy module belt kit
1
Flat belt, timing, 100T
*Several used
Belt kit
Table 99. Belt kit
EN
Copy module 559
Gear/pulley kit
Table 100. Gear/pulley kit
Part number
Quantity
Description
C7836-67903
1 kit
Copy module gear/pulley kit
1
Spacer, pulley
1
Pulley, 66T
2
Pulley
4
Pulley
2
Pulley, tension
Spring kit
Table 101. Spring kit
Part number
Quantity
Description
C7836-67904
1 kit
Copy module spring kit
2
Spring, leaf
1
Spring, leaf
2
Spring, tension
1
Spring, tension
1
Spring, compression
560 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Assembly location diagram
Copyboard cover assembly
(figure 428)
Control panel inverter PCA
(figure 436)
Motor driver PCA (figure 439)
Control panel assembly
(figure 427)
Control panel PCA (figure
434)
Control panel CPU PCA
(figure 435)
Mirror assembly 1 (figure
429)
Reader controller PCA
(figure 437)
APC power supply PCA
(figure 432)
Dc power supply PCA
(figure 431)
Noise filter PCA (figure
433)
Power cord terminal
assembly (figure 426)
Inverter PCA (figure 440)
Electrical tray assembly
(figure 430)
Figure 421.
EN
Analog image processor PCA
(figure 438)
Assembly location diagram
Copy module 561
External covers and panels
Control panel assembly
(figure 427)
Figure 422.
External covers and panels
562 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 102. External covers and panels
Key
Part number
1
Quantity
Description
1
Retainer, glass, right
2
FB5-5318-000CN
1
Cover, upper
3
FB5-5317-000CN
1
Cover, upper, front
4
FF6-0284-000CN
4A
1
Cover, upper, rear
1
Seal, cover
5
FB5-5324-000CN
2
Cover, upper, small
6
FB5-5334-000CN
1
Cover, main switch
7
FF6-0285-000CN
7A
1
Cover, left
2
Seal, cover
Air filter, 3
7B
FB4-0834-000CN
1
7C
FB4-0888-000CN
1
Air filter, 1
8
FF6-0286-000CN
1
Cover, right
8A
FB4-0889-000CN
1
Air filter, 2
9
FF5-8662-000CN
1
Glass, copyboard (inch/A size)
1
Glass, copyboard (A size)
9
9A
9B
FS6-8499-000CN
9B
2
Tape, glass protective
1
Plate, length index (inch/A size)
1
Plate, length index (A size)
10
FB5-5321-000CN
1
Cover, blanking, rear
11
FB5-5320-000CN
1
Panel, rear
12
Copy module screw/ring kit
4
Screw with washer, M4X6
13
FF6-0288-000CN
1
Holder, jump (inch/A size)
1
Holder, jump (A size)
13
13A
FS6-8920-000CN
13A
14
FB5-5315-000CN
1
Plate, size index (inch/A size)
1
Plate, size index (A size)
1
Cover, front, lower
15
1
Cover, connector
16
1
Left glass retainer assembly
Cover, rubber
17
FB5-5325-000CN
7
18
Copy module screw/ring kit
2
Screw with washer, M3X6
19
1
Label, “Legal Limitations” (USA)
19
1
Label, “Legal Limitations” (France)
19
1
Label, “Legal Limitations” (Germany)
19
1
Label, “Legal Limitations” (English)
19
1
Label, “Legal Limitations” (Italy)
19
1
Label, “Legal Limitations” (Other)
1
Label, “Legal Limitations” (Spain)
20
19
FA3-9315-000CN
1
Plate, cover
21
FB5-5316-000CN
2
Cap, front lower
501
Copy module screw/ring kit
*
Screw, mach., truss head,M4X6
502
Copy module screw/ring kit
1
Screw, mach., C.S. head,M4X8
*Several used
EN
Copy module 563
Internal components
Mirror assembly 1
(figure 429)
Figure 423.
Internal components (1 of 3)
564 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 103. Internal components (1 of 3)
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
1
3
Screw, adjusting
2
1
Pulley
3
4
Damper
Copy module spring kit
2
Spring, leaf
1
Shaft, drive, mirror mounting
6
FB4-0740-000CN
1
Wire, scanner, front
7
FB4-0741-000CN
1
Wire, scanner, rear
8
Copy module gear/pulley kit
1
Spacer, pulley
4
5
9
1
Plate, grounding, 3
10
1
Plate, lens mounting
11
Copy module gear/pulley kit
1
Pulley, 66T
12
Copy module screw/ring kit
4
Screw, M4X6
13
Copy module belt kit
1
Flat belt, timing, 100T
2
Bearing, ball
14
15
FG5-9837-000CN
1
CCD unit
16
FG5-9839-000CN
1
Mirror assembly 2
17
Copy module gear/pulley kit
2
Pulley
1
Mount, pulley, front
1
Mount, pulley, rear
1
Photo-interrupter, S7G37 (PS101 J2013)
18
19
20
FH7-7306-000CN
21
FB4-0745-000CN
1
Plate, home position sensor
22
FH6-1461-000CN
1
Motor, stepping (PM1 J302)
23
Copy module gear/pulley kit
4
Pulley
4
Retainer, pulley
24
25
1
Label, “Warning”
26
2
Plate, adjusting
27
1
Spring, leaf
501
Copy module screw/ring kit
4
Screw, TP, M3X4
502
Copy module screw/ring kit
6
Ring, E
503
Copy module screw/ring kit
*
Screw, mach., truss head,M4X6
504
Copy module screw/ring kit
1
Screw, mach., truss head,M4X10
505
Copy module screw/ring kit
4
Screw with washer, M3X8
506
Copy module screw/ring kit
*
Screw, TP, M4X6
507
XB7-2100-409CN
3
Nut, hex, M4
508
Copy module screw/ring kit
*
Screw, mach., truss head,M4X6
*Several used
EN
Copy module 565
Figure 424.
Internal components (2 of 3)
Table 104. Internal components (2 of 3)
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
1
Copy module gear/pulley kit
2
Pulley, tension
1
Sheet, protect, A
2
*Several used
566 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 104. Internal components (2 of 3) (continued)
Key
Part number
3
4
FB4-0752-000CN
5
Quantity
Description
1
Sheet, protect, B
1
Sheet, back-up
1
Spring, leaf
Plate, rail
6
FB4-0705-000CN
2
7
FH2-6452-000CN
1
Film, fluorescent (J2015, 2037)
8
Copy module screw/ring kit
2
Screw, stepped, M4
9
Copy module spring kit
2
Spring, tension
3
Clamp, cable
10
11
1
Cable, fluorescent (J1610, 2018, 2037)
12
1
Control panel connector cable (J901, 955, 1607,
1608)
12A
1
Core, ferrite
12B
1
Core, ferrite
13
1
Motor driver power cable (J301, 2002)
14
1
Motor driver signal cable (J303, 1605)
15
1
Sheet, blanking
Sensor, document size (A size PS103 J2009)
16
FH7-7424-000CN
1
16
FH7-7388-000CN
1
Sensor, document size (inch size PS104 J2010)
2
Connector, 3P (J2009, 2010)
17
18
3
Support, cable
19
FH7-7423-000CN
1
Sensor, document size (A size PS106 J2011)
19
FH7-7386-000CN
2
Sensor, document size (inch size PS105, 106
J2011, 2012)
20
1
Clip, cable (A size)
20
2
Clip, cable (inch size)
21
1
Ferrite core
22
2
Clip, cable
23
2
Screw, stepped
1
Spring, leaf
1
Connector mounting assembly (J1651)
25A
1
Cable, connector mounting (J1606, 1652, 1653)
25B
1
Ferrite core
26
15
Clip, cable
27
1
Spring, leaf
28
2
Connector, 3P (J2011, 2012)
29
2
Screw, stepped, M4
30
1
Spring, leaf
31
1
Spring, leaf
24
25
FG5-9856-000CN
501
Copy module screw/ring kit
*
Screw, mach., truss head,M4X6
502
Copy module screw/ring kit
2
Screw, mach., truss head,M3X12
503
Copy module screw/ring kit
17
Screw, TP, M3X6
*Several used
EN
Copy module 567
Figure 425.
Internal components (3 of 3)
568 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 105. Internal components (3 of 3)
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
1
4
Plate, glass retaining
2
1
Support, glass, right
3
1
Connector, 2P (J2014)
Copy module spring kit
1
Spring, tension
1
Nut
Copy module screw/ring kit
1
Screw, stepped, M4
7
1
Cover, lower
8
1
Bracket, control card
1
Bracket, fan
1
Photo-interrupter (PS102 J2007)
1
Mount, sensing
1
Switch, key (KEY SW J2014)
4
5
6
9
10
FH7-7312-000CN
11
12
FH7-6139-000CN
13
1
Mount, key switch
14
2
Clamp, cable
1
Adjuster
7
Nut, hex, M6
15
XZ9-0444-000CN
16
17
18
XH9-0105-000CN
9
Clip, cable
3
Foot, rubber
19
1
Sheet, protect
20
1
Spring, leaf
501
Copy module screw/ring kit
28
Screw, mach., truss head,M4X5
502
Copy module screw/ring kit
*
Screw, mach., truss head,M4X6
503
Copy module screw/ring kit
*
Screw, TP, M4X6
504
Copy module screw/ring kit
2
Screw, tapping, pan head,M2.6X8
*Several used
EN
Copy module 569
Power cord terminal assembly
Noise filter PCA
(figure 433)
Figure 426.
Power cord terminal assembly
570 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 106. Power cord terminal assembly
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
1
1
Cable, relay breaker (J1001)
2
1
Sheet, protective
3
1
Sheet, blanking
4
1
Clip, cable
5
FB5-5330-000CN
1
Cover, power supply
6
FH7-6208-000CN
1
Relay, AC 250 V (RL1)
7
FH7-6254-000CN
1
Switch, main (MSW1)
8
FH7-7457-000CN
1
Breaker, circuit (CB1), 100/127 V
FH7-7458-000CN
1
Breaker, circuit (CB1), 220/240V
9
2
Clip, cable
10
2
Clip, cable
11
1
Clip, cable
12
2
Clamp, cable
13
1
Cable, outlet
14
1
Cable, relay dc (J2035)
15
2
Ferrite core
16
1
Label, connecting
17
1
Cable, inlet
1
Label, “Switch off caution”
501
18
Copy module screw/ring kit
4
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
502
Copy module screw/ring kit
2
Washer, toothed lock
503
Copy module screw/ring kit
5
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
504
Copy module screw/ring kit
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X20
505
Copy module screw/ring kit
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M5X6
EN
Copy module 571
Control panel assembly
Control panel PCA (figure 434)
Control panel PCA
(figure 434)
Control panel PCA
(figure 434)
Control
panel PCA
(figure
434)
Control panel PCA
(figure 434)
Control panel CPU PCA
(figure 435)
Control panel
inverter PCA
(figure 436)
Figure 427.
Control panel assembly
572 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 107. Control panel assembly
Key
Part number
FG6-5843-000CN
Quantity
Description
1
Control panel assembly
1
2
Bracket, control panel
2
1
Cover, function
3
2
Clip, cable
4
2
Clamp, cable
5
1
Clamp, cable
6
3
Clip, cable
7
FG6-0365-000CN
1
LCD panel unit
8
FB4-6704-000CN
1
Sheet, grounding
9
Copy module screw/ring kit
1
Screw with washer, M3X6
10
Copy module screw/ring kit
54
Screw, M3X8
11
FB2-4243-000CN
1
Cover, lamp filter
12
FB2-4244-000CN
1
Support exposure light
13
FB4-3142-000CN
1
Key top, function, 1
14
FB4-7871-000CN
1
Key top, function, 3
15
2
Cover, led panel, right
16
2
Cover, led panel, left
17
2
Reflector
18
FB4-2581-000CN
1
Key top, start
19
FB4-2582-000CN
1
Key top, stop
20
FB4-2583-000CN
1
Key top, reset
21
FB4-2584-000CN
1
Key top, number
22
FB4-2585-000CN
1
Key top, 1
23
FB5-5313-000CN
1
Cover, one-touch, 3
24
1
Support, right
25
1
Plate, grounding
26
FB4-2594-000CN
27
1
Key top, standby
1
Sheet, insulating
28
FB4-2597-000CN
1
Key top, user guide
29
FB4-6703-000CN
1
Button, switch
30
Copy module spring kit
1
Spring, compression
31
FH6-0734-000CN
1
Function switch PCB unit
32
1
Label, “Warning, High Voltage”
501
Copy module screw/ring kit
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
502
Copy module screw/ring kit
4
Screw with washer, M4X6
EN
Copy module 573
Copyboard cover assembly
Figure 428.
Copyboard cover assembly
574 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 108. Copyboard cover assembly
Key
Part number
FG6-5851-000CN
Quantity
Description
1
Copyboard cover assembly
1
2
Plate, reinforcement
2
2
Hinge, copyboard cover
3
1
Cover, copyboard, front
1
Cover, copyboard, rear
1
Copyboard cover cushion assembly
4
5
FF9-1694-020CN
5A
3
Plate, cushion mounting
6
2
Plate, auxiliary, rear
7
2
Plate, auxiliary, front
8
3
Sheet, rubber
501
Copy module screw/ring kit
4
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X16
502
Copy module screw/ring kit
8
Screw, tapping, truss head, M4X12
EN
Copy module 575
Mirror assembly 1
Figure 429.
Mirror assembly 1
576 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 109. Mirror assembly 1
Key
Part number
Quantity
FG5-9838-000CN
1
Description
Mirror assembly 1
1
1
Mount, terminal, rear
2
4
Plate, contact
3
1
Cover, cable guide
4
FB3-2411-000CN
4
Pin, slide
5
FB3-7692-000CN
4
Pin, pad, 2
6
1
Flag, HP sensor
7
1
Reflector, lower
8
1
Reflector, auxiliary
9
1
Reflector, front
10
1
Reflector, rear
11
2
Spring, leaf, mirror
12
1
Holder, cable, front
13
1
Holder, cable, rear
14
1
Mount, sensor
15
1
Mount, terminal, front
16
3
Guide, cord
17
1
Exposure filter
18
2
Damper, 1
19
1
Damper, 2
20
1
Seal, insulation, 1
21
1
Seal, insulation, 2
22
1
Cap, sensor
23
1
Plate, light blocking
24
2
Clamp, cable
25
1
Mirror 1
1
Cable, fluorescent lamp (J2015, 2038, 2039)
26
27
FH7-3336-000CN
1
Lamp, fluorescent (LA1)
28
FH7-4559-000CN
1
Heater, fluorescent lamp (H1 THM J2039)
2
Cover, heater
Screw, M3X6
29
30
Copy module screw/ring kit
1
31
FG2-9439-000CN
1
Light sensor PCB assembly
1
Cable, exposure control (J2001, 2038)
2
Pad, oil
32
33
FB4-0802-000CN
501
Copy module screw/ring kit
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
502
Copy module screw/ring kit
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X12
503
4
Ring, toothed lock
504
4
Screw with washer, M3X6
505
Copy module screw/ring kit
4
Screw with washer, M3X8
506
Copy module screw/ring kit
15
Screw, TP, M3X6
EN
Copy module 577
Electrical tray assembly
Inverter PCA
(figure 440)
Dc power
supply
PCA
(figure
431)
APC power
supply PCA
(figure 432)
Power cord
terminal
assembly
(figure
426)
Reader controller PCA
(figure 437)
Analog image processor
PCA (figure 438)
Figure 430.
Electrical tray assembly
578 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 110. Electrical tray assembly
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
1
1
Sheet, PCB
2
1
Cover, ROM
3
1
Plate, grounding
4
1
Mount, cord
5
1
Plate, grounding
1
Screw with washer, M4X6
6
Copy module screw/ring kit
7
FG2-9539-000CN
1
Cable, interface R-P (J1612, 2101)
8
FH6-1463-000CN
1
Fan (FM4 J2031)
9
FH6-3844-000CN
10
11
1
ECO-O board PCB unit
7
Clip, cable
11
Clip, cable (100/127 V)
9
Clip, cable (220/240 V)
12
1
Clip, cable
13
1
Clamp, cable
14
1
Sheet, partition
15
1
Clip, cable
16
1
Cable, inverter lamp (J1003, 2018)
16A
1
Clamp, ferrite
17
1
Cable 2, CCD (J503, 2017)
17A
1
Connector, snap tight (J2017)
17B
1
Ferrite core
18
1
Cable 1, CCD (J507, 2016)
18A
1
Connector, snap tight (J2016)
19
1
Label, “Copy load”
1
Connector, female (J2022)
1
Cable, AC (J2, 1801)
4
Support, PCB
20
FH2-6480-000CN
21
22
23
Copy module screw/ring kit
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
24
1
Ferrite clamp
25
1
Core, ferrite, SFC-10
26
2
Core, ferrite
27
1
Clip, cable
28
1
Spring, leaf
29
1
Spring, leaf
1
Ferrite core
30
501
Copy module screw/ring kit
25
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
502
Copy module screw/ring kit
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X30
503
Copy module screw/ring kit
17
Screw, TP, M3X6
504
Copy module screw/ring kit
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
505
Copy module screw/ring kit
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
506
Copy module screw/ring kit
1
Screw with washer, M4X6
EN
Copy module 579
Dc power supply PCA
Figure 431.
Dc power supply PCA
580 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 111. Dc power supply PCA
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
FG5-9845-000CN
1
Dc power supply PCB assembly (100/127 V)
FG5-9858-000CN
1
Dc power supply PCB assembly (220/240 V)
CT1301
1
Transformer (100/127 V)
CT1301
1
Current transformer (220/240 V)
FU1201
1
Fuse, AC125V, 10A (100/127 V)
FU1201
1
Fuse, 250V, 5A (220/240 V)
FU1501
1
Fuse, 60V, 1A
FU1502
1
Fuse, 60V, 400MA
FU1503
1
Fuse, 60V, 400MA
FU1504
1
Fuse, 60V, 400MA
FU1505
1
Fuse, 60V, 1A
FU1506
1
Fuse, 60V, 2A
FU1507
1
Fuse, 60V, 4A
FU1508
1
Fuse, 60V, 7A
FU1509
1
Fuse, 60V, 630MA
FU1511
1
Fuse, 60V, 5A
FU1512
1
Fuse, 60V, 2A
FU1513
1
Fuse, 60V, 5A
FU1514
1
Fuse, 60V, 1A
FU1515
1
Fuse, 60V, 500MA
FU1516
1
Fuse, 60V, 250MA
FU1517
1
Fuse, 60V, 250MA
FU1518
1
Fuse, 60V, 2A
FU1519
1
Fuse, 60V, 400MA
L 1202
1
Coil, 1MH, 10A (100/127 V)
L 1202
1
Coil, 8MH, 4A (220/240 V)
L 1203
1
Coil, 1MH, 10A (100/127 V)
L 1203
1
Coil, 8MH, 4A (220/240 V)
L 1301
1
Choke coil
Q 1301
1
IC, HX-3019, hybrid
T 1201
1
Transformer (100/127 V)
T 1201
1
Transformer (220/240 V)
T 1301
1
Transformer (100/127 V)
T 1301
1
Transformer (220/240 V)
EN
Copy module 581
APC power supply PCA
Figure 432.
APC power supply PCA
Table 112. APC power supply PCA
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
FG5-9847-000CN
1
APC power supply PCB assembly (100/127 V)
FG5-9861-000CN
FU1801
1
APC power supply PCB assembly (220/240 V)
1
Fuse, 60V, 10A
FU1802
1
Fuse, 60V, 1A
L 1801
1
Coil, choke
T 1801
1
Transformer (100/127 V)
T 1802
1
Transformer (220/240 V)
582 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Noise filter PCA
Figure 433.
Noise filter PCA
Table 113. Noise filter PCA
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
FG2-9463-000CN
1
Noise filter PCB assembly (100/127 V)
1
Noise filter PCB assembly (220/240 V)
1
FG2-9541-000CN
1
Cable, noise filter, 1
2
1
Cable, noise filter, 2 (J2036)
FU1101
1
Fuse, 8 A, 125 V (100/127 V)
FU2501
1
Fuse, 250 V, 5 A (220/240 V)
L 1101
1
Coil (100/127 V)
L 2501
1
Coil (220/240 V)
EN
Copy module 583
Control panel PCA
Figure 434.
Control panel PCA
Table 114. Control panel PCA
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
FG6-0366-000CN
1
Control panel PCB assembly*
1
1
Holder, LED
2
1
Cable, control, 1 (J902, 921)
3
1
Cable, control, 2 (J903, 922)
4
1
Cable, control, VR (J905, 941)
5
1
Cable, control, MSW (J904, 931)
6
1
Cable, control, PL (J909, 951)
LED907
1
LED unit
LED908
1
LED unit
LED909
1
LED unit
LED910
1
LED unit
VR 941
1
Switch, VR
* Control panel PCB assembly is included in the assembly shown in Figure 427.
584 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Control panel CPU PCA
Figure 435.
Control panel CPU PCA
Table 115. Control panel CPU PCA
Key
1
Part number
Quantity
Description
FG6-0364-000CN
1
Control panel CPU PCB assembly*
1
IC, MB89P637, M-PRO (Q919)
* Control panel CPU PCB assembly is included in the assembly shown in Figure 427.
EN
Copy module 585
Control panel inverter PCA
Figure 436.
Control panel inverter PCA
Table 116. Control panel inverter PCA
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
FG9-3515-000CN
1
Control inverter PCB assembly*
F1
1
Fuse, 1A, 125V
T1
1
Transformer, inverter
* Control panel inverter PCB assembly is included in the assembly shown in Figure 427.
586 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Reader controller PCA
Figure 437.
Reader controller PCA
Table 117. Reader controller PCA
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
1
FG2-9443-060CN
1
Reader controller PCB (USA)
1
FG3-0215-000CN
1
Reader controller PCB (Europe)
1A
FG2-9448-080CN
1
R-CON extension DIMM assembly (USA)
1A
FG3-0220-000CN
1
R-CON extension DIMM assembly (Europe)
BAT1601
WK1-5019-000CN
1
Battery, lithium, CR2477-HE4H, 3V
F 1601
1
Fuse, 60V, 2A
F 1603
1
Fuse, 60V, 1A
F 1604
1
Fuse, 60V, 200MA
IC1602
1
IC, HG62G027S61F, gate array
IC1604
1
IC, HD6432653BA12F, CPU
IC1605
1
IC, M38881M2-010GP, IPC
IC1608
1
IC, FH4-5851, hybrid
IC1609
1
IC, UPD65625GB-Y04-9EU
IC1610
1
IC, UPD65636GB-Y18-9EU, G array
EN
Copy module 587
Analog image processor PCA
Figure 438.
Analog image processor PCA
Table 118. Analog image processor PCA
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
FG3-0315-000CN
1
Analog IP PCB assembly
Q501
1
IC, KZ3S113E11CFP, C-MOS
Q502
1
IC, HG72C006FD, C-MOS
Q508
1
IC, KZ3S157311CFP, C-MOS
Q509
1
IC, KZ3S113831CFP, C-MOS
Q512
1
IC, JSC05KR517AJ40, gate array
Q513
1
IC, LF9008, ASIC
Q514
1
IC, KZ3S157211CFP, C-MOS
588 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Motor driver PCA
Figure 439.
Motor driver PCA
Table 119. Motor driver PCA
Key
EN
Part number
Quantity
Description
FG5-9842-000CN
1
Motor driver PCB assembly
Copy module 589
Inverter PCA
Figure 440.
Inverter PCA
Table 120. Inverter PCA
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
FG5-9849-000CN
1
Inverter PCB assembly
FU1001
1
Fuse, 60V, 4A
FU1002
1
Fuse, 60V, 1A
L 1001
1
Inductor
L 1002
1
Inductor
T 1001
1
Transformer
T 1002
1
Current transformer
T 1003
1
Transformer
590 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Connectors
Figure 441.
Connectors (1 of 3)
Table 121. Connectors (1 of 3)
EN
Key
Quantity
Description
J1
—
Dc power supply
J1
1
Connector, 9P, female
J1
2
Socket contact, 18-24AWG
J2
—
Dc power supply
J2
1
Connector, 5P, female
J2
2
Socket contact, 18-24AWG
J3
—
Dc power supply
J3
1
Connector, 10P, female
J3
10
Socket contact, 18-24AWG
J4
—
Dc power supply
J4
1
Connector, 6P, female
J4
6
Socket contact, 18-24AWG
J5
—
Dc power supply
J5
1
Connector, 8P, female
J5
5
Socket contact, 18-24AWG
Copy module 591
Table 121. Connectors (1 of 3) (continued)
Key
Quantity
Description
J6
—
Dc power supply
J6
1
Connector, 9P, female
J6
8
Socket contact, 18-24AWG
J7
—
Dc power supply
J7
1
Connector, 5P, female
J8
—
Dc power supply
J8
1
Connector, 4P, female
J9
—
Dc power supply
J9
1
Connector, 2P, female
J 001
1
Connector, 4P, female
J 001
3
Socket contact, 18-24AWG
J 101
—
CCD driver
J 101
1
Connector, 15P, female
J 102
—
CCD driver
J 102
1
Connector, 14P, female
J 301
—
Optical motor driver
J 301
1
Connector, 9P, female
J 301
9
Socket contact, 18-24AWG
J 302
—
Optical motor (PM1)
J 302
—
Optical motor driver
J 303
—
Optical motor driver
J 303
1
Connector, 8P, female
J 303
1
Connector, 8P, female
J 303
1
Holder, connector, 16P
J 502
—
Analog image processor
J 502
1
Connector, 8P, female
J 502
8
Socket contact, 18-24AWG
J 503
—
Analog image processor
J 503
1
Connector, 15P, female
J 506
—
Analog image processor
J 506
—
Reader controller
J 507
—
Analog image processor
J 507
1
Connector, 12P, female
J 902
—
Control panel
J 902
1
Connector, 12P, female
J 903
—
Control panel
J 903
1
Connector, 11P, female
J 904
—
Control panel
592 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 121. Connectors (1 of 3) (continued)
Key
EN
Quantity
Description
J 904
1
Connector, 4P, female
J 905
—
Control panel
J 905
1
Connector, 4P, female
J 909
—
Control panel
J 909
1
Connector, 2P, female
J 921
—
Control panel
J 921
1
Connector, 12P, female
J 922
—
Control panel
J 922
1
Connector, 11P, male
J 931
—
Control panel
J 931
1
Connector, 4P, male
J 941
—
Control panel
J 941
1
Connector, 4P, male
J 951
—
Control panel
J 951
1
Connector, 2P, male
J1001
—
Inverter
J1001
1
Connector, 2P, female
J1001
2
Socket contact, 18-24AWG
J1002
—
Inverter
J1002
1
Connector, 8P, female
J1003
—
Inverter
J1003
1
Connector, 5P, female
J1003
4
Socket contact, 18-24AWG
J1101
—
Noise filter
J1101
1
Connector, 3P, male
J1101
2
Socket contact
J1601
—
Reader controller
J1601
1
Connector, 5P, female
J1602
—
Reader controller
J1602
1
Connector, 13P, female
J1604
—
Reader controller
J1604
1
Connector, 6P
J1605
—
Reader controller
J1605
1
Connector, 8P, female
J1605
1
Connector, 8P, female
J1605
1
Holder, connector, 16P
J1606
—
Reader controller
J1606
1
Connector, 11P, female
Copy module 593
Table 121. Connectors (1 of 3) (continued)
Key
Quantity
Description
J1606
1
Connector, 11P, female
J1606
1
Holder, connector, 22P
J1607
—
Reader controller
J1607
1
Connector, 2P, female
J1608
—
Reader controller
J1608
1
Connector, 15P, female
J1608
1
Connector, 15P, female
J1608
1
Holder, connector, 30P
J1609
—
Reader controller
J1609
1
Connector, 12P, female
J1609
1
Connector, 12P, female
J1609
1
Holder, connector, 24P
J1610
—
Reader controller
J1610
1
Cable, fluorescent
J1611
—
Reader controller
J1611
1
Connector, 7P, female
J1611
7
Socket contact, 18-24AWG
J1612
—
Reader controller
J1612
1
Holder, connector, 100P
J1613
—
Reader controller
J1613
1
Connector, 4P, female
J1614
—
Reader controller
J1614
—
Analog image processor
J1615
—
Reader controller
J1615
1
Connector, 2P, female
J1615
2
Socket contact, 22-26AWG
J1616
—
Reader controller
J1616
—
Reader control DIMM
J1651
—
To printer
J1651
—
Connector stage unit
J1652
—
Connector stage unit
J1652
1
Connector, 11P, female
J1653
—
Connector stage unit
J1653
1
Connector, 10P
J1801
—
APC power supply
J1801
1
Connector, 5P, female
J1801
2
Socket contact, 18-24AWG
J1802
—
APC power supply
594 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 121. Connectors (1 of 3) (continued)
EN
Key
Quantity
Description
J1802
1
Connector, 6P, female
J1802
6
Socket contact, 18-24AWG
J1804
—
APC power supply
J1804
1
Connector, 2P, female
J2000
1
Connector, 4P
J2000
1
Connector, 4P, female
J2000
4
Pin contact, 30-26AWG
J2001
—
Light sensor
J2001
1
Connector, 3P, female
J2001
3
Socket contact, AWG22-28
J2006
1
Connector, 9P, female
J2006
1
Connector, 9P
J2007
—
Cover sensor (PS102)
J2007
1
Connector, 3P
J2009
—
Size sensor 0 (PS103)
J2009
1
Connector, 3P
J2010
—
Size sensor 1 (PS104)
J2010
1
Connector, 3P
J2011
—
Size sensor 2 (PS105)
J2011
1
Connector, 3P
J2012
—
Size sensor 6 (PS106)
J2012
1
Connector, 3P
J2013
—
Home position sensor (PS101)
J2013
1
Connector, 3P
J2014
—
Key switch (KEY SW)
J2014
1
Connector, 2P, female
J2014
1
Connector, 2P
J2015
1
Film, fluorescent
J2015
1
Cable, fluorescent lamp
J2018
1
Cable, fluorescent
J2018
1
Connector, 5P, male
J2018
4
Pin contact
J2020
—
To copydata controller
J2020
1
Connector, 8P, female
J2021
2
Connector, 9P, female
J2021
1
Connector, 9P
J2024
1
Connector, 2P
J2024
1
Connector, 2P
Copy module 595
Table 121. Connectors (1 of 3) (continued)
Key
Quantity
Description
J2024
2
Socket, contact
J2024
2
Pin, contact, 18-22AWG
J2030
2
Connector, 2P, female
J2030
1
Connector, 2P
J2034
—
Reader controller
J2034
1
Connector, 2P, female
J2035
1
Connector, 2P
J2035
1
Connector, 2P
J2035
2
Socket, contact, 22-26AWG
J2035
2
Pin, contact, 22-26AWG
J2036
—
Noise filter
J2036
1
Connector, 9P, female
J2036
2
Socket contact, 18-24AWG
J2037
1
Cable, fluorescent
J2037
1
Film, fluorescent
J2038
1
Cable, fluorescent lamp
J2038
1
Connector, 3P, female
J2038
3
Pin contact, 22-28AWG
J2039
—
Scanning lamp heater (H1)
J2039
1
Cable, fluorescent lamp
J2041
2
Connector, 13P, female
J2041
1
Connector, snap tight
596 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Figure 442.
Connectors (2 of 3)
Table 122. Connectors (2 of 3)
EN
Key
Quantity
Description
J2002
1
Connector, 9P, male
J2002
1
Connector, 9P, female
J2002
9
Socket contact, 18-24AWG
J2002
9
Pin contact
J2016
2
Connector, 13P, female
J2016
1
Connector, snap tight
J2017
2
Connector, 15P, female
J2017
1
Connector, snap tight
J2031
—
Power supply cooling fan
J2031
1
Connector, 3P (FM1)
J2031
1
Connector, 3P
Copy module 597
Figure 443.
Connectors (3 of 3)
Table 123. Connectors (3 of 3)
Key
Quantity
Description
J 901
—
Control panel
J 901
1
Connector, 15P, female
J 901
1
Connector, 15P, female
J 901
1
Holder, connector, 30P
J 955
—
Control panel
J 955
1
Connector, 2P, female
J2002
1
Connector, 9P, male
J2002
1
Connector, 9P, female
J2002
9
Socket contact, 18-24AWG
J2002
9
Pin contact
J2016
2
Connector, 13P, female
J2016
1
Connector, snap tight
J2017
2
Connector, 15P, female
598 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 123. Connectors (3 of 3) (continued)
Key
EN
Quantity
Description
J2017
1
Connector, snap tight
J2018
1
Cable, fluorescent
J2018
1
Connector, 5P, male
J2018
4
Pin contact
J2022
—
To document feeder
J2022
1
Connector, female
J2022
1
Connector, 7P, female
J2022
3
Pin contact, 18-24AWG
J2041
2
Connector, 13P, female
J2041
1
Connector, snap tight
J2042
1
Connector, 2P, female
J2042
1
Connector, 2P
J2042
1
Connector, 2P, male
J2042
2
Terminal
Copy module 599
ADF
Note
The only part that can be serviced on the ADF is the large white feeding
belt (part number FC1-7815-020CN). (See “Removing the feeding belt”
on page 431.) The remainder of the ADF will be serviced via
adjustment/calibration (see “ADF adjustments” on page 140), cleaning
(see “Cleaning ADF parts” on page 167), and then whole-unit
exchange.
The exchange part number for the ADF is C7837-69053. The
replacement product number for the ADF is C7837A.
Belt kit
Table 124. Belt kit
Part number
Quantity
C7837-67903
600
Description
ADF belt kit
2
Roller, feed belt drive
2
Roller, feed belt drive
2
Guide, belt
1
Belt, timing, 80T
1
Belt, timing, 140T
1
Belt, timing, 44T
1
Belt, timing, 53T
1
Belt, timing, 92T
1
Flat belt, timing, 89T
1
Belt, timing, 100T
1
Belt, timing, 170T
1
Belt, timing, 132T
FC2-1827-000CN
8
Belt, separation
FB3-5702-000CN
4
Belt, separation
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Bushing kit
Table 125. Bushing kit
Part number
Quantity
C7837-67904
Description
ADF bushing kit
1
Bushing
3
Bushing
1
Bushing
2
Bushing
2
Bushing
2
Bushing
1
Bushing
1
Bushing
2
Bushing
1
Bushing
Gear/pulley kit
Table 126. Gear/pulley kit
Part number
Quantity
C7837-67905
EN
Description
ADF gear/pulley kit
1
Pulley, 32T
1
Gear, 16T
1
Gear, 32T
1
Pulley, roller, reverse
1
Pulley, 40T
1
Pulley F, 28T
1
Gear, 18T
1
Gear, 22T/pulley, 28T
1
Gear, 20T
1
Gear, 15T
1
Gear, 16T/pulley, 20T
1
Pulley, 20T
1
Gear, 16T
1
Pulley
2
Washer, pulley
1
Gear, 40T/pulley, 16T
1
Pulley, idler
1
Gear, 25T
1
Gear, 20T
1
Gear, 16T/pulley, 15T
ADF 601
Pin kit
Table 127. Pin kit
Part number
Quantity
C7837-67902
Description
ADF pin kit
1
Pin, spring
2
Pin, dowel
6
Pin, dowel
1
Pin, spring
6
Pin, dowel
1
Pin, spring
1
Pin, spring
1
Pin, dowel
1
Pin, dowel
1
Pin, dowel
2
Pin, spring
Screw/ring kit
Table 128. Screw/ring kit
Part number
Quantity
C7837-67901
Description
ADF screw/ring kit
4
Screw, stepped, M3X1.4
2
Screw, mach., flat head, M3X4
2
Bolt, M5X20
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X30
4
Screw, TP, M4X6
2
Nut, hex, M5
6
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
1
Screw, tapping, truss head, M4X6
3
Screw, TP, M4X6
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
2
Screw, M4X8
1
Screw, stepped, M4
2
Screw, stepped, M4
1
Screw, M4X6
6
Screw, stepped, M3
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
2
Setscrew, M4X8
1
Screw, tapping, truss head, M4X6
*Several used
602
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 128. Screw/ring kit (continued)
Part number
Quantity
Description
4
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
8
Screw, TP, M4X6
1
Screw, TP, M4X6
1
Screw, TP, M3X4
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X12
2
Screw, TP, M3X6
2
Screw, mach., washer head, M4X10
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
1
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X6
3
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X8
3
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X8
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M2X3
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
4
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X10
1
Screw, stepped, M4
2
Screw, stepped, M4
1
Screw, stepped, M3
1
Screw, stepped, M3
2
Screw, M3X2.5
1
Screw, stepped, M4
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X5
2
Screw, stepped, M3
1
Screw, M2X12
*
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
1
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X6
*
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
8
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
7
Ring, E
3
Ring, grip
*
Ring, E
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X3
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X4
1
Screw, TP, M3X4
5
Ring, E
3
Ring, E
3
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X10
1
Screw, TP, M4X6
3
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X5
2
Screw, flat head,M3X8
*Several used
EN
ADF 603
Table 128. Screw/ring kit (continued)
Part number
Quantity
Description
3
Screw, TP, M4X8
3
Screw, tapping, truss head, M2X5
2
Setscrew, M4X4
1
Screw, TP, M3X5
4
Screw, TP, M4X6
1
Ring, E
2
Ring, E
1
Ring, E
2
Screw, TP, M4X6
8
Ring, E
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
1
Ring, E
1
Ring, E
*Several used
Spring kit
Table 129. Spring kit
Part number
Quantity
C7837-67906
604
Description
ADF spring kit
1
Spring, tension
4
Spring, tension
6
Spring, tension
2
Spring, tension
4
Spring, tension
6
Spring, compression
1
Spring, compression
2
Spring, tension
1
Spring, tension
2
Spring, tension
1
Spring, tension
1
Spring, tension
2
Spring, tension
1
Spring, tension
1
Spring, tension
4
Spring, tension
2
Spring, tension
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Assembly locations
External covers and
panels (figure 446)
Document tray assembly
(figure 448)
Upper cover assembly
(figure 449)
Belt drive motor
assembly (figure 456)
RDF controller PCA
(figure 461)
Right paper delivery
assembly (figure 454)
Paper feed motor
assembly (figure 455)
Upper paper guide
assembly (figure 457)
Paper separation
assembly (figure 460)
RF assembly (1 of 4)
(figure 450)
Figure 444.
EN
DF assembly (figure
447)
Separation roller assembly
(figure 459)
Lower paper guide assembly (figure 458)
Assembly locations
ADF 605
Mounting hardware
Figure 445.
Mounting hardware
Table 130. Mounting hardware
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
1
FB3-2141-000CN
1
Tray 3, copy
2
FB3-3143-020CN
1
Tray 2, copy
3
FB4-7021-000CN
1
Mount, tray
4
FB4-7022-000CN
1
Plate, tray
5
FB5-5328-000CN
1
Guide, paper right
6
ADF screw/ring kit
4
Screw, stepped, M3X1.4
7
ADF screw/ring kit
2
Screw, mach., flat head, M3X4
8
FF5-7814-000CN
1
Pillar, left
9
FF5-7815-000CN
1
Pillar, right
10
ADF screw/ring kit
2
Bolt, M5X20
501
ADF screw/ring kit
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X30
502
ADF screw/ring kit
4
Screw, TP, M4X6
503
ADF screw/ring kit
2
Nut,hex,M5
606
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
External covers and panels
Figure 446.
External covers and panels
Table 131. External covers and panels
Key
Part number
1
FB5-5309-000CN
1
Cover, front
2
FB5-5302-000CN
1
Cover, upper
3
FB5-5303-000CN
4
Quantity
Description
1
Cover
1
Plate, cover
501
ADF screw/ring kit
6
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
502
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, tapping, truss head, M4X6
503
ADF screw/ring kit
3
Screw, TP, M4X6
EN
ADF 607
DF assembly
Figure 447.
608
DF assembly
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 132. DF assembly
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
1
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
2
FM6-2145-000CN
1
Turn roller assembly
2A
1
Bushing, idler roller
2B
1
Shaft, idler roller
2
Roller, feed belt idler
8
Band, roller
1
Catch, magnet
2
Roller, feed belt drive
2C
3
FA3-4509-000CN
4
5
ADF belt kit
6
ADF belt kit
7
8
2
Roller, feed belt drive
1
Plate, joint
2
Spacer
9
ADF screw/ring kit
2
Screw, M4X8
10
FC1-1279-000CN
1
Lever 2, deflector
1
Holder, solenoid
11
12
1
Plate, joint paper pick-up
13
1
Plate
14
1
Crossmember, left
15
1
Crossmember, center
16
1
Crossmember, right
17
1
Plate, guide, front
18
1
Wire, grounding
19
1
Screw, adjusting
20
1
Mount, roller
21
1
Shaft, feed belt
22
FC1-1334-030CN
14
Roller
23
FC1-1336-000CN
2
Flange
24
FB3-5757-000CN
1
Hinge, left
25
FB3-5758-000CN
1
Hinge, right
26
FC1-7815-020CN
1
Feed belt
27
FA5-4732-000CN
3
Foot, rubber
4
Tie, cable
1
Plate, slide, rear
28
29
FF5-7816-000CN
30
FG2-9558-000CN
30A
1
Interface cable (J1, 2, 201)
1
Bushing
31
FH7-5843-000CN
1
Solenoid, dc 24 V (SL3 J204)
32
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, stepped, M4
33
ADF screw/ring kit
2
Screw, stepped, M4
EN
ADF 609
Table 132. DF assembly (continued)
Key
Part number
34
ADF gear/pulley kit
1
Pulley, 32T
35
ADF spring kit
1
Spring, tension
36
ADF spring kit
4
Spring, tension
37
ADF spring kit
6
Spring, tension
38
ADF spring kit
2
Spring, tension
1
Bracket, connector
3
Clip, cable
1
Microswitch (MS1)
2
Spacer, PCB
2
Guide, belt
39
40
41
WC4-5030-000CN
42
Quantity
Description
43
ADF belt kit
44
FE9-0117-000CN
1
Grommet
45
XG9-0237-000CN
4
Bearing, ball
4
Spacer, PCB
FC1-3044-000CN
1
Foot, rubber, front
48
2
Clip, cable
49
3
Clip, cable
46
47
50
51
ADF screw/ring kit
52
ADF screw/ring kit
53
1
Retainer, cord
1
Screw, M4X6
4
Spring, tension
1
Plate, grounding
54
ADF screw/ring kit
6
Screw, stepped, M3
55
ADF spring kit
6
Spring, compression
56
FB4-7004-000CN
6
Roller
1
Spring, grounding
57
58
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
59
FB4-7024-000CN
1
Sheet, sensor lever
501
ADF pin kit
1
Pin, spring
502
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Washer, toothed lock
503
ADF screw/ring kit
2
Setscrew, M4X8
504
ADF screw/ring kit
2
Ring, E
505
ADF screw/ring kit
7
Ring, grip
506
ADF pin kit
2
Pin, dowel
507
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Washer, toothed lock
508
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, tapping truss head, M4X6
509
ADF screw/ring kit
4
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
510
ADF screw/ring kit
10
Screw, TP, M4X6
511
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, TP, M4X6
512
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, TP, M3X4
610
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 132. DF assembly (continued)
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
513
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X12
514
ADF pin kit
6
Pin, dowel
515
ADF screw/ring kit
2
Screw, TP, M3X6
516
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Washer, toothed lock
517
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Nut, hex, M4
518
ADF pin kit
1
Pin, spring
EN
ADF 611
Document tray assembly
Figure 448.
612
Document tray assembly
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 133. Document tray assembly
Key
Part number
1
FF6-0276-000CN
1A
Quantity
Description
1
Tray, document
1
Label, paper size
2
FB5-5293-000CN
1
Cover, rear, tray
3
FB5-5294-000CN
1
Guide, slide
4
FB5-5295-000CN
1
Base guide
5
FB5-5296-000CN
1
Tray, auxiliary
6
FC1-6179-000CN
2
Clamp, guide
7
ADF gear/pulley kit
1
Gear, 16T
8
FF6-0277-000CN
8A
8B
9
FF2-5903-030CN
10
FC1-1311-000CN
1
Guide, slide, rear
1
Plate
1
Label, warning
1
Motor, dc 6 V (M4 J102)
1
Lever, recycle
11
1
Mount, recycle motor
12
1
Tray cable assembly (J8, 101, 218)
12A
1
Connector, 3P (J218)
2
Screw, mach., washer head, M4X10
1
Mount, volume
13
ADF screw/ring kit
14
15
ADF gear/pulley kit
1
Gear, 32T
16
FG2-7569-000CN
1
Rotary VR assembly (VR1 J218)
17
1
Clamp, cable
18
1
Spring, leaf
19
FB3-5666-000CN
1
Block, tray
20
FG2-5001-030CN
1
Indicator PCB assembly
21
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
501
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X6
502
ADF screw/ring kit
3
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X8
503
ADF screw/ring kit
3
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X8
504
ADF screw/ring kit
2
Washer, toothed lock
505
ADF screw/ring kit
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M2X3
506
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
507
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
508
ADF screw/ring kit
4
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X10
EN
ADF 613
Upper cover assembly
Figure 449.
614
Upper cover assembly
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 134. Upper cover assembly
Key
Part number
FG6-5836-000CN
Quantity
Description
1
Upper cover assembly
1
5
Rod
2
5
Spring, leaf
3
1
Cover, sensor
4
2
Spring, leaf
5
1
Flag, sensor
6
4
Roller, delivery
7
1
Cover, upper
7A
1
Eliminator, static charge
8
1
Spring, torsion
9
1
Wire
10
5
Roller
11
1
Sensor connecting cable (J207,303)
12
1
IC, TLP1242, photo-interrupter (S6 J303)
13
1
Plate, sensor guard
13A
1
Sheet, guard
501
2
Screw, tapping, truss head, M4X8
502
ADF screw/ring kit
7
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X6
503
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Washer, toothed lock
EN
ADF 615
RF assembly
Lower paper guide
assembly (figure 458)
Figure 450.
616
To Paper separation
assembly (figure
460)
RF assembly (1 of 4)
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 135. RF assembly (1 of 4)
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
1
2
Bushing
3
1
Stopper, lower guide
6
1
Guide A, inner
8
1
Plate, reverse
8A
FC2-3246-000CN
4
Sheet
12
FF5-9581-000CN
1
Roller, reverse
20
FB4-7018-000CN
1
Roller, registration
26
ADF gear/pulley kit
1
Pulley, roller, reverse
37
FB4-6994-000CN
1
Cover
38
1
Disk, clock
39
1
Holder, sensor registration
41
1
Cover, sensor
43
1
Guide, paper
44
FF2-5771-000CN
1
Plate, sensor, separation
49
1
Plate, positioning
51
1
Guide B, inner
52C
1
Sheet, 3
52D
1
Sheet, 4
1
Plate, positioning
1
EMP sensing PCB assembly (S1 J203)
57
1
Sensor connecting cable (J205, 302)
58
1
Cable, separation sensing (J208, 304)
53
54
FG2-9554-000CN
61
FG2-3394-000CN
1
Registration sensor H assembly (LED3 J302)
63
FG2-7570-000CN
1
ENT sensing LED PCB assembly (S3 J212)
63A
1
Diode, 1SS81
63B
1
Photo-transistor
5
Cap, rubber
3
Bushing
65
67
ADF bushing kit
75
ADF gear/pulley kit
1
Pulley, 40T
83
ADF spring kit
2
Spring, tension
86
ADF spring kit
2
Spring, tension
90
ADF screw/ring kit
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X5
102
FF3-0434-000CN
103
1
Holder J, sensing
4
Tie, cable
104
WG8-5206-000CN
2
Photo-interrupter, SG206 (S4,7 J214, 304)
105
FH7-7326-000CN
1
IC, TLP1225, photo-interrupter (S11 J215)
*Several used
EN
ADF 617
Table 135. RF assembly (1 of 4) (continued)
Key
Part number
107
ADF belt kit
108
110
Quantity
Description
1
Belt, timing, 140T
1
Rail, guide
1
Plate
119
ADF pin kit
6
Pin, dowel
121
ADF bushing kit
1
Bushing
122
ADF bushing kit
1
Bushing
501
ADF screw/ring kit
*
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
504
ADF screw/ring kit
*
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
505
ADF screw/ring kit
17
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
507
ADF screw/ring kit
3
Ring, grip
508
ADF screw/ring kit
*
Ring, E
510
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X4
*Several used
618
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
EN
ADF 619
Paper separation assembly
(figure 460)
Paper separation assembly
(figure 460), callout 13
Figure 451.
620
RF assembly (2 of 4)
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 136. RF assembly (2 of 4)
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
4
1
Arm, shutter
7
1
Weight
15
1
Plate, shutter holding
15A
1
Cushion
1
Shutter
1
Arm, pick-up, front
16
17
FB3-5640-000CN
18
FB3-5641-000CN
1
Arm, pick-up, rear
21
FB3-5660-000CN
1
Lever 1, deflector
22
FB3-5637-000CN
23
25
FC1-1294-020CN
35
36
FC1-6184-000CN
42
1
Roller, paper delivery
1
Reflector
1
Holder, switch
1
Clip, cable
1
Link, shutter
1
Shaft, arm, pick-up rear
45
1
Connector, 4P (J203)
47
1
Plate, belt tension, front
52
1
Limit plate, separation
52A
FF5-9582-000CN
2
Sheet, 1
52B
1
Sheet, 2
52C
1
Sheet, 3
1
Sheet, 4
1
EMP sensing PCB assembly (S1 J203)
54A
1
LED, TLN119B
54B
1
Photo-transistor TPS616C
52D
54
FG2-9554-000CN
54C
1
Cover, sensor
54D
1
Sheet
1
IC, TLP1241, photo-interrupter (S5 J206)
1
Plate, pick-up
59
WG8-5362-000CN
60
62
FG2-9925-000CN
62A
1
Cover switch assembly (MS2 J3)
1
Microswitch (MS2)
64
FH7-5653-000CN
1
Solenoid, dc 24 V (SL1 J217)
72
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, stepped, M3
73
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, stepped, M3
77
ADF gear/pulley kit
1
Gear, 18T
1
Plate P, shutter
85
ADF spring kit
1
Spring, tension
88
ADF spring kit
1
Spring, tension
78
*Several used
EN
ADF 621
Table 136. RF assembly (2 of 4) (continued)
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
89
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, stepped, M4
90
ADF screw/ring kit
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X5
3
Clamp, cable
1
Gear, 16T/pulley, 20T
92
95
ADF gear/pulley kit
96
ADF gear/pulley kit
1
Pulley, 20T
97
ADF gear/pulley kit
1
Gear, 16T
100
ADF spring kit
1
Spring, tension
3
Clip, cable
101
103
4
Tie, cable
106
1
Plate, tray positioning
109
ADF bushing kit
2
Bushing
111
ADF belt kit
1
Belt, timing, 44T
112
1
Flange C
113
1
Flange D
116
FH6-1266-000CN
117
118
ADF screw/ring kit
120
1
Motor, dc 23 V (M1 J12)
1
Guide, cable
1
Screw, M2X12
2
Connector, 2P (J216, 217)
121
ADF bushing kit
1
Bushing
122
ADF bushing kit
1
Bushing
501
ADF screw/ring kit
*
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
502
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
503
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X6
504
ADF screw/ring kit
*
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
505
ADF screw/ring kit
17
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
506
ADF screw/ring kit
7
Ring, E
508
ADF screw/ring kit
*
Ring, E
509
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X3
514
ADF screw/ring kit
5
Ring, E
515
ADF screw/ring kit
3
Ring, E
516
ADF pin kit
1
Pin, spring
518
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, TP, M4X6
*Several used
622
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
EN
ADF 623
Figure 452.
624
RF assembly (3 of 4)
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 137. RF assembly (3 of 4)
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
2
1
Plate, lifting, cam
5
1
Shaft, cam
1
Crossmember, guide, upper
1
Guide, front, separation
10A
2
Rubber
10B
2
Sheet, A
9
10
FF5-5201-020CN
10C
8
Sheet, B
11
1
Plate, tray
1
Shaft, pressure, pick-up
1
Plate, pressure pick-up
19
FB3-5642-000CN
24
29
FB3-5649-000CN
1
Hook, solenoid
30
FC1-1300-000CN
2
Cam
1
Plate, sensing
1
Arm, front
31
32
FC1-1302-000CN
33
FC1-1303-000CN
34
40
FB3-5669-000CN
1
Arm, rear
1
Mount, solenoid
1
Spring, torsion
48
1
Plate, belt tension, rear
52C
1
Sheet, 3
52D
1
Sheet, 4
55
1
Tray, pick-up
59
WG8-5362-000CN
1
IC, TLP1241, photo-interrupter (S5 J206)
66
ADF bushing kit
1
Bushing
67
ADF bushing kit
3
Bushing
68
FH7-5709-000CN
1
Solenoid, dc 24 V (SL2, J216)
70
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, stepped, M4
71
ADF screw/ring kit
2
Screw, stepped, M4
79
ADF bushing kit
2
Bushing
80
ADF bushing kit
2
Bushing
87
ADF spring kit
1
Spring, tension
91
2
Clip, cable
92
3
Clamp, cable
93
ADF screw/ring kit
2
Screw, stepped, M3
94
ADF gear/pulley kit
1
Gear, 15T
98
ADF spring kit
2
Spring, tension
99
ADF spring kit
1
Spring, tension
114
FF5-5198-000CN
1
Plate, stop, woodruff
*Several used
EN
ADF 625
Table 137. RF assembly (3 of 4) (continued)
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
114A
1
Sponge, damper
115
1
Collar 2, retaining
120
2
Connector, 2P (J216, 217)
121
ADF bushing kit
1
Bushing
122
ADF bushing kit
1
Bushing
501
ADF screw/ring kit
*
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
504
ADF screw/ring kit
*
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
505
ADF screw/ring kit
17
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
508
ADF screw/ring kit
*
Ring, E
511
ADF screw/ring kit
3
Nut, hex, M3
512
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, TP, M3X4
513
ADF pin kit
1
Pin, spring
514
ADF screw/ring kit
5
Ring, E
515
ADF screw/ring kit
3
Ring, E
517
ADF screw/ring kit
3
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X10
*Several used
626
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
EN
ADF 627
Separation roller
assembly
(figure 459)
Figure 453.
628
RF assembly (4 of 4)
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 138. RF assembly (4 of 4)
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
13
FB3-5638-000CN
1
Roller, front
14
FB3-5639-000CN
1
Roller, rear
27
FB4-6988-000CN
1
Joint
1
Shaft, roller
28
46
ADF belt kit
1
Belt, timing, 80T
50
FF5-5191-000CN
2
Roller, pick-up
52C
1
Sheet, 3
52D
1
Sheet, 4
56
FA6-2513-000CN
2
Washer
66
ADF bushing kit
1
Bushing
67
ADF bushing kit
3
Bushing
69
ADF bushing kit
1
Bushing
74
ADF spring kit
1
Spring, compression
76
ADF gear/pulley kit
1
Pulley F, 28T
81
ADF gear/pulley kit
1
Gear, 22T/pulley, 28T
82
ADF gear/pulley kit
1
Gear, 20T
84
ADF screw/ring kit
2
Screw, M3X2.5
119
ADF pin kit
6
Pin, dowel
121
ADF bushing kit
1
Bushing
122
ADF bushing kit
1
Bushing
504
ADF screw/ring kit
*
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
506
ADF screw/ring kit
7
Ring, E
508
ADF screw/ring kit
*
Ring, E
*Several used
EN
ADF 629
Right paper delivery assembly
Figure 454.
630
Right paper delivery assembly
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 139. Right paper delivery assembly
Key
Part number
Quantity
FG6-5838-000CN
1
Right paper delivery assembly
1
Guide, upper, delivery
1
2
Description
1
Guide, lower, delivery
1
Roller, delivery
4
1
Lever, delivery sensor
5
1
Flag, sensor
6
1
Mount, sensor
7
6
Spring, leaf
8
1
Scraper
9
1
Cover, stamp
10
3
Rod
11
1
Connector, 6P (J219)
12
1
Cable, motor (J221, 307)
13
1
Solenoid, dc 24 V (SL4 J220)
14
1
Bushing
15
1
Bushing
16
3
Roller, delivery
17
1
Gear, 21T
3
FB4-6990-000CN
18
1
Gear, 21T/pulley, 42T
1
IC, TLP1241, photo-interrupter (S12 J306)
20
2
Clamp, cable
21
1
Cable, sensor (J219, 306, 308)
22
1
Spring, torsion
19
WG8-5362-000CN
23
2
Screw, stepped
24
1
Spring, torsion
25
1
Spring, tension
26
1
Eliminator, static charge, F
27
1
Belt, timing, 53T
28
2
Flange
29
1
Cable, delivery (J14, 219, 220, 221)
30
1
Stamp1
31
1
Connector, 2P (J220)
32
1
Connector, 3P (J221)
33
5
Clamp, cable
34
ADF belt kit
ADF screw/ring kit
35
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
1
Motor, dc 24 V (M5 J307)
36
FH7-7326-000CN
1
IC, TLP1225, photo-interrupter (S13 J308)
501
ADF screw/ring kit
7
Ring, E
502
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
503
ADF pin kit
1
Pin, dowel
504
ADF screw/ring kit
12
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
505
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
1 Right paper delivery assembly does not include the part shown in key number 30.
EN
ADF 631
Paper feed motor assembly
Figure 455.
632
Paper feed motor assembly
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 140. Paper feed motor assembly
Key
Part number
FG6-2173-000CN
Quantity
Description
1
Paper feed motor assembly
1
1
Mount, motor
1A
1
Sheet, 1
1B
1
Sheet, rubber 2
1C
1
Sheet, rubber, 3
2
1
Motor, dc 24 V (M2 J11)
3
1
Pulley, 1
4
1
Pulley, 2
5
FH7-7236-000CN
1
Photo-interrupter, GP1A34A1 (S9 J210)
6
ADF belt kit
1
Belt, timing, 92T
7
FC1-6220-000CN
1
Washer, pulley
8
ADF gear/pulley kit
2
Screw, mach. truss head, M3x4 2
501
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Ring, E
2
Screw, with washer, M4x8
9
2 Paper feed motor assembly does not include the part shown with key number 8.
EN
ADF 633
Belt drive motor assembly
Figure 456.
634
Belt drive motor assembly
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 141. Belt drive motor assembly
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
1
1
Mount, motor
1A
1
Damper
1B
1
Sheet, rubber 2
1C
1
Sheet, rubber, 3
1
Plate, clutch tensioning
1
Motor, dc 24 V (M3 J7)
2
3
FH6-1603-000CN
4
ADF gear/pulley kit
5
6
ADF screw/ring kit
7
8
9
ADF gear/pulley kit
1
Pulley
1
Shaft, clutch
3
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X5
1
Disk, clock
1
Mount, brake, 1
2
Washer, pulley
10
ADF screw/ring kit
2
Screw, flat head, M3X8
11
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Gear, 40T/pulley, 16T
12
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Pulley, idler
13
ADF belt kit
1
Flat belt, timing, 89T
14
ADF belt kit
1
Belt, timing, 100T
15
ADF belt kit
1
Belt, timing, 170T
16
FH7-5363-000CN
1
Brake, electromagnetic (BK1 J6)
17
FH7-5403-000CN
1
Clutch, electromagnetic (CL1 J13)
18
FH7-7236-000CN
1
Photo-interrupter, GP1A34A1 (S10 J211)
19
ADF bushing kit
2
Bushing
20
1
Mount, brake, 2
21
1
Plate3
22
ADF screw/ring kit
3
Screw,TP,M4X8 3
501
ADF screw/ring kit
3
Screw, tapping, truss head, M2X5
502
ADF screw/ring kit
2
Setscrew, M4X4
503
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, TP, M3X5
504
ADF screw/ring kit
4
Screw, TP, M4X6
505
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Ring, E
506
ADF screw/ring kit
2
Ring, E
507
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Ring, E
508
ADF screw/ring kit
2
Screw, TP, M4X6 3
3 Belt drive motor assembly does not include the part shown with key numbers 21, 22, and 508.
EN
ADF 635
Upper paper guide assembly
Figure 457.
636
Upper paper guide assembly
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 142. Upper paper guide assembly
Key
Part number
FG5-7273-000CN
1
Quantity
Description
1
Upper paper guide assembly
1
Guide, upper
2
1
Flapper, reverse
3
1
Plate, flapper, mounting
4
1
Arm, flapper
5
1
Spring, torsion
6
1
Guide, front registration
6A
1
Mylar, registration guide front
7
1
Spring, torsion
8
ADF bushing kit
1
Bushing
501
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X6
2
Ring, grip
502
EN
ADF 637
Lower paper guide assembly
Figure 458.
638
Lower paper guide assembly
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 143. Lower paper guide assembly
Key
Part number
FG6-5837-000CN
Quantity
Description
1
Lower paper guide assembly
1
1
Guide, paper, lower
2
5
Rod
3
1
Plate, guide
4
4
Spring, leaf, 1
5
6
Spring, leaf, 2
6
5
Roller
7
2
Screw,stepped,M3X1.4
8
1
Sensor lever unit
9
1
Photo-interrupter, SG206 (S8 J305)
10
1
Sensor connecting cable (J209, 305)
501
1
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X6
1
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X6
502
EN
ADF screw/ring kit
ADF 639
Separation roller assembly
Figure 459.
640
Separation roller assembly
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 144. Separation roller assembly
Key
Part number
FG6-2176-000CN
Quantity
Description
1
Separation roller assembly
1
1
Gear, 8T
2
1
Gear, 6T
3
1
Arm, guide rear
1
Damper
1
Roller, separation
5
2
Roller, 2
6
1
Roller, drive, 1
3A
4
FF5-5207-000CN
7
1
Roller, drive, 2
8
ADF gear/pulley kit
1
Gear, 25T
9
FB4-6991-000CN
8
Roller
1
Arm, guide front
10
10A
1
Damper
501
ADF screw/ring kit
8
Ring, E
502
ADF pin kit
1
Pin, dowel
EN
ADF 641
Paper separation assembly
From RF assembly (4 of 4)
(figure 453)
Figure 460.
642
Paper separation assembly
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 145. Paper separation assembly
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
FG6-4442-000CN
1
Paper separation assembly
ADF belt kit
8
Belt, separation
1
Collar, retaining
4
Belt, separation
4
2
Roller, belt, side
5
1
Shaft, drive, belt separation
1
2
3
ADF belt kit
6
1
Roller, belt, center
7
1
Pulley, drive separation, center
8
2
Pulley, drive separation, side
9
2
Bracket, separation, side
10
1
Bracket, separation, center
11
2
Arm, bracket, center
4
Arm, bracket, side
1
Side plate, separation
12
13
FF5-5188-000CN
14
ADF bushing kit
1
Bushing
15
ADF gear/pulley kit
1
Gear, 20T
16
ADF gear/pulley kit
1
Gear, 16T/pulley, 15T
17
ADF spring kit
4
Spring, tension
4
Spring, leaf
ADF spring kit
2
Spring, tension
1
Flange
1
Belt, timing, 132T
18
19
20
21
ADF belt kit
501
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
502
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Ring, E
503
ADF screw/ring kit
1
Ring, E
504
ADF pin kit
1
Pin, dowel
505
ADF pin kit
2
Pin, spring
EN
ADF 643
RDF controller PCA
Figure 461.
RDF controller PCA
Table 146. RDF controller PCA
Key
1
644
Part number
Quantity
Description
FG2-9927-000CN
1
RDF controller PCB assembly
1
IC, M27C1001-80XF1, EP-ROM (Q2)
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Connectors
Figure 462.
Connectors (1 of 2)
Table 147. Connectors (1 of 2)
Key
Quantity
J1
RDF controller
J1
1
Connector, 7P, female
J1
7
Terminal
J2
1
Connector, 4P, female
J2
4
J2
RDF controller
J3
Socket, contact, 18-24AWG
RDF controller
J3
1
Connector, 2P
J3
2
Socket, contact, 18-24AWG
J5
1
Connector, 14P
J5
13
J5
J6
EN
Description
RDF controller
Socket contact, DF11-2428SCF
Belt motor brake (BK1)
J6
RDF controller
J7
Belt motor (M3)
J7
RDF controller
J8
RDF controller
ADF 645
Table 147. Connectors (1 of 2) (continued)
Key
Quantity
Description
J8
1
Connector, 9P
J8
9
Socket contact
J9
1
Connector, 24P
J9
24
J9
RDF controller
Feeder motor (M2)
J 11
RDF controller
J 12
Separation motor (M1)
J 12
RDF controller
J 13
Clutch (CL1)
J 13
RDF controller
J 14
RDF controller
J 14
1
J101
Connector, 10P
Indicator
J101
1
Connector, 6P, female
J101
6
Socket contact
1
Connector, 2P, female
J102
J102
Indicator
J102
2
Socket contact
J201
1
Copier
J201
1
Housing
J201
7
Terminal
J201
3
Terminal
J204
Deflector solenoid (SL3)
J204
2
Connector,2P,female
J204
1
Connector, 2P
J205
2
Connector, 4P, female
J205
1
Connector, 4P
J206
1
Connector, 3P
J207
2
Connector, 3P
J207
1
Connector, 3P
J208
2
Connector, 3P, female
J208
1
Connector, snap tight
J209
2
Connector, 3P, female
J209
1
Connector, 3P
1
Connector, 3P
J206
Paper pick-up roller sensor (S5)
J210
J210
646
Socket contact, DF11-2428SCF
J 11
Feeder motor clock sensor (S9)
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 147. Connectors (1 of 2) (continued)
Key
Quantity
Description
J211
1
Connector, 3P, female
J212
2
Connector, 2P, female
J212
1
Connector, snap tight
1
Connector, 3P
J216
1
Connector, 2P, female
J216
1
Connector, 2P
J211
Belt motor clock sensor (S10)
J215
J215
Register roller clock sensor (S11)
J216
Paper retainer plate solenoid (SL2)
J217
Stopper plate solenoid (SL1)
J217
1
Connector, 2P, female
J217
1
Connector, snap tight
J219
2
Connector, 6P
J219
1
Connector, 6P
J220
1
Connector, 2P, female
J220
1
Connector, 2P
J221
2
Connector, 3P
J221
1
Connector, 3P
J220
Stamp solenoid (SL4)
J306
J306
Delivery sensor 2 (S12)
1
J307
J307
1
Connector, 2P, female
J307
2
Contact
1
Connector, 3P
J308
J308
EN
Connector, 3P
Paper delivery motor (M5)
Delivery motor sensor (S13)
ADF 647
Figure 463.
Connectors (2 of 2)
Table 148. Connectors (2 of 2)
Key
Quantity
Description
J203
2
Connector, 4P, female
J203
1
Connector, 4P
J214
Upper cover sensor (S4)
J214
1
Connector, 3P
J218
2
Connector, 3P
J218
1
Connector, 3P
J302
1
Connector, 2P, female
J302
1
Pin assembly, 2P
J302
2
Contact
J303
J303
Delivery sensor 1 (S6)
1
Connector, 3P
1
Connector, 3P
1
Connector, 3P
J304
J304
Paper pick-up sensor (S7)
J305
J305
648
Reversing sensor (S8)
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Side HCI
Bushing kit
Table 149. Bushing kit
Part number
Quantity
C7839-67902
Description
Side HCI bushing kit
2
Bushing
2
Bushing
2
Bushing
2
Bushing
1
Bushing
8
Bushing
1
Bushing
Gear/pulley kit
Table 150. Gear/pulley kit
Part number
Quantity
C7839-67903
EN
Description
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
1
Gear, 28T/41T
1
Gear, 58T
1
Gear, 28T
2
Gear, 16T
1
Gear, 19T
1
One-way gear, 71T
1
Gear, 18T
1
Gear, 36T
1
Gear, 14T/42T/32T
1
Gear, 47T
1
Gear, 35T
Side HCI 649
Screw/ring kit
Table 151. Screw/ring kit
Part number
Quantity
C7839-67901
Description
Side HCI screw/ring kit
2
Spring, torsion
4
Screw, M4X6
2
Screw, M4X6
2
Screw, TP, M4X6
4
Ring, E
2
Screw, TP, M4X6
*
Screw, RS, M4X8
2
Screw, w/washer, M4
*
Screw, TP, M4X4
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
3
Screw, TP, M4X6
2
Screw, M4X10
*
Screw, RS, M4X8
*
Screw, TP, M4X4
5
Ring, E
2
Setscrew, M3X4
*
Screw, RS, M4X8
1
Screw, stepped
1
Screw, M3X8
8
Screw, TP, M4X6
3
Screw, mach., truss head, M2.3X10
6
Ring, E
*
Screw, TP, M4X4
1
Screw, tapping, truss head, M4X6
2
Screw, w/washer, M3X8
8
Screw, TP, M3X6
8
Ring, E
4
Screw, w/washer, M3X6
8
Ring, E
2
Ring, E
XD3-1200-122CN
5
Pin, spring
XD3-2200-102CN
3
Pin, dowel
XD3-2200-122CN
2
Pin, dowel
*Several used
650
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Spring kit
Table 152. Spring kit
Part number
Quantity
C7839-67904
EN
Description
Side HCI spring kit
1
Spring, tension
1
Spring, tension
1
Spring, compression
1
Spring, compression
2
Spring, compression
1
Spring, tension
1
Spring, tension
1
Spring, tension
1
Spring, tension
1
Spring, tension
Side HCI 651
Assembly locations
Lifter drive assembly
(figure 470)
Deck controller PCA
(figure 473)
Paper pick-up
assembly (1 of 2)
(figure 471)
Figure 464.
652
Assembly locations
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Mounting hardware
Figure 465.
Mounting hardware
Table 153. Mounting hardware
Key
Quantity
Description
1
1
Plate, mount
2
2
Plate, latch
501
8
Screw, TP, M4X4
EN
Part number
Side HCI 653
External covers and panels
Figure 466.
654
External covers and panels
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 154. External covers and panels
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
1
FB4-7441-000CN
1
Panel, front
2
FF5-9140-000CN
1
Panel, upper
1
Guide, LED
1
Size plate
4
2
Plate, shaft support
5
2
Shaft, cover
2A
3
FF5-9141-000CN
6
FB4-7413-000CN
1
Cover, window
7
FB4-7425-000CN
2
Spring, torsion
8
FB4-7438-000CN
1
Tape, door cover
9
FF5-9142-000CN
1
Deck cover
10
WG8-5362-000CN
1
IC, TLP1241, photo-interrupter (PS2 J310)
11
Side HCI screw/ring kit
4
Screw, M4X6
12
FB4-7381-000CN
13
1
Flag, sensor
1
Cover, sensor
14
FB4-7444-000CN
1
Cover, deck, rear
15
FB4-7445-000CN
1
Cover, dc controller
1
Sensor, cable (J304, 310)
2
Screw, M4X6
16
17
Side HCI screw/ring kit
501
Side HCI screw/ring kit
2
Screw, TP, M4X6
502
Side HCI screw/ring kit
4
Ring, E
503
Side HCI screw/ring kit
2
Screw, TP, M4X6
EN
Side HCI 655
Internal components
Deck controller PCA (figure 473)
Lifter drive assembly
(figure 470)
Figure 467.
656
Internal components (1 of 3)
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 155. Internal components (1 of 3)
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
1
1
Label, adjusting
2
1
Plate, pin holder
3
1
Plate, pin holder
4
2
Plate, deck stop
5
1
Label, paper supply
6
1
Pin, positioning
7
FB4-7387-000CN
1
Arm, paper sensor
8
Side HCI spring kit
1
Spring, tension
9
2
Pin, positioning
10
1
Pin, guide, 2
11
XG9-0402-000CN
2
Roller
12
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
1
Gear, 28T/41T
13
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
1
Gear, 58T
14
RG5-2166-000CN
1
Paper sensing assembly
14A
1
Spring, leaf
14B
1
Paper sensing PCB assembly
14C
1
Paper-volume cable (J205, 601)
15
1
Spring, leaf
16
FH2-6719-000CN
17
1
Power cord (100/127 V P2)
1
PSU cable (J203, 901)
18
Side HCI screw/ring kit
*
Screw, RS, M4X8
19
FH2-5762-000CN
1
Power cord (220/240 V P2)
20
FH2-6464-000CN
1
Cable, interface
21
FH3-2509-000CN
1
Switching regulator PCB unit
22
WT2-5526-000CN
2
Hexagon bolt, M4
23
Side HCI screw/ring kit
2
Screw, with washer, M4
501
Side HCI screw/ring kit
3
Ring, E
502
Side HCI screw/ring kit
*
Screw, TP, M4X4
503
Side HCI screw/ring kit
2
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
504
Side HCI screw/ring kit
3
Screw, TP, M4X6
*Several used
EN
Side HCI 657
Figure 468.
658
Internal components (2 of 3)
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 156. Internal components (2 of 3)
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
1
RB1-6872-000CN
1
Sheet, separation, leather
2
FB4-7371-000CN
1
Plate, wire hook
3
FC1-5054-000CN
1
Hook, wire
4
FC1-5049-000CN
2
Bracket
5
FF5-9125-000CN
1
Side guide plate, front
1
Sheet, protective, small
5A
5B
1
Coupler, standard
6
Side HCI screw/ring kit
2
Screw, M4X10
7
FG6-3921-000CN
1
Side guide plate, rear
7A
1
Plate, paper holder
7B
1
Coupler, panel limit
7C
1
Sheet, protective, small
8
FC1-5052-000CN
1
Wire, rear
9
FC1-5051-000CN
1
Wire, front
10
1
Holder, cable, front
11
1
Holder, cable, rear
12
2
Flange, idler
13
1
Plate, pulley support, front
1
Plate, pulley support, rear
2
Pulley, lifting
14
15
FB2-8465-000CN
16
FA6-9988-020CN
1
Flange, lifter
17
FA9-2112-000CN
2
Bushing
18
FA6-9971-000CN
2
Pulley, idler
19
FB4-7379-000CN
1
Shaft, lifter wire
1
Plate, limit, wire
1
Flange, rear
20
21
FC1-5081-000CN
22
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
1
Gear, 28T
23
Side HCI screw/ring kit
*
Screw, RS, M4X8
2
Washer, retaining
*
Screw, TP, M4X4
2
Ring, toothed lock
5
Ring, E
501
502
Side HCI screw/ring kit
503
504
Side HCI screw/ring kit
505
Side HCI screw/ring kit
2
Setscrew, M3X4
506
Side HCI pin kit
1
Pin, dowel
*Several used
EN
Side HCI 659
Figure 469.
660
Internal components (3 of 3)
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 157. Internal components (3 of 3)
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
1
FB3-9198-000CN
1
Handle, upper guide
2
FB4-7372-000CN
1
Latch, front
3
1
Shaft, latch
4
1
Lever, plate
5
1
Link, latch
6
1
Shaft, lever
7
1
Arm, handle
FB4-7423-000CN
1
Plate, latch front
9
FB4-7424-000CN
1
Plate, latch rear
10
FF5-9122-000CN
1
Latch, rear
1
Arm
FB3-2411-000CN
1
Pin, slide
8
11
11A
12
Side HCI spring kit
1
Spring, tension
13
FA9-2112-000CN
2
Bushing
14
Side HCI screw/ring kit
*
Screw, RS, M4X8
15
Side HCI spring kit
1
Spring, tension
16
XZ9-0401-000CN
2
Caster
17
FG6-3913-000CN
2
Caster, unit
18
1
Mount, switch
19
1
Plate, switch
20
Side HCI screw/ring kit
21
22
WC4-0153-000CN
23
1
Screw, stepped
1
Spring, tension
1
Microswitch (MS1 J326)
1
Mount, switch
24
FB4-7391-000CN
1
Spring, leaf
25
WC4-0153-000CN
1
Microswitch (MS2 J327)
26
1
Arm, releasing
FB4-7420-000CN
1
Lever, releasing
28
FB4-7426-000CN
1
Shaft, arm
29
FF5-9121-000CN
1
Mount, releasing
30
Side HCI spring kit
1
Spring, compression
31
WG8-5362-000CN
1
IC, TLP1241, photo-interrupter (PS1 J309)
1
Spring, leaf
1
Microswitch (MS3 J328)
27
32
33
WC4-0153-000CN
34
Side HCI screw/ring kit
35
1
Screw, M3X8
1
LED cable (J301, 303)
*Several used
EN
Side HCI 661
Table 157. Internal components (3 of 3)
Key
Part number
36
RG5-4199-000CN
37
Quantity
Description
1
LED PCB assembly
1
Size sensor cable (J325, 328)
38
1
Switch cable (J321, 322, 326, 327)
39
1
Holder, LED
40
1
Plate, shield
41
XZ9-0459-000CN
2
Wing,nut,M8
42
XA9-1109-000CN
2
Wing,nut,M8
1
Arm, latch
43
501
Side HCI screw/ring kit
8
Screw, TP, M4X6
502
Side HCI screw/ring kit
3
Screw, mach., truss head, M2.3X10
503
Side HCI screw/ring kit
5
Ring, E
504
Side HCI screw/ring kit
6
Ring, E
505
Side HCI screw/ring kit
*
Screw, TP, M4X4
506
Side HCI screw/ring kit
1
Screw, tapping, truss head, M4X6
*Several used
662
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Lifter drive assembly
Figure 470.
Lifter drive assembly
Table 158. Lifter drive assembly
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
FG6-3919-000CN
1
Lifter drive assembly
1
1
Gear, 65T/17T (SPM1 J205)
2
1
Motor, stepping
3
1
Gear, 20T/63T
4
1
Gear, 32T/68T
5
Side HCI screw/ring kit
2
Screw, with washer, M3X8
501
Side HCI screw/ring kit
1
Ring, E
2
Ring, E
502
EN
Side HCI 663
Paper pick-up assembly
Figure 471.
664
Paper pick-up assembly (1 of 2)
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 159. Paper pick-up assembly (1 of 2)
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
FG6-3922-000CN
1
Paper pick-up assembly
1
1
Crossmember, lower guide
2
1
Guide, sensor
3
1
Lever, release
4
1
Lever, pick-up release
5
1
Link, retard
7
1
Shaft, release
8
1
Shaft, pick-up release
10
1
Shaft
16
FF5-9131-000CN
1
Link, pick-up
18
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
1
Gear, 19T
19
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
1
One-way gear, 71T
1
Collar, spring
1
Cam, roller
20
24
RB2-2470-000CN
25
RB2-2471-000CN
1
Arm, roller
33
RH7-1367-000CN
1
Motor, stepping (SPM3 J319)
34
RH7-1368-000CN
1
Motor, stepping (SPM2 J315)
35
RH7-5202-000CN
1
Solenoid (SL1 J320)
37
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
1
Gear, 36T
41
Side HCI bushing kit
8
Bushing
45
Side HCI spring kit
1
Spring, tension
50
Side HCI screw/ring kit
25
Screw, TP, M3X6
51
RB1-7813-000CN
1
Lever, registration sensor
52
Side HCI bushing kit
1
Bushing
53
Side HCI spring kit
1
Spring, tension
54
WG8-5362-000CN
1
IC, TLP1241, photo-interrupter (PS5 J314)
56
Side HCI spring kit
1
Spring, tension
501
Side HCI screw/ring kit
9
Ring, E
503
Side HCI screw/ring kit
4
Screw, with washer, M3X6
504
Side HCI screw/ring kit
9
Ring, E
506
Side HCI pin kit
3
Pin, dowel
508
Stand screw/ring kit
4
Washer, spring
EN
Side HCI 665
Figure 472.
666
Paper pick-up assembly (2 of 2)
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 160. Paper pick-up assembly (2 of 2)
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
6
FB4-7348-000CN
1
Arm, pick-up
9
FB4-7421-000CN
1
Flag, paper position
11
FB4-7347-000CN
1
Arm, rear
12
1
Shaft, rear
13
1
Joint
14
1
Joint
15
FF5-9129-000CN
1
Shaft, front
17
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
2
Gear, 16T
21
RB1-6588-000CN
1
Limiter, torque
2
Shaft, positioning
22
23
RB1-7818-000CN
4
Roller, feed
26
RB2-2475-000CN
1
Arm, paper sensor
1
Shaft, paper sensor
1
Roller, feed
27
28
RB2-2511-000CN
29
RB2-2512-000CN
1
Shaft, roller
30
RF5-1834-000CN
2
Roller, feed
31
RF5-1835-000CN
1
Roller, pick-up
32
RF5-2558-000CN
1
Shaft, gear
36
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
1
Gear, 18T
38
Side HCI bushing kit
2
Bushing
39
Side HCI bushing kit
2
Bushing
40
Side HCI bushing kit
1
Bushing
41
Side HCI bushing kit
8
Bushing
42
Side HCI spring kit
1
Spring, compression
43
Side HCI spring kit
2
Spring, compression
44
Side HCI spring kit
1
Spring, tension
46
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
1
Gear, 14T/42T/32T
47
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
1
Gear, 47T
48
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
1
Gear, 35T
49
WG8-5362-000CN
2
IC, TLP1241, photo-interrupter (PS3,4 J312, 313)
1
Cable, pick-up (J311-314, 317-320)
55
57
Side HCI spring kit
1
Spring, tension
501
Side HCI screw/ring kit
9
Ring, E
502
Side HCI pin kit
5
Pin, spring
503
Side HCI screw/ring kit
4
Screw, with washer, M3X6
505
Side HCI screw/ring kit
2
Ring, E
506
Side HCI pin kit
3
Pin, dowel
507
Side HCI pin kit
2
Pin, dowel
508
Stand screw/ring kit
4
Washer, spring
EN
Side HCI 667
Deck controller PCA
Figure 473.
Deck controller PCA
Table 161. Deck controller PCA
Key
Part number
Quantity
Description
FG2-9550-000CN
1
Deck controller PCB assembly
FU201
1
Fuse, 60V, 1A
FU202
1
Fuse, 60V, 1.25A
FU203
1
Fuse, 60V, 1A
668
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Connectors
Figure 474.
Connectors
Table 162. Connectors
Key
Quantity
To option controller
J201
Deck controller
J203
Deck controller
J203
1
Connector, 6P, female
J203
6
Socket contact, 18-24AWG
J204
J204
Deck controller
1
J205
J205
Connector, 5P, female
Deck controller
1
Connector, 3P, female
J206
Lifter motor (SPM1)
J206
Deck controller
J207
J207
EN
Description
J201
Deck controller
1
Connector, 5P, female
J208
Deck controller
J209
Deck controller
Side HCI 669
Table 162. Connectors (continued)
Key
Quantity
Description
J209
1
Connector, 6P
J210
J210
Deck controller
1
J211
J211
Deck controller
1
J212
J212
Connector, 9P, female
Deck controller
1
J301
Connector, 3P, female
LED
J301
1
Connector, 3P, female
J304
2
Connector, 3P
J304
1
Connector, 3P
J305
1
Connector, 4P, female
J305
1
Connector, 4P
J306
1
Connector, 2P, female
J306
1
Connector, 2P
J307
1
Connector, 9P, female
J307
1
Connector, 9P
1
Connector, 3P
J310
1
Connector, 3P
J311
1
Connector, 9P, female
J309
J309
Registration sensor (PS1)
J310
Jam sensor (PS2)
J312
J312
Paper exit sensor (PS3)
1
J313
J313
J314
Connector, 3P
Paper high sensor (PS4)
1
J314
Connector, 3P
Door open sensor (PS5)
1
J315
Connector, 3P
Pick-up motor 1 (SPM2)
J315
1
Connector, 5P, female
J315
1
Connector, 5P
J316
1
Connector, 5P, female
J317
1
Connector, 4P, female
J318
1
Connector, 2P, female
J319
J319
670
Connector, 2P, female
Deck controller
1
J213
J213
Connector, 4P, female
Pick-up motor 2 (SPM3)
1
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
Connector, 4P, female
EN
Table 162. Connectors (continued)
Key
Quantity
Description
J319
1
Connector, 4P
1
Connector, 2P, female
J320
J320
Pick-up solenoid (SL1)
J320
1
Connector, 2P
J321
1
Connector, 5P, female
J321
1
Connector, 5P
J322
1
Connector, 4P, female
J323
1
Connector, 4P, female
J323
1
Connector, 4P
J324
1
Connector, 2P, female
J324
1
Connector, 2P
J325
1
J326
J326
1
Connector, 2P, female
J326
2
Socket contact, 22-26AWG
J327
Lower limit switch (MS2)
J327
1
J327
2
J328
Connector, 2P, female
Socket contact, 22-26AWG
Size sensing switch (MS3)
J328
1
Connector, 2P, female
J328
2
Socket contact, 22-26AWG
1
Connector, 3P, female
J901
1
Connector, 6P, female
J901
6
Socket contact, 18-24AWG
J601
J601
Paper volume
J901
EN
Connector, 2P, female
Deck set switch (MS1)
Power supply
Side HCI 671
Numerical parts list
Table 163. Numerical parts list
Part number
Description
Figure
Key
ADF paper separation belt kit
—
—
Side HCI pin kit
—
—
C7837-67901
ADF screw/ring kit
—
—
C7836-67901
Copy module screw/ring kit
—
—
C7836-67902
Copy module belt kit
—
—
C7836-67903
Copy module gear/pulley kit
—
—
C7836-67904
Copy module spring kit
—
—
C7837-67902
ADF pin kit
—
—
C7837-67903
ADF belt kit
—
—
C7837-67904
ADF bushing kit
—
—
C7837-67905
ADF gear/pulley
—
—
C7837-67906
ADF spring kit
—
—
C7838-67901
Stand screw/ring kit
—
—
C7839-67901
Side HCI screw/ring kit
—
—
C7839-67902
Side HCI bushing kit
—
—
C7839-67903
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
—
—
C7839-67904
Side HCI spring kit
—
—
FA3-4509-000CN
Band, roller
447
3
FA3-9315-000CN
Plate, cover
422
20
FA5-4732-000CN
Foot, rubber
447
27
FA6-2513-000CN
Washer
450–453
56
FA6-9971-000CN
Pulley, idler
468
18
FA6-9988-020CN
Flange, lifter
468
16
FA9-2112-000CN
Bushing
468
17
FA9-2112-000CN
Bushing
469
13
FB2-4243-000CN
Cover, lamp filter
427
11
FB2-4244-000CN
Support exposure light
427
12
FB2-8465-000CN
Pulley, lifting
468
15
FB3-2141-000CN
Tray 3, copy
445
1
FB3-2411-000CN
Pin, slide
469
11A
FB3-2411-000CN
Pin, slide
429
4
FB3-3143-020CN
Tray 2, copy
445
2
FB3-5637-000CN
Roller, paper delivery
450–453
22
FB3-5638-000CN
Roller, front
450–453
13
672
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 163. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Figure
Key
FB3-5639-000CN
FB3-5640-000CN
Roller, rear
450–453
14
Arm, pick-up, front
450–453
17
FB3-5641-000CN
FB3-5642-000CN
Arm, pick-up, rear
450–453
18
Shaft, pressure, pick-up
450–453
19
FB3-5649-000CN
FB3-5660-000CN
Hook, solenoid
450–453
29
Lever 1, deflector
450–453
21
FB3-5666-000CN
Block, tray
448
19
FB3-5669-000CN
Spring, torsion
450–453
40
FB3-5702-000CN
Belt, separation
—
—
FB3-5757-000CN
Hinge, left
447
24
FB3-5758-000CN
Hinge, right
447
25
FB3-7692-000CN
Pin, pad, 2
429
5
FB3-9198-000CN
Handle, upper guide
469
1
FB4-0705-000CN
Plate, rail
424
6
FB4-0740-000CN
Wire, scanner, front
423
6
FB4-0741-000CN
Wire, scanner, rear
423
7
FB4-0745-000CN
Plate, home position sensor
423
21
FB4-0752-000CN
Sheet, back-up
424
4
FB4-0802-000CN
Pad, oil
429
33
FB4-0834-000CN
Air filter, 3
422
7B
FB4-0888-000CN
Air filter, 1
422
7C
FB4-0889-000CN
Air filter, 2
422
8A
FB4-2581-000CN
Key top, start
427
18
FB4-2582-000CN
Key top, stop
427
19
FB4-2583-000CN
Key top, reset
427
20
FB4-2584-000CN
Key top, number
427
21
FB4-2585-000CN
Key top, 1
427
22
FB4-2594-000CN
Key top, standby
427
26
FB4-2597-000CN
Key top, user guide
427
28
FB4-2675-000CN
Shaft, roller
420
6A
FB4-2686-000CN
Cover, mount plate
420
9
FB4-2689-000CN
Cap, front lower
420
3C
FB4-2689-000CN
Cap, front lower
420
4C
FB4-3142-000CN
Key top, function, 1
427
13
FB4-6703-000CN
Button, switch
427
29
FB4-6704-000CN
Sheet, grounding
427
8
FB4-6988-000CN
Joint
450–453
27
FB4-6990-000CN
Roller, delivery
454
3
EN
Numerical parts list 673
Table 163. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Figure
Key
FB4-6991-000CN
Roller
459
9
FB4-6994-000CN
Cover
450–453
37
FB4-7004-000CN
Roller
447
56
FB4-7018-000CN
Roller, registration
450–453
20
FB4-7021-000CN
Mount, tray
445
3
FB4-7022-000CN
Plate, tray
445
4
FB4-7024-000CN
Sheet, sensor lever
447
59
FB4-7347-000CN
Arm, rear
471–472
11
FB4-7348-000CN
Arm, pick-up
471–472
6
FB4-7371-000CN
Plate, wire hook
468
2
FB4-7372-000CN
Latch, front
469
2
FB4-7379-000CN
Shaft, lifter wire
468
19
FB4-7381-000CN
Flag, sensor
466
12
FB4-7387-000CN
Arm, paper sensor
467
7
FB4-7391-000CN
Spring, leaf
469
24
FB4-7413-000CN
Cover, window
466
6
FB4-7420-000CN
Lever, releasing
469
27
FB4-7421-000CN
Flag, paper position
471–472
9
FB4-7423-000CN
Plate, latch front
469
8
FB4-7424-000CN
Plate, latch rear
469
9
FB4-7425-000CN
Spring, torsion
466
7
FB4-7426-000CN
Shaft, arm
469
28
FB4-7438-000CN
Tape, door cover
466
8
FB4-7441-000CN
Panel, front
466
1
FB4-7444-000CN
Cover, deck, rear
466
14
FB4-7445-000CN
Cover, dc controller
466
15
FB4-7871-000CN
Key top, function, 3
427
14
FB5-5293-000CN
Cover, rear, tray
448
2
FB5-5294-000CN
Guide, slide
448
3
FB5-5295-000CN
Base guide
448
4
FB5-5296-000CN
Tray, auxiliary
448
5
FB5-5302-000CN
Cover, upper
446
2
FB5-5303-000CN
Cover
446
3
FB5-5309-000CN
Cover, front
446
1
FB5-5313-000CN
Cover, one-touch, 3
427
23
FB5-5315-000CN
Cover, front, lower
422
14
FB5-5316-000CN
Cap, front lower
422
21
FB5-5317-000CN
Cover, upper, front
422
3
674
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 163. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Figure
Key
FB5-5318-000CN
Cover, upper
422
2
FB5-5320-000CN
Panel, rear
422
11
FB5-5321-000CN
Cover, blanking, rear
422
10
FB5-5324-000CN
Cover, upper, small
422
5
FB5-5325-000CN
Cover, rubber
422
17
FB5-5328-000CN
Guide, paper right
445
5
FB5-5330-000CN
Cover, power supply
426
5
FB5-5334-000CN
Cover, main switch
422
6
FC1-1279-000CN
Lever 2, deflector
447
10
FC1-1294-020CN
Holder, switch
450–453
25
FC1-1300-000CN
Cam
450–453
30
FC1-1302-000CN
Arm, front
450–453
32
FC1-1303-000CN
Arm, rear
450–453
33
FC1-1311-000CN
Lever, recycle
448
10
FC1-1334-030CN
Roller
447
22
FC1-1336-000CN
Flange
447
23
FC1-3044-000CN
Foot, rubber, front
447
47
FC1-5049-000CN
Bracket
468
4
FC1-5051-000CN
Wire, front
468
9
FC1-5052-000CN
Wire, rear
468
8
FC1-5054-000CN
Hook, wire
468
3
FC1-5081-000CN
Flange, rear
468
21
FC1-6179-000CN
Clamp, guide
448
6
FC1-6184-000CN
Link, shutter
450–453
36
FC1-6220-000CN
Washer, pulley
455
7
FC1-7815-020CN
Feed belt
447
26
FC2-1827-000CN
Belt, separation
—
—
FC2-3246-000CN
Sheet
450–453
8A
FE9-0117-000CN
Grommet
447
44
FF2-5771-000CN
Guide, paper
450–453
43
FF2-5903-030CN
Motor, dc 6 V (M4 J102)
448
9
FF3-0434-000CN
Holder J, sensing
450–453
102
FF5-5188-000CN
Side plate, separation
460
13
FF5-5191-000CN
Roller, pick-up
450–453
50
FF5-5198-000CN
Plate, stop, woodruff
450–453
114
FF5-5201-020CN
Guide, front, separation
450–453
10
FF5-5207-000CN
Roller, separation
459
4
FF5-7814-000CN
Pillar, left
445
8
EN
Numerical parts list 675
Table 163. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Figure
Key
FF5-7815-000CN
Pillar, right
445
9
FF5-7816-000CN
Plate, slide, rear
447
29
FF5-8662-000CN
Glass, copyboard (inch/A size)
422
9
FF5-9121-000CN
Mount, releasing
469
29
FF5-9122-000CN
Latch, rear
469
10
FF5-9125-000CN
Side guide plate, front
468
5
FF5-9129-000CN
Shaft, front
471–472
15
FF5-9131-000CN
Link, pick-up
471–472
16
FF5-9140-000CN
Panel, upper
466
2
FF5-9141-000CN
Size plate
466
3
FF5-9142-000CN
Deck cover
466
9
FF5-9581-000CN
Roller, reverse
450–453
12
FF5-9582-000CN
Limit plate, separation
450–453
52
FF6-0276-000CN
Tray, document
448
1
FF6-0277-000CN
Guide, slide, rear
448
8
FF6-0284-000CN
Cover, upper, rear
422
4
FF6-0285-000CN
Cover, left
422
7
FF6-0286-000CN
Cover, right
422
8
FF6-0288-000CN
Holder, jump (inch/A size)
422
13
FF9-1694-020CN
Copyboard cover cushion assembly
428
5
FG2-3394-000CN
Registration sensor H assembly (LED3 J302)
450–453
61
FG2-5001-030CN
Indicator PCB assembly
448
20
FG2-7569-000CN
Rotary VR assembly (VR1 J218)
448
16
FG2-7570-000CN
ENT sensing LED PCB assembly (S3 J212)
450–453
63
FG2-9439-000CN
Light sensor PCB assembly
429
31
FG2-9443-060CN
Reader controller PCB (USA)
437
1
FG2-9448-080CN
R-CON. extension DIMM assembly (USA)
437
1A
FG2-9463-000CN
Noise filter PCB assembly (100/127 V)
433
—
FG2-9539-000CN
Cable, interface R-P (J1612, 2101)
430
7
FG2-9541-000CN
Noise filter PCB assembly (220/240 V)
433
—
FG2-9550-000CN
Deck controller PCB assembly
473
—
FG2-9554-000CN
EMP sensing PCB assembly (S1 J203)
450–453
54
FG2-9558-000CN
Interface cable (J1, 2, 201)
447
30
FG2-9925-000CN
Cover switch assembly (MS2 J3)
450–453
62
FG2-9927-000CN
RDF controller PCB assembly
461
—
FG3-0215-000CN
Reader controller PCB (Europe)
437
1
FG3-0220-000CN
R-CON. extension DIMM assembly (Europe)
437
1A
FG3-0315-000CN
Analog IP PCB assembly
438
—
676
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 163. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Figure
Key
FG5-7273-000CN
Upper paper guide assembly
457
—
FG5-9837-000CN
CCD unit
423
15
FG5-9838-000CN
Mirror assembly 1
429
—
FG5-9839-000CN
Mirror assembly 2
423
16
FG5-9842-000CN
Motor driver PCB assembly
439
—
FG5-9845-000CN
Dc power supply PCB assembly (100/127 V)
431
—
FG5-9847-000CN
APC power supply PCB assembly (100/127 V)
432
—
FG5-9849-000CN
Inverter PCB assembly
440
—
FG5-9856-000CN
Connector mounting assembly (J1651)
424
25
FG5-9858-000CN
Dc power supply PCB assembly (220/240 V)
431
—
FG5-9861-000CN
APC power supply PCB assembly (220/240 V)
432
—
FG6-0364-000CN
Control panel CPU PCB assembly2
435
—
FG6-0365-000CN
LCD panel unit
427
7
FG6-0366-000CN
Control panel PCB assembly1
434
—
FG6-0394-000CN
Lock pin assembly
420
7
FG6-2173-000CN
Paper feed motor assembly
455
—
FG6-2176-000CN
Separation roller assembly
459
—
FG6-3913-000CN
Caster, unit
469
17
FG6-3919-000CN
Lifter drive assembly
470
—
FG6-3921-000CN
Side guide plate, rear
468
7
FG6-4442-000CN
Paper separation assembly
460
—
FG6-5836-000CN
Upper cover assembly
449
—
FG6-5837-000CN
Lower paper guide assembly
458
—
FG6-5838-000CN
Right paper delivery assembly
454
—
FG9-3515-000CN
Control inverter PCB assembly (See note 3)
436
—
FH2-5762-000CN
Power cord (220/240 V P2)
467
19
FH2-6452-000CN
Film, fluorescent (J2015, 2037)
424
7
FH2-6464-000CN
Cable, interface
467
20
FH2-6480-000CN
Connector, female (J2022)
430
20
FH2-6719-000CN
Power cord (100/127 V P2)
467
16
FH3-2509-000CN
Switching regulator PCB unit
467
21
FH6-0734-000CN
Function switch PCB unit
427
31
FH6-1266-000CN
Motor, dc 23 V (M1 J12)
450–453
116
FH6-1461-000CN
Motor, stepping (PM1 J302)
423
22
FH6-1463-000CN
Fan (FM4 J2031)
430
8
FH6-1603-000CN
Motor, dc 24 V (M3 J7)
456
3
FH6-3844-000CN
ECO-O board PCB unit
430
9
FH7-3336-000CN
Lamp, fluorescent (LA1)
429
27
EN
Numerical parts list 677
Table 163. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Figure
Key
FH7-4559-000CN
Heater, fluorescent lamp (H1 THM J2039)
429
28
FH7-5363-000CN
Brake, electromagnetic (BK1 J6)
456
16
FH7-5403-000CN
Clutch, electromagnetic (CL1 J13)
456
17
FH7-5653-000CN
Solenoid, dc 24 V (SL1 J217)
450–453
64
FH7-5709-000CN
Solenoid, dc 24 V (SL2, J216)
450–453
68
FH7-5843-000CN
Solenoid, dc 24 V (SL3 J204)
447
31
FH7-6139-000CN
Switch, key (KEY SW J2014)
425
12
FH7-6208-000CN
Relay, AC 250 V (RL1)
426
6
FH7-6254-000CN
Switch, main (MSW1)
426
7
FH7-7236-000CN
Photo-interrupter, GP1A34A1 (S10 J211)
456
18
FH7-7236-000CN
Photo-interrupter, GP1A34A1 (S9 J210)
455
5
FH7-7306-000CN
Photo-interrupter, S7G37 (PS101 J2013)
423
20
FH7-7312-000CN
Photo-interrupter (PS102 J2007)
425
10
FH7-7326-000CN
IC, TLP1225, photo-interrupter (S11 J215)
450–453
105
FH7-7326-000CN
IC, TLP1225, photo-interrupter (S13 J308)
454
36
FH7-7386-000CN
Sensor, document size (inch size PS105, 106
J2011, 2012)
424
19
FH7-7388-000CN
Sensor, document size (inch size PS104 J2010)
424
16
FH7-7423-000CN
Sensor, document size (A size PS106 J2011)
424
19
FH7-7424-000CN
Sensor, document size (A size PS103 J2009)
424
16
FH7-7457-000CN
Breaker, circuit (CB1), 100/127 V
426
8
FH7-7458-000CN
Breaker, circuit (CB1), 220/240V
426
—
FM6-2145-000CN
Turn roller assembly
447
2
FS6-8499-000CN
Plate, length index (inch/A size)
422
9B
FS6-8920-000CN
Plate, size index (inch/A size)
422
13A
RB1-6588-000CN
Limiter, torque
471–472
21
RB1-6872-000CN
Sheet, separation, leather
468
1
RB1-7813-000CN
Lever, registration sensor
471–472
51
RB1-7818-000CN
Roller, feed
471–472
23
RB2-2470-000CN
Cam, roller
471–472
24
RB2-2471-000CN
Arm, roller
471–472
25
RB2-2475-000CN
Arm, paper sensor
471–472
26
RB2-2511-000CN
Roller, feed
471–472
28
RB2-2512-000CN
Shaft, roller
471–472
29
RF5-1834-000CN
Roller, feed
471–472
30
RF5-1835-000CN
Roller, pick-up
471–472
31
RF5-2558-000CN
Shaft, gear
471–472
32
RG5-2166-000CN
Paper sensing assembly
467
14
678
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 163. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Figure
Key
RG5-4199-000CN
LED PCB assembly
469
36
RH7-1367-000CN
Motor, stepping (SPM3 J319)
471–472
33
RH7-1368-000CN
Motor, stepping (SPM2 J315)
471–472
34
RH7-5202-000CN
Solenoid (SL1 J320)
471–472
35
WC4-0153-000CN
Microswitch (MS1 J326)
469
22
WC4-0153-000CN
Microswitch (MS2 J327)
469
25
WC4-0153-000CN
Microswitch (MS3 J328)
469
33
WC4-5030-000CN
Microswitch (MS1)
447
41
WG8-5206-000CN
Photo-interrupter, SG206 (S4,7 J214, 304)
450–453
104
WG8-5362-000CN
IC, TLP1241, photo-interrupter (PS1 J309)
469
31
WG8-5362-000CN
IC, TLP1241, photo-interrupter (PS2 J310)
466
10
WG8-5362-000CN
IC, TLP1241, photo-interrupter (PS3,4 J312, 313)
471–472
49
WG8-5362-000CN
IC, TLP1241, photo-interrupter (PS5 J314)
471–472
54
WG8-5362-000CN
IC, TLP1241, photo-interrupter (S12 J306)
454
19
WG8-5362-000CN
IC, TLP1241, photo-interrupter (S5 J206)
450–453
59
WK1-5019-000CN
Battery,lithium,CR2477-HE4H,3V
437
BAT160
1
WT2-5526-000CN
Hexagon bolt, M4
467
22
XA9-1109-000CN
Wing,nut,M8
469
42
XB7-2100-409CN
Nut, hex, M4
423
507
XG9-0237-000CN
Bearing, ball
447
45
XG9-0304-000CN
Bearing
420
6B
XG9-0402-000CN
Roller
467
11
XH9-0105-000CN
Foot, rubber
425
18
XZ9-0367-000CN
Caster
420
5B
XZ9-0401-000CN
Caster
469
16
XZ9-0444-000CN
Adjuster
425
15
XZ9-0446-000CN
Caster
420
6C
XZ9-0457-000CN
Caster
420
6D
XZ9-0459-000CN
Wing,nut,M8
469
41
XZ9-0491-000CN
Adjuster
420
3D
XZ9-0491-000CN
Adjuster
420
4D
XZ9-0491-000CN
Adjuster
420
5C
EN
Numerical parts list 679
Alphabetical parts list
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list
Description
Part number
Figure
Key
ADF belt kit
C7837-67903
—
—
ADF bushing kit
C7837-67904
—
—
ADF gear/pulley kit
C7837-67905
—
—
ADF paper separation belt kit
—
—
C7837-67902
—
—
ADF screw/ring kit
C7837-67901
—
—
ADF spring kit
C7837-67906
—
—
Adjuster
XZ9-0444-000CN
425
15
Adjuster
XZ9-0491-000CN
420
3D
Adjuster
XZ9-0491-000CN
420
4D
Adjuster
XZ9-0491-000CN
420
5C
Air filter, 1
FB4-0888-000CN
422
7C
Air filter, 2
FB4-0889-000CN
422
8A
ADF pin kit
Air filter, 3
FB4-0834-000CN
422
7B
Analog IP PCB assembly
FG3-0315-000CN
438
—
APC power supply PCB assembly (100/127 V)
FG5-9847-000CN
432
—
APC power supply PCB assembly (220/240 V)
FG5-9861-000CN
432
—
Arm
469
11
Arm, bracket, center
460
11
Arm, bracket, side
460
12
Arm, flapper
457
4
Arm, front
450–453
32
Arm, guide front
FC1-1302-000CN
459
10
Arm, guide rear
459
3
Arm, handle
469
7
Arm, latch
Arm, paper sensor
FB4-7387-000CN
469
43
467
7
Arm, paper sensor
RB2-2475-000CN
471–472
26
Arm, pick-up
FB4-7348-000CN
471–472
6
Arm, pick-up, front
FB3-5640-000CN
450–453
17
Arm, pick-up, rear
FB3-5641-000CN
450–453
18
Arm, rear
FB4-7347-000CN
471–472
11
Arm, rear
FC1-1303-000CN
450–453
33
469
26
Arm, releasing
680
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Arm, roller
RB2-2471-000CN
Arm, shutter
Figure
Key
471–472
25
450–453
4
Band, roller
FA3-4509-000CN
447
3
Base guide
FB5-5295-000CN
448
4
Battery,lithium,CR2477-HE4H,3V
WK1-5019-000CN
437
BAT1601
Bearing
XG9-0304-000CN
420
6B
423
14
Bearing, ball
XG9-0237-000CN
447
45
Belt, separation
ADF belt kit
460
1
Belt, separation
ADF belt kit
460
3
Belt, separation
FB3-5702-000CN
—
—
Belt, separation
FC2-1827-000CN
—
—
Belt, timing, 100T
ADF belt kit
456
14
Belt, timing, 132T
ADF belt kit
460
21
Belt, timing, 140T
ADF belt kit
450–453
107
Belt, timing, 170T
ADF belt kit
456
15
Belt, timing, 44T
ADF belt kit
450–453
111
Belt, timing, 53T
ADF belt kit
454
27
Belt, timing, 80T
ADF belt kit
450–453
46
Belt, timing, 92T
ADF belt kit
455
6
Block, tray
FB3-5666-000CN
448
19
Bolt, M5X20
ADF screw/ring kit
445
10
Bracket
FC1-5049-000CN
468
4
447
39
Bearing, ball
Bracket, connector
Bracket, control card
425
8
Bracket, control panel
427
1
Bracket, fan
425
9
Bracket, separation, center
460
10
Bracket, separation, side
460
9
FH7-5363-000CN
456
16
Breaker, circuit (CB1), 100/127 V
FH7-7457-000CN
426
8
Breaker, circuit (CB1), 220/240V
FH7-7458-000CN
426
—
Bushing
454
14
Bushing
454
15
Bushing
447
30A
Bushing
450–453
1
Brake, electromagnetic (BK1 J6)
Bushing
ADF bushing kit
456
19
Bushing
ADF bushing kit
457
8
EN
Alphabetical parts list 681
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Key
Bushing
ADF bushing kit
460
14
Bushing
ADF bushing kit
450–453
66
Bushing
ADF bushing kit
450–453
67
Bushing
ADF bushing kit
450–453
69
Bushing
ADF bushing kit
450–453
79
Bushing
ADF bushing kit
450–453
80
Bushing
ADF bushing kit
450–453
109
Bushing
ADF bushing kit
450–453
121
Bushing
ADF bushing kit
450–453
122
Bushing
FA9-2112-000CN
468
17
Bushing
FA9-2112-000CN
469
13
Bushing
Side HCI bushing kit
471–472
38
Bushing
Side HCI bushing kit
471–472
39
Bushing
Side HCI bushing kit
471–472
40
Bushing
Side HCI bushing kit
471–472
41
Bushing
Side HCI bushing kit
471–472
52
447
2A
427
29
Cable 1, CCD (J507, 2016)
430
18
Cable 2, CCD (J503, 2017)
430
17
Bushing, idler roller
Button, switch
FB4-6703-000CN
Cable, AC (J2, 1801)
430
21
Cable, connector mounting (J1606, 1652, 1653)
424
25A
Cable, control, 1 (J902, 921)
434
2
Cable, control, 2 (J903, 922)
434
3
Cable, control, MSW (J904, 931)
434
5
Cable, control, PL (J909, 951)
434
6
Cable, control, VR (J905, 941)
434
4
Cable, delivery (J14, 219, 220, 221)
454
29
Cable, exposure control (J2001, 2038)
429
32
Cable, fluorescent (J1610, 2018, 2037)
424
11
Cable, fluorescent lamp (J2015, 2038, 2039)
429
26
Cable, inlet
426
17
Cable, interface
FH2-6464-000CN
467
20
Cable, interface R-P (J1612, 2101)
FG2-9539-000CN
430
7
Cable, inverter lamp (J1003, 2018)
430
16
Cable, motor (J221, 307)
454
12
Cable, noise filter, 1
433
1
Cable, noise filter, 2 (J2036)
433
2
682
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Key
Cable, outlet
426
13
Cable, pick-up (J311-314, 317-320)
471–472
55
Cable, relay breaker (J1001)
426
1
Cable, relay dc (J2035)
426
14
Cable, sensor (J219, 306, 308)
454
21
Cable, separation sensing (J208, 304)
450–453
58
Cam
FC1-1300-000CN
450–453
30
Cam, roller
RB2-2470-000CN
471–472
24
Cap
420
3A
Cap
420
4A
Cap, front lower
FB4-2689-000CN
420
3C
Cap, front lower
FB4-2689-000CN
420
4C
Cap, front lower
FB5-5316-000CN
422
21
420
3B
Cap, front upper
420
4B
Cap, rubber
450–453
65
Cap, front upper
Cap, sensor
429
22
Caster
XZ9-0367-000CN
420
5B
Caster
XZ9-0401-000CN
469
16
Caster
XZ9-0446-000CN
420
6C
Caster
XZ9-0457-000CN
420
6D
Caster, unit
FG6-3913-000CN
469
17
447
4
FG5-9837-000CN
423
15
Catch, magnet
CCD unit
Choke coil
431
L 1301
Clamp, cable
454
20
Clamp, cable
454
33
Clamp, cable
448
17
Clamp, cable
424
10
Clamp, cable
420
10
Clamp, cable
425
14
Clamp, cable
426
12
Clamp, cable
427
4
Clamp, cable
427
5
Clamp, cable
429
24
Clamp, cable
430
13
Clamp, cable
450–453
92
Clamp, ferrite
430
16A
EN
Alphabetical parts list 683
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Key
Clamp, guide
FC1-6179-000CN
448
6
Clip, cable
447
40
Clip, cable
447
48
Clip, cable
447
49
Clip, cable
424
22
Clip, cable
424
26
Clip, cable
425
17
Clip, cable
426
4
Clip, cable
426
9
Clip, cable
426
10
Clip, cable
426
11
Clip, cable
427
3
Clip, cable
427
6
Clip, cable
430
10
Clip, cable
430
12
Clip, cable
430
15
Clip, cable
430
27
Clip, cable
450–453
35
Clip, cable
450–453
91
Clip, cable
450–453
101
Clip, cable (100/127 V)
430
11
Clip, cable (220/240 V)
430
11
Clip, cable (A size)
424
20
Clip, cable (inch size)
424
20
Clutch, electromagnetic (CL1 J13)
456
17
Coil (100/127 V)
FH7-5403-000CN
433
L 1101
Coil (220/240 V)
433
L 2501
Coil, 1MH, 10A (100/127 V)
431
L 1202
Coil, 1MH, 10A (100/127 V)
431
L 1203
Coil, 8MH, 4A (220/240 V)
431
L 1202
Coil, 8MH, 4A (220/240 V)
431
L 1203
Coil, choke
432
L 1801
Collar 2, retaining
450–453
115
Collar, retaining
460
2
471–472
20
424
25
Connector, 2P (J2014)
425
3
Connector, 2P (J216, 217)
450–453
120
Collar, spring
Connector mounting assembly (J1651)
684
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
FG5-9856-000CN
EN
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Key
Connector, 2P (J220)
454
31
Connector, 3P (J2009, 2010)
424
17
Connector, 3P (J2011, 2012)
424
28
Connector, 3P (J218)
448
12A
Connector, 3P (J221)
454
32
Connector, 4P (J203)
450–453
45
Connector, 6P (J219)
454
11
430
20
Connector, snap tight (J2016)
430
18A
Connector, snap tight (J2017)
430
17A
Connector, female (J2022)
FH2-6480-000CN
Control inverter PCB assembly (See note 3)
FG9-3515-000CN
436
—
424
12
FG6-0364-000CN
435
—
Control panel PCB assembly
FG6-0366-000CN
434
—
Copy module belt kit
C7836-67902
—
—
Copy module gear/pulley kit
C7836-67903
—
—
Copy module screw/ring kit
C7836-67901
—
—
Copy module spring kit
C7836-67904
—
—
Copyboard cover cushion assembly
FF9-1694-020CN
428
5
Core, ferrite
424
12A
Core, ferrite
424
12B
Core, ferrite
430
26
Core, ferrite, SFC-10
430
25
Coupler, panel limit
468
7B
Coupler, standard
468
5B
Control panel connector cable (J901, 955, 1607,
1608)
Control panel CPU PCB assembly2
1
Cover
FB4-6994-000CN
450–453
37
Cover
FB5-5303-000CN
446
3
Cover switch assembly (MS2 J3)
FG2-9925-000CN
450–453
62
Cover, blanking, rear
FB5-5321-000CN
422
10
Cover, cable guide
429
3
Cover, connector
422
15
Cover, copyboard, front
428
3
Cover, copyboard, rear
428
4
Cover, dc controller
FB4-7445-000CN
466
15
Cover, deck, rear
FB4-7444-000CN
466
14
Cover, front
FB5-5309-000CN
446
1
Cover, front, lower
FB5-5315-000CN
422
14
EN
Alphabetical parts list 685
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Figure
Key
Cover, function
427
2
Cover, heater
429
29
Cover, lamp filter
Part number
FB2-4243-000CN
Cover, led panel, left
Cover, led panel, right
427
11
427
16
427
15
FF6-0285-000CN
422
7
425
7
FB5-5334-000CN
422
6
Cover, mount plate
FB4-2686-000CN
420
9
Cover, one-touch, 3
FB5-5313-000CN
427
23
Cover, left
Cover, lower
Cover, main switch
Cover, power supply
FB5-5330-000CN
426
5
Cover, rear, tray
FB5-5293-000CN
448
2
Cover, right
FF6-0286-000CN
422
8
430
2
Cover, ROM
Cover, rubber
422
17
Cover, sensor
FB5-5325-000CN
449
3
Cover, sensor
466
13
Cover, sensor
450–453
41
Cover, sensor
450–453
54C
Cover, stamp
454
9
449
7
446
2
Cover, upper
Cover, upper
FB5-5302-000CN
Cover, upper
FB5-5318-000CN
422
2
Cover, upper, front
FB5-5317-000CN
422
3
Cover, upper, rear
FF6-0284-000CN
422
4
Cover, upper, small
FB5-5324-000CN
422
5
Cover, window
FB4-7413-000CN
466
6
Crossmember, center
447
15
Crossmember, guide, upper
450–453
9
Crossmember, left
447
14
Crossmember, lower guide
471–472
1
Crossmember, right
447
16
Current transformer
440
T 1002
Current transformer (220/240 V)
431
CT1301
Cushion
450–453
15A
Damper
423
3
Damper
456
1A
Damper
459
3A
686
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Key
Damper
459
10A
Damper, 1
429
18
429
19
431
—
Damper, 2
Dc power supply PCB assembly (100/127 V)
FG5-9845-000CN
Dc power supply PCB assembly (220/240 V)
FG5-9858-000CN
431
—
Deck controller PCB assembly
FG2-9550-000CN
473
—
Deck cover
FF5-9142-000CN
466
9
Diode, 1SS81
450–453
63A
Disk, clock
456
7
Disk, clock
450–453
38
ECO-O board PCB unit
FH6-3844-000CN
Eliminator, static charge
Eliminator, static charge, F
430
9
449
7A
454
26
EMP sensing PCB assembly (S1 J203)
FG2-9554-000CN
450–453
54
ENT sensing LED PCB assembly (S3 J212)
FG2-7570-000CN
450–453
63
429
17
Exposure filter
Fan (FM4 J2031)
FH6-1463-000CN
430
8
Feed belt
FC1-7815-020CN
447
26
Ferrite clamp
430
24
Ferrite core
424
21
Ferrite core
424
25B
Ferrite core
426
15
Ferrite core
430
17B
Ferrite core
430
30
Film, fluorescent (J2015, 2037)
FH2-6452-000CN
Flag, HP sensor
Flag, paper position
FB4-7421-000CN
424
7
429
6
471–472
9
454
5
449
5
466
12
Flange
454
28
Flange
460
20
Flag, sensor
Flag, sensor
Flag, sensor
Flange
FB4-7381-000CN
FC1-1336-000CN
Flange C
447
23
450–453
112
Flange D
450–453
113
Flange, idler
468
12
Flange, lifter
FA6-9988-020CN
468
16
Flange, rear
FC1-5081-000CN
468
21
EN
Alphabetical parts list 687
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
457
2
Flat belt, timing, 100T
Copy module belt kit
423
13
Flat belt, timing, 89T
ADF belt kit
456
13
Foot, rubber
FA5-4732-000CN
447
27
Flapper, reverse
Key
Foot, rubber
XH9-0105-000CN
425
18
Foot, rubber, front
FC1-3044-000CN
447
47
Function switch PCB unit
FH6-0734-000CN
Fuse, 1A, 125V
427
31
436
F1
Fuse, 250 V, 5 A (220/240 V)
433
FU2501
Fuse, 250V, 5A (220/240 V)
431
FU1201
Fuse, 60V, 1.25A
473
FU202
Fuse, 60V, 10A
432
FU1801
Fuse, 60V, 1A
431
FU1501
Fuse, 60V, 1A
431
FU1505
Fuse, 60V, 1A
431
FU1514
Fuse, 60V, 1A
432
FU1802
Fuse, 60V, 1A
437
F 1603
Fuse, 60V, 1A
440
FU1002
Fuse, 60V, 1A
473
FU201
Fuse, 60V, 1A
473
FU203
Fuse, 60V, 200MA
437
F 1604
Fuse, 60V, 250MA
431
FU1516
Fuse, 60V, 250MA
431
FU1517
Fuse, 60V, 2A
431
FU1506
Fuse, 60V, 2A
431
FU1512
Fuse, 60V, 2A
431
FU1518
Fuse, 60V, 2A
437
F 1601
Fuse, 60V, 400MA
431
FU1502
Fuse, 60V, 400MA
431
FU1503
Fuse, 60V, 400MA
431
FU1504
Fuse, 60V, 400MA
431
FU1519
Fuse, 60V, 4A
431
FU1507
Fuse, 60V, 4A
440
FU1001
Fuse, 60V, 500MA
431
FU1515
Fuse, 60V, 5A
431
FU1511
Fuse, 60V, 5A
431
FU1513
Fuse, 60V, 630MA
431
FU1509
Fuse, 60V, 7A
431
FU1508
688
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Key
Fuse, 8 A, 125 V (100/127 V)
433
FU1101
Fuse, AC125V, 10A (100/127 V)
431
FU1201
Gear, 14T/42T/32T
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
471–472
46
Gear, 15T
ADF gear/pulley kit
450–453
94
Gear, 16T
ADF gear/pulley kit
448
7
Gear, 16T
ADF gear/pulley kit
450–453
97
Gear, 16T
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
471–472
17
Gear, 16T/pulley, 15T
ADF gear/pulley kit
460
16
Gear, 16T/pulley, 20T
ADF gear/pulley kit
450–453
95
Gear, 18T
ADF gear/pulley kit
450–453
77
Gear, 18T
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
471–472
36
Gear, 19T
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
471–472
18
Gear, 20T
ADF gear/pulley kit
460
15
Gear, 20T
ADF gear/pulley kit
450–453
82
Gear, 20T/63T
470
3
Gear, 21T
454
17
Gear, 21T/pulley, 42T
454
18
Gear, 22T/pulley, 28T
ADF gear/pulley kit
450–453
81
Gear, 25T
ADF gear/pulley kit
459
8
Gear, 28T
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
468
22
Gear, 28T/41T
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
467
12
Gear, 32T
ADF gear/pulley kit
448
15
470
4
471–472
48
Gear, 32T/68T
Gear, 35T
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
Gear, 36T
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
471–472
37
Gear, 40T/pulley, 16T
ADF screw/ring kit
456
11
Gear, 47T
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
471–472
47
Gear, 58T
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
467
13
Gear, 65T/17T (SPM1 J205)
470
1
Gear, 6T
459
2
Gear, 8T
459
1
Glass, copyboard (A size)
422
9
Glass, copyboard (inch/A size)
FF5-8662-000CN
422
9
Grommet
FE9-0117-000CN
447
44
Guide A, inner
450–453
6
Guide B, inner
450–453
51
447
43
450–453
117
Guide, belt
Guide, cable
EN
ADF belt kit
Alphabetical parts list 689
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Key
Guide, cord
429
16
Guide, front registration
457
6
450–453
10
466
2A
Guide, front, separation
FF5-5201-020CN
Guide, LED
Guide, lower, delivery
454
2
Guide, paper
FF2-5771-000CN
450–453
43
Guide, paper right
FB5-5328-000CN
445
5
458
1
Guide, paper, lower
Guide, sensor
471–472
2
Guide, slide
FB5-5294-000CN
448
3
Guide, slide, rear
FF6-0277-000CN
448
8
457
1
454
1
469
1
Guide, upper
Guide, upper, delivery
Handle, upper guide
FB3-9198-000CN
Heater, fluorescent lamp (H1 THM J2039)
FH7-4559-000CN
429
28
Hexagon bolt, M4
WT2-5526-000CN
467
22
428
2
447
24
Hinge, copyboard cover
Hinge, left
FB3-5757-000CN
Hinge, right
FB3-5758-000CN
447
25
Holder J, sensing
FF3-0434-000CN
450–453
102
Holder, cable, front
429
12
Holder, cable, front
468
10
Holder, cable, rear
429
13
Holder, cable, rear
468
11
Holder, jump (A size)
422
13
422
13
Holder, LED
434
1
Holder, LED
469
39
Holder, jump (inch/A size)
FF6-0288-000CN
Holder, sensor registration
450–453
39
Holder, solenoid
447
11
Holder, switch
FC1-1294-020CN
450–453
25
Hook, solenoid
FB3-5649-000CN
450–453
29
Hook, wire
FC1-5054-000CN
468
3
437
IC1608
IC, FH4-5851, hybrid
IC, HD6432653BA12F, CPU
437
IC1604
IC, HG62G027S61F, gate array
437
IC1602
IC, HG72C006FD, C-MOS
438
Q502
IC, HX-3019, hybrid
431
Q 1301
690
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Key
IC, JSC05KR517AJ40, gate array
438
Q512
IC, KZ3S113831CFP, C-MOS
438
Q509
IC, KZ3S113E11CFP, C-MOS
438
Q501
IC, KZ3S157211CFP, C-MOS
438
Q514
IC, KZ3S157311CFP, C-MOS
438
Q508
IC, LF9008, ASIC
438
Q513
IC, M27C1001-80XF1, EP-ROM (Q2)
461
1
IC, M38881M2-010GP, IPC
437
IC1605
IC, MB89P637, M-PRO (Q919)
IC, TLP1225, photo-interrupter (S11 J215)
FH7-7326-000CN
435
1
450–453
105
IC, TLP1225, photo-interrupter (S13 J308)
FH7-7326-000CN
454
36
IC, TLP1241, photo-interrupter (PS1 J309)
WG8-5362-000CN
469
31
IC, TLP1241, photo-interrupter (PS2 J310)
WG8-5362-000CN
466
10
IC, TLP1241, photo-interrupter (PS3,4 J312,
313)
WG8-5362-000CN
471–472
49
IC, TLP1241, photo-interrupter (PS5 J314)
WG8-5362-000CN
471–472
54
IC, TLP1241, photo-interrupter (S12 J306)
WG8-5362-000CN
454
19
IC, TLP1241, photo-interrupter (S5 J206)
WG8-5362-000CN
450–453
59
IC, TLP1242, photo-interrupter (S6 J303)
449
12
IC, UPD65625GB-Y04-9EU
437
IC1609
437
IC1610
448
20
Inductor
440
L 1001
Inductor
440
L 1002
IC, UPD65636GB-Y18-9EU,G. array
Indicator PCB assembly
FG2-5001-030CN
Interface cable (J1, 2, 201)
FG2-9558-000CN
447
30
Inverter PCB assembly
FG5-9849-000CN
440
—
Joint
471–472
13
Joint
471–472
14
Joint
FB4-6988-000CN
450–453
27
Key top, 1
FB4-2585-000CN
427
22
Key top, function, 1
FB4-3142-000CN
427
13
Key top, function, 3
FB4-7871-000CN
427
14
Key top, number
FB4-2584-000CN
427
21
Key top, reset
FB4-2583-000CN
427
20
Key top, standby
FB4-2594-000CN
427
26
Key top, start
FB4-2581-000CN
427
18
Key top, stop
FB4-2582-000CN
427
19
Key top, user guide
FB4-2597-000CN
427
28
EN
Alphabetical parts list 691
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Key
Label, “Copy load”
430
19
Label, “Legal Limitations” (English)
422
19
Label, “Legal Limitations” (France)
422
19
Label, “Legal Limitations” (Germany)
422
19
Label, “Legal Limitations” (Italy)
422
19
Label, “Legal Limitations” (Other)
422
19
Label, “Legal Limitations” (Spain)
422
19
Label, “Legal Limitations” (USA)
422
19
Label, “Switch off caution”
426
18
Label, “Warning”
423
25
Label, “Warning, High Voltage”
427
32
Label, adjusting
467
1
Label, connecting
426
16
Label, paper size
448
1A
Label, paper supply
467
5
Label, warning
448
8B
Lamp, fluorescent (LA1)
FH7-3336-000CN
429
27
Latch, front
FB4-7372-000CN
469
2
Latch, rear
FF5-9122-000CN
469
10
LCD panel unit
FG6-0365-000CN
427
7
469
35
RG5-4199-000CN
469
36
LED unit
434
LED907
LED unit
434
LED908
LED unit
434
LED909
LED unit
434
LED910
LED cable (J301, 303)
LED PCB assembly
LED, TLN119B
450–453
54A
Left frame assembly
4201
4
422
16
450–453
21
Left glass retainer assembly
Lever 1, deflector
FB3-5660-000CN
Lever 2, deflector
FC1-1279-000CN
Lever, delivery sensor
447
10
454
4
Lever, pick-up release
471–472
4
Lever, plate
469
4
Lever, recycle
FC1-1311-000CN
448
10
Lever, registration sensor
RB1-7813-000CN
471–472
51
471–472
3
FB4-7420-000CN
469
27
Lever, release
Lever, releasing
692
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Key
Lifter drive assembly
FG6-3919-000CN
470
—
Light sensor PCB assembly
FG2-9439-000CN
429
31
Limit plate, separation
FF5-9582-000CN
450–453
52
Limiter, torque
RB1-6588-000CN
471–472
21
Link, latch
469
5
FF5-9131-000CN
471–472
16
471–472
5
Link, shutter
FC1-6184-000CN
450–453
36
Lock pin assembly
FG6-0394-000CN
420
7
420
5
Link, pick-up
Link, retard
Lower crossmember assembly
Lower paper guide assembly
FG6-5837-000CN
Lower plate assembly
458
—
420
6
Microswitch (MS1 J326)
WC4-0153-000CN
469
22
Microswitch (MS1)
WC4-5030-000CN
447
41
Microswitch (MS2 J327)
WC4-0153-000CN
469
25
450–453
62A
469
33
429
25
Microswitch (MS2)
Microswitch (MS3 J328)
WC4-0153-000CN
Mirror 1
Mirror assembly 1
FG5-9838-000CN
429
—
Mirror assembly 2
FG5-9839-000CN
423
16
Motor driver PCB assembly
FG5-9842-000CN
Motor driver power cable (J301, 2002)
Motor driver signal cable (J303, 1605)
Motor, dc 23 V (M1 J12)
FH6-1266-000CN
Motor, dc 24 V (M2 J11)
439
—
424
13
424
14
450–453
116
455
2
FH6-1603-000CN
456
3
454
35
FF2-5903-030CN
448
9
470
2
Motor, stepping (PM1 J302)
FH6-1461-000CN
423
22
Motor, stepping (SPM2 J315)
RH7-1368-000CN
471–472
34
Motor, stepping (SPM3 J319)
RH7-1367-000CN
471–472
33
Mount, brake, 1
456
8
Mount, brake, 2
456
20
Mount, cord
430
4
Mount, key switch
425
13
Mount, motor
455
1
Mount, motor
456
1
Motor, dc 24 V (M3 J7)
Motor, dc 24 V (M5 J307)
Motor, dc 6 V (M4 J102)
Motor, stepping
EN
Alphabetical parts list 693
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Key
Mount, pulley, front
423
18
Mount, pulley, rear
423
19
Mount, recycle motor
448
11
469
29
Mount, roller
447
20
Mount, sensing
425
11
Mount, sensor
454
6
Mount, sensor
429
14
Mount, releasing
FF5-9121-000CN
Mount, solenoid
450–453
34
Mount, switch
469
18
Mount, switch
469
23
Mount, terminal, front
429
15
429
1
445
3
Mount, terminal, rear
Mount, tray
FB4-7021-000CN
Mount, volume
448
14
Mylar, registration guide front
457
6A
Noise filter PCB assembly (100/127 V)
FG2-9463-000CN
433
—
Noise filter PCB assembly (220/240 V)
FG2-9541-000CN
433
—
425
5
Nut, hex, M3
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
511
Nut, hex, M4
ADF screw/ring kit
447
517
Nut, hex, M4
XB7-2100-409CN
423
507
Nut,hex,M5
ADF screw/ring kit
445
503
425
16
Nut
Nut,hex,M6
One-way gear, 71T
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
471–472
19
Pad, oil
FB4-0802-000CN
429
33
Panel, front
FB4-7441-000CN
466
1
Panel, rear
FB5-5320-000CN
422
11
Panel, upper
FF5-9140-000CN
466
2
Paper feed motor assembly
FG6-2173-000CN
455
—
Paper sensing assembly
RG5-2166-000CN
467
14
467
14B
Paper sensing PCB assembly
Paper separation assembly
FG6-4442-000CN
Paper-volume cable (J205, 601)
460
—
467
14C
Photo-interrupter (PS102 J2007)
FH7-7312-000CN
425
10
Photo-interrupter, GP1A34A1 (S10 J211)
FH7-7236-000CN
456
18
Photo-interrupter, GP1A34A1 (S9 J210)
FH7-7236-000CN
455
5
Photo-interrupter, S7G37 (PS101 J2013)
FH7-7306-000CN
423
20
694
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Photo-interrupter, SG206 (S4,7 J214, 304)
WG8-5206-000CN
450–453
104
458
9
Photo-transistor
450–453
63B
Photo-transistor TPS616C
450–453
54B
Photo-interrupter, SG206 (S8 J305)
Key
Pillar, left
FF5-7814-000CN
445
8
Pillar, right
FF5-7815-000CN
445
9
Pin, dowel
ADF pin kit
454
503
Pin, dowel
ADF pin kit
447
506
Pin, dowel
ADF pin kit
447
514
Pin, dowel
ADF pin kit
459
502
Pin, dowel
ADF pin kit
460
504
Pin, dowel
ADF pin kit
450–453
119
Pin, dowel
Side HCI pin kit
468
506
Pin, dowel
Side HCI pin kit
471–472
506
Pin, dowel
Side HCI pin kit
471–472
507
467
10
Pin, guide, 2
Pin, pad, 2
429
5
Pin, positioning
FB3-7692-000CN
420
6E
Pin, positioning
467
6
Pin, positioning
467
9
Pin, slide
FB3-2411-000CN
429
4
Pin, slide
FB3-2411-000CN
469
11A
Pin, spring
ADF pin kit
447
501
Pin, spring
ADF pin kit
447
518
Pin, spring
ADF pin kit
460
505
Pin, spring
ADF pin kit
450–453
513
Pin, spring
ADF pin kit
450–453
516
Pin, spring
Side HCI pin kit
471–472
502
Plate
447
13
Plate
448
8A
Plate
450–453
110
Plate (see note3)
456
21
Plate P, shutter
450–453
78
Plate, adjusting
423
26
Plate, auxiliary, front
428
7
Plate, auxiliary, rear
428
6
Plate, belt tension, front
450–453
47
Plate, belt tension, rear
450–453
48
EN
Alphabetical parts list 695
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Key
Plate, clutch tensioning
456
2
Plate, contact
429
2
446
4
422
20
Plate, cushion mounting
428
5A
Plate, deck stop
467
4
Plate, flapper, mounting
457
3
Plate, glass retaining
425
1
Plate, grounding
447
53
Plate, grounding
427
25
Plate, grounding
430
3
Plate, grounding
430
5
Plate, grounding, 3
423
9
Plate, guide
458
3
Plate, cover
Plate, cover
FA3-9315-000CN
Plate, guide, front
Plate, home position sensor
FB4-0745-000CN
447
17
423
21
Plate, joint
447
7
Plate, joint paper pick-up
447
12
Plate, latch
465
2
Plate, latch front
FB4-7423-000CN
469
8
Plate, latch rear
FB4-7424-000CN
469
9
422
9B
Plate, length index (A size)
Plate, length index (inch/A size)
Plate, lens mounting
FS6-8499-000CN
422
9B
423
10
Plate, lifting, cam
450–453
2
Plate, light blocking
429
23
Plate, limit, wire
468
20
Plate, mount
465
1
Plate, mount, 1
420
11
Plate, mount, 2
420
12
Plate, paper holder
468
7A
Plate, pick-up
450–453
60
Plate, pin holder
467
2
Plate, pin holder
467
3
Plate, positioning
450–453
49
Plate, positioning
450–453
53
Plate, pressure pick-up
450–453
24
Plate, pulley support, front
468
13
696
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Plate, pulley support, rear
Plate, rail
FB4-0705-000CN
Figure
Key
468
14
424
6
Plate, reinforcement
428
1
Plate, reinforcement, rear
420
8
Plate, reverse
450–453
8
Plate, sensing
450–453
31
Plate, sensor guard
449
13
Plate, sensor, separation
450–453
44
Plate, shaft support
466
4
Plate, shield
469
40
Plate, shutter holding
450–453
15
Plate, size index (A size)
422
13A
Plate, size index (inch/A size)
FS6-8920-000CN
422
13A
Plate, slide, rear
FF5-7816-000CN
447
29
Plate, stop, woodruff
FF5-5198-000CN
450–453
114
469
19
450–453
11
445
4
Plate, switch
Plate, tray
Plate, tray
FB4-7022-000CN
Plate, tray positioning
450–453
106
Plate, wire hook
FB4-7371-000CN
468
2
Power cord (100/127 V P2)
FH2-6719-000CN
467
16
Power cord (220/240 V P2)
FH2-5762-000CN
467
19
PSU cable (J203, 901)
467
17
Pulley
423
2
Pulley
ADF gear/pulley kit
456
4
Pulley
Copy module gear/pulley kit
423
17
Pulley
Copy module gear/pulley kit
423
23
Pulley F, 28T
ADF gear/pulley kit
450–453
76
Pulley, 1
455
3
Pulley, 2
455
4
Pulley, 20T
ADF gear/pulley kit
450–453
96
Pulley, 32T
ADF gear/pulley kit
447
34
Pulley, 40T
ADF gear/pulley kit
450–453
75
Pulley, 66T
Copy module gear/pulley kit
423
11
Pulley, drive separation, center
460
7
Pulley, drive separation, side
460
8
Pulley, idler
ADF screw/ring kit
456
12
Pulley, idler
FA6-9971-000CN
468
18
EN
Alphabetical parts list 697
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Pulley, lifting
FB2-8465-000CN
468
15
Pulley, roller, reverse
ADF gear/pulley kit
450–453
26
Pulley, tension
Copy module gear/pulley kit
424
1
450–453
108
Rail, guide
Key
R-CON. extension DIMM assembly (Europe)
FG3-0220-000CN
437
1A
R-CON. extension DIMM assembly (USA)
FG2-9448-080CN
437
1A
RDF controller PCB assembly
FG2-9927-000CN
461
—
Reader controller PCB (Europe)
FG3-0215-000CN
437
1
Reader controller PCB (USA)
FG2-9443-060CN
Reflector
437
1
427
17
Reflector
450–453
23
Reflector, auxiliary
429
8
Reflector, front
429
9
Reflector, lower
429
7
Reflector, rear
429
10
Registration sensor H assembly (LED3 J302)
FG2-3394-000CN
450–453
61
Relay, AC 250 V (RL1)
FH7-6208-000CN
426
6
Retainer, cord
447
50
Retainer, glass, right
422
1
Retainer, pulley
423
24
Right frame assembly
420
3
FG6-5838-000CN
454
—
470
502
Ring, E
ADF screw/ring kit
454
501
Ring, E
ADF screw/ring kit
447
504
Ring, E
ADF screw/ring kit
455
501
Ring, E
ADF screw/ring kit
456
505
Ring, E
ADF screw/ring kit
456
506
Ring, E
ADF screw/ring kit
456
507
Ring, E
ADF screw/ring kit
459
501
Ring, E
ADF screw/ring kit
460
502
Ring, E
ADF screw/ring kit
460
503
Ring, E
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
506
Ring, E
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
508
Ring, E
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
514
Ring, E
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
515
Right paper delivery assembly
Ring, E
Ring, E
Copy module screw/ring kit
423
502
Ring, E
Side HCI screw/ring kit
466
502
698
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Key
Ring, E
Side HCI screw/ring kit
467
501
Ring, E
Side HCI screw/ring kit
468
504
Ring, E
Side HCI screw/ring kit
469
503
Ring, E
Side HCI screw/ring kit
469
504
Ring, E
Side HCI screw/ring kit
470
501
Ring, E
Side HCI screw/ring kit
471–472
501
Ring, E
Side HCI screw/ring kit
471–472
504
Ring, E
Side HCI screw/ring kit
471–472
505
Ring, E
Stand screw/ring kit
420
501
Ring, E
Stand screw/ring kit
420
504
457
502
Ring, grip
ADF screw/ring kit
447
505
Ring, grip
ADF screw/ring kit
Ring, grip
450–453
507
Ring, toothed lock
429
503
Ring, toothed lock
468
503
Rod
454
10
Rod
449
1
Rod
458
2
Roller
449
10
Roller
458
6
Roller
FB4-6991-000CN
459
9
Roller
FB4-7004-000CN
447
56
Roller
FC1-1334-030CN
447
22
Roller
XG9-0402-000CN
467
11
Roller, 2
459
5
Roller, belt, center
460
6
Roller, belt, side
460
4
Roller, delivery
454
16
449
6
454
3
Roller, drive, 1
459
6
Roller, drive, 2
459
7
Roller, delivery
Roller, delivery
FB4-6990-000CN
Roller, feed
RB1-7818-000CN
471–472
23
Roller, feed
RB2-2511-000CN
471–472
28
Roller, feed
RF5-1834-000CN
471–472
30
Roller, feed belt drive
ADF belt kit
447
5
Roller, feed belt drive
ADF belt kit
447
6
447
2C
Roller, feed belt idler
EN
Alphabetical parts list 699
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Key
Roller, front
FB3-5638-000CN
450–453
13
Roller, paper delivery
FB3-5637-000CN
450–453
22
Roller, pick-up
FF5-5191-000CN
450–453
50
Roller, pick-up
RF5-1835-000CN
471–472
31
Roller, rear
FB3-5639-000CN
450–453
14
Roller, registration
FB4-7018-000CN
450–453
20
Roller, reverse
FF5-9581-000CN
450–453
12
Roller, separation
FF5-5207-000CN
459
4
Rotary VR assembly (VR1 J218)
FG2-7569-000CN
448
16
450–453
10A
Rubber
Scraper
454
8
Screw, adjusting
447
19
Screw, adjusting
423
1
420
507
Screw, allen head, M6X10
Stand screw/ring kit
Screw, allen head,M8X8
Stand screw/ring kit
420
5A
Screw, flat head, M3X8
ADF screw/ring kit
456
10
Screw, M2X12
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
118
Screw, M3X2.5
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
84
Screw, M3X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
429
30
Screw, M3X8
Copy module screw/ring kit
427
10
Screw, M3X8
Side HCI screw/ring kit
469
34
Screw, M4X10
Side HCI screw/ring kit
468
6
Screw, M4X6
ADF screw/ring kit
447
51
Screw, M4X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
423
12
Screw, M4X6
Side HCI screw/ring kit
466
11
Screw, M4X6
Side HCI screw/ring kit
466
17
Screw, M4X8
ADF screw/ring kit
447
9
Screw, M4X8
Stand screw/ring kit
420
6F
Screw, M6X6
Stand screw/ring kit
420
2
Screw, M6X6
Stand screw/ring kit
420
1
Screw, mach. truss head, M3x4 (see note 2)
ADF gear/pulley kit
455
8
Screw, mach., C.S. head,M4X8
Copy module screw/ring kit
422
502
Screw, mach., flat head, M3X4
ADF screw/ring kit
445
7
Screw, mach., truss head, M2.3X10
Side HCI screw/ring kit
469
502
Screw, mach., truss head, M2X3
ADF screw/ring kit
448
505
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X10
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
517
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X12
ADF screw/ring kit
447
513
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X12
Copy module screw/ring kit
429
502
700
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Key
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X3
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
509
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
ADF screw/ring kit
454
34
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
ADF screw/ring kit
454
504
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
ADF screw/ring kit
447
1
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
ADF screw/ring kit
447
58
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
ADF screw/ring kit
448
21
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
504
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
Copy module screw/ring kit
429
501
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X4
Side HCI screw/ring kit
467
503
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X5
ADF screw/ring kit
456
6
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
ADF screw/ring kit
454
502
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
ADF screw/ring kit
448
506
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
ADF screw/ring kit
448
507
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
ADF screw/ring kit
460
501
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
501
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
426
501
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
427
501
Screw, mach., truss head, M3X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
430
505
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X16
Copy module screw/ring kit
428
501
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X20
Copy module screw/ring kit
426
504
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X30
ADF screw/ring kit
445
501
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X30
Copy module screw/ring kit
430
502
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X4
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
510
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X5
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
90
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
ADF screw/ring kit
454
505
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
ADF screw/ring kit
447
509
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
ADF screw/ring kit
446
501
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
505
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
426
503
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
430
23
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
430
501
Screw, mach., truss head, M4X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
430
504
Screw, mach., truss head, M5X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
426
505
Screw, mach., truss head,M3X12
Copy module screw/ring kit
424
502
Screw, mach., truss head,M4X10
Copy module screw/ring kit
423
504
Screw, mach., truss head,M4X5
Copy module screw/ring kit
425
501
Screw, mach., truss head,M4X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
423
503
Screw, mach., truss head,M4X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
423
508
EN
Alphabetical parts list 701
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Key
Screw, mach., truss head,M4X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
422
501
Screw, mach., truss head,M4X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
424
501
Screw, mach., truss head,M4X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
425
502
Screw, mach., washer head, M4X10
ADF screw/ring kit
448
13
Screw, RS, M4X8
Side HCI screw/ring kit
467
18
Screw, RS, M4X8
Side HCI screw/ring kit
468
23
Screw, RS, M4X8
Side HCI screw/ring kit
Screw, stepped
Screw, stepped
469
14
454
23
424
23
Screw, stepped
Side HCI screw/ring kit
469
20
Screw, stepped, M3
ADF screw/ring kit
447
54
Screw, stepped, M3
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
72
Screw, stepped, M3
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
73
Screw, stepped, M3
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
93
Screw, stepped, M3X1.4
ADF screw/ring kit
445
6
424
29
Screw, stepped, M4
Screw, stepped, M4
ADF screw/ring kit
447
32
Screw, stepped, M4
ADF screw/ring kit
447
33
Screw, stepped, M4
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
70
Screw, stepped, M4
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
71
Screw, stepped, M4
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
89
Screw, stepped, M4
Copy module screw/ring kit
424
8
Screw, stepped, M4
Copy module screw/ring kit
425
6
Screw, tapping truss head, M4X6
ADF screw/ring kit
447
508
Screw, tapping, pan head,M2.6X8
Copy module screw/ring kit
425
504
Screw, tapping, truss head, M2X5
ADF screw/ring kit
456
501
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X10
ADF screw/ring kit
448
508
458
501
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X6
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X6
ADF screw/ring kit
448
501
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X6
ADF screw/ring kit
449
502
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X6
ADF screw/ring kit
457
501
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X6
ADF screw/ring kit
458
502
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X6
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
503
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X8
ADF screw/ring kit
448
502
Screw, tapping, truss head, M3X8
ADF screw/ring kit
448
503
Screw, tapping, truss head, M4X12
Copy module screw/ring kit
428
502
Screw, tapping, truss head, M4X6
ADF screw/ring kit
446
502
Screw, tapping, truss head, M4X6
Side HCI screw/ring kit
469
506
702
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Screw, tapping, truss head, M4X8
Screw, TP, M3X4
ADF screw/ring kit
Key
449
501
447
512
Screw, TP, M3X4
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
512
Screw, TP, M3X4
Copy module screw/ring kit
423
501
Screw, TP, M3X5
ADF screw/ring kit
456
503
Screw, TP, M3X6
ADF screw/ring kit
447
515
Screw, TP, M3X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
424
503
Screw, TP, M3X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
429
506
Screw, TP, M3X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
430
503
Screw, TP, M3X6
Side HCI screw/ring kit
471–472
50
465
501
Screw, TP, M4X4
Side HCI screw/ring kit
467
502
Screw, TP, M4X4
Side HCI screw/ring kit
468
502
Screw, TP, M4X4
Side HCI screw/ring kit
469
505
Screw, TP, M4X6
ADF screw/ring kit
447
510
Screw, TP, M4X6
ADF screw/ring kit
447
511
Screw, TP, M4X6
ADF screw/ring kit
456
504
Screw, TP, M4X6
ADF screw/ring kit
445
502
Screw, TP, M4X6
ADF screw/ring kit
446
503
Screw, TP, M4X6
ADF screw/ring kit
450–453
518
Screw, TP, M4X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
423
506
Screw, TP, M4X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
425
503
Screw, TP, M4X6
Side HCI screw/ring kit
466
501
Screw, TP, M4X6
Side HCI screw/ring kit
466
503
Screw, TP, M4X6
Side HCI screw/ring kit
467
504
Screw, TP, M4X6
Side HCI screw/ring kit
469
501
Screw, TP, M4X6 (see note3)
ADF screw/ring kit
456
508
Screw, TP, M4X8
Stand screw/ring kit
420
503
429
504
422
18
Screw, TP, M4X4
Screw, with washer, M3X6
Screw, with washer, M3X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
Screw, with washer, M3X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
427
9
Screw, with washer, M3X6
Side HCI screw/ring kit
471–472
503
Screw, with washer, M3X8
Copy module screw/ring kit
423
505
Screw, with washer, M3X8
Copy module screw/ring kit
429
505
Screw, with washer, M3X8
Side HCI screw/ring kit
470
5
Screw, with washer, M4
Side HCI screw/ring kit
467
23
Screw, with washer, M4X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
422
12
Screw, with washer, M4X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
427
502
EN
Alphabetical parts list 703
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Key
Screw, with washer, M4X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
430
6
Screw, with washer, M4X6
Copy module screw/ring kit
430
506
Screw, with washer, M4x8
455
9
Screw,stepped,M3X1.4
458
7
456
22
422
4A
Screw,TP,M4X8 (see note3)
ADF screw/ring kit
Seal, cover
Seal, cover
422
7A
Seal, insulation, 1
429
20
Seal, insulation, 2
429
21
Sensor connecting cable (J205, 302)
450–453
57
Sensor connecting cable (J207,303)
449
11
Sensor connecting cable (J209, 305)
458
10
Sensor lever unit
458
8
Sensor, cable (J304, 310)
466
16
Sensor, document size (A size PS103 J2009)
FH7-7424-000CN
424
16
Sensor, document size (A size PS106 J2011)
FH7-7423-000CN
424
19
Sensor, document size (inch size PS104 J2010)
FH7-7388-000CN
424
16
Sensor, document size (inch size PS105, 106
J2011, 2012)
FH7-7386-000CN
424
19
Separation roller assembly
FG6-2176-000CN
459
—
Setscrew, M3X4
Side HCI screw/ring kit
468
505
Setscrew, M4X4
ADF screw/ring kit
456
502
Setscrew, M4X8
ADF screw/ring kit
Shaft
Shaft, arm
FB4-7426-000CN
447
503
471–472
10
469
28
Shaft, arm, pick-up rear
450–453
42
Shaft, cam
450–453
5
Shaft, clutch
456
5
Shaft, cover
466
5
Shaft, drive, belt separation
460
5
Shaft, drive, mirror mounting
423
5
Shaft, feed belt
447
21
Shaft, front
FF5-9129-000CN
471–472
15
Shaft, gear
RF5-2558-000CN
471–472
32
Shaft, idler roller
447
2B
Shaft, latch
469
3
469
6
468
19
Shaft, lever
Shaft, lifter wire
704
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
FB4-7379-000CN
EN
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Key
Shaft, paper sensor
471–472
27
Shaft, pick-up release
471–472
8
471–472
22
450–453
19
Shaft, rear
471–472
12
Shaft, release
471–472
7
Shaft, positioning
Shaft, pressure, pick-up
FB3-5642-000CN
Shaft, roller
450–453
28
Shaft, roller
FB4-2675-000CN
420
6A
Shaft, roller
RB2-2512-000CN
471–472
29
450–453
54D
Sheet
Sheet
450–453
8A
Sheet, 1
455
1A
Sheet, 1
450–453
52A
Sheet, 2
450–453
52B
Sheet, 3
450–453
52C
Sheet, 4
450–453
52D
Sheet, A
450–453
10B
Sheet, B
450–453
10C
Sheet, back-up
FC2-3246-000CN
FB4-0752-000CN
Sheet, blanking
Sheet, blanking
Sheet, grounding
FB4-6704-000CN
424
4
424
15
426
3
427
8
Sheet, guard
449
13A
Sheet, insulating
427
27
Sheet, partition
430
14
Sheet, PCB
430
1
Sheet, protect
425
19
Sheet, protect, A
424
2
Sheet, protect, B
424
3
Sheet, protective
426
2
Sheet, protective, small
468
5A
Sheet, protective, small
468
7C
Sheet, rubber
428
8
Sheet, rubber 2
455
1B
Sheet, rubber 2
456
1B
Sheet, rubber, 3
455
1C
Sheet, rubber, 3
Sheet, sensor lever
EN
FB4-7024-000CN
456
1C
447
59
Alphabetical parts list 705
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Sheet, separation, leather
RB1-6872-000CN
Shutter
Figure
Key
468
1
450–453
16
Side guide plate, front
FF5-9125-000CN
468
5
Side guide plate, rear
FG6-3921-000CN
468
7
Side HCI bushing kit
C7839-67902
—
—
Side HCI gear/pulley kit
C7839-67903
—
—
—
—
—
—
Side HCI pin kit
Side HCI screw/ring kit
C7839-67901
Side HCI spring kit
C7839-67904
—
—
Side plate, separation
FF5-5188-000CN
460
13
Size plate
FF5-9141-000CN
466
3
469
37
Size sensor cable (J325, 328)
Solenoid (SL1 J320)
RH7-5202-000CN
471–472
35
Solenoid, dc 24 V (SL1 J217)
FH7-5653-000CN
450–453
64
Solenoid, dc 24 V (SL2, J216)
FH7-5709-000CN
450–453
68
Solenoid, dc 24 V (SL3 J204)
FH7-5843-000CN
447
31
Solenoid, dc 24 V (SL4 J220)
454
13
Spacer
447
8
Spacer, PCB
447
42
Spacer, PCB
447
46
423
8
450–453
114A
Spacer, pulley
Copy module gear/pulley kit
Sponge, damper
Spring, compression
ADF spring kit
447
55
Spring, compression
ADF spring kit
450–453
74
Spring, compression
Copy module spring kit
427
30
Spring, compression
Side HCI spring kit
469
30
Spring, compression
Side HCI spring kit
471–472
42
Spring, compression
Side HCI spring kit
471–472
43
Spring, grounding
447
57
Spring, leaf
454
7
Spring, leaf
448
18
Spring, leaf
449
2
Spring, leaf
449
4
Spring, leaf
423
27
Spring, leaf
424
5
Spring, leaf
424
24
Spring, leaf
424
27
Spring, leaf
424
30
706
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Key
Spring, leaf
424
31
Spring, leaf
425
20
Spring, leaf
430
28
Spring, leaf
430
29
Spring, leaf
460
18
Spring, leaf
467
14A
Spring, leaf
467
15
Spring, leaf
469
32
Spring, leaf
Copy module spring kit
423
4
Spring, leaf
FB4-7391-000CN
469
24
Spring, leaf, 1
458
4
Spring, leaf, 2
458
5
Spring, leaf, mirror
429
11
Spring, tension
454
25
Spring, tension
469
21
Spring, tension
ADF screw/ring kit
447
52
Spring, tension
ADF spring kit
447
35
Spring, tension
ADF spring kit
447
36
Spring, tension
ADF spring kit
447
37
Spring, tension
ADF spring kit
447
38
Spring, tension
ADF spring kit
460
17
Spring, tension
ADF spring kit
460
19
Spring, tension
ADF spring kit
450–453
83
Spring, tension
ADF spring kit
450–453
85
Spring, tension
ADF spring kit
450–453
86
Spring, tension
ADF spring kit
450–453
87
Spring, tension
ADF spring kit
450–453
88
Spring, tension
ADF spring kit
450–453
98
Spring, tension
ADF spring kit
450–453
99
Spring, tension
ADF spring kit
450–453
100
Spring, tension
Copy module spring kit
424
9
Spring, tension
Copy module spring kit
425
4
Spring, tension
Side HCI spring kit
467
8
Spring, tension
Side HCI spring kit
469
12
Spring, tension
Side HCI spring kit
469
15
Spring, tension
Side HCI spring kit
471–472
44
Spring, tension
Side HCI spring kit
471–472
45
Spring, tension
Side HCI spring kit
471–472
53
EN
Alphabetical parts list 707
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Key
Spring, tension
Side HCI spring kit
471–472
56
Spring, tension
Side HCI spring kit
471–472
57
Spring, torsion
454
22
Spring, torsion
454
24
Spring, torsion
449
8
Spring, torsion
457
5
457
7
450–453
40
Spring, torsion
Spring, torsion
FB3-5669-000CN
Spring, torsion
FB4-7425-000CN
Stamp (see note1)
Stand screw/ring kit
C7838-67901
Stopper, lower guide
Support exposure light
FB2-4244-000CN
466
7
454
30
—
—
450–453
3
427
12
Support, cable
424
18
Support, glass, right
425
2
Support, PCB
430
22
Support, right
427
24
Switch cable (J321, 322, 326, 327)
469
38
Switch, key (KEY SW J2014)
FH7-6139-000CN
425
12
Switch, main (MSW1)
FH7-6254-000CN
426
7
434
VR 941
Switching regulator PCB unit
FH3-2509-000CN
467
21
Tape, door cover
FB4-7438-000CN
Switch, VR
466
8
Tape, glass protective
422
9A
Tie, cable
447
28
Tie, cable
450–453
103
Transformer
440
T 1001
Transformer
440
T 1003
Transformer (100/127 V)
431
CT1301
Transformer (100/127 V)
431
T 1201
Transformer (100/127 V)
431
T 1301
Transformer (100/127 V)
432
T 1801
Transformer (220/240 V)
431
T 1201
Transformer (220/240 V)
431
T 1301
Transformer (220/240 V)
432
T 1802
Transformer, inverter
436
T1
Tray 2, copy
FB3-3143-020CN
445
2
Tray 3, copy
FB3-2141-000CN
445
1
708
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 164. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Tray cable assembly (J8, 101, 218)
Figure
Key
448
12
Tray, auxiliary
FB5-5296-000CN
448
5
Tray, document
FF6-0276-000CN
448
1
450–453
55
Tray, pick-up
Turn roller assembly
FM6-2145-000CN
447
2
Upper cover assembly
FG6-5836-000CN
449
—
Upper paper guide assembly
FG5-7273-000CN
457
—
Washer
FA6-2513-000CN
450–453
56
Washer, plain
Stand screw/ring kit
420
502
Washer, plain
Stand screw/ring kit
420
505
Washer, pulley
ADF gear/pulley kit
456
9
Washer, pulley
FC1-6220-000CN
455
7
468
501
Washer, spring
Stand screw/ring kit
420
506
Washer, spring
Stand screw/ring kit
420
508
Washer, toothed lock
ADF screw/ring kit
447
502
Washer, toothed lock
ADF screw/ring kit
447
507
Washer, toothed lock
ADF screw/ring kit
447
516
Washer, toothed lock
ADF screw/ring kit
448
504
Washer, toothed lock
ADF screw/ring kit
449
503
Washer, toothed lock
Copy module screw/ring kit
Washer, retaining
Weight
426
502
450–453
7
Wing,nut,M8
XA9-1109-000CN
469
42
Wing,nut,M8
XZ9-0459-000CN
469
41
Wire
Wire, front
449
9
FC1-5051-000CN
468
9
447
18
FC1-5052-000CN
468
8
Wire, grounding
Wire, rear
Wire, scanner, front
FB4-0740-000CN
423
6
Wire, scanner, rear
FB4-0741-000CN
423
7
EN
Alphabetical parts list 709
710
Chapter - 8 Parts and diagrams
EN
Index
A
A/D conversion circuit 203, 204
abbreviations guide 103
ABC (auto background control) circuit
theory of operation 204
absorption, chromatic 221
ac power
troubleshooting 519
accessories
connection status 66
information from HP FIRST 43
ordering 39, 44
accessories power supply
removing 374
voltage 238, 239
ACC-STS menu 66
acronyms guide 103
ACS (color auto recognition)
area adjustments 89
defined 51
ACS key 50
addresses, scanning 227
ADF (automatic document feeder)
adjustments 140
assembly diagrams 605
belt drive motor assembly 634
capacity 29
circuit breaker 285
circuitry 244, 290, 292
cleaning 164, 168
clearing jams 282
clutch 249
communication 245
connectors 645
controllers, adjusting 158
copyglass positioning 145
covers, identifying 377
covers, part numbers 607
delivery operation 266
detecting originals 269, 271
DF assembly 608
diagrams 30
dimensions 29
display boards 302
document tray assembly 612
document tray, adjusting 146
double-sided original mode 252
electrical adjustments 155
electrical circuitry 244
EN
error history 69
functional overview 250
gears 384
height, adjusting 141
horizontal size plate adjustments 145
indicator PCB 288
jams, clearing 281
left edge stop position, adjusting 147
life span, parts 163
lower paper guide assembly 638
lubricants 174
measuring stop position 148
motors, operation 249
motors, removing 387
motors, types of 286
mounting hardware 606
MS1 (open/closed switch) adjustments 151
open/closed switch, adjusting 151
original skew adjustments 142
originals, detecting 269, 271
originals, improperly placed 282
original-width-detecting variable resistor (VR1),
adjusting 157
original-width-detection volume 383
paper feed motor assembly 632
part numbers 600
parts, life span 163
PCBs 287
power supply 285
RDF controller 644
recirculating lever 274
reduced page composition mode 255
removing 378
resetting 75
RF assembly 616
right paper delivery assembly 630
sensors, adjusting 155
separation belt pressure 152
separation paper assembly 642, 643
separation roller assembly 640
servicing 377
sheet-to-sheet gap, adjusting 149
side guide lock, removing 382
solenoids 286
specifications 28
timing charts 288, 303
top pick-up mode 256, 257
upper paper guide assembly 636
Index 711
ADF errors
open during operation 280, 281
ADF switch (MS1) 279
adjust mode
ADJ-XY 84, 90
CCD settings 90
DENS settings 85
FEED-ADJ 89, 92
HV-TR 87, 92
IMG-REG settings 85, 90
menus 83
PASCAL 86, 91
adjusters, part numbers 680
adjusting
auto gradation 125
automatic document feeder (ADF) height 140
belt motor tension 391
black text density 53
CCD calibration 128
clutch timing 89
CMYK balance 86
CMYK density 85, 109
color area 89
control panel contrast 49
document tray paper sensor (S1) 155
document tray, automatic document feeder (ADF)
146
drive belt tension 338
exposure recalibration 126
feeding power 154
gradation 57
horizontal registration 124
horizontal size plate 145
image start positions 89
lamp, scanning 127
LCD contrast 232
margins 85, 122
MS1 (open/closed switch) 151
open/closed switch 151
original skew 142
original-width-detecting variable resistor (VR1)
157
power, feeding 154
registration sensor (S3) 155
sensors 155
separation belt pressure 152
sharpness 121
sheet-to-sheet distance 115
sheet-to-sheet gap 149
stop position 115
stopper plate solenoid 423
tension, belt motor 391
tension, drive belt 338
text quality 84
transfer bias 87
zoom control 56
712 Index
ADJ-X/Y (image start position)
troubleshooting 466
ADJ-XY (image start position)
settings 84, 90
administrative functions key 61
administrative menus 52
AE mode
menus 84
settings 204
alarm sound 53
ALARM-1 menu 69
algorithms, copy 51
alphabetical list, part numbers 680
aluminum white plate 99
ammonium gas, avoiding 462
analog image processor
diagrams 588
operations 203
part numbers 588
anti-counterfeit function
overview 231
troubleshooting 480
anti-reflecting plate, mounting 358
anti-see-through mode 213
AP-IP PCB
functions 206
removing 372
replacing 134
application notes
HP Driver Distribution Center 44
HP FIRST 43
applying lubricants 174
arching, during paper feed 258
arms, part numbers 680
ASAP (Automated Support Access Program) 42
Asia Pacific Customer Care Centers 46
assembling printer 332
assembly diagrams
automatic document feeder (ADF) 605
belt drive motor 634
control panel 572, 584
copy module 561
copyboard cover 574
deck controller PCB 668
DF 608
document tray (ADF) 612
electrical tray, copy module 578
high-capacity input (HCI) 652
lifter drive 663
mirrors 576
paper pick-up (HCI) 664, 666
paper separation 642
power cord, copy module 570
RF 616
right paper delivery 630
separation roller 640
EN
atmospheric pressure 25
auto clear time 55
auto gradation correction
adjusting 125
controlling 99
settings 91
auto paper selection 51, 197
auto power save mode 55, 235
auto power-off time 55
auto ratio selection 51, 197
auto start copying 51
Automated Support Access Program (ASAP) 42
automatic cassette selection 53
automatic document feeder (ADF)
adjustments 140
assembly diagrams 605
belt drive motor assembly 634
capacity 29
circuit breaker 285
circuitry 244, 290, 292
cleaning 164, 168
clearing jams 282
clutch 249
communication 245
connectors 645
controllers, adjusting 158
copyglass positioning 145
covers, identifying 377
covers, part numbers 607
delivery operation 266
detecting originals 269, 271
DF assembly 608
diagrams 30
dimensions 29
display boards 302
document tray assembly 612
document tray, adjusting 146
double-sided original mode 252
electrical adjustments 155
electrical circuitry 244
error history 69
functional overview 250
gears 384
height, adjusting 141
horizontal size plate adjustments 145
indicator PCB 288
jams, clearing 281
left edge stop position, adjusting 147
life span, parts 163
lower paper guide assembly 638
lubricants 174
measuring stop position 148
motors, operation 249
motors, removing 387
motors, types of 286
mounting hardware 606
EN
MS1 (open/closed switch) adjustments 151
open/closed switch, adjusting 151
original skew adjustments 142
originals, detecting 269, 271
originals, improperly placed 282
original-width-detecting variable resistor (VR1),
adjusting 157
original-width-detection volume 383
paper feed motor assembly 632
part numbers 600
parts, life span 163
PCBs 287
pick-up jams 74
power supply 285
RDF controller 644
recirculating lever 274
reduced page composition mode 255
removing 378
resetting 75
RF assembly 616
right paper delivery assembly 630
sensors, adjusting 155
separation belt pressure 152
separation paper assembly 642, 643
separation roller assembly 640
servicing 377
sheet-to-sheet gap, adjusting 149
side guide lock, removing 382
solenoids 286
specifications 28
timing charts 288, 303
top pick-up mode 256, 257
upper paper guide assembly 636
automatic gradation adjustment 57
B
B image signal 210
backgrounds
auto control, theory of operation 204
cancellation, theory of 213
colored, adjusting for 121, 205
omission mode 213
white 205
backing up
data 179
settings 62
bands, part numbers 681
bank note detection function
overview 231
troubleshooting 480
base plate
misplaced images and 160
position, adjusting 160
batteries, lithium
copy module 179
part numbers 681
Index 713
bearings, part numbers 681
belt drive motor
diagrams 634
part numbers 635
belt kits, part numbers
automatic document feeder (ADF) 600
copy module 559
belt motor
adjusting 391
automatic document feeder (ADF) 249
controlling 277
drive signals 277, 278
overcurrent protection 278
removing 389
sensors 81
speed 277
belt motor clock sensor
removing 389
belts
cleaning 168
diagrams 31
drive, adjusting tension 338
feeding, removing 431
feeding, replacing 377
life span 163
part numbers 681
reversing roller drive, removing 398
secondary transfer, faults 466, 471
separating 31
separation, pressure adjustments 152
separation, removing 398
timing, adjusting tension 331
BGR signals
theory of operation 203, 204
bias, transfer 87
binding shift 51, 225
Bk signal 219
black key 50
black lines, troubleshooting 470
black originals 198
black pixel signal 207
black text auto density adjust 53
black toner, creating 219
black, solid
troubleshooting 480
BLANK menu 85
blanking 230
block diagrams
high-capacity input (HCI) 304
blocks
color correction 212
image processor 206
output 201
transfer 201
boards, PS/PCL 508
714 Index
body cover (ADF)
identifying 30, 377
removing 380
body options 99
bolts, part numbers 681
book frame erase 51
book originals 198
bottom pick-up mode
delivery roller, removing 414
bracket (HCI), removing 449
brackets, part numbers 681
breaker, leakage 519
bushing kits, part numbers
automatic document feeder (ADF) 601
high-capacity input (HCI) 649
buzzer 53
C
cables
accessory 237
document tray 381
ECO-2 119
flexible, connecting 356
flexible, disconnecting 355
flexible, removing 353
part numbers 119, 682
scanner drive, routing 347
cams, part numbers 683
Canadian Customer Care Center (CCCC) 45
capacity
automatic document feeder (ADF) 29
high-capacity input (HCI) 32
original tray 75
caps, part numbers 683
carbon paper, avoiding 29
cassette pick-up roller
replacing 543
cassettes
auto select 53
jams in 73
media widths 67
casters, part numbers 683
CCC (Customer Care Centers)
Asia Pacific 46
Canada 45
Europe 45
USA 45
CCCC (Canadian Customer Care Center) 45
CCD (charge-coupled device)
calibration 128
cleaning 166
color correction, theory of 212
diagrams 27
replacing 131
RGB position matching 210
settings 94
EN
shading correction, theory of 208
theory of operation 201
CCD driver, theory of operation 202
CCD menu
adjust mode 84
display mode 67
settings 90
CCD unit
resetting after 62
centering images 51, 225
channels, image signal 201, 203
character edge detection 211
charging system, condensation in 463
check pins 288, 318
checking
short circuits 519
chromatic absorption 221
chromatic component (Ca/Cb) signal 214, 215
chromatic identification 214
circuit breakers
automatic document feeder (ADF) 285
leakage 519
part numbers 681
circuitry
accessory power supply 238
analog image processing 203
automatic document feeder (ADF) 244, 290, 292
belt motor 277
copy module 179
deck controller PCB 306, 321
high-capacity input (HCI) 324
leakage breaker 519
overcurrent protection 235, 278
pick-up motor 275
power supply, automatic document feeder (ADF)
285
reader controller PCB 179, 180
scanner motor 191
short circuits, checking for 519
short circuits, scanning lamp 196
signals, automatic document feeder (ADF) 288
clamps, part numbers 683
cleaning
automatic document feeder (ADF) 164, 168
belt assembly 168
CCD 166
copy module 165
copyboard glass 165
covers 165
end-user maintenance 164
feeding belt 167
HCI (high-capacity input) 173
high-capacity input (HCI) 173
intermediate transfer drum sequence 187
ITD rotation 99, 100
LED3 172
EN
lenses 166
mirrors 166
original sensor 170
registration sensor 170, 172
rollers 167
sensors 169
separation belt 115, 167
separation guide 173
service technician maintenance 164
solvents 164
standard white plate 166
CLEAR function 94
clear key 50
clearing
jams 281
touch panel display 55
C-link interface 304
clip holder 50
clip rings, tools for removing 331
clips, part numbers 684
cloth, cleaning with 164
clutch
automatic document feeder (ADF) 249
part numbers 684
reduced page composition mode 264
removing 392
slip stop 393
timing, adjusting 89
CMYK
color balance 86
density, adjusting 85, 109
fine-adjust 86
gradation control level 86
gradation test 472
start position 85
value range 69
codes
country 70
error 493
jams 282
language 70
series 70
coils, part numbers 684
cold reset 57
color
auto gradation adjustments 125
background, adjusting for 121
displacement 471
processing 219
terminology 103
test print options 110, 466
color auto recognition (ACS) 51
color balance, CMYK 86
color component signal 207
Index 715
color correction
CCD settings 94
color balance, CMYK 86
displacement 471
offset level, RGB 68
output values, RGB 67
RGB ratios 84
shading target values, RGB 67
test print options 110, 466
theory of 212
COLOR menu 86
communications
automatic document feeder (ADF) 245
control 232
high capacity input (HCI) 304
IPC 245
compliance information 35
condensation, troubleshooting 463
conformity, declarations of 35
connecting
copy module to PC 137, 138
flexible cable 356
PC to copy module 137, 138
power plug 462
power supply 237
connection status
accessories 66
connectors
automatic document feeder (ADF), part numbers
645
copy module, diagrams 591, 598
copy module, part numbers 591, 597, 598
high-capacity input (HCI), diagrams 669
high-capacity input (HCI), part numbers 669
interface 33
power supply cord 26
printer power cord 26
consumables
ordering 41
context-sensitive help 49
contrast adjustment
control panel 49
LCD 232
control card
signals 80
control key 26
control panel
adjusting contrast 49
assembly diagrams 572, 584
CPU, circuitry 179
CPU, diagrams and part numbers 585
CPU, functions 232
diagrams 26
functions 232
inverter, diagrams and part numbers 586
key descriptions 96
716 Index
LCD lifespan 163
menu 94
part numbers 573, 584
power switch 50
removing 344
soft switch 177
specifications 23
troubleshooting 458
user mode 52
control system, copy module 178
controller PCB, copy module
part numbers 587
removing 370
replacing 57, 129
controllers
ADF sensors 82
automatic document feeder (ADF), adjusting 158
automatic document feeder (ADF), circuit
diagrams 290, 292
copy module PCB, removing 370
copy module, diagrams and part numbers 587
DADF PCB 246
dc PCB, part numbers 119
dc PCB, replacing 120
deck PCB, diagrams 319
deck PCB, operations 304
deck PCB, part numbers 668
deck PCB, removing 453
laser PCB 109
RDF, diagrams and part numbers 644
reader controller PCB 179
conversions
BGR to YMC 216
RGB 214
cool down period
toner 177
COPIER screen 60
copy module
ac power, troubleshooting 519
accessories power supply, removing 374
accessories power supply, voltage 239
analog image processor 588
assembly location diagrams 561
automatic gradation adjustments 125
backing up settings 62
batteries 179
circuitry 179
cleaning 165
cold reset 57
connecting to PC 137, 138
connectors 591
control system 178
controller PCB, removing 370
controller PCB, replacing 57, 129
covers, diagrams 562
covers, identifying 333
EN
covers, part numbers 563
covers, removing 334
CPU 179
DC power, troubleshooting 520
diagrams 26
downloading, preparing for 137
electrical tray assembly 578
environment, operating 25, 462
exposure system 178, 188, 189
fan 234
features 23, 51
functions 51, 178
height, troubleshooting 471
horizontal registration, adjusting 124
image faults, troubleshooting 491
image processing system 200
internal components 564
inverter, part numbers 590
jams 58
life span, parts 163
locking 50
lubricants 174
main power supply 239
motor driver 589
noise filter 583
operating environment 25, 462
part numbers 558
parts, life span 163
power cord terminal assembly 569, 570, 571
power supplies, diagrams 580, 582
power supplies, part numbers 580, 582
power supplies, removing 373
power supplies, voltage 239
powering off 137
replacing parts 333
return to standard mode 139
scanner motor, removing 338
service mode 60
settings 54
specifications 23
standard mode, returning to 139
troubleshooting 460, 512
troubleshooting image faults 491
copy module controller PCB
part numbers 587
removing 370
replacing 57, 129
copy speed 23
copyboard cover
assembly diagrams 574
diagrams 26
part numbers 575
copyboard glass
automatic document feeder (ADF) positioning 145
cleaning 164, 165
diagrams 26
EN
original-size identification 197, 199
part numbers 689
troubleshooting 462
copying status indicator 49
copying, sequence of operations 185, 187
cord, power
terminal assembly diagrams 570
terminal assembly part numbers 571
cores, ferrite
part numbers 685
correcting
background cancellation 213
density 229
enlargements 223
horizontal registration 124
image quality 99, 476
lines 99, 102
logarithms 216
quality, copy 121
retransfer 99, 102
shading, theory of 208
count mismatch
originals 283
counter mode 111
counterfeit prevention features
overview 231
troubleshooting 480
counters
mode 111
soft 103
total 112
country codes 70
covers
automatic document feeder (ADF) 30, 377
body (ADF) 377, 380
cleaning 164, 165
copy module, diagrams 562
copy module, identifying 333
copy module, part numbers 563
copy module, removing 334
diagrams 33
front (ADF) 377
front (HCI) 434, 435
high-capacity input (HCI), diagrams 654
high-capacity input (HCI), identifying 434
high-capacity input (HCI), part numbers 655
high-capacity input (HCI), removing 435
lower front (copy module) 333, 334
modified top, part numbers 119
part numbers 685
pulley, removing 442
rear (copy module) 333, 336
rear (HCI) 434, 436
upper (ADF) 377, 614
upper front (copy module) 333, 337
upper left (copy module) 333, 335
Index 717
upper left (HCI) 434, 435
upper rear (copy module) 333, 335
upper right (copy module) 333, 334
upper right (HCI) 434, 436
CPU
control panel 179, 232, 585
copy module 179
DADF controller PCB 244
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) 139
crossmembers, part numbers 686
CTS-STS menu 67
Customer Care Centers (CCC)
Asia Pacific 46
Canada 45
Europe 45
online 40
USA 45
Customer Care Online 40
Customer Information Centers 44
customer support
Customer Care Centers (CCC) 45
Customer Information Centers 44
Customer Support Sales Center 44
Dealer Response Line 44
HP ASAP (Automated Support Access Program)
42
HP Direct 44
HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support
Technology) 43
HP Software Distribution Center 44
technical 42
websites 40
Customer Support Sales Center 44
cyan toner cartridge 466
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) 139
cylinder, developing
faults 470
troubleshooting 482
D
DADF controller PCB
automatic document feeder (ADF) 244
inputs 246
pick-up motor drive signals 275
sensors 82
dampers, part numbers 686
data status indicator 49
DC controller PCB
resetting 62
dc controller PCB
part numbers 119
replacing 120
DC power, troubleshooting 520
DC-CON menu 79
Dealer Response Line 44
718 Index
deck controller PCB
assembly diagrams 668
diagrams 319
lifter operation 310
out-of-paper sensor 307
output 306
overview 304
part numbers 668
removing 453
declarations of conformity 35
default paper detection sizes 273
default settings
common 53
customizing 52
delays, image signals 210, 211
delivering
originals 266
small size originals 268
delivery jams 280
delivery motor
function 249, 267
removing 394
delivery roller
cleaning 167
diagrams 31
removing 414, 416
delivery sensor 79
delivery sensor 1 (S6) 279
delivery sensor 2 (S12) 279
delivery tray, automatic document feeder 266
delivery/reversing roller
removing 407
DENS (density) settings 85
density
auto adjust 53
auto gradation correction 99
black text 53
CMYK, adjusting 85, 109
correction curve 229
dark area faults 466
fine-adjust 121
scanning lamp sensor 69
theory of 216
uneven, troubleshooting 463, 466
detaching
mirror positioning tool 351
detecting originals
automatic document feeder (ADF) 269, 271
horizontal direction 272, 273
jams 280
size 271
vertical direction 271, 273
detergent, cleaning with 165
developing cylinder
faults 470
troubleshooting 482
EN
DF assembly
diagrams 608
part numbers 609
Dhalf settings 91
diagrams, lists of 5
diameters
rollers 482
digital image processing 206
digital signals
automatic document feeder (ADF) 288
dimensions
automatic document feeder (ADF) 29
copy module 25
high-capacity input (HCI) 32
DIMMs
cold reset after replacing 57
mounting ROM 342
removing 340
resetting 62
DIP switch, using 535
directions
main scanning 225
scanner motor rotation 191
scanning 222
sub scanning 225
disabling
body options 99
gate array 109
separation static elimination 99, 101
size mix mechanism 115
disassembling printer 332
disconnecting
flexible cable 355
power plug 177
power supply 237
display boards
automatic document feeder (ADF) 302
display mode
ACC-STS menu 66
ALARM-1 menu 69
CCD menu 67
CTS-STS menu 67
ERR menu 67, 76
error details 76
JAM menu 67, 71
jam screen 71
languages 70
menus 65
MISC menu 69
SENSOR menu 69
USER menu 66
VERSION menu 66
display, touch panel
clearing 55
diagrams 50
troubleshooting 458
EN
distance, horizontal size plate 145
distance, sheet-to-sheet
adjusting 115, 149
document tray
automatic document feeder (ADF), adjusting 146
cable connections 381
capacity 75
diagrams 30
document tray assembly
diagrams 612
part numbers 613
document tray paper sensor
adjusting 155
functions 279, 282
sequence of operations 269
documentation, ordering 40
door, copier
opening 177
dots per inch 23
double feeding jams 280, 281
double-sided copying
automatic document feeder (ADF) 250
copy module 51
second side elimination 121
sequence of operations 252
terminology 103
transfer bias adjustments 87
downloading
firmware localization 138
language localization 138
preparing copy module 137
troubleshooting 139
drive belt
tension adjustments 338
drive cable, scanner
routing 347
drive pulses 192
drive signals
belt motor 277, 278
pick-up motor 275, 276
Driver Distribution Center 44
driver PCB, scanner motor
removing 339
drum cartridge
faults 466, 467
drum, photosensitive
condensation 463
faults 474
life span 69
testing 95
troubleshooting 482
drying 165
DSW1
diagrams 145
Index 719
duplexing unit
defined 51
jams in 73
sensors 79
dust, excessive 462, 545
E
E address 227
ECCC (European Customer Care Center) 45
ECO-2 cable
part numbers 119
ECO-2 PCB
functions 206
part numbers 119
removing 371
replacing 120
EEPROM
replacing 129
troubleshooting 509
electrical adjustments
automatic document feeder (ADF) 155
electrical specifications
automatic document feeder (ADF) 29
copy module 25
high-capacity input (HCI) 32
electrical tray assembly, copy module
diagrams 578
part numbers 579
electricity, static
precautions for 332
e-mail lists 42
emissions
acoustic 25
ozone 25
enabling
body options 99
gate array 109
separation static elimination 99, 101
size mix mechanism 115
ending service mode 61
end-user adjustments 121
enlarge page separation 51
enlarging
automatic 51
corrections 223
image signal delay 210
specifications 23
theory of operations 192, 222
environment, operating
copier 462
copy module 25
high-capacity input (HCI) 32
internal 69
E-rings, part numbers 698
720 Index
ERR menu
codes 67
screens 76
error codes
automatic document feeder (ADF) communication
245
cooling fan 234
faults without 519
guide to 493
initialization 94
jams 282
scanning lamp 196
error screen 76
error status indicator 49
ESD precautions 137
European Customer Care Center (ECCC) 45
exchanging parts 41
exiting
Power Save mode 49
Service Support Tool 139
exposure recalibration 56
exposure recalibration adjustments 126
exposure system, copy module
diagrams 188
sequence of operations 189
troubleshooting 480
external covers
automatic document feeder (ADF) 377
automatic document feeder (ADF), part numbers
607
copy module, diagrams 562
copy module, identifying 333
copy module, part numbers 563
copy module, removing 334
high-capacity input (HCI) 434
high-capacity input (HCI), diagrams 654
high-capacity input (HCI), part numbers 655
F
factory settings
labels 62
fan air inlet
diagrams 26
fans
copy module 234
length of operation 332
life span 163
removing 346, 375
Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology (HP
FIRST) 43
features
automatic document feeder (ADF) 28
copy module 23, 51
high-capacity input (HCI) 32
EN
feed motor
automatic document feeder (ADF) 249
troubleshooting 542
voltage 314
feed roller
diagrams 34
high-capacity input (HCI) 34
life span 163
operations 256
removing 399, 441
replacing 543
feed sensor (PS5)
operations 307
troubleshooting 543
FEED-ADJ (feeding system) settings 89, 92
feeder belt
life span 163
FEEDER menu 81
feeder mode 114
feeder motor
removing 387, 452
FEEDER screen 60
feeder, paper
accessory power supply PCB 238
options 115
sensor adjustments 115
testing 95
feeding belt
cleaning 167, 168
diagrams 31
removing 431
reversal operation 261
sequence of operations 258
feeding belt driver roller
diagrams 31
feeding belt link roller
diagrams 31
feeding guide
condensation in 463
feeding paper, troubleshooting 543
feeding power, testing 154
feeding roller
cleaning 167
diagrams 31
feeding system settings 92
feeding, paper
arching 258
delivering originals 266
double 280, 281
high-capacity input (HCI) 307
reversal operation 261
simultaneous originals 264
skewed, troubleshooting 545
top pick-up mode 251, 257
troubleshooting 463
ferrite cores, part numbers 685
EN
field replaceable units (FRUs)
ordering 41
figures, lists of 5
files, firmware image localization
installing 136
obtaining 135
filters
fan 234
noise 583
fine-adjust
CMYK 86
density 121
zoom 126
firmware
localization 135, 138
FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support
Technology) 43
fixing faults 468
flanges, part numbers 687
flapper plate, removing 427
flexible cable
connecting 356
disconnecting 355
removing 353
fogging
causes of 474
preventing 213
font support 43
foot, rubber
part numbers 688
formatter, printer 304
forward speed, scanner motor 191
framing 230
front cover (ADF), identifying 377
front cover (HCI)
identifying 434
removing 435
front plate
removing 413
FRUs
ordering 41
full image function 51
full-color key 50
full-color mode
selecting 50
full-color test prints 474
fuses
automatic document feeder (ADF) power supply
285
part numbers 688
ratings 238
replacing 541
fusing assembly, removing 332
Index 721
G
G image signal 205, 210, 211
gaps
printer/HCI, adjusting 159
sheet-to-sheet 149
gate array, enabling 109
gear/pulley kits, part numbers
automatic document feeder (ADF) 601
copy module 560
high-capacity input (HCI) 649
gears
automatic document feeder (ADF) 384
idler, removing 400
lubricating 174
part numbers 689
gradation adjustment
automatic 57
CMYK 86
fine 86
test prints 468
gradation control
CMYK test prints 472
test prints 469
gray balance, testing 474
grid pattern, correcting 124, 471
grommets, part numbers 689
guide key 49
guides
condensation 463
inlet plate, removing 397
inside plate, removing 399
lower paper assembly 638
part numbers 689
pre-separation 31
reversing, removing 419
separation plate, removing 399
separation, cleaning 173
side 382, 383
upper paper assembly 636
H
halftone test print 470
HCI (high-capacity input)
adjustments 159
assembly diagrams 652
base plate, adjusting 160
block diagram 304
capacity 32
cleaning 173
connectors, part numbers 669
covers, diagrams 654
covers, identifying 434
covers, part numbers 655
covers, removing 435
deck controller part numbers 668
deck controller PCB 304
722 Index
diagrams 33
dimensions 32
environment, operating 32
feed sensor 313
gap, adjusting 159
internal components 656
jams 313
lifter drive assembly 663
lifter operation 310
lifter wire, removing 442
lubricants 174
motors 316
mounting hardware 653
operating environment 32
overcurrent protection 314
paper pick-up assembly 664
part numbers 649
parts, removing 435
PCBs 317
pick-up unit, removing 437
power supply 314
power supply, removing 454
remaining paper detection 311
removing parts 435
sensors 315
solenoids 316
specifications 32
troubleshooting 535
heater rings, mounting 361
heater, scanning lamp
removing 357
temperature control 195
troubleshooting 505
height
automatic document feeder (ADF) 29
automatic document feeder (ADF), adjusting 141
copy module 25
copy module, troubleshooting 471
high-capacity input (HCI) 32
help, context-sensitive 49
Hewlett-Packard Distribution (HPD) ordering
information 39
high humidity
adjustments for 99, 102
operating environment 462
high-capacity input (HCI)
adjustments 159
assembly diagrams 652
base plate, adjusting 160
block diagram 304
capacity 32
cleaning 173
connectors, part numbers 669
covers, diagrams 654
covers, identifying 434
covers, part numbers 655
EN
covers, removing 435
deck controller part numbers 668
deck controller PCB 304
diagrams 33
dimensions 32
environment, operating 32
feed sensor 313
gap, adjusting 159
internal components 656
jams 313
lifter drive assembly 663
lifter operation 310
lifter wire, removing 442
lubricants 174
motors 316
mounting hardware 653
operating environment 32
overcurrent protection 314
paper pick-up assembly 664
part numbers 649
parts, removing 435
PCBs 317
pick-up unit, removing 437
power supply 314
power supply, removing 454
remaining paper detection 311
removing parts 435
sensors 315
solenoids 316
specifications 32
troubleshooting 535
hinges, part numbers 690
history
errors 493
jams 67
holders, part numbers 690
hole image erase 51
home position sensor 190, 504
hooks, part numbers 690
horizontal lines, troubleshooting 485
horizontal registration, adjusting 124
horizontal reproduction ratio 222
horizontal size plate, adjusting 145
horizontal stripe test print 466
HP ASAP (Automated Support Access Program) 42
HP Automated Support Access Program (ASAP) 42
HP Customer Care Centers (CCC)
Asia Pacific 46
Canada 45
Europe 45
USA 45
HP Customer Care Online 40
HP Direct 44
HP Distribution ordering information 39
HP Driver Distribution Center 44
EN
HP Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology
(FIRST) 43
HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support
Technology) 43
HP LaserJet 8550 119
HP LaserJet 8550 MFP
unique parts 119
HP Technical Training 40
HPD (Hewlett-Packard Distribution) ordering
information 39
hues, test prints for 467
humidity
copy module 25
high, effects on quality 99, 102
high-capacity input (HCI) 32
internal 69
low, effects on quality 99, 101
operating environment 462
sensors 79
HV-TR settings 87, 92
I
I/O mode
DC-CON menu 79
descriptions 77
FEEDER menu 81
R-CON menu 80
screen levels 78
ID key 50
ID mode 50
identifying original-size 197, 199
idler gears, removing 400
image files, localization firmware 135
image margin, adjusting 122
image processing
analog 203
digital 206
enlargement, theory of 222
reduction, theory of 222
theory of operation 200
image processor block 206
image processor, analog
diagrams 588
part numbers 588
image quality
automatic gradation adjustments 125
background cancellation 213
end user adjustments 121
options 99
priority mode 204
troubleshooting 476
image quality priority mode 204
image shifting 224, 225
image signals
B 210
channels 201, 202
Index 723
delays 210, 211
digital 206
G 205, 210, 211
R 210
skipping 192
image start positions
adjusting 84, 89
resetting 90
troubleshooting 466
IMG-REG settings (color image displacement) 85,
90
inches, settings for 53
in-country Customer Care Centers 46
indicator PCB 288
indicators
diagrams 30
original set 58, 269
indicators, status
overview 49
initial screens
service mode 60, 61
inlet guide plate, removing 397
input devices, troubleshooting 459
inputs
DADF controller PCB 246
deck controller PCB 321
reader controller PCB circuitry 180
inside guide plate
removing 399
installing
firmware image file 136
Service Support Tool 135
intensity detection PCB
removing 364
replacing 133
intensity, scanning lamp
adjusting 95
checking 195
controlling 194
measured by CCD 208
interface
cable, part numbers 119
PCB assembly, part numbers 119
serial (C-link) 304
interface connector, diagrams 33
intermediate transfer drum (ITD)
cleaning faults 99, 100, 463
faults 471
theory of operation 187
internal components
copy module, diagrams 564, 566, 568
copy module, part numbers 565, 566, 569
high-capacity input (HCI), diagrams 656, 658,
660
high-capacity input (HCI), part numbers 657, 659,
661
724 Index
non-HP, removing 457
interrupt copying 51
interrupt key 49
intervals, uneven 470
inverter, control panel
diagrams 586
part numbers 586
inverter, copy module
diagrams 590
part numbers 590
removing 376
IOT cable, part numbers 119
IPC communication 245
isolating problems 458
ITD (intermediate transfer drum)
cleaning faults 99, 100, 463
theory of operation 187
J
JAM menu 67
jams
clearing 281
code initialization 94
display mode screens 71
high-capacity input (HCI) 313
history 67
menu 67
originals 58
originals improperly placed 282
pick-up 72, 74
pick-up blocks 543
preventing 146
sensors 73
types of 72
joints, part numbers 691
K
keypad
function 50
part numbers 691
service mode keys 61
testing 94
keys
control panel 96
functions 49, 50
part numbers 691
preference 54
reset 61
L
L/Ca/Cb conversions 214
labels
part numbers 692
power rating 457
service 62
EN
lamp, scanning
adjusting 127
checking condition of 195
controlling 193
cover, removing 357
density sensor 69
diagrams 27
errors 196
flickering 485
heater, removing 357
heater, troubleshooting 505
intensity control 194
intensity detection PCB, replacing 133
life span 69, 163
part numbers 692
pre-heating control 194
recalibration 127
removing 357
replacing 132, 361
shading, effects on 208
short circuits 196
signals 80
temperature control 195
testing 95
touching, avoiding 360
turning on and off 194
voltage 194
languages
codes 70
downloading firmware 138
firmware image files 135
laser
faults 471, 474
safety statement 36
theory of operation 187
laser controller PCB 109
laser scanner motor
theory of operation 187
LaserJet 8550 119
LaserJet 8550 MFP
unique parts 119
last original, detecting 274
last-page detector 30
latches, part numbers 692
LCD
backlight signal 80
contrast adjustment 232
control panel 49
CPU control 232
lifespan 163
part numbers 692
removing 346
testing 94
EN
leading edges
detecting 271
folding, troubleshooting 545
margins, adjusting 85, 122
leaf spring 366
leakage breaker 519
LED101 269
LED102 269
LED3, cleaning 172
LEDs
current leakage 318
part numbers 692
testing 94
troubleshooting with 535
user 33, 320
left edge stop position, adjusting 147
left margin, adjusting 122
lens
cleaning 166
condensation 463
diagrams 27
mount cover, removing 365
level 1 screens
adjust mode 83
display mode 65
I/O mode 77
level 2 menus
adjust mode 83
display mode 65
I/O mode 79
option 99
run/check mode 94
level 3 menus
adjust mode 84
display mode 66
I/O mode 79
option 99
run/check mode 94
levels, service mode screens 63
levers, part numbers 692
life span, parts 163
lifter drive
diagrams 663
part numbers 663
lifter motor
operations 310
removing 452
voltage 314
lifter wire
removing 442
tightening 451
lifter, high-capacity input (HCI) 34, 310
light
conversions 214
wavelength filtering 212
light images, troubleshooting 463, 477, 479
Index 725
line memory
image signal delay 210
theory of operation 192
lines per inch 23
lines, troubleshooting
black 470
brush-like 99, 101
claw-like 99, 101
grid pattern 124, 471
horizontal 485
vertical 483
white 466, 470, 484, 486, 487, 488, 489, 490,
491
list server 42
lists
figures 5
part numbers, alphabetical 680
part numbers, numerical 672
tables 17
localization
image files 135
installing image files 136
lock pins, part numbers 693
logarithm corrections 216
low humidity, adjustments for 99, 101
low power mode
functions 235
settings 55
lower front cover (copy module)
identifying 333
removing 334
lower limit lifter switch (MS3) 310
lower paper guide
diagrams and part numbers 638
lubricants
applying 174
types of 174
lubricating
periodic 174
luminous component (L) signal 207, 214, 215
LUT settings 91
M
machine settings (option) 98
main scanning direction 222
maintenance
end user 164
overdue 457
service technician 164
manuals, ordering 40
margins
adjusting 85, 122
creating 51
masking, output 221
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) 43
726 Index
measuring
feeding power 154
stop position 148
mechanical adjustments
ADF (automatic document feeder) 141
memory, line
image signal delay 210
theory of operation 192
menus
ACC-STS 66
adjust mode 83
administrative 52
AE 84
ALARM-1 69
BLANK 85
canceling out of 49
CCD 67
COLOR 86
control panel 94
counter mode 111
CTS-STS 67
DC-CON 79
display mode 65
ERR 67
FEED-ADJ 89
FEEDER 81
feeder 114
HV-TR 87
I/O mode 79
JAM 67
MISC 69, 89
option 98
PASCAL 86
R-CON 80
run/check mode 93
SENSOR 69
test print mode 109
USER 66
VERSION 66
metric system, settings for 53
mirror images, creating 226
mirror mounts
anti-reflecting plate 358
flexible cable connector 353
reverse distance 191
speed 192
mirror positioning tool
detaching 351
part numbers 331
mirrors
assembly diagrams 576
cleaning 166
condensation 463
diagrams 27
part numbers 577, 693
MISC menu 69, 89
EN
MISC-P (printer unit) 95
MISC-R (reader unit) 95
misfeeds
improper gap adjustment 159
MJ (text detection) signal
chromatic identification 214
theory of operation 211
model numbers 35
modes
adjust 83
AE 84, 204
anti-see-through 213
background omission 213
counter 111
display 65
double-sided original 252
feeder 114
full color 50
I/O 77
ID 50
ITD cleaning rotation 99, 100
low power 235
mono-color 50
photo 109
reduced page composition 255, 263
run/check 93
separation belt cleaning 115
service 60
standard 54
standard, returning to 139
test print 108
text 109
text/photo/map 89
user 49
modified top cover assembly, part numbers 119
motor driver, copy module
diagrams 589
part numbers 589
motors
automatic document feeder (ADF) 249, 286
automatic document feeder (ADF), removing 387,
452
belt 249
belt drive assembly 634, 635
belt, adjusting tension 391
belt, control 277
belt, removing 389
delivery 249, 267
delivery, removing 394
drive pulses, scanner motor 192
driver diagrams 589
driver part numbers 589
feed, troubleshooting 542
feeder 249
feeder, removing 387, 452
high-capacity input (HCI) 316
EN
laser scanner, theory of operation 187
lifter 310
lifter, removing 452
paper feed, diagrams and part numbers 632
part numbers 693
pick-up 249, 256, 275
pick-up, high-capacity input (HCI) 307
pick-up, removing 385, 452, 453
scanner 191
scanner, removing 338
scanner, troubleshooting 525
sensors 81
mounting
original-width-detection volume 383
ROM DIMMs 342
mounting hardware
automatic document feeder (ADF) 606
high-capacity input (HCI) 653
part numbers 693
MOVE signal 192
moving the copier
powering off 177
procedures for user 177
MS1 (ADF switch) 279
MS1 (open/closed switch)
adjustments 151
MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheet) 43
multifeeder
jams in 73
troubleshooting 544
N
navigating service mode screens 63
networks, troubleshooting 457
noise
copy module 25
noise filter
diagrams 583
part numbers 583
non-HP components 457
non-image width, adjusting 122
numbers
model 35
originals copied 284
phone 40
serial 35
numerical list, part numbers 672
nuts, part numbers 694
O
odd/even bit synthesis 203
offset level, RGB 68
online support 40
opacity, guidelines for 29
Index 727
operating environment
copier 462
copy module 25
high-capacity input (HCI) 32
internal 69
option menu 98
options
counter 112
feeder 115
test print 110
ordering
consumables 41
documentation and software 40
FRUs 41
original delivery tray
diagrams 30
operations 266
original detection signal (EMPS) 269
original exposure system, checking 480
original frame erase, defined 51
original guide
sequence of operations 256
original sensor
cleaning 170
original set indicator
diagrams 30
functions 58, 269
original size sensors
theory of operation 198
original tray
identifying 377
originals
auto matching 51
black 198
books 198
count mismatch 283
default detection sizes 273
delivering 266
density 462
detecting 269, 271
direction detection 271, 272
double-sided 252
improper placement 282
inspecting 121
jams 58
jams, preventing 146
last, detecting 274
number copied 284
overriding stopper plate 283
pick-up failures 283
poor quality 121
position shifting 225
positioning 145
quality, effects on copying 121
reduced page composition 255, 263
resetting 284
728 Index
reversal operation 261
second pick-up 259
settings 121
size detection 115, 271
size sensors 80
size-detection, theory of 197, 199
skew adjustments 142
small size 268
specifications for 29
text 204
top pick-up mode 251, 256, 257
tray capacity 75
troubleshooting 462
types of 23
width-detection volume, mounting 383
wrong size 75, 283
original-size sensors
theory of operation 199
original-width detecting volume, mounting 383
original-width-detecting variable resistor (VR1),
adjusting 157
out-of-paper sensor (PS3) 307
output blocks 201
output masking 221
output trays
double-sided original mode 252
output values
RGB 67, 68
outputs
deck controller PCB 306, 321
reader controller PCB circuitry 180
overcurrent protection
accessory power supply PCB 238
automatic document feeder (ADF) 285
belt motor 278
copy module 235
high-capacity input (HCI) power supply 314
troubleshooting 520, 521
overheating prevention
copy module fan 234
scanner motor 192
overseas customer support 46
P
page separate function 51
page tiling 51
pages per minute 23
paper
automatic selection 51, 197
default detection sizes 273
detecting originals 269, 271
direction detection 271, 272
high-capacity input (HCI) 307
lower guide assembly 638
out-of-paper sensor 307
positioning 463
EN
remaining, detection of 310, 311
size, automatic selection 51, 197
sizes supported 25, 29
specifications 29
terminology, sizes 103
top pick-up mode 256, 257
transfer bias, adjusting 87, 88
troubleshooting 463
types of 87, 88
upper guide assembly 636
wrinkled 544
paper deflecting plate
diagrams 31
paper deflecting solenoid
positioning 426
paper feed motor
diagrams and part numbers 632
paper feeding, testing 95
paper pick-up assembly (HCI)
diagrams 664, 666
part numbers 665, 667
paper pick-up roller
lifespan 163
paper retaining plate
diagrams 31
paper retaining plate solenoid
positioning 424
paper separation assembly
diagrams 642
part numbers 643
paper stopper plate
diagrams 31
overriding 283
paperclip holder 50
paper-retaining solenoid
removing 396
paper-size limit panel
diagrams 34
paper-size selection tab
diagrams 33
part numbers
alphabetical list 680
automatic document feeder (ADF) 600
copy module 558
high-capacity input (HCI) 649
numerical list 672
stand assembly 556, 557
unique to HP LaserJet 8550 MFP 119
parts
assembling 332
disassembling 332
exchanging 41
HP Direct 44
life spans 163
ordering 39
periodic replacement 163
EN
phone number identification 44
unique to HP LaserJet 8550 MFP 119
website information 40
PASCAL menu 86, 91
passwords, erasing 57
patterns, test print 465
PC, connecting to 137, 138
periodically replaced parts 163
phone numbers
automated support 42
Customer Care Centers 45
ordering 41
ordering centers 40
sales centers 44
photo mode 109
photocells 201
photointerrupter
operations of 198
part numbers 694
testing 527
photos
settings for 53
sharpness 121
photosensitive drum
condensation 463
faults 474
life span 69
theory of operation 187
troubleshooting 482
picking up originals
failures 283
jams 280
last original detection 274
reversal operation 261
small sizes 268
top pick-up mode 251, 256, 257
picking up paper
block jams 543
sequence of operations 307
testing 539
pick-up delay jams 313
pick-up guide
condensation in 463
pick-up jams 72, 74
pick-up mode
exiting 540
pick-up motor
automatic document feeder (ADF) 249
controlling 275
drive signals 276
high-capacity input (HCI) 307
removing 385, 452, 453
sequence of operations 256
speed 275
testing 539
pick-up paper sensor 79
Index 729
pick-up roller
cleaning 167
diagrams 31, 34
removing 396, 440
pick-up roller shaft 256
pick-up sensor (S7) 279, 282
pick-up separation 257
pick-up solenoid (SL1) 307
pick-up unit (HCI), removing 437
pillars, part numbers 695
pilot lamp 50
pin kits, part numbers
automatic document feeder (ADF) 602
pins, part numbers 695
plates
anti-reflecting 358
flapper, removing 427
front, removing 413
inlet guide, removing 397
inside guide, removing 399
paper deflecting 31
paper retaining 31
paper stopper 31
part numbers 695
reversing, removing 412
separation guide, removing 399
pliers, stop ring 331
plug, power 177
positioning
originals 282
paper 463
solenoids 423, 424, 426
positions
base plate, adjusting 160
image, troubleshooting 466
stop, adjusting 115
power consumption
automatic document feeder (ADF) 29
copy module 25
high-capacity input (HCI) 32
power cord terminal assembly
diagrams 569, 570
part numbers 571
power cords
part numbers 697
printer connector 26
supply connector 26
power plug 177, 462
Power Rating Label 457
power receptacle, high-capacity input (HCI)
diagrams 33
Power Save mode
auto timing 55
exiting 49
functions 235
key 50
730 Index
rates of 53
power supplies
accessories PCB 238
APC 582
automatic document feeder (ADF) 285
connecting 237
cooling fan 234
copy module, diagrams 580, 582
copy module, part numbers 580, 582
copy module, removing 373, 374
DC 580
DC voltage 525
fans, removing 346, 375
fuses 238
high-capacity input (HCI) 314
high-capacity input (HCI), removing 454
locating 237
overcurrent protection 235
signals 239
troubleshooting 509, 541
voltage 235
power supply cord connector
diagrams 26
power switches
control panel 50
rear, locating 26
using 177
power, feeding
measuring 154
power, troubleshooting
ac 519
DC 520
no power 458, 541
powering off
automatic 55
copier 177
copy module 137
fans 332
overcurrent protection 235
precautions 332
scanning lamp 194
settings 55
troubleshooting 457
powering on
scanning lamp 194
sequence of operations 183
precautions
ESD 137
repair notices 332
preference key 54
pre-heating scanning lamp
control 194
temperature 195
pre-separation guide
diagrams 31
pressure, atmospheric 25
EN
pressure, separation belt
adjusting 152
pre-transfer assembly
troubleshooting 462
pre-transfer charging assembly
faults 466
pre-troubleshooting checklist 457
print engine
adjustments 120
printer
disassembling 332
troubleshooting 457
printer drivers
handled by HP Driver Distribution Center 44
obtaining 40
request form 43
troubleshooting 457
printer formatter 304
printer power cord connector
diagrams 26
printer/HCI gap, adjusting 159
priorities, setting 53
priority on image quality mode 204
priority on speed mode 204
product data sheets 43
PS/PCL board, troubleshooting 508
pulley cover, removing 442
pulley kits, part numbers
automatic document feeder (ADF) 601
high-capacity input (HCI) 649
pullouts 331
Q
quality
auto gradation adjustments 125
background cancellation 213
end user adjustments 121
image priority mode 204
image, options 99
image, troubleshooting 476
R
R image signal 210
rail, scanner
cleaning 525
lubricating 174
rate of saving, power 53
ratios, reproduction
automatic selection 197
horizontal 222
theory of operations 192
vertical 222
ratios, RGB 84
R-CON menu 80
RDF controller, diagrams and part numbers 644
read address 227
EN
reader controller PCB
circuitry 179, 180
communication control 232
diagrams 587
I/O states 80
original size, identifying 199
part numbers 587
pass-through only 200
resetting 62
scanner motor 192
scanning lamp control 193
troubleshooting 509
READY indication 93
rear cover (copy module)
identifying 333
removing 336
rear cover (HCI)
identifying 434
removing 436
rear power switch
diagrams 26
using 177
recalibrating
CCD 128
exposure 56
exposure adjustments 126
lamp output 127
re-circulating lever
idle rotation 281
recirculating lever
operations 274
recirculation lever
idle rotation 74, 283
recirculation sensor (S14) 279, 282
reduced page composition
original sizes 255
sequence of operations 263, 265
reduction
automatic 51
specifications 23
theory of operations 192, 222
reentering settings 62
reflecting faces, cleaning 170
reflector, part numbers 698
registration paper sensor
adjusting 155
cleaning 170, 172
detecting original direction 271
functions 279, 282
settings 79
registration roller
diagrams 31
faults 470
removing 402
sequence of operations 258
troubleshooting 482, 544
Index 731
registration roller clock sensor 271
regulatory information 35
relocating the copier 177
remaining paper detection PCB 320
remaining paper, detecting 310, 311
remanufactured parts 41
removing
accessories power supply, copy module 374
ADF (automatic document feeder) 378
AP-IP PCB 372
automatic document feeder (ADF) 378
automatic document feeder (ADF) motor 452
belt motor 389
body cover (ADF) 380
clutch 392
control panel 344
controller PCB, copy module 370
copy module controller PCB 370
copy module covers 334
covers, copy module 334
deck controller PCB 453
delivery motor 394
delivery roller 414, 416
delivery/reversing roller 407
DIMMs 340
driver PCB, scanner motor 339
ECO-2 PCB 371
fans 346, 375
feed roller 399
feeder motor 387, 452
feeding belt 431
flexible cable 353
front cover (HCI) 435
inlet guide plate 397
inside guide plate 399
intensity detection PCB 364
inverter PCB 376
lamp, scanning 357
LCD assembly 346
lens mount cover 365
lifter motor 452
lifter wire 442
lower front cover (copy module) 334
motors (ADF) 387
non-HP components 457
pick-up motor 452, 453
pick-up roller 396, 440
pick-up unit (HCI) 437
power supply, copy module 373
power supply, high-capacity input (HCI) 454
pulley cover 442
rear cover (copy module) 336
rear cover (HCI) 436
registration roller 402
reversing guide 419
scanner motor 338
732 Index
scanning lamp 357
separation belt 398
separation guide plate 399
side guide lock 382
stamp solenoid 427
standard white plate cover 363
stopper plate solenoid 422
upper front cover (copy module) 337
upper left cover (copy module) 335
upper left cover (HCI) 435
upper rear cover (copy module) 335
upper right cover (copy module) 334
upper right cover (HCI) 436
repair locations, Customer Support Sales Center 44
repair notices 332
repeat images 227
replacing
AP-IP PCB 134
CCD (charge-coupled device) 131
copy module controller PCB 129
copy module parts 333
dc controller PCB 120
ECO-2 PCB 120
feed roller 543
gears, lubricating 174
intensity detection PCB 133
lamp, scanning 132, 361
parts, procedures for 457
periodically 163
scanning lamp 361
reproduction ratios
automatic selection 197
horizontal 222
theory of operations 192
vertical 222
reset key 49, 61
resetting
accessory power supply PCB 238
automatic document feeder (ADF) 75
cold reset 57
copier 235
copier protection circuit 238
jams, original 284
service mode screen 61
settings 54
user mode screen 61
resistors
original-width-detecting 157
variable 288, 318
resolution, specifications 23
retainers, part numbers 698
retaining rolls
diagrams 31
retransfer, correcting 99, 102
returning to standard mode 139
reversal feeding jams 280
EN
reversal operation 261
reversal sensor (S8) 279
reverse distance, scanner motor 191
reversing guide
removing 419
reversing plate
removing 412
reversing roller
diagrams 31
operations 261
reversing roller drive belt, removing 398
RF assembly
diagrams 616
part numbers 617, 621, 625, 629
RGB
adjustment 94
color correction, theory of 212
conversions 214
gradation test 473
offset levels 68
output values 67
position matching 210
ratios 84
shading target values 67, 68
right angles, correcting 124, 471
right margin
adjusting 122
right paper delivery assembly
diagrams 630
part numbers 631
right upper cover open sensor (PS1) 310
rings, heater 361
rings, part numbers 698
rods, part numbers 699
rollers
cassette pick-up, replacing 543
cleaning 167
delivery, removing 414, 416
delivery/reversing, removing 407
diagrams 31
diameters 482
feed, removing 399, 441
feed, replacing 543
high-capacity input (HCI) 307
image intervals 482
life span 163
part numbers 699
pick-up, removing 396, 440
registration, removing 402
registration, troubleshooting 544
sensors 81
separation, diagrams 640
separation, part numbers 641
separation, removing 441
troubleshooting 482
EN
ROM
DIMM, mounting 342
DIMM, removing 340
updating 138
version 66, 139
version display 138
rotation, scanner motor 191
routing scanner drive cable 347
run/check mode
menus 93
S
S address 227, 228
S4 (upper cover sensor) 279
safety
laser statement 36
save power key 50
saving power 53
saving settings 95, 97
scanner
directions, scanning 222
faults 470
home position sensor 190, 504
read addresses 227
sensors 190, 504
theory of operation 190
scanner drive cable
routing 347
scanner motor
circuitry 191
driver PCB, removing 339
overheating prevention 192
removing 338
troubleshooting 525
scanner rail
cleaning 525
lubricating 174
screen contrast dial 49
screens
adjust mode 83
display mode 65
error 76
initial service mode 63
jams 76
levels 63
navigating 63
run/check mode 93
service mode, navigating 63
test print mode 109
screw/ring kits, part numbers
automatic document feeder (ADF) 602
copy module 558
high-capacity input (HCI) 650
stand assembly 555
Index 733
screws
keeping track of 331
part numbers 700
second original pick-up 259
secondary transfer belt
faults 466, 471
second-side elimination 51, 121
selecting
service mode screens 63
selective shift 225
SENSOR menu 69
sensors
adjusting 155
belt motor 81
cleaning 169
DADF controller PCB 82
delivery 79
delivery 2 279
delivery sensor 1 279
document paper tray 269
document tray paper 155
duplexing unit 79
feed (PS5) 307
feeder, adjusting 115
high-capacity input (HCI) 315
humidity 79
jam detection 280
jams 73
lamp density 69
menu 69
MS1 280
MS2 281
original paper tray 279, 282
original size 80
original size, theory of operation 198
original-size, theory of operation 199
out-of-paper (PS3) 307
part numbers 704
pick-up 279, 282
pick-up paper 79
re-circulation 279, 282
registration 79
registration paper 155, 271, 279, 282
registration roller clock 271
reversal 279
right upper cover open (PS1) 310
rollers 81
S1 (document tray paper) 155
S1 (original tray paper) 279, 282
S11 (recirculation lever) 283
S12 (delivery 2) 279
S14 (re-circulation) 279, 282
S3 (registration paper) 155, 279, 282
S4 (upper cover) 279
S6 (delivery sensor 1) 279
S7 (pick-up sensor) 279, 282
734 Index
S8 (reversal sensor) 279
scanner home position 190, 504
separation 79
temperature 79
upper cover (S4) 279
upper limit lifter (PS4) 310
separating belt
diagrams 31
separation
pick-up 257
separation assembly, paper
diagrams 642
part numbers 643
separation belt
cleaning 167
cleaning mode 115
operations 256
pressure, adjusting 152
removing 398
sequence of operations 258
separation guide
cleaning 173
separation guide plate
removing 399
separation roller
diagrams 34, 640
life span 163
part numbers 641
removing 441
troubleshooting 482
separation sensor 79
separation static eliminator
enabling 99, 101
troubleshooting 462
sequence of operations
automatic document feeder (ADF) 249
copying 185, 187
double-sided original mode 252
enlargement 192
exposure system 189
lifter, high-capacity input (HCI) 310
picking up paper 307
powering on 183
reduced page composition 263, 265
reduction 192
reversal pick-up 261, 262
scanner 190
small size originals 268
top pick-up mode 256, 257
serial interface 304
serial numbers
locating 35
troubleshooting 509
series codes 70
service agreements 44
SERVICE indication 93
EN
service label 62
service LED 536
Service Materials Organization (SMO) ordering
information 39
service mode
ending 61
navigating screens 63
overview 60
settings, erasing 96
starting 60, 61
sub-items 60
service notes
HP FIRST 43
ordering 40
Service Support Tool
exiting 139
installing 135
obtaining 135
starting 136
settings
backing up 62
color correction 56
common 53
copy module 54
customizing defaults 52
default 53
density 56
display panel 50
image read start positions 84, 90
reentering 62
resetting 54
saving 95, 97
timer 55
user mode 52
shading
correction, theory of 208
shading target values 67, 68
shafts
lubricating 174
part numbers 704
sharpness
adjusting 121
higher 214
lower 214
weak and strong 215
sheet frame erase 51
sheet-to-sheet distance
adjusting 115, 149
sequence of operations 263
sheet-to-sheet gap, adjusting 149
shifting
images 51, 224, 225
short circuits
checking for 519
leakage breaker 519
overcurrent protection 235
EN
side by side copying 255
side guide
diagrams 30
opening 383
positioning 382
side guide lock, removing 382
signals
automatic document feeder (ADF) 288
belt motor 277, 278
BGR 204
Bk 219
black pixel 207
chromatic component (Ca/Cb) 214, 215
color component 207
control card 80
control counter 80
deck controller PCB 321
G image signal 205
image processing 201, 202
luminous component (L) 207, 214, 215
MJ (text detection) 211
original detection (EMPS) 269
pick-up motor 275, 276
power on, high-capacity input (HCI) 314
power supply 239
scanner motor 192
scanning lamp 80, 194
standard white plate 84
text detection 207
YMC 217
single-sided copying
automatic document feeder (ADF) 250
size mix mechanism 115
sizes
auto paper select 51
detection defaults 273
mix mechanism 115
originals, identifying 197, 199
paper 25, 29
small originals, pick-up 268
terminology 103
zoom adjustments 126
skew, original
adjusting 142
slant processing 228
slip stop, clutch 393
SME (Support Materials Europe), ordering from 39
SMO (Service Materials Organization), ordering from
39
SNA motor drive pulses 192
SNE motor drive pulses 192
soft counter 103
soft power switch 177
Index 735
software
matrix 43
ordering 40
support from HP FIRST 43
software counters, checking 52
software, troubleshooting 457
soiled images, troubleshooting 481
solenoids
automatic document feeder (ADF) 286
high-capacity input (HCI) 316
paper deflecting 426
paper retaining plate 424
paper-retaining, removing 396
part numbers 706
pick-up (SL1) 307
positioning 423, 424, 426
stamp, removing 427
stopper plate, adjusting 423
stopper plate, removing 422
voltage 314
solid black/solid color, troubleshooting 480
solvents 164
SPA motor drive pulses 192
spatial filter processing 214
SPE motor drive pulses 192
specifications
automatic document feeder (ADF) 28
copy module 23
electrical 25, 29, 32
environmental 25, 32
high capacity input (HCI) 32
resolution 23
soft counter 103
speed 23, 24
speed
belt motor 277
color 24
full color 23
mirror mounts 192
monochrome 23, 24
original delivery 267
pick-up motor 275
priority mode 204
rotation, scanner motor 191
spring kits, part numbers
automatic document feeder (ADF) 604
copy module 560
high-capacity input (HCI) 651
springs, part numbers 706
stamp solenoid, removing 427
stand assembly
diagrams 556
part numbers 555, 557
screw/ring kit 555
standard copying mode 49
standard image target 464
736 Index
standard mode
returning to 139
settings 54
standard white plate
cleaning 166
indications for replacement 209
removing cover 363
replacing 134
resetting 62
shading correction, theory of 208
signals 84
switching 99
troubleshooting 462
standby mode
pre-heating control mechanism 194
sequence of operations 184
start key 50
start position
CMYK, adjusting 85
image, adjusting 89
starting service mode 61
statements
laser safety 36
warranty 46
static electricity, precautions for 332
static elimination 99, 101
stationary jams 313
status indicators
diagrams 30
original set 58, 269
overview 49
stop key 50
stop position
adjusting 115
left edge, adjusting 147
measuring 148
stop ring pliers 331
stopper plate solenoid
adjusting 423
removing 422
strips, test 424
strong sharpness 215
sub scanning direction 222
sub tray
diagrams 30
sunlight, protecting from 462
supplies, ordering 39, 44
support
Customer Care Centers (CCC) 45
Customer Information Centers 44
Customer Support Sales Center 44
Dealer Response Line 44
font 43
HP ASAP (Automated Support Access Program)
42
HP Direct 44
EN
HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support
Technology) 43
HP Software Distribution Center 44
technical 42
websites 40
Support Materials Europe (SME) ordering
information 39
supports, part numbers 708
switches
DIP 535
lower limit lifter 310
MS1 (open/closed), adjusting 151
open/closed (MS1), adjusting 151
power 177
power supply, high-capacity input (HCI) 314
power, troubleshooting 541
remaining paper detection 310, 311
system 49
switching arm
sequence of operations 256
system switch 49
T
tables, list of 17
target values 67, 68
technical training 40
temperature
auto power save mode 235
copy module 25
high-capacity input (HCI) 32
internal 69
operating environment 462
scanning lamp 195, 196
sensors 79
warm-up phase 184
tension
belt motor 391
timing belt adjustments 331
tension gage 331
terminology guide 103
test print mode
menus 108
options 110
test prints 465
test strips 424
testing
drums 95
keypad 94
LCD panel 94
paper feed 95
pick-up 539
text
adjusting settings 84
density correction 229
detection signal 207
identification block 211
EN
priority on speed mode 204
settings for 53
text mode 109
text/photo/map mode 51, 89
thermistor, scanning lamp 196
tightening
lifter wire 451
tiling 51
timer settings 55
timing belt
adjusting tension 331
timing charts
automatic document feeder (ADF) 288, 303
timing sensors
cleaning 167
toner
absorption characteristics 221
black, theory of 219
caking prevention 332
catch tray 457
cooling off 177
excessive 457, 466
light, relationship to 217
spilled 457, 466
theory of operation 187
waste case 69
toner cartridge
cyan 466
faults 467, 469
tools
mirror positioning 351
required 331
top pick-up mode 416
reduced page composition mode 263
second original 259
sequence of operations 251, 256, 257
touch panel display
clearing 55
diagrams 50
troubleshooting 458
tracking function, anti-counterfeit 231
trailing edges
detecting 271, 274
margins, adjusting 122
training 40
transfer bias, adjusting 87
transfer blocks 201
transfer faults 470
transformers, part numbers 708
transparencies
guidelines for 29
transfer bias, adjusting 88
trays, part numbers 708
troubleshooting
ac power 519
checklist 457
Index 737
condensation 463
copy module 460, 512
copy module image faults 491
DC power 520
display 458
EEPROM 509
error codes 493
exposure system 480
feed motor 542
high-capacity input (HCI) 535
image faults 476
input devices 459
isolating problems 458
multifeeder 544
originals, foggy 462
overcurrent protection 520, 521
power 458, 541
power supplies 509
reader controller PCB 509
rollers 482
scanner motor 525
skewed paper feed 545
test pick-up 539
test prints 465
wiring 504
wrinkled paper 544
typeface support 43
U
UCR (under color removal) processing 219
under color removal (UCR) processing 219
uneven density, troubleshooting 463, 466
uneven intervals, troubleshooting 470
upper cover (ADF)
assembly diagrams 614
diagrams 30
identifying 377
part numbers 614
upper cover sensor (S4) 279
upper front cover (copy module)
identifying 333
removing 337
upper left cover (copy module)
identifying 333
removing 335
upper left cover (HCI)
identifying 434
removing 435
upper limit lifter sensor (PS4) 310
upper paper guide
diagrams and part numbers 636
upper rear cover (copy module)
identifying 333
removing 335
738 Index
upper right cover (copy module)
identifying 333
removing 334
upper right cover (HCI)
identifying 434
removing 436
upper right cover, high-capacity input (HCI)
diagrams 33
user
adjustments 121
user LED
conditions 536
diagrams 33
PCB 320
USER menu 66
user mode
defined 52
starting and ending 49
V
values
CMYK 69
shading targets 67, 68
variable resistor, original-width-detecting
adjusting 157
variable resistors 288, 318
ventilation 462
VERSION menu 66
versions
ROM 138, 139
vertical lines, troubleshooting 483
vertical reproduction ratio 222
voltage
accessory power supply 239
DC power supply 525
feed motor, high-capacity input (HCI) 314
lifter motor 314
operating environment 462
overvoltage protection 235
power supply, automatic document feeder (ADF)
285
power supply, copy module 235, 239
power supply, high-capacity input (HCI) 314
scanning lamp 194
soft counter specifications 107
varying 457
VR1 (original-width-detecting variable resistor),
adjusting 157
W
Wait message 60
warm-up phase 184
warnings, resetting 58
warranty 46
EN
washers
important notes on 332
part numbers 709
waste toner case 69
water, cleaning with 164
wavelengths, blocks 212
weak sharpness 215
websites
Service Support Tool 135
support 40
weight
automatic document feeder (ADF) 29
copy module 25
high-capacity input (HCI) 32
paper 29
white lines, troubleshooting
causes of 470
cyan areas 466
horizontal 486, 487, 488, 489, 490, 491
vertical 484
white, representing 230
width
non-image, adjusting 122
wires, part numbers 709
wiring faults 504
wrinkled paper 544
wrong size originals 75, 283
X
X/Y zoom 51
X-direction
adjusting settings 90
Y
Y-direction
adjusting settings 90
YMC conversions 216, 219
YMC signals 217
Z
zoom
fine adjust 126
fine adjustment 56
functions 51
EN
Index 739
740 Index
EN
Jumpboard
(2) flathead
screws, no
washers
CCD hold
down
(2) M4x6 screws
with washers
Scanning
lamp cover
Standard
white plate
(1) tapered-head
screw
(1) metal clamp
(4) gold screws,
no washers
Metal plate
Lower front
cover
(2) gold screws
(2) M4x6 screws,
no washers
(2) plastic covers
Antireflecting
plate
(2) black screws
with washers
Lamp
(2) black screws
with washers
Lamp
intensity
detector
(1) self-tapping
screw
CCD cage
(9) M4x6 screws
with washers
Control panel
(5) M4x6 screws
with washers
Scan motor
driver PCB
(2) M4x6 screws
with washers
DIMM cover
(2) M4x6 screws,
no washers
Upper front
cover skin
Metal chassis
plates (3)
(4) M4x6 screws,
no washers
(4) rubber covers
(20) brass
screws, no
washers:
Left skin
(5) screws, no
washers
(5) on each
smaller front
plate
Top rear skin
(6) on back plate
(3) rubber covers
(5) screws, no
washers
Metal back
cover
(4) on vertical
plate
(3) screws with
star washers
Upper right
cover skin
(2) M4x6 screws,
no washers
Electrical unit
pullout—RFI
cover
(7) screws
Electrical unit
pullout tray
ADF
document
output tray
from front: (2)
shoulder screws
from back: (7)
screws with
washers
from glass: (2)
large shoulder
screws and (2)
metal clamps
(2) long black
screws
Manual Part Number
C7834-90902
HP Color LaserJet 8550 Printer Service Manual
©Copyright 2000
Hewlett-Packard Company
8550 Printer
Copy Module
Automatic Document Feeder
High-Capacity Input
Service Manual
*C7834-90902*
*C7834-90902*
Printed on
Recycled Paper
C7834-90902
English